Punch Home As 40003333333333333333333333

User’s Guide

Home Design Architectural Series 4000

© 2006 Punch! Software, L.L.C. PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide All rights reserved. This document, as well as the software described in it, is furnished under license and can only be used or copied in accordance with the terms of the license. Portions of the software described in this document © 1995-2006 Microsoft Corporation. Except as permitted by such license, no part of this document can be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted, in any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, recording, or otherwise, without the prior written permission of Punch! Software, L.L.C. Punch! Software, L.L.C. reserves the right to improve, enhance and revise its products without notice. Punch! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 is a registered trademark of Punch! Software, L.L.C. Microsoft Windows is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation. All other product names mentioned in this document are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective manufacturers. The information in this document is furnished for informational use only, is subject to change without notice and should not be construed as a commitment by Punch! Software, L.L.C. Punch! assumes no liability for any errors or inaccuracies that may appear in this document. Second edition, 2006 Printed in the United States of America

Table of Contents Part 1: Nuts & Bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Welcome . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Window Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 A Quick Tour . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 File Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Punch! Updater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Punch! Software Primer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 Plan Tabs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43

Part 2: From the Ground Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 Topo Designer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Room Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Foundation Plan Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Floor Plan Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

49 57 61 67

Part 3: Utilities in Your Home Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 Electrical Plan Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 Plumbing Plan Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 HVAC Plan Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95

Part 4: Working on Your Home’s Exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 Roofing Plan Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Roofing Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Deck Plan Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Deck Designer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Landscape Plan Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Detail Plan Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

101 111 117 121 133 141

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

i

Contents

Part 5: Customizing Your Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149 Editing Your Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Working with LiveView . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Personalizing Your Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Material Workshop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

151 157 169 183

Part 6: Design Aid PowerTools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191 Site Planner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Door Designer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Window Designer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cabinet Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fireplace Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Plant Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Trim Designer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pool Designer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

193 197 203 209 219 225 229 233

Part 7: General PowerTools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249 FloorPlan Trace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PhotoView & PhotoView Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DXF/DWG Export & Import . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fence Designer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Elevation Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Framing Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Estimator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

251 255 263 267 273 277 285

Part 8: Presentation & CAD PowerTools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291 RealModel® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Layout Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Symbol Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Section Detailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Global Sun Positioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

ii

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

293 297 301 309 317

Contents

Part 9: Punch! Animator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323 File Management and Editing Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325 KeyPoints and Animation Paths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329 Segment Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333 Video Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337

Part 10: 3D Custom Workshop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341 Window Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . File Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drawing Grids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drawing in 3D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drawing in 2D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Converting 2D Objects to 3D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Editing 3D Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Controlling Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Applying Color and Material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

343 347 351 357 367 375 379 389 395

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

iii

Chapter

iv

i

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

Part 1

Nuts & Bolts

Chapter 1: Chapter 2: Chapter 3: Chapter 4: Chapter 5: Chapter 6: Chapter 7:

Welcome . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Window Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 A Quick Tour . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 File Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Punch! Updater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Punch! Software Primer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 Plan Tabs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43

Chapter 1

Welcome Punch! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 is a professional-level home design system developed for anyone who needs fast, accurate home drawings and wants the flexibility to view and edit their plan in 3D. Uses for Punch! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 include: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Architectural drawings Presentations Kitchen design 3D visualization Plumbing planning DXF/DWG Import and Export Electrical plans Framing customization Interior design Landscaping

In addition, Punch! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 contains a variety of useful PowerTools that each perform a specific task. For instance, Framing Editor lets you customize almost every facet of your framing, like the material, spacing and even the direction studs and trusses are to be placed and Layout Manager makes it easy to make professional presentations of your designs to an architect or builder. Once you’re finished with your design, you can even record an AVI movie to send to your friends, architect, builder and so on. It’s simple to get started designing the home of your dreams. Take a few minutes to familiarize yourself with the contents of this manual, so you’ll know where to quickly find the answers. Be sure to see Chapters 2 and 3 for an overview of the screen layout and a quick tour of the program. See the chapter titled “Punch! Software Primer”, which begins on page 27 for a basic overview of tools and techniques that you’ll use throughout the design process. The most important thing to do before beginning work with Punch! AS4000 will be setting your display to 32-bit color. To do this, right-click the Desktop, then click Properties on the pop-up menu. Click the Settings Tab on the Display Properties dialog box, then select True Color (32-bit); if this is not available on your computer, select 24-bit.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

3

Chapter

1 Welcome

Contents of Package

3

Punch! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 comes with everything you need to install and use the software. The package includes the following items:

Define your design’s exterior walls. For more information, see “To convert interior walls to exterior walls”, which begins on page 71.

4

Use the Wall Segment Properties dialog box to match all roof sections. For more information, see “Defining Gable Wall Segments”, which begins on page 71.

5

Use the Automatic Flooring feature on the upper floors. For more information, see “To control automatic flooring”, which begins on page 70.

6

(optional) Draw flooring on the upper floors. For more information, see “Adding Flooring”, which begins on page 81.

7

Customize any complex roofing sections. For more information, see “Using the Freehand Roof Tools”, which begins on page 103.

■ ■ ■

Punch! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 Installation Set of three (3) CDs PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide Homeplan booklet

System Requirements In order to run Punch! Home Design Architectural Series 4000, it is recommended that you have a Pentium-based computer. In addition, your system should include the following: System Requirements ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Intel® Pentium®,Celeron®, Xeon™ or Centrino™ or AMD® Athlon™, Duron™ or Opteron™ Processor Windows® 98 or higher 64 MB of RAM 1.4 GB of hard disk space VGA video card displaying at least 800x600 with 24-bit color (32-bit, if available) CD-ROM drive Mouse or other pointing device 32 MB Video Card Memory (optional) Microsoft Internet Explorer 4.0 or above to use Content Updater

Tips for Users of Other Punch! Programs Punch! AS4000 will open all floorplans designed with previously-released Punch! programs. One major difference from very early Punch! programs involves the use of interior, exterior and foundation walls. Walls drawn in some previous Punch! programs, like Punch! Super Home Suite and Punch! 5 in 1 Home Design, may import as interior walls, so these walls will need to be customized in Punch! AS4000. In addition, you will want to use the Punch! Topo Designer PowerTool to update all topography drawn in previouslyreleased Punch! programs. For more information, see “Topo Designer”, which begins on page 49. To update a file from a previous Punch! program

Tip: The most important thing to remember when beginning a new drawing is to complete your foundation or exterior walls first. A completely-closed exterior perimeter will ensure that floor square footage measurements will be correctly calculated.

Installing Punch! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 To install Punch! Home Design Architectural Series 4000, you must run Setup. You can’t install or reconfigure Punch! AS4000 by copying files directly from the distribution CD to your hard drive. To install Punch! AS4000 1

Insert Punch! AS4000 Installation CD #1 into your CD-ROM drive. Installation begins as soon as you insert the CD.

2

Follow the installation prompts that appear.

3

Insert Installation CD #2 when prompted to do so.

Note: If Windows Explorer launches and shows you the contents of CD #2, just close that window. You will not need to launch any further files until the installation is completed. 4

Repeat for the remaining CDs in the installation set.

5

Click OK, making sure you do not change the drive at this point.

Note: If installation did not begin when you inserted the Punch! AS4000 Installation CD #1 into your CD-ROM drive, Autorun may be turned off on your computer.

1

Make a copy of your file. Save the original.

2

Open the copied file.

4

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

Registering Punch! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 To install Punch! AS4000 if installation does not begin automatically 1

Insert Punch! AS4000 Installation CD #1 into your CD-ROM drive.

2

Double-click My Computer.

3

Double-click the CD-ROM drive (most computers will begin the installation at this point).

4

■

■

■

Double-click SETUP.

Registering Punch! Home Design Architectural Series 4000

Set your Display Settings to 800x600 pixels and High Color (24-bit) or True Color (32-bit). On your Start menu, select Control Panel>Display>Settings. If you notice that the 3D display is not clear, set back the Graphics Acceleration. On your Start menu, select Control Panels> System>Performance>Graphics, then set the acceleration back one notch. By default, all measurements display in English Units; to choose Metric Units go to Design>Unit of Measure... select Metric Units.

Display Settings

Take a moment to register online during installation. After registering, you are eligible for technical support and for early notification when new product releases become available. Your serial number is located on the Help Menu, under About Punch Home Design.

Punch! AS4000 is designed to run effectively based on the system requirements printed on the software packaging. However, there are some specific settings you can select to obtain the best display possible. To adjust your display settings 1

You can also register your software by visiting the Customer Support Center at http://punch.custhelp.com.

On the Start menu, click Settings, Control Panel. The Control Panel program group is displayed.

2

Speed Tips

Double-click Display. The Display Properties dialog box is displayed.

3

Click to the Settings page tab.

4

In the Colors list box, click True Color (32-bit).

You can “Speed Up” Punch! AS4000 by changing some of the program's default settings. ■

■

■ ■ ■

■

Close the LiveView window when you are not working in 3D. No 3D calculations are performed when the LiveView window is closed. Choose the Quarter-View window size for LiveView instead of Full-View to increase 3D rendering speed. 3D rendering speed increases as the LiveView window becomes smaller in size. Turn off shadows. For more information, see “Adding Lighting and Shadows”, which begins on page 161. Set your Display Screen Settings to 24-bit (32-bit, if available), 65,000 colors for optimum rendering speed. Hide the floors that are not being drawn. By turning off the inactive floors, the program will not waste resources on them. On the View menu, click Render Options. The Render Options dialog box is displayed. The lower the render quality, the faster LiveView will render your design.

Note: If 32-bit is unavailable, click True Color (24-bit). 5

In the Screen Area section, move the slider to display at least 800 x 600 pixels.

6

Click OK. The new window settings are applied. You may be prompted to restart your computer to apply the new settings. If so, click OK or Yes.

Online Help Punch! AS4000 includes an extensive online help system. This system includes all of the information found in the PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide. To access the online help files ■

On the Help menu, click Contents or press F1.

To access help for a specific part of your 2D drawing

Important System Settings Some of your computer’s settings can impact Punch! AS4000’s efficiency. By changing one (or more) of these settings, you can control how the program performs.

1

On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.

2

Click the Context Help Button.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

5

Chapter 3

1 Welcome

Click the feature, object or plant that you want help with. The Quick Access menu for that feature, object or plant is displayed on the right side of the window.

2

Navigate through the Help System until the topic you need is displayed.

3

Click the Show Me button. A short video will be played, showing how the tool or feature works.

Technical Support 4

Click the tool’s Help listing on the pop-up window. Help for that feature, object or plant is displayed.

5

(optional) Pressing F1, while many tools are active, will access the help file for that Tool.

Before contacting Punch! Technical Support, please verify that the answer to your question is not available from one of the following resources: ■ ■

Video Tutorials Video Tutorials are available for drawing tools and other commonly-used features. These tutorials can be accessed three ways.

■ ■

■

To access video tutorials from Tool Guides 1

On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.

2

Click the feature, object or plant that you want help with, then click the Tool Guide tool. The Tips and

■

Tricks menu for that tool is displayed.

Punch! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide Punch! AS4000 Help System Video Tutorials To automatically launch your browser and visit the Punch! Software website, click the Connect to Punch! button at the upper right of your window. The Punch! Online Community is available at http://forums.punchsoftware.com. At the Online Community, users can post questions and trade useful tips and tricks. The Customer Support Center is available at http://punch.custhelp.com. At the Customer Support Center you can register your software, search the knowledge base or ask a question, if necessary.

The Customer Support Center can only answer questions that are related to features of Punch! Home Design Architectural Series 4000. They cannot answer specific questions about home building, local building codes and so on. 3

Click the Video Tutorial button on the Tips and Tricks menu. A short video will be played showing how the tool works.

To access video tutorials with a right-click

When contacting the Support Center, please provide the following details: ■ ■ ■

1

On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.

■

2

Click the Context Help Button.

■

3

Right-click the feature, object or plant that you want help with. The Quick Access menu for that tool, object or plant is displayed.

4

Click Video Tutorial on the pop-up window. A short video will be played, showing how the tool works.

To access video tutorials from Help

■ ■

Serial Number - located on the Help > About Punch! Home Design dialog box Your computer’s operating system Make and model of your computer Video card manufacturer and model Video card driver date and version Video RAM Display settings, including hardware acceleration

After registering your program, you will receive 60 days of free technical support. When you call, you should be in front of your computer, with the program running, and have the above information handy. The technical support contact information can be located at the Customer Support Center http://punch.custhelp.com.

1

On the Help menu, click Contents or press F1.

6

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

Chapter 2

Window Layout The Punch! AS4000 window provides an assortment of features that make it easy to create precise home plans. This chapter describes the basic components. In most cases, this chapter does not provide detailed information on standard Windows concepts or on specific menu items. For information on standard Windows concepts, such as the mouse, the Control menu, the window border, the maximize button, dialog box controls and so on, refer to Windows online Help.

LiveView icons title bar menu bar tips & tricks plan tab

standard toolbar

plan toolbar

annotation and dimension bar

Preview Bar

design window

elevation slider

virtual ruler measurement tools working floor button selection filter

status bar

context help button snaps button

property bar

vertical scroll bar compass

horizontal scroll bar

Launch Punch! websites

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

7

Chapter

2 Window Layout

Title Bar

Tips & Tricks

The title bar extends across the top of the application window. It displays the name of the program and the name of the current drawing file. Using the buttons at the right end of the title bar you can minimize, maximize, close or restore the window. You can also maximize or restore a window by double-clicking on the title bar. Double-clicking the Control menu box at the left end of the title bar is a quick way to exit. If the application is running in a window, rather than maximized, dragging the title bar moves the entire window on the desktop.

Punch! AS4000 makes it easy to get started by providing users with tips and tricks for each Tool. Tips & Tricks provide information about each tool and some general information about the program. Tips & Tricks can be turned off and on to suit your needs. To access general tips & tricks ■

On the Standard toolbar, click the Tips & Tricks Button.

Menu Bar You can choose menu items using either the mouse or the keyboard. To use the mouse, click the menu name; when the menu drops down, click the item you want. Menu items with an arrow to the right display cascading menus, when you place the pointer over one of them. When you highlight a menu item, a description is displayed on the status bar. To use the keyboard, press the ALT key and type the underlined letter in the menu name, then type the underlined letter in the menu item’s name. If there is a cascading menu, you must type another letter. You can also use the arrow keys to move through menu items and press ENTER to select one. The ESC key backs out of the menu items one level at a time. There are single-key or key combination shortcuts for certain frequently-used menu items. Each menu lists available shortcut keys to the right of the item’s name. You can use the techniques for choosing menu items in combination.

To access tips & tricks for a specific tool 1

On any plan tab, click the tool you want to learn more about.

2

Click the Tips & Tricks Button, the Tips and Tricks menu for that tool is displayed.

To access tips & tricks for a part of your 2D drawing 1

On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.

2

Click the Context Help Button.

3

Click the feature, object or plant that you want help with. The Quick Access menu for that feature, object or plant is displayed on the right side of the window.

4

Click the Tips & Tricks listing at the top of the pop-up window. The Tips & Tricks Button menu for that feature, object or plant is displayed.

5

(optional) Click Back or Next to cycle through the tips available for that feature, object or plant.

Plan Tabs and Toolbars Clicking one of the plan tabs will activate the toolbar for that plan layer. For example, if you select the Landscape tab, the Landscape toolbar will appear. In addition, when you click the small arrow next to the title of the tab, you have the option of viewing or hiding other plans. This will be useful, for example, if you want to see the foundation plan with landscaping, but without exterior and interior walls. To find out what a certain tool represents, hold the pointer over the tool and read the description on the status bar at the bottom of the window.

8

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

Elevation Slider To turn tool guides on and off ■

To turn off Tool Guides, click (Turn-Off Tool Guides).

You are not constrained to vertical or horizontal; the Vertical Ruler can be stretched in any direction necessary.

Snaps Bar On the Snaps bar, you will find tools that you will begin to find indispensable. Each tool has a very specific function and will allow you to place walls, doors, windows and many other things exactly where you want them - the first time! For more information, see “Punch! Software Primer”, which begins on page 27. ■

To turn on Tool Guides, on the Help Menu click Show Tool Guides.

From placing a window exactly 6'4" from a corner to placing a table lamp exactly in the center of the end table, you will begin to use Snaps in concert with almost every other drawing tool in Punch! AS4000.

Annotation Bar On the Annotation bar, there are two tools for text, straight and angled, and several tools to let you dimension part of your design where automatic dimensioning may not be available.

Elevation Slider With Punch! AS4000’s Elevation Slider you can easily move selected items vertically off “ground level”. This feature makes it a snap to make sure windows, doors, plants and so on are in exactly the position you want. Simply select the object or feature to be raised and move slider by clicking and dragging with the mouse. For a more information, see “Using Elevation Slider” on page 156.

Virtual Ruler The Virtual Ruler works like a real-world tape measure. It stores away in the corner of the window until you need it. Then, with one click, it is displayed in the middle of the window, where you can move it into any position necessary to make a needed measurement. It then stores away until you need it again. To move the Virtual Ruler, click and drag from the center. To resize, click and drag on one of the large black dots at either end.

With these tools, you will be able to measure and label any part of your drawing. If you want, you can store these labels on the Detail Tab, so you have the option of turning them off when you want to see your design in a more unobstructed state. For more information, see “Punch! Software Primer”, which begins on page 27.

Measurement Tools The measurement tools include associative dimensions, window/door callouts and the shortcuts to calculate floor square footage.

Associative Dimensioning are the measurements that appear as you are adding features. For example, the Associative Dimensioning feature will show how far from the ends of each wall the window is positioned. When the Window/Door Callouts option is checked, the measurements of all window and door openings will be shown, with the wall measurement,s and be displayed in the floorplan view.

Drag

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

9

Chapter

2 Window Layout

Selecting one of the three square footage options will cause Punch! AS4000 to make that calculation and display it in the Status Bar.

Working Floor Button Use the Working Floor button to switch the current view based on the number of floors in your home plan. When you click the Working Floor button, a pop-up menu is displayed. Simply click the floor on which you would like to work to switch the current working floor.

Status Bar The status bar is located in the lower left of the window and displays prompts, program messages and measurements. It is a good place to look when you are holding the pointer over certain buttons or menu items to find their function.

Scroll Bars Scroll bars provide a way for you to pan across the drawing, that is, to change the part of the drawing visible in the window, without changing the level of magnification. ■ ■ ■ ■

To pan the drawing in small increments, click the scroll arrow that points in the direction you want to pan. To pan in larger increments, click the control shaft, between the scroll box and a scroll arrow. To pan by a custom increment, drag the scroll box in the direction you want to pan. To position at a specific area of the page, right-click the scroll bar and click the wanted area on the pop-up menu that is displayed.

When you want to focus primarily on your 2D actions while maintaining a clear view of the 3D design, select Split Plan/ 3D View. Then, when you’re ready to add materials and colors to your Dream Home it will be easier in the 3D Full View mode.

Properties Bar You can easily modify features you have previously drawn by selecting them and editing their properties on the Properties Bar. You can even set the Properties Bar to automatically display when a feature is selected by clicking Auto Activate.

Selection Filter There will be times that you will place items atop one another. To make it easier to select each layer use the Selection Filter. Click the type of feature(s) you want to be able to select. When you hold down the CTRL key, you will only be able to select those features. For example, to select a transom window placed over a door check “Windows” on the Selection Filter. Hold down the CTRL key and click where the window and door are placed and you will only select the window.

Preview Bars You can click and drag objects, templates, materials, colors and so on from their Preview Bars onto your plan. The Preview Bar changes to reflect your selection. For instance, if you click the Plant Bar, plant options will be displayed.

LiveView Icons It is in the LiveView window where you see your designs come to life! The default view is Plan Full View. When you load Punch! AS4000, this is the view you will see. With the 3D Quarter View option, use most of your window for drawing, yet be able to view your design in 3D. For a full explanation see the chapter titled “Working with LiveView”, which begins on page 157. 10

Clicking one of the buttons on the PowerTool bar launches one of the associated Punch! AS4000 applications. For example: ■

■

Launch Topo Designer. To learn more about Topo Designer, see the chapter titled “Topo Designer”, which begins on page 49. Launch Material Workshop. To learn more about Material Workshop, see the chapter titled “Material Workshop”, which begins on page 183.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

Compass Setting ■

Launch Roofing Wizard. To learn more about Roofing Wizard, see the chapter titled “Roofing Wizard”, which begins on page 111.

All PowerTools launch in this same fashion, whether they were written by Punch! Software, LLC or by a third-party developer.

Compass Setting With the True North compass you can make sure that your design is placed correctly on your lot. The compass is also useful to accurately depict the direction of shadows and the sun’s position.

PunchSoftware.com With the click of one button, you can visit the Punch! website at www.punchsoftware.com or the Punch! PowerTool Store at www.punchsoftware.com/PowerTool_store.htm ■

■

■

To automatically launch your browser and visit the Punch! home page, click the Punch! Software Websites button at the upper right of your window, then click Punch! Software Home Page. To automatically launch your browser and visit the Punch! PowerTool Store, click the Punch! Software Websites button at the upper right of your window, then click Punch! PowerTool Store. New additions and revisions are being added to the Punch! content libraries all the time. Use the Punch! Updater to connect to our server, search for new content packages, and update your existing content libraries.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

11

Chapter

12

2 Window Layout

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

Chapter 3

A Quick Tour To get the most benefit from Punch! Home Design Architectural Series 4000, you should take a minute to become familiar with some of its basic concepts. This chapter describes a few settings you should know, as well as some of the terms used throughout this guide. Punch! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 is not just one software application, but several applications that can be used together. Once you’ve mastered Punch! AS4000, additional tools are available to customize your home plans: Estimator, Material Workshop, PhotoView, RealModel and 3D Custom Workshop. Information on the use of all these tools can be found in this User’s Manual. With Punch! AS4000 you can set a precise drawing scale, define units of measurement and set the reference grid. There are also many performance settings you can apply to optimize drawing speed and 3D viewing.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

13

Chapter

3 A Quick Tour

About This Guide

Graphic Cues

The text and graphics in this guide are tailored to help you find the information you need quickly and get the most out of Punch! AS4000. Each section of this guide is divided into a series of step-by-step instructions, making it easy for you to scan a page to find exactly what you need. You can also refer to the index for additional topics on the same subject, if necessary.

This guide uses several types of graphic elements. Some show the window or a dialog box that will appear during an operation. When this type of graphic illustration is used, every effort is made to show the element exactly as it is displayed on the window. Graphic Cues Used in this Guide Convention

Instructions for installing and using Microsoft Windows do not appear in this guide. If you’re uncomfortable with your knowledge of Windows or with the concepts associated with a user interface object, you should review Windows online Help before attempting any serious work with Punch! AS4000.

mouse click that selects a point—the number, when present, specifies the mouse click’s position in a series of clicks

2

Basic Terms Dr ag

The following is a list of terms used throughout this guide. Take a moment to familiarize yourself with the language used in this guide and to reinforce your understanding of basic terminology.

2

Click Pressing and releasing the left mouse button once. Right-click Pressing and releasing the right mouse button once. Double-click Pressing and releasing the left mouse button twice. Click and drag Pressing the left mouse button, holding it down and moving the mouse, simultaneously. Drag-and-drop Clicking to select an item, holding down the mouse button, then dragging and releasing. Scroll Using the scroll bars on the sides of the application window by clicking the slider box, holding down the mouse button and dragging.

Meaning

click and drag operation—beginning of arrow indicates where to start; end of arrow indicates where to stop a right mouse click —the number, when present, specifies the mouse click’s position in a series of clicks

Punch! PowerTools™ Punch! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 is PowerTool enabled. Punch! PowerTools seamlessly add additional features and functionality to your program to make it easier to create your dream home! Whenever more PowerTools become available, they are offered to users at the Punch! PowerTool Store. ■

To automatically launch your browser and visit the Punch! PowerTool Store, click the Punch! Software Websites button at the upper right of your screen, then click Punch! PowerTool Store.

Defining Your Lot Size and Topography With Punch! AS4000 you define lot size and all topographical information in the Site Planner and Topography Designer PowerTools. For more information, see “Topo Designer”, which begins on page 49. For more information, see “Site Planner”, which begins on page 193.

14

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

Setting the Scale

Setting the Scale

3

(optional) Click the arrow next to Angle Format and select the number of decimal points you want to use.

4

(optional) Click the arrow next to Precision and select the number of decimal points you want to use.

5

(optional) Click the arrow next to Readout Format and select the format you want.

6

Click OK. The unit of measurement and options you selected are applied.

Scale is the ratio between real-world size of objects and items in your drawing and their size when printed. The default drawing scale is 1/4" = 1', meaning that 1/4" on your drawing plan equals one foot in real-world size. You can customize scale settings at any time to suit your needs, as well as print your drawing to scale. To set the drawing scale 1

On the Design menu, click Plan Scale. The Plan Scale dialog box is displayed.

2

Click a new scale setting, then click OK. The new scale is applied to your plan drawing.

Setting Unit of Measurement You can set units of measurement in Punch! AS4000 by selecting either English measurements or Metric measurements. You can also set the default measurements and options to be applied when any previously-drawn design is opened. To use English measurements

To use Metric measurements

1

On the Design menu, click Unit of Measure. The Measurement Units dialog box is displayed.

2

Click English Units.

1

On the Design menu, click Unit of Measure. The Measurement Units dialog box is displayed.

2

Click Metric Units.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

15

Chapter 3

3 A Quick Tour

(optional) Click the arrow next to Angle Format and select the number of decimal points you want to use.

Grid properties can also be set by accessing the right-click menu with nothing selected. To define Snap to Grid settings

4

(optional) Click the arrow next to Readout Format and select the format you want.

5

Click OK. The unit of measurement and options you selected are applied.

To set defaults for previous designs 1

Follow the instructions for either English or Metric units outlined above, then click the box to set the defaults for all previously-drawn designs.

1

On the Options menu, click Grid Properties or rightclick on your design window and click Grid Properties on the pop-up menu that is displayed. The Grid Properties dialog box is displayed.

2

On the Grid Spacing dialog box, type new measurements into the Snap Grid section, then click OK. Items you draw or drag-and-drop into the design window will now snap to the measurements you defined.

Note: Initially, the grid is set at 12 inches, making it easy to visualize each plan square as exactly one square foot, but can be customized to meet your particular design needs.

2

Click OK. The defaults will be applied to any previouslydrawn design when it is opened.

Using the Grid

Note: Snap settings can be set as low as 0.10 inch (English), 0.002 m (Metric), and still show visible movement along the grid. Snap settings can be set as high as 500 inches (English), 12.70 m (Metric). To select grid spacing 1

On the Options menu, click Grid Properties or rightclick on your design window and click Grid Properties on the pop-up menu that is displayed. The Grid Properties dialog box is displayed.

2

Type new horizontal and vertical measurements in the Grid Dots/Lines section of the Grid Spacing page, then click OK. The new grid spacing measurements are applied.

With Punch! AS4000 you can set specific grid properties that aid in drawing your home plan. You can set points, based on the reference grid, which is useful when you want to make sure certain points are specified precisely. Grid settings have a direct impact on the ease of aligning objects, snapping objects to the grid and so on. When using the Snap to Grid feature, items that are dragged and dropped on the design window are automatically snapped, or placed, to align with the current grid. By default, Snap to Grid is turned on. You can customize grid settings by selecting grid spacing, grid style and whether the grid is hidden from view or displayed.

16

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

Using the Grid disabled. To enable Snap to Grid, simply recheck the menu item. To display the grid ■

On the Options menu, click to check Grid Visible or right-click on your design window and click Grid Visible on the pop-up menu that is displayed. The grid is displayed on the design window.

To change the grid style 1

On the Options menu, click Grid Properties or rightclick on your design window and click Grid Properties on the pop-up menu that is displayed. The Grid Properties dialog box is displayed.

2

Click the Grid Style page tab.

3

Click either Grid Dots or Grid Lines, then click OK. The new grid style is applied.

Note: Grid Dots/Lines can be set to as low as 1 inch (English), 0.02 m (Metric), and still be viewable. Grid Dots/ Lines can be set as high as 500 inches (English), 12.70 m (Metric). To move objects/features along the grid 1 2

On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool. Click the object or feature you want to move.

3

Using the arrow keys on your keyboard, move the object or feature into position.

Note: Each time you press an arrow key, the object or feature will move one increment that you have set in “To define Snap to Grid settings” on page 16. To turn off Snap to Grid ■

On the Options menu, click to uncheck Snap to Grid, press CTRL+R or right-click on your design window and click Snap to Grid on the pop-up menu. The feature is

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

17

Chapter

18

3 A Quick Tour

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

Chapter 4

File Management When you start Punch! AS4000, a new blank drawing file is displayed. If you are returning to work on an existing drawing, you must open it, or display it on the screen. Opening a file involves clicking Open on the File menu and specifying the name of the file you want to open. Once you have opened a file, you can edit, import, export, print, view and save it. You can have more than one file open at a time. The exact number of files you can have open depends on the amount of memory in your system and the complexity of the home plan file. When you open a file, Punch! AS4000 displays it in a new window. The changes you make to a plan drawing occur only in your computer’s memory until you save them. To preserve a drawing for later use, you must save it to a file. If you want to save a drawing using its current name or if you want to save a new, untitled drawing, use Save. If you want to save a drawing using a new name, use Save As. At any point during the design process you can import objects created in 3D Custom Workshop to further customize your design. In addition, you can export a 3D LiveView rendering to make it easy to share your design with friends.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

19

Chapter

4 File Management

Opening a File

To save an existing file

Opening a file copies the data it contains into memory, making it available for you to edit or print the plan drawing.

■

To open an existing file 1

On the File menu, click Open. The Open dialog box is displayed.

2

On the File menu, click Save or right-click, then click Save on the pop-up menu that is displayed or press Ctrl+S.

To save a new, unnamed file 1

In the File Name box, type the name of the file you want to open, or search for the file by switching folders or drives.

On the File menu, click Save As. The Save As dialog box is displayed.

2

3

When you see the name of the file you want to open, click to select it.

Type a file name in the File Name text box. Punch! AS4000 automatically adds the PRO extension, unless you specify another extension.

3

Click OK.

4

Click OK.

To see a list of recently opened files

To save a file to a different name, drive, or folder 1

On the File menu, click Save As. The Save As dialog box is displayed.

1

On the File menu, highlight Open Recent. The Open Recent listing is displayed.

2

2

On the Open Recent pop-up, click the file you want to open. The file loads into memory.

If you want to save the drawing under another name, type a name in the File Name text box.

3

If you want to save the drawing to a different drive or folder, click a different drive and folder, or type the complete path in the File Name text box.

4

Click OK.

To clear the recently opened files listing 1

On the File menu, highlight Open Recent. The Open Recent listing is displayed.

2

On the Open Recent pop-up, click Clear Recent Designs List. A warning box is displayed.

3

Click Yes to delete all files from the listing. Click No to leave the listing unchanged.

Saving a File When you open a file, Punch! AS4000 copies the file to your computer’s memory. As you work, you modify the copy stored in memory. Any system failure or loss of power destroys that copy. To save your work permanently, you must save it to a file on a disk. A good rule of thumb is to save every 15 minutes or after you’ve completed any work you wouldn’t want to redo. When you click the Save command, Punch! AS4000 saves the active drawing using the name and location you last gave it. You can create more than one version of a drawing or save copies on another disk for safekeeping. You can save each version under a different name, or you can save them under the same name in different folders or on different disks.

20

Closing a File When you finish working with a file, close it to remove the window from the screen and to free up your computer’s memory. When you are done working in Punch! AS4000, close all your files and exit the program. To close a file ■

On the File menu, click Close. If you have unsaved changes in your plan drawing, Punch! AS4000 prompts you to save them before it closes the file.

To close all open files and exit Punch! AS4000 ■

On the File menu, click Exit. If any open drawings have unsaved changes, Punch! AS4000 prompts you to save them before it closes their files.

Accessing the Pre-Drawn Homeplans Punch! AS4000 includes a wide variety of homeplans for you to alter. The included homeplans are located in the directory where you installed the program, in a subdirectory called “Plans”.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

Importing Files To open a pre-drawn homeplan

Exporting Files

1

Open the Punch software and click File>Open.

2

On the screen that appears, click the down arrow beside My Documents and select C Drive.

3

From the folders that appear in the window, double-click Program Files.

4

From the next set of folders that appear, click Punch!

5

Select Plans from the next set of folders.

6

The 20 plans will appear in the window. Double-click the plan you wish to view.

You can export a rendering of your LiveView window to BMP, JPG, PDS, PNG, TGA and WMF format. Files can be exported in Textured, Wire-Frame and ClearView modes. The exported file will appear just as your LiveView window does. Be sure to render your drawing in high-resolution before exporting. Size is also controlled by how your LiveView window appears; the larger the LiveView window, the larger the file will be. For more information on controlling the LiveView environment, see “Working with LiveView”, which begins on page 157.

Note: All plans included with Punch! AS4000 are the copyright of Wolfgang Trost Architects. The plans and 3D computer images are for conceptual purposes only. You must have any plans provided in, or generated by, Punch! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 checked by a licensed architect before you build. Punch Software LLC and Wolfgang Trost Architects are not liable for errors, omissions or any other deficiencies in these conceptual plans. Complete sets of building plans for these homes are available by contacting Wolfgang Trost Architects at www.wolfgangtrost.com

By exporting your design to VRML, it becomes available for viewing with a VRML viewer or through a web browser (provided an appropriate plug-in is installed). These helper applications and plug-ins are available as free downloads on the Internet. Note: The 3D design will appear without the materials, when viewed from a VRML file. To export 1

On the File menu, click Export 3D>LiveView Image. The Export Options dialog box is displayed.

2

Click the radio button next to the format you want to use, then click OK. The Save As dialog box is displayed.

3

(optional) Click the radio button next to the Export Quality that is needed, then click OK.

4

(optional) Set a size for the exported image, then click OK.

5

Type a file name in the File Name text box. Punch! AS4000 automatically adds the extension.

6

If you want to save the drawing to a different drive or folder, click a different drive and folder, or type the complete path in the File Name text box.

7

Click OK.

Importing Files Punch! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 is actually many programs in one. All of these programs integrate seamlessly; objects created with Punch! 3D Custom Workshop and cabinets designed in Punch! Cabinet Wizard are available for import into your floor plan. To import a 3D Custom Workshop object 1

On the File menu, click Import>Punch! 3D Custom Workshop Object. The Import Punch! 3D Object dialog box is displayed.

2

In the File Name box, type the name of the file you want to open or search for the file by switching folders or drives.

3

When you see the name of the file you want to open, click to select it.

4

Click OK. The object is placed in the center of your 2D design.

Note: Double-click the object to re-open it in 3D Custom Workshop.

To export to VRML 1

On the File menu, click Export 3D>VRML.

2

In the File Name text box, type a name. Punch! AS4000 automatically adds the extension, then click OK.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

21

Chapter

4 File Management

Sharing Files Using the Content Folder

5

Punch! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 will look for anything missing from a drawing in the Contents Folder. Missing components could be custom textures, custom plants, the topography grid files, PhotoView images, and so on.

To print to scale

To share a design that has customized components, those components need to be collected and placed in the Content Folder, then the Content Folder will be emailed with your home design plan.

Printing Floorplans Punch! AS4000 prints using the current Windows printer drivers. You can, however, print using any installed printer. Using the Print dialog box you can specify a printer or plotter from those currently installed. Your can print your drawing in color or in black and white; it can be printed to scale or you can print it all on one page, whatever you require. Follow these steps to print your 2D drawing. To print to fit page 1

On the File menu, click Print to Fit Page or press Ctrl+P. A Print Manager menu will ask if you want to print your drawing in color. Click Yes to print in color; click no to print in greyscale.

Click OK.

1

On the Design menu, click Plan Scale. The Plan Scale dialog box is displayed.

2

Click the radio button next to the scale you want to use. Click OK.

Note: Gridlines will print if they are visible when the drawing is printed. 3

On the File menu, click Print to Scale. A Print Manager menu will ask if you want to print your drawing in color. Click Yes to print in color; click no to print in greyscale.

4

The Print dialog box is displayed.

5

Click the printer you want to use.

6

(optional) Change the paper orientation and size.

7

Click OK.

Printing a 3D LiveView Rendering Punch! AS4000 streamlines the process used to print the 3D LiveView images. With just a couple of clicks, you can print beautiful, full-color renderings of your design. To print a 3D LiveView rendering 1

Note: Gridlines will print if they are visible when the drawing is printed.

On the File menu, click Print 3D LiveView, then select the quality needed.

2

The print dialog box is displayed.

2

3

Click the printer you want to use.

4

(optional) Change the paper orientation and size.

5

Click OK.

The Print dialog box is displayed.

3

Click the printer you want to use.

4

(optional) Change the paper orientation and size.

22

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

Chapter 5

Punch! Updater New additions and revisions are being added to the Punch! content libraries all the time. Use the Punch! Updater to connect to our server, search for new content packages, and update your existing content libraries. Note: The Punch! Updater utility compares the content packages you’ve downloaded to those on the server. Punch! does not collect or transmit information about you or your system over the Internet.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

23

Chapter

5 Punch! Updater

Updating your Punch! content

4

Click the link. Punch! Updater searches for available updates and a list is displayed.

5

Click the check box next to each package you want to install. The Total Download Size and Total Installation Size is displayed. The Install button is activated.

Punch! Updater offers a list of available updates for you to download. Not only does Punch! Updater allow you to choose which updates you want, but Updater recommends additional downloads to complement your initial selection. Updating your software, using Punch! Updater, allows you to receive the maximum performance from your software. To search for available updates 1

2

3

Make sure your computer is connected to the Internet, then click the Punch! Software Web site button in the top right-hand corner. A drop-down menu is displayed.

Click Punch! Updater. The Punch! Updater Package Manager displays the packages you’ve downloaded.

Note: Some updates are designed to work in conjunction with other updates. In such cases, Punch! lists the packages designed to accompany your selections in the Recommended Updates section. Failure to download these additional packages may impact the appearance or performance of your new content. 6

(optional) To select all the recommended packages, click the Select All button.

7

Click the Install button to begin the installation process. Your selection(s) downloads to your hard drive.

8

When installation is complete, click OK. The initial search page is displayed.

Click the Search for Updates button. The initial search page is displayed.

Note: Once you have downloaded a package, it appears in the Package Manager and no longer appears in the available updates list. To uninstall an update

24

1

Click the Package Manager button. The packages you’ve downloaded are displayed.

2

Select the package you want to uninstall then click the Uninstall button. The uninstall confirmation box is displayed.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

Updating your Punch! content To customize update manager options 1

Click the Program Settings button. The Install Manager Options are displayed. ■

3

4

Click YES to uninstall the package. When uninstallation is complete, a dialog box will be displayed.

■

To automatically select the Punch! Updater recommendations, click the checkbox next to Automatically select recommended package updates. Your library may already contain a file that exists in the package you are downloading. Specify the action you want Punch! Updater to take in this situation.

2

To save your settings, click the Save button. Your updated Program Settings are saved.

3

To restore Updater’s original Program Settings, click the Default button, then click the Save button. The Program Settings return to their default setting.

Click OK to return to the Package Manager. To customize network options

To customize install manager options 1

Click the Program Settings button. The Install Manager Options are displayed.

1

Click the Program Settings button. The Install Manager Options appear.

2

Click the LAN Proxy Server drop-down box. The proxy use options appear. ■

■ ■

Click Do not use a proxy server to disable Punch! Updater from using a proxy server when accessing the Internet. Click Use system’s proxy settings to use your current Internet settings to access the Internet. Click Use custom proxy settings to enter HTTP Proxy, Port and No Proxy for.

Note: A proxy server acts as a buffer between your computer and the information you are accessing on the Internet. Proxy settings can be customized to restrict your computer from certain information. ■

■

To remove all files upon uninstallation, select the checkbox next to Remove empty categories from the software when uninstalling packages. To prompt a warning before uninstalling packages, click the checkbox next to Warn me before uninstalling packages

2

To save your settings, click the Save button. Your updated Program Settings are saved.

3

To restore Updater’s original Program Settings, click the Default button, then click the Save button. The Program Settings return to their original setting.

3

To save your settings, click the Save button. Your updated Program Settings are saved.

4

To restore Updater’s original Program Settings, click the Default button, then click the Save button. The Program Settings return to their default setting.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

25

Chapter

26

5 Punch! Updater

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

Chapter 6

Punch! Software Primer This chapter contains concepts and procedures that you will need throughout your design process. Many features are drawn the same way throughout Punch! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 and the PowerTools that are included with it. Whether you are drawing a rectangle to mask part of a tree in PlantEditor or a rectangle to tint a custom material in Material Workshop, it will always be drawn in the same way. The icons may different slightly, but the process is the same. Plus, Punch! AS4000’s powerful Snaps Toolbar has many tools that make precision placement easier. On the Snaps Toolbar there are a wide variety of precision drawing aids that will help in exact placement of walls, doors, windows and so on. The Snaps functions are also available in a variety of the included PowerTools. Often, drawing a plan to scale is not enough to convey precise measurements. In such cases, you must notate the measurements using manual dimension notes. Punch! AS4000, by default, automatically displays dimensions, as you draw. This makes it easy to create accurate drawings from the start. In addition to the Virtual Ruler you can use a variety of dimension tools available in Punch! AS4000 to measure items that are not automatically dimensioned. You can also obtain total square footage measurements for each floor of your home design with the Square Footage menu item. With the text tools you can add either straight or angled text to any area of your drawing. This feature is useful if you’d like to name your home plan or add your address to the final drawing, for instance. You can select from any font installed on your computer, as well as select style and size.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

27

Chapter

6 Punch! Software Primer

Drawing Shapes Many features are drawn the same way throughout Punch! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 and the PowerTools that are a part of it. Whether you are drawing a rectangle to mask part of a tree in PlantEditor or a rectangle to tint a custom material in Material Workshop, it will always be drawn in the same way. The icons may different slightly, but the process is the same.

1 2 Drag

To draw rectangles and squares 1

Click the Rectangle Tool. The pointer changes to reflect drawing mode.

Note: If you want to draw several rectangles, on the Edit

5

Release the mouse button.

To draw a polygon

menu, click Keep Tool Selected. To deactivate the tool, click the Selection tool on the Standard Toolbar.

1

Click the Polygon Tool. The pointer changes to reflect drawing mode.

2

(optional) Click the editing mode that you want to apply, then select a color or material from the Preview Bar.

2

(optional) Click the editing mode that you want to apply, then select a color or material from the Preview Bar.

3

Click on the design window to define the start point of the rectangle. A rubber-band rectangle is displayed and follows the pointer. Dimensions are displayed, as you draw.

3

Click on the design window to define the start point of the polygon. A rubber-band line is displayed and follows the pointer. Dimensions are displayed, as you draw.

4

Click and move the mouse to the next cornerpoint. Repeat until you have drawn the necessary shape.

4

Hold the mouse button down, as you extend the rectangle to the size you want.

12

2

12

52

Dr ag

5

Release the mouse button.

To draw circles and ovals 1

Click the Circle/Oval Tool. The pointer changes to reflect drawing mode.

2

(optional) Click the editing mode that you want to apply, then select a color or material from the Preview Bar.

3

Click on the design window to define the start point of the shape. A rubber-band shape is displayed and follows the pointer. Dimensions are displayed, as you draw.

4

Hold the mouse button down, as you extend the shape to the size you want.

42

32

5

2

Right-click to end drawing mode.

To draw a multigon

1

Click the Multigon Tool. The pointer changes to reflect drawing mode.

2

(optional) Click the editing mode that you want to apply, then select a color or material from the Preview Bar.

Note: On the Options menu, click Multigon Options to change the number of sides.

3

Click on the design window to define the start point of the multigon. A rubber-band multigon is displayed and follows the pointer.

28

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

Changing Curve Tension 4

Hold the mouse button down, as you extend the multigon to the size you want.

12

5

Dr ag

1

Click the Curve Tool. The pointer changes to reflect drawing mode.

2

(optional) Click the editing mode that you want to apply, then select a color or material from the Preview Bar.

3

Click on the design window to define the start point of the curve. A rubber-band curve is displayed and follows the pointer. Click and move the mouse to the next point. Repeat until you have drawn the needed shape.

Note: Although the lines will initially appear angular, they will become curved when you end drawing mode. 5

Type the amount of tension that you want.

4

Click OK. The Curve Tension you specified is applied.

Examples: Default Curve Tension (8):

Release the mouse button.

To draw a curve

4

3

Double-click to end drawing mode.

Changing Curve Tension To further control the look of the shapes drawn with any of the arc or curve tools, you have control over the degree of curve assigned to them. With the Straighten feature, it is easy to create angular shapes and with Curve Tension you can change the appearance. Curve Tension is measured between 1 and 10. Specifying 1 in the dialog box results in very little tension being applied, while specifying 10 causes a slightlyexaggerated curve. To change curve tension 1

Click an object to select it.

2

On the Property bar, click Adjust, in the Curve section. The Smooth dialog box is displayed.

Curve Tension set at 2:

To remove curve tension 1

Click an object to select it.

2

On the Property bar, click Straighten, in the Curve section. The curve is changed to a polyline.

Snap Basics With snaps, you can define exactly what distance interior walls are placed from other walls or begin exactly at the end of the wall when drawing a roof section. You can move through the Snaps Toolbar with the Tab key. Each time you press Tab, the next Snap Tool is activated, Shift-Tab reverses the process. The following examples show a few ways that Snaps will help you during the design process; each Snap Tool works in concert with many other tools in Punch! AS4000. Accessing the Snaps toolbar ■

Click the Snaps On Tool. The Snaps toolbar is displayed.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

29

Chapter

6 Punch! Software Primer

To snap a wall from the end of another wall

To snap a roof

1

On the Floor Plan tab, click the Interior Wall Tool.

1

2

On the Snaps toolbar, click the Snap to Endpoint Tool or press TAB.

On the Roofing Plan tab, click one of the Roof Tools. The Preview Bar displays the pitches that are available.

2

Click the roof pitch to select it.

3

Click a wall on the design window. The wall will “snap to” the endpoint nearest where you clicked.

3

On the Snaps toolbar, click the Snap to Endpoint Tool or press TAB.

4

Click a wall on the design window. The roof will “snap to” the endpoint nearest where you clicked.

5

Hold down the mouse button and drag until the cursor touches another wall.

6

Press Tab to re-activate the Snap to Endpoint Tool. The roof will automatically extend to cover the entire perimeter.

4

5

Hold down the mouse button and drag. Notice that the wall follows the pointer and automatically displays the wall length.

Release the mouse button when the wall length you want is reached.

Note: Each Snap Tool defaults back to “No Snap” after it is used; double-click the Snap Tool to lock it in active mode. If you have locked a Snap Tool and use the Tab key to activate another tool, it will also be locked as active. To unlock it, click “No Snap”. Note: Walls are drawn from a centerline. When moving or otherwise manipulating them, you are always working from the centerline and snapping to them will do the same.

30

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

Snap to Segment Centerpoint

5

7

Release the mouse button when the wall length you want is reached.

Release the mouse button.

Snap to Segment Centerpoint Snap to Segment Centerpoint will be useful when drawing walls, placing doors or windows, and so on. You can move through the Snaps Toolbar with the Tab key. Each time you press Tab, the next Snap Tool is activated, Shift-Tab reverses the process. To snap a wall from the center of another wall 1

On the Floor Plan tab, click the Interior Wall Tool.

2

On the Snaps toolbar, click the Snap to Segment Centerpoint Tool or press TAB to move through the tools on the Snaps toolbar.

3

4

Click a wall on the design window. The wall will “snap to” the centerpoint of the wall.

Note: Each Snap Tool defaults back to “No Snap” after it is used; double-clicking the Snap Tool will lock it in active mode. If you have locked a Snap Tool and use the Tab key to activate another tool, it will also be locked as active. To unlock it, click “No Snap”. To snap a window in the center of a wall 1

On the Floor Plan tab, click the Window Tool. The Preview Bar displays the styles that are available.

2

On the Snaps toolbar, click the Snap to Segment Centerpoint Tool or press TAB to move through the tools on the Snaps toolbar.

3

Click a wall on the design window. The window will “snap to” the centerpoint of the wall.

Hold down the mouse button and drag. Notice that the wall follows the pointer and automatically displays the wall length.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

31

Chapter

4

6 Punch! Software Primer

(optional) Customize the window properties as shown in the section “To add a window” on page 76.

4

Hold down the mouse button and drag until the cursor touches the outside perimeter of the room. Notice that a red arrow is displayed showing the centerline of the stairway. The stairway will automatically move to the center of the room when the cursor touches the perimeter.

5

Release the mouse button.

Snap to Object Center Snap to Object Center will make placing items in the center of rooms easy. Details down to placing a coffee table exactly in the center of the floor rug just take a couple of clicks. To snap a stairway to the center of a room 1

On the Floor Plan tab, click the Stairway Tool.

2

On the Snaps toolbar, click the Snap to Object Centerpoint Tool or press TAB to move through the tools on the Snaps toolbar.

3

32

Click a stairway on the design window. The cursor will “snap to” the centerpoint of the stairway.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

Snap to Object Corner Note: Each Snap Tool defaults back to “No Snap” after it is used; double-clicking the Snap Tool will lock it in active mode. If you have locked a Snap Tool and use the Tab key to activate another tool, it will also be locked as active. To unlock it, click “No Snap”.

7

Hold down the mouse button and drag until the cursor touches the outside perimeter of the table.

To snap a lamp to the center of a table 1

Click the Object Tab. The Preview Bar displays furnishing objects.

2

Click the arrow next to “Objects” at the top of the Preview Bar to display the object library list, then click another object library.

3

Scroll to view the available objects. Drag and drop a table and a lamp onto your design window.

4

On the Snaps toolbar, click the Snap to Object Centerpoint Tool or press TAB to move through the tools on Snaps toolbar.

5

Click the lamp on the design window. The cursor will “snap to” the centerpoint of the lamp.

6

Press TAB to move through the tools on the Snaps toolbar until the Snap to Object Centerpoint is again active.

Note: The lamp will automatically move to the center of the table when the cursor touches the perimeter of the table.

8

Release the mouse button.

Note: For more information on placing objects, see “Objects Preview Bar”, which begins on page 170.

Snap to Object Corner Snap to Object Corner makes it easy to grab an object or other element by its corner and move it precisely into position. You can use any snap tool in conjunction with other snaps to move features and objects into the perfect position, the first time. To snap a planter to the corner of a deck 1

Click the Object Tab. The Preview Bar displays furnishing objects.

2

Click the arrow next to “Objects” at the top of the Preview Bar to display the object library list, then click another object library.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

33

Chapter

6 Punch! Software Primer

3

Scroll to view the available objects. Drag and drop a planter onto your design window.

4

On the Snaps toolbar, click the Snap to Object Cornerpoint Tool or press TAB to move through the tools on the Snaps toolbar.

Note: The planter will automatically move to the corner of the deck when the cursor touches the perimeter of the deck. 8

5

Click the planter on the design window. When you drag the planter the cursor will “snap to” the cornerpoint.

6

Press TAB to move through the tools on Snaps toolbar until the Snap to Object Cornerpoint is active again.

Release the mouse button.

Note: For more information on placing objects, see “Objects Preview Bar”, which begins on page 170.

Snap to Intersection Using the Snap to Intersection control, you can position walls, objects and other features where you want them the first time. To snap a wall exactly opposite another wall

7

34

1

On the Floor Plan tab, click the Interior Wall Tool.

2

On the Snaps toolbar, click the Snap to Intersection Tool or press TAB to move through the tools on the Snaps toolbar.

3

Click a wall on the design window. The wall will “snap to” the endpoint nearest where you clicked.

4

Hold down the mouse button and drag. Notice that the wall follows the pointer and automatically displays the wall length.

Hold down the mouse button and drag, until the cursor touches the outside perimeter of the deck.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

Snap to Perpendicular

Snap to Segment-Offset You can easily place walls, objects, and so on, where you want them the first time with Snap to Segment-Offset. To snap a planter 18" from the corner of a deck

5

Release the mouse button when the wall length you want is reached.

Note: Each Snap Tool defaults back to “No Snap” after it is used; double-clicking the Snap Tool will lock it in active mode. If you have locked a Snap Tool and use the Tab key to activate another tool, it will also be locked as active. Note: Walls are drawn from a centerline. When manipulating them, you are always working from the centerline and snapping to them will do the same.

1

Click the Object Tab. The Preview Bar displays furnishing objects.

2

Click the arrow next to “Objects” at the top of the Preview Bar to display the object library list, then click another object library.

3

Scroll to view the available objects. Drag and drop a planter onto your design window.

4

On the Snaps toolbar, click the Snap to SegmentOffset Tool. The Snap to Segment-Offset dialog box is displayed.

Snap to Perpendicular Snap to Perpendicular makes it easy to add a CAD line perpendicular to a circle or oval. For instance, if you want to draw a pathway at a perpendicular angle to a curved retaining wall.

5

Type 18 in the text box. Click OK.

6

On the Snaps toolbar, click the Snap to Object Cornerpoint Tool or press TAB to move through the tools on the Snaps toolbar.

7

Click the planter on the design window. The cursor will “snap to” the cornerpoint of the planter.

8

Press TAB to move through the tools on the Snaps toolbar until the Snap to Segment-Offset tool is active.

To snap a perpendicular line 1

On the Detail Plan tab, click the Line Tool.

2

On the Snaps toolbar, click the Snap to Perpendicular Tool or press TAB to move through the tools on the Snaps toolbar.

3

Click the perimeter of a circle or oval drawn previously. The line will “snap to” an angle perpendicular to the edge.

4

Hold down the mouse button and drag. Notice that the line follows the pointer and automatically displays dimensions.

5

Release the mouse button when the length you want is reached.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

35

Chapter

6 Punch! Software Primer Reshaping Elements Punch! AS4000 lets you manipulate many straight elements in your design to make your dreams a reality. A few of the elements that can be reshaped are railings, roof panels, flooring, and 2D CAD objects. To fillet (round) a corner

9

Hold down the mouse button and drag until the cursor touches the outside perimeter of the deck.

1

On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.

2

Click the feature you want to fillet. Selection handles appear around the object.

3

On the Property bar, click Points, in the Edit Level section, or right-click and click Point Selection.

4

On the Snaps toolbar, click the Fillet Corner Tool.

5

Click a cornerpoint of the feature; hold down the mouse button and move the pointer toward the center of the feature.

Dr ag

Note: When the cursor touches the deck perimeter, the planter will automatically move to the distance from the corner of the deck specified in Step 4. 10 Release the mouse button.

6

Note: Each Snap Tool defaults back to “No Snap” after it is used; double-clicking the Snap Tool will lock it in active mode. If you have locked a Snap Tool and use the Tab key to activate another tool, it will also be locked as active.

To inversely fillet (round) a corner

Release the mouse to stop filleting the corner.

1

On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.

2

Click the feature you want to fillet. Selection handles appear around the object.

Adding and Deleting Points

3

You can add or delete points to walls, 2D CAD objects, and so on at any time to quickly reshape them.

On the Property bar, click Points, in the Edit Level section, or right-click and click Point Selection.

4

On the Snaps toolbar, click the Inverted Fillet Corner Tool.

To add a point

5

Click a cornerpoint of the object; hold down the mouse button and move the pointer toward the center of the feature.

1

On the Snaps toolbar, click the Add Point tool. The pointer changes to reflect drawing mode.

2

Click on a wall, or anywhere you want to gain flexibility.

To remove a point 1

On the Snaps toolbar, click the Remove Point tool. The pointer changes to reflect drawing mode.

2

Click on any point you want to remove.

36

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

Using Flip and Mirror To flip a feature vertically 1

Click the feature you want to flip.

2

On the Snaps toolbar, click the Flip Vertical Tool or on the Edit menu, click Flip Vertical.

Dr ag

To mirror a feature horizontally

6

Release the mouse to stop filleting the corner.

To chamfer a corner

1

Click the feature you want to mirror.

2

On the Snaps toolbar, click the Mirror Horizontal Tool or on the Edit menu, click Mirror Horizontal.

3

Move the feature into position.

To mirror a feature vertically

1

On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.

2

Click the feature you want to chamfer. Selection handles appear around the object.

3

On the Property bar, click Points, in the Edit Level section, or right-click and click Point Selection.

4

On the Snaps toolbar, click the Chamfer Corner Tool.

Dimensioning

5

Click a cornerpoint of the object; hold down the mouse button and move the pointer toward the center of the feature.

Dr ag

6

Release the mouse to stop filleting the corner.

Using Flip and Mirror The Flip function takes the original feature and reverses it either horizontally or vertically. Mirror works much like the Flip function. The difference is that mirror leaves the original and makes a duplicate. Mirror creates two identical objects facing one another.

1

Click the feature you want to mirror.

2

On the Snaps toolbar, click the Mirror Vertical Tool or on the Edit menu, click Mirror Vertical.

3

Move the feature into position.

Punch! AS4000 automatically displays dimensions as you draw, making it easy to precisely place walls, doors and other items in your plan drawing. The powerful Dimension Wall tool will be especially useful to add interactive dimensions between walls, where they are not automatically generated. Dimensions drawn with the Dimension Wall tool are automatically updated when either wall is moved. You’ll find this tool extremely useful when measuring between the main house and the walls of other buildings, like a garden shed or playhouse. In some instances, you might want to print your plan drawing without dimension annotation. You have the option of turning off automatic dimensioning if you don’t want it displayed on the drawing page or as you draw. To use the wall-spacing dimension tool 1

On the Annotation toolbar, click the Dimension Wall Tool.

2

Click a wall on the design window to define the starting point; hold down the mouse button and drag to the second wall.

3

Release the mouse button to set the measurement.

To use the offset dimension tool

To flip a feature horizontally 1

Click the feature you want to flip.

2

On the Snaps toolbar, click the Flip Horizontal Tool or on the Edit menu, click Flip Horizontal.

1

On the Annotation toolbar, click the Offset Dimension Tool.

2

Click on the design window to define the starting point; hold down the mouse button and drag to the ending point of the measurement you require.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

37

Chapter

6 Punch! Software Primer

12

2 1

Drag

Drag

3

Release the mouse button.

4

Move the mouse in the direction you want to offset the dimension.

3

Release the mouse button.

4

Move the mouse in the direction you want to offset the dimension.

2 2

5 5

To use the length dimension tool 1

On the Annotation toolbar, click the Length Dimension Tool.

2

Click on the design window to define the starting point; hold down the mouse button and drag to the ending point of the measurement you require.

38

Click to end.

Click to end.

To use the zero-offset dimension tool 1

On the Annotation toolbar, click the Zero-Offset Dimension Tool.

2

Click on the design window to define the starting point; hold down the mouse button and drag to the ending point of the measurement you require.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

Using the Virtual Ruler 3

Release the mouse button to set the measurement.

2

Click to select the endpoint style you want to use, then click OK.

To use the diameter dimension tool 1

On the Annotation toolbar, click the Diameter Dimension Tool.

2

Click one edge of a circle drawn on the Details Tab to define the starting point. The dimension will automatically snap to the opposite edge of the circle.

3

(optional) Move the mouse clockwise or counterclockwise to position the diameter dimension before releasing the mouse button.

Using the Virtual Ruler The Virtual Ruler is a handy feature for measuring items in your home plan that are not automatically dimensioned. You can “undock” the ruler at any time, leaving it active, or hide it from view with one mouse click. The Virtual Ruler is an easy way to measure at an angle, too. To measure using the Virtual Ruler 1

To use the leader dimension tool

Click the Virtual Ruler button at the bottom of the design window. The Virtual Ruler is displayed on

1

On the Annotation toolbar, click the Leader Dimension Tool.

the drawing page. 2

2

Click on the design window to define the starting point; hold down the mouse button and drag to draw the first segment of the dimension.

Click one of the black circles on the ruler edges and drag in the direction you want to measure. The measurement is displayed in the center of the Virtual Ruler.

3

3

Release the mouse button and move the mouse in the direction you want the second segment to be placed.

(optional) Click the center of the Virtual Ruler and drag it to a new location on the design window.

4

Click to end.

To hide the Virtual Ruler ■

To turn off automatic dimensioning ■

On the Options menu, click to uncheck Automatic Dimensioning.

OR ■

At the bottom of the window, click the Dimension button, then click to uncheck Automatic Dimensioning on the pop-up menu that is displayed.

To hide window and door dimensions ■

Calculating Square Footage Punch! AS4000 can automatically calculate square footage of each floor of your home plan. This feature makes it easy to figure how much carpet you’ll need to cover the first floor, for instance, or simply estimate your overall home size. If square footage is incorrect, check to make sure the exterior perimeter is intact. For more information, see “Defining the Foundation Perimeter”, which begins on page 62.

At the bottom of the window, click the Dimension button, then click to uncheck Window/Door

To calculate floor square footage

callouts on the pop-up menu that is displayed.

■

To change the endpoint style 1

Click the Virtual Ruler button at the bottom of the design window. The Virtual Ruler is “docked.”

On the Options menu, click Dimension Properties. The Dimension Properties menu is displayed.

At the bottom of the window, click the Dimension button, then click First Floor Square Footage (or Second or Third floor). Punch! AS4000 calculates the square footage and the total is displayed on the status bar.

Note: The square footage calculation is based on wall centerline measurements.

Adding Text Use text to add information to your drawing. For example, you might add text to annotate rooms, specify a home address, the date the drawing was created or a specific feature in your plan. Punch! AS4000 gives you the flexibility to place text anywhere in your plan drawing, using different

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

39

Chapter

6 Punch! Software Primer

formatting techniques for each text instance. Text you place in your drawing is displayed on all 2D printed output.

or ■

To place text in your drawing

Click the text you want to edit, then click Edit on the Properties Bar.

1

On the Annotation toolbar, click the Multi-Line Text tool.

To place text at an angle

2

Click the area where you want to place text on the drawing page. An Edit Text dialog box is displayed.

1

On the Annotation toolbar, click the Rotated Text tool.

2

Click the area where you want to place text on the drawing page. An (optional) dialog box is displayed.

3

Type the notation in the text box.

4

Click the radio button next to the angle you want or enter a custom angle in the dialog box.

5

Click OK to end edit mode.

6

(optional) Click Font, the Font dialog box is displayed. Choose the Font, Style and Size, then click OK.

3

Type the annotation in the text box. Click OK to end edit mode.

4

(optional) Click Font, the Font dialog box is displayed. Choose the Font, Style and Size, then click OK.

To change alignment of multi-line text 1

Using the selection tool, click the text you want to change.

2

Click Center on the Properties Bar.

To change formatting of existing text

3

(optional) Click Right on the Properties Bar.

1

Using the selection tool, click the text you want to change. Selection handles appear around the text.

2

On the Options menu, click Text or double-click the selected text. The Font dialog box is displayed.

3

To change the text font, click a new font on the Font list.

To edit text ■

40

Double-click the text you want to edit.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

Adding Text 4

To change the text style, click a new style on the Font style list.

5

To change the text size, click a new size on the Size list.

6

Click OK.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

41

Chapter

42

6 Punch! Software Primer

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

Chapter 7

Plan Tabs Punch! AS4000 utilizes a collection of layers which are accessible by clicking the tabs along the top and right side of the design window. Clicking a plan tab accesses a set of tools that you can use to design your floorplan, for example clicking the Electrical Tab accesses outlets, switches and ceiling fans while clicking the Landscaping Tab accesses tools for edging, fencing, ground fill, excavation and so on. Clicking a Content Bar accesses features like furniture objects, materials, colors and so on. Once placed, each feature like a door, window, plant, outlet and so on can be altered at any time. Click the feature and the Properties Toolbar is brought to the top (a default that can be changed) and displays the customizable properties of that feature. You can further customize which plan layer or combination of plan layers you want to be active. In addition, you can make each plan layer a different color so you can tell at a glance which layer a specific feature is on. You can even move features to a different plan when necessary.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

43

Chapter

7 Plan Tabs

Selecting a Plan Tab Using the easily-accessible plan tabs, you can quickly access each tool set at any time. To select a plan tab 1 2

On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool. Click the plan tab you want to use. The plan tab is selected and the tools available on that tab appear.

Customizing Visible Plans During the design of your floorplan, there may be times when you want certain layers, that by default are hidden, to be visible. For example, while working on your electrical plan, you may need to see where plumbing lines will be. Punch! AS4000 makes it easy to customize how you view your plan layers.

To customize the color of plan layer 1

On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.

2

Click the plan tab you want to customize. The plan tab is selected and the tools available on that tab appear.

3

Click the arrow to the right of the plan name, then click Floor Plan Color. The Color matrix will appear.

4

Click a color from the Basic Color list. Click OK.

To hide a plan layer from view 1

On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.

2

Click the plan tab you want to use. The plan tab is selected and the tools available on that tab appear.

3

Click the arrow to the right of the plan name, then click the plan layer you want hidden.

Note: Items on a hidden plan layer are not available during a Select All process and will not be altered with the other items and features in your drawing. To view a plan layer 1

On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.

2

Click the plan tab you want to use. The plan tab is selected and the tools available on that tab appear.

3

Click the arrow to the right of the plan name, then click the plan layer you want to appear.

44

Note: The Color|Solid preview box will display the chosen color. 5

(optional) Click a color from the Custom Colors list. Click OK.

6

(optional) Move the arrow to the right of the colorbar at the right of the Color dialog box. Click OK.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

Moving Features to Different Plans 7

(optional) On the Color Spectrum box, click a color or click-and-drag the color marker. Click OK.

8

(optional) Type Hue, Saturation and Luminosity variables. Click OK.

9

(optional) Type Red, Green and Blue variables. Click OK.

Moving Features to Different Plans With Punch! AS4000 you can move selections to different plan layers; while Move to Plan deletes these objects from their original position. Features moved to other plan tabs will automatically change color to the color assigned to the new location. To move features from one plan to another 1 2

On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool. Click the feature or object you want moved. To select more than one object, press the SHIFT key, while clicking objects.

3

On the Edit menu, click Move to Plan, then specify the plan where you want the feature to appear, in the pop-up menu that is displayed.

4

(optional) Right-click the selection and click Move to Plan on the pop-up menu that is displayed, then click which plan. The selection is moved to the plan you specified.

Note: Items on a hidden layer are not available during a Select All process and will not be moved along with the other items and features in your drawing.

Selecting the Properties Bar The Properties Bar is easily accessed by clicking a feature on your floorplan. For example, clicking a door accesses the customizable properties for doors and clicking a plant accesses the properties for plants. To select the properties bar 1 2

On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool. Click the feature you want to customize. The Properties Bar is displayed.

Note: If the Properties Bar does not automatically display, it may be set to “Manual Activate”. To reset the toggle, click the arrow after “Properties”, then click Auto Activate on the pop-up menu that is displayed.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

45

Chapter

46

7 Plan Tabs

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

Part 2

From the Ground Up Chapter 8: Topo Designer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Chapter 9: Room Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Chapter 10: Foundation Plan Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Chapter 11: Floor Plan Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

49 57 61 67

Chapter 8

Topo Designer Punch! Home Design Architectural Series 4000’s Topo Designer lets you incorporate information about your lot’s contours into your design then display that information in 3D. You can use complex curves or simple geometric shapes to represent your topography. You can even use existing topography drawings to trace the contours of your lot. All modifications made in Topo Designer can be applied back to Punch! AS4000. Your topo lines will be displayed on the Landscape tab and their visibility can be turned on and off.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

49

Chapter

8 Topo Designer

Adding Topography Objects Topo Designer allows you to create topography objects using a variety of methods. You can create sloped lots, draw custom contours from scratch with simple 2D tools, even import a topographical image of your lot and trace the exact contours. Launching Topo Designer ■

Launch Topo Designer by clicking the Topo Designer icon on the PowerTool Bar.

Tips for Users of Other Punch! Programs Topography that was drawn in a previous Punch! program was cumulative. Topo Designer draws all elevations as absolute. Example: If, in a previous version, you had drawn a circular area and set its elevation to four feet, then you drew an overlapping area and set its elevation to three feet, the result would have been a seven foot hill. Topo Designer will display this as a four foot hill with a one foot depression at the top. Tips for converting topography ■ ■ ■ ■

■

Topo lines should not be overlapped. The new topo will not be relative to zero automatically. If the only topo contour is set to 4', the whole lot will be 4'. Sloped Lot objects and Sloped Lot Section Objects need to be converted to topo contours. Select the Sloped Lot object, set the contour spacing, the descent angle, then press the “convert to contours” button. Select the Sloped Lot Section object, set the descent angle, then press the “convert to contours” button.

Setting the Lot Size With Topo Designer you can define a lot size that matches your physical lot. The default lot size is 200 x 200 feet. To set the lot size 1

On the Design menu, click Lot Properties or press CTRL+L. The Lot Properties dialog box is displayed.

2

Type the new lot size in the text boxes, then click OK. The lot is altered

3

(optional) If you change your lot size after you begin drawing your topography contours, click the Scale Contours box to ensure that your existing topo contours are scaled up or down by the ratio of the new lot size.

4

(optional) Click to select meters if you want to use metric measurements.

Setting the Working Elevation Before you draw topography objects, be sure to set your working elevation. All other topography objects are drawn in relation to this elevation. To set the working elevation 1

On the Design menu, click Set Working Elevation. The Set Working Elevation dialog box is displayed.

2

(optional) In the Working Elevation edit box, type a new value.

3

Click OK.

Using 2D Drawing Tools Contour lines represent a series of connected points that share the same elevation. Using Topo Designer’s 2D drawing tools, you can draw open or closed contours to represent the topography of your lot. Note: Elevations for topography objects are not cumulative, each is relative to the working elevation of your drawing.

50

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

Using 2D Drawing Tools Tip: When drawing multiple instances of a topography object, be sure to turn Auto Reset off. On the Options menu, click to uncheck Auto Reset Tools. When Auto Reset Tools is unchecked, you can draw concurrent topography objects without selecting the corresponding topography tool each time.

6

Click and move the mouse to the next point. Repeat until you have drawn the needed shape.

7

Double-click to end drawing mode.

To draw rectangle topography objects 1

Click the Rectangle Topography Tool. The pointer changes to reflect drawing mode.

To draw curved topography objects 1

Click the Curved Topography Tool. The pointer changes to reflect drawing mode.

2

The Topo Object Properties bar is displayed, showing the customizable options for this tool.

2

The Topo Object Properties bar is displayed, showing the customizable options for this tool.

3

(optional) In the Elevation edit box, type a new value.

3

(optional) In the Elevation edit box, type a new value.

4

4

(optional) Click the Method button to access a different drawing style, then select an option from the pop-up menu that is displayed.

(optional) Click the Method button to access a different drawing style, then select an option from the pop-up menu that is displayed.

Note: The two predefined drawing methods are closed curve and open curve. 5

Click on the design window to define the start point of the curve. A rubber-band curve is displayed and follows the pointer.

6

Click and move the mouse to the next point. Repeat until you have drawn the needed shape.

Note: The four predefined drawing methods are draw rectangle from corner, draw rectangle from center, draw square from corner and draw square from center. 5

Click on the design window to define the start point of the rectangle. A rubber-band rectangle is displayed and follows the pointer. Dimensions are displayed as you draw.

6

Hold the mouse button down, as you extend the rectangle to the size you want.

Note: Although the lines will initially appear to be angular, they will become curved when you end drawing mode. 7

12

Double-click to end drawing mode.

To draw straight-edge topography objects 1

Click the Straight-Edge Topography Tool. The pointer changes to reflect drawing mode.

2

The Topo Object Properties bar is displayed, showing the customizable options for this tool.

3

(optional) In the Elevation edit box, type a new

4

7

Release the mouse button.

value.

To draw circle and oval topography objects

(optional) Click the Method button to access a different drawing style, then select an option from the pop-up menu that is displayed.

1

Click the Circle/Oval Topography Tool. The pointer changes to reflect drawing mode.

2

The Topo Object Properties bar is displayed, showing the customizable options for this tool.

3

(optional) In the Elevation edit box, type a new value.

4

(optional) Click the Method button to access a different drawing style, then select an option from the pop-up menu that is displayed.

Note: The two predefined drawing methods are closed polygon and open polygon. 5

Drag

Click on the design window to define the start point of the polygon. A rubber-band polyline is displayed and follows the pointer.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

51

Chapter

8 Topo Designer

Note: The four predefined drawing methods are draw oval from corner, draw oval from center, draw circle from corner and draw circle from center. 5

Click on the design window to define the start point of the shape. A rubber-band shape is displayed and follows the pointer. Dimensions are displayed as you draw.

6

Hold the mouse button down, as you extend the shape to the size you want.

1 2

Drag

7

Release the mouse button.

To draw circular arc topography objects

12 Dr ag

7

Release the mouse button.

1

Click the Circular Arc Topography Tool. The pointer changes to reflect drawing mode.

2

The Topo Object Properties bar is displayed, showing the Elevation edit box.

3

(optional) In the Elevation edit box, type a new value.

4

Press the mouse button, on the design window, to define the centerpoint of the circular arc. A rubber-band line is

To draw arc topography objects 1

Click the Arc Topography Tool. The pointer changes to reflect drawing mode.

2

The Topo Object Properties bar is displayed, showing the customizable options for this tool.

3

(optional) In the Elevation edit box, type a new value.

4

(optional) Click the Method button to access a different drawing style, then select an option from the pop-up menu that is displayed.

displayed and follows the pointer. This line signifies the radius of your arc.

Drag

1

Note: The two predefined drawing methods are free-form arc and 90 degree arc. Each can be drawn either open or closed. 5

6

Click on the design window to define the start point of the arc. A rubber-band line is displayed and follows the pointer. Dimensions are displayed, as you draw.

2

5

Hold the mouse button down and extend the radius to the size you want. Dimensions appear in the position readout bar, as you draw.

6

Release the mouse button.

7

Move the mouse clockwise or counter-clockwise to create the shape you want.

Hold the mouse button down, as you extend the arc to the size you want.

52

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

Creating a Building Pad

Creating a Building Pad Use the Building Pad tools to draw level ground for your foundation. You can draw the building pad, using a special polygon tool or convert another topography object to a building pad. When you return to Punch! AS4000, you can make your building pad visible on the Foundations tab by turning the Landscape layer on.

2

To draw a building pad

8

Click to end drawing mode.

1

Click the Building Pad Area Tool. The pointer changes to reflect drawing mode.

2

(optional) In the Elevation edit box, type a new value.

3

Click on the design window to define the start point of the polygon. A rubber-band curve is displayed and follows the pointer.

To draw multigon topography objects 1

Click the Multigon Topography Tool. The pointer changes to reflect drawing mode.

4

Click and move the mouse to the next point. Repeat until you have drawn the needed shape.

2

The Topo Object Properties bar is displayed, showing the customizable options for this tool.

5

Double-click to end drawing mode.

3

(optional) In the Elevation edit box, type a new value.

To convert an existing topography object to a building pad

4

On the Properties bar, type the number of equal sides you want to draw.

1

5

Click on the design window to define the start point of the multigon. A rubber-band multigon is displayed and follows the pointer.

Click a contour shape in the design window. The Topo Object Properties bar is displayed, showing the customizable options for this contour.

2

Click the Convert to Build Pad button.

6

Hold the mouse button down, as you extend the multigon to the size you want.

Adding Slopes Many topographical maps show slope, rather than complex topography shapes. You can use Topo Designer to to create multiple slopes, with individual angles of descent. Once you’ve defined the slope, you can move selected topography lines to create plateaus or otherwise customize your topography design. To define slope sections

12

7

Dr ag

Release the mouse button.

Note: To change the multigon’s size, but constrain its orientation, press CTRL while drawing.

1

Click the Slope Lot Section Tool.

2

(optional) On the Topography Slope Properties bar, type a different Descent Angle in the dialog box.

3

Click on the design window; hold down the mouse button and drag.

4

Release the mouse button.

5

Repeat steps 3 and 4, until the topography is drawn to your lot’s specifications.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

53

Chapter

8 Topo Designer 4

Click OK. The trace image is repositioned.

To resize a trace image 1

Click the Trace Topography Properties Tool. The Image Trace Properties bar is displayed, showing the customizable options for this tool.

2

In the Scale Section, type a new value in the Horizontal or Vertical text box, then press ENTER. The trace image is resized.

OR 1

On the Design menu, click Resize Topography Trace Image. The Resize Topography Trace Image dialog box is displayed.

2

Type a new value in the Horizontal or Vertical text box, then click OK. The trace image is resized.

Tracing a Topography Image If you already have an image that shows the topology of your lot—for instance a scanned topology drawing or an aerial photograph—Topo Designer lets you trace topography objects directly over that image. Simply import the image, position it in the drawing, then use one of the topography tools to trace the image. To import a trace image 1

On the Design menu, click Load Topography Trace Image or click the Trace Topography Properties Tool. The Open dialog box is displayed.

2

In the File Name box, type the name of the image file you want to open or search for the file by switching folders or drives.

3

When you see the name of the file you want to open, click to select it.

4

Click OK.

To move a trace image 1

Click the Trace Topography Properties Tool. The Image Trace Properties bar is displayed, showing the customizable options for this tool.

2

Click the Offset Trace tool. A pop up dialog box is displayed.

3

Click the horizontal or vertical scroll arrows to reposition the trace image.

54

Note: You can click Original Size on the Resize Topography Trace Image dialog box, or on the Image Trace Properties bar, to return the trace image to its original size. To stretch a trace image to fit the design window 1

Click the Trace Topography Properties Tool. The Image Trace Properties bar is displayed, showing the customizable options for this tool.

2

In the Scale Section, click the Horizontal or Vertical stretch tool. The trace image is stretched accordingly to fit the page.

OR 1

On the Design menu, click Resize Topography Trace Image. The Resize Topography Trace Image dialog box is displayed.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

Controlling Lot Properties 2

Check the Stretch Horizontal or Stretch Vertical checkbox, then click OK. The trace image is stretched accordingly to fit the page.

Note: You can click Original Size on the Resize Topography Trace Image dialog box, or on the Image Trace Properties bar, to return the trace image to its original size. To control the visibility of a trace image 1

Click the Trace Topography Properties Tool. The Image Trace Properties bar is displayed, showing the customizable options for this tool.

2

Check the Visible checkbox at the bottom of the property bar. When the checkbox is not checked, the trace image is not visible.

OR ■

On the Design menu, click Topography Trace Image Visible. When Topography Trace Image Visible is not checked, the trace image is not visible.

3

(optional) Click to raise or lower the Patch Resolution. A lower value results in a more accurate 3D rendering of your topography, but may also impact performance.

4

(optional) Check the Render Patch Lines checkbox to include patch lines, when rendering in ClearView.

5

(optional) Check the Render Lot Base checkbox to render the subsurface as a solid.

6

(optional) In the Topography Generation section, click to raise or lower the Generation Quality. Higher generation quality reduces rendering speed.

7

(optional) Check the Automatically Generate When Needed checkbox to update the LiveView window every time you add or change a topography object.

8

Click OK.

Editing Topography Objects You can control the precision of your topography drawing by changing the elevation or adding and deleting specific topography points to the topography objects you have created.

Controlling Lot Properties

To increase or decrease elevation

The Lot Properties dialog box allows you to control not only the size of your lot, but how it is rendered in 3D.

1

Click a topography object in the design window.

2

(optional) On the Topo Objects Properties bar, type a different elevation in the dialog box.

To modify the lot properties 1

2

On the Design menu, click Lot Properties or click the Lot Properties Tool. The Lot Properties dialog box is displayed.

To add a topography point 1

Click the Add Topography Point Tool. The pointer changes to reflect drawing mode.

(optional) Type a value in Width or Depth text boxes, then select a unit of measurement from the drop-down box.

2

Click to enter a new point on one of the topography objects you have created.

To remove a topography point 1

Click the Remove Topography Point Tool. The pointer changes to reflect drawing mode.

2

Click to remove a point from one of the topography objects you have created.

Using Nudge, Snap Tools and the Grid Once you’ve placed a roof object, you can precisely move it into position using Nudge. Nudge utilizes the arrow keys to move selected objects, or features, a specified distance. For more information on using Nudge, see “Using Nudge”, which begins on page 153.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

55

Chapter

8 Topo Designer

Nudge works in tandem with the Snap Grid. To learn more about the Snap Grid, see “Using the Grid”, which begins on page 16. With snaps, you can define exactly where topo objects are placed. You can move through the Snaps Toolbar with the Tab key. Each time you press Tab, the next Snap Tool is activated, Shift-Tab reverses the process. For more information, see “Punch! Software Primer”, which begins on page 27. Grid settings have a direct impact on the ease of aligning topo objects, snapping objects to the grid and so on. When using the Snap to Grid feature, items that are dragged and dropped on the design window are automatically snapped, or placed, to align with the current grid. By default, Snap to Grid is turned on. For more information, see “Using the Grid”, which begins on page 16.

Viewing the Topography Drawing While designing your topography plan, you will probably want to view the 2D plan view only. Once completed, you can view your plan in a combination of 2D and 3D or in 3D only. To view the 2D topography plan only ■

On the Window menu, click Plan Full View. The 2D plan view is displayed.

To work on a selected floor ■

On the Design menu, click Work on Floor or click the Working Floor button at the left bottom of the design window, then click to check the floor on which you want to work.

To view all 2D floor plan views at once ■

On the Design menu, click Visible Floors or click the Working Floor button at the left bottom of the design window, then click to check View All Floors.

To view the working floor only ■

On the Design menu, click Visible Floors or click the Working Floor button at the left bottom of the design window, then click to check View Working Floor Only.

To view drawing layer combinations 1

On the Design menu, click Visible plans or click the Visible Plans button at the left bottom of the design window. A drop-down menu will appear.

2

Click the plan you want to view.

3

(optional) Repeat until the combination you want is reached.

56

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

Chapter 9

Room Wizard For many people, visualizing their dream home does not start with the outside shape of the building, but with a wish list of individual rooms. Now you can create complex floorplans from the inside out by laying out your home design room by room. Create entire rooms with one click of the mouse! Build an entire floor in just minutes with Punch! Room Wizard.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

57

Chapter

9 Room Wizard

Launching Room Wizard ■

4

Launch Room Wizard by clicking the Room Wizard icon on the PowerTool Bar.

■

Adding Rooms

■

You can create rooms with a few simple clicks of the mouse. Punch! Room Wizard allows you to use pre-designed room dimensions, customize these dimensions or create your room from scratch. When you want to see your design with the overlapping walls trimmed away, just click the “Walls” tab. The Rooms toolbar features twelve color-coded room types, as well as one general room type that can be customized to your wishes. Simply select your room type, change your room’s dimensions (if you wish), and place your room on the design window. When you’re finished placing rooms, simply exit Room Wizard to update your design! Tip: It is best to use Room Wizard only once per design. If you have added walls using the tools in your design program, there is the possibility that those walls will be removed by re- launching Room Wizard.

■ ■

5

To draw a rectangular room, starting from the upper left-hand corner, select the first rectangle option. To draw a rectangular room, starting from the center, select the second rectangle option. To draw a square room, starting from the upper lefthand corner, select the first square option. To draw a square room starting from the center, select the second square option.

Create your room by clicking and dragging in the design window to draw your walls.

To create a room from scratch 1

Click the Rectangle button. The Room Properties bar appears on the right-hand side of the Room Wizard.

2

Choose the Method to draw your room. ■

To create auto-sized rooms 1

Choose the Method to draw your room.

■

Click the corresponding button for the room type that you want to create. The Room Properties bar appears on the right-hand side of the Room Wizard.

■

To create a rectangular room, starting from the upper left-hand corner, select the first rectangle option. To create a rectangular room, starting from the center, select the second rectangle option. To create a square room, starting from the upper lefthand corner, select the first square option. To create a square room starting from the center, select the second square option.

2

Click the radio button next to auto-sizing on the Room Properties bar.

3

(optional) In the Width text box, enter the width of the room, in feet and inches, and press ENTER.

3

In the Room Name text box, type your room’s name and press ENTER.

4

(optional) In the Height text box, enter the length of the room, in feet and inches, and press ENTER

4

Create your room by clicking and dragging in the design window to draw your walls.

5

Click in the drawing area to place your room.

■

Tip: You can resize an auto-sized room by clicking on a wall and expanding it to the length you want. To draw rooms 1

Click the corresponding button for the room type that you want to create. The Room Properties bar appears on the right-hand side of the Room Wizard.

2

Click the radio button next to Manual Sizing on the Room Properties bar.

3

Click the Method button and select your design method.

58

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

Modifying Room Properties

Modifying Room Properties

2

Modifications to your room(s) are performed on the right-hand side of the Room Wizard in the Room Properties bar. You can modify properties such as room dimensions, name, even the viewing priority of overlapping rooms, at any time during the building process.

Select the room you want to modify. To select more than one room, press the SHIFT key while clicking rooms. The Room Properties bar appears on the right-hand side of the Room Wizard.

3

(optional) Click Increase Priority to make the selected room appear on top of any overlapping rooms.

4

(optional) Click Lower Priority to make the selected room appear beneath any overlapping rooms.

Note: The Room Properties bar will appear each time you create a room.

Note: When you want to see your design with the overlapping walls trimmed away, just click the “Walls” tab.

To change room dimensions On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.

To calculate the area of a room 1

On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.

2

Select the room you want to modify. The Room Properties bar appears on the righthand side of the Room Wizard.

2

Select the room you want to calculate. To select more than one room, press the SHIFT key while clicking rooms.

3

(optional) In the Width text box, enter the width of the room, in feet and inches, and press ENTER.

3

Click the Calc. Area button on the Room Properties bar.

4

(optional) In the Height text box, enter the length of the room, in feet and inches, and press ENTER

4

The calculation is displayed in the space under the Calc. Area button.

1

To calculate the area of an entire floor

To change room names

1

Click on the Walls tab. Your design is displayed in blueprint form.

Select the room you want to modify. The Room Properties bar appears on the right-hand side of the Room Wizard.

2

(optional) Click Calc. Floor Area to calculate the total area of the current floor.

Type the name of the room you want in the Room Name text box and press ENTER.

Controlling Drawing Settings

1

On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.

2

3

To align a room to the grid 1 2

On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool. Select the room you want to modify. The Room Properties bar appears on the right-hand side of the Room Wizard.

3

Click one of the Align to Grid buttons to reposition the room.

The drawing settings appear on the Property bar when you first open Room Wizard, and again when you click on any part of the Design Window where you have not placed a room. Note: Before you draw rooms, be sure to set your working elevation. All other rooms are drawn in relation to this elevation. To set the working elevation

Note: When you draw a room, by default, it is aligned to the grid. However, if you resize the room using the properties bar to something other then a 6" increment, you can use the Align to Grid tool to position the room more precisely.

■

To set ceiling heights 1

On the Property bar, type the height you want the first floor ceiling to be, in the First Floor text box, and press ENTER.

2

Type the height you want the second floor ceiling to be, in the Second Floor text box, and press ENTER.

To control the visibility of overlapping rooms 1

On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.

On the Property bar, type a new value in the Working Elevation edit box, then press ENTER.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

59

Chapter 3

9 Room Wizard

Type the height you want to third floor ceiling to be, in the Third Floor text box, and press ENTER.

To work on a selected floor ■

On the Design menu, click Work on Floor, or click the Working Floor button at the left bottom of the design window, then click to check the floor on which you want to work.

Editing Your Design

3

On the Edit menu, click Move. The Move dialog box is displayed.

4

Click either Cartesian or Polar, then type amount you want the room moved in the appropriate text boxes.

5

Click OK. The room is moved, based on the coordinates you specified.

Note: Coordinates are measured in inches or they can be measured in feet and inches, separated by a hyphen. To rotate a room by specifying an amount

Room Wizard provides you with editing tools to help you modify your interior floorplan. You must select the room(s) you want to edit before clicking on the Edit menu.

1

On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.

2

Click the room(s) you want rotated. To select more than one room, press the SHIFT key while clicking rooms.

To copy a room from one floor to another

3

On the Edit menu, click Rotate. The Rotate dialog box is displayed.

4

Click either Degrees or Radians, then type the angle you want to rotate the plan in the Angle text box.

5

Click OK. The room is rotated based on the angle measurement you specified.

1

On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.

2

Click the room(s) you want duplicated.To select more than one room, press the SHIFT key while clicking rooms.

3

On the Edit menu, click Copy to Floor, Upper Floor. Select Lower Floor if you want to copy the original down one level.

Note: The first floor is set as your default working floor.

To flip a room 1

On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.

2

Click the room(s) you want flipped. To select more than one room, press the SHIFT key while clicking rooms.

3

On the Edit menu, click Flip Vertical or Flip Horizontal. The room is flipped.

To move rooms from one floor to another 1 2

On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool. Click the room(s) you want moved. To select more than one room, press the SHIFT key while clicking rooms.

3

On the Edit menu, click Move to Floor, Upper Floor. Select Lower Floor if you want to move the original down one level.

To mirror a room 1

On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.

2

Click the room(s) you want mirrored. To select more than one room, press the SHIFT key while clicking rooms.

3

On the Edit menu, click Mirror Vertical or Mirror Horizontal. The room is mirrored.

To move a room using the Nudge feature 1

On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.

2

Click the room to select it.To select more than one room, press the SHIFT key while clicking rooms.

3

On the Edit menu, click Nudge, then click the direction (up, down, left, right).

Tip: You can also nudge your design by using the arrows on your keyboard. To move the a room by a specified amount 1

On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.

2

Click the room(s) you want moved. To select more than one room, press the SHIFT key while clicking rooms.

60

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

Chapter 10

Foundation Plan Tab Just like building in the real world, the best place to start is with a foundation for your design. The Foundation Plan Tab includes tools to help you add the foundation details to your plan. You will learn to specify wall and footing widths, add stiffener beams, draw piers and define post tension. Punch! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 makes creating basements or split-level homes easy. With just one or two mouse-clicks your basement will be moved into proper elevation position, with the use of the versatile Elevation Slider.

PowerTools to enhance your design ■ ■

“Topo Designer” on page 49 “Material Workshop” on page 183

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

61

Chapter

10 Foundation Plan Tab

Defining the Foundation Perimeter Punch! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 provides the tools to create a good foundation in your home plan. You have options for wall thickness, footing width, stiffener beams and foundation piers. Note: As you draw your foundation you are also drawing your first floor walls. To define the foundation perimeter 1

On the Foundation Plan tab, click the Foundation Perimeter Tool.

2

Click on the design window to define the start point of the foundation. A rubber-band line is displayed and follows the pointer. This line signifies the first edge of the foundation. Notice that dimensions are displayed, as you draw.

12

42

2

32

Setting the Foundation Perimeter Options Punch! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 draws your first floor walls, as you define the foundation perimeter. Once you have defined the foundation perimeter of your design, you have the option to customize many features. From wall thickness, floor height and stud spacing to automatic flooring options and footing width, you have alternatives for almost every feature. You can customize these settings at any time. For information on setting the wall style, see “Defining Gable Wall Segments”, which begins on page 71. To define the foundation width 1

On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.

2

Click the wall of the foundation to select it; the Wall Properties bar is displayed.

3

Click the radio button next to the width of footings you want to use.

4

(optional) Type in a custom measurement, if needed.

To define stud spacing 1

On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.

Note: Drawing is constrained to 15 degree angles; to release this constraint hold down the SHIFT key, while drawing.

2

Click the wall of the foundation to select it; the Wall Properties bar is displayed.

3

Click and move the pointer to the next cornerpoint. Repeat until you have completely drawn the foundation.

3

Type the stud spacing required in the dialog box.

4

Right-click to end drawing mode.

To hide window and door dimensions ■

On the Options menu, click to uncheck Window/Door Callouts.

OR ■

At the bottom of the window, click the Dimension button, then click to uncheck Window/Door callouts on the pop-up menu that is displayed.

OR ■

On the Walls Properties bar, click to uncheck the radio button next to Callouts.

Note: The dashed lines represent footing width and the faint blue diagonal lines represent the foundation area.

62

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

Editing Foundation Walls To dimension from wall center

To reshape the foundation

By default, measurements are from wall surface to wall surface; to measure walls “on center” follow these steps.

1 2

On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool. Click the wall of the foundation you want to reshape.

3

Click a cornerpoint of the foundation; hold down the mouse button and drag.

4

Click the next cornerpoint; hold down the mouse button and drag.

5

(optional) Click a side of the foundation to move two cornerpoints at once.

1

On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.

2

Click the wall of the foundation to select it; the Wall Properties bar is displayed.

3

Click the radio button next to Centers.

To convert foundation walls to interior walls

To change dimension location 1

On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.

2

Click the wall of the foundation to select it; the Wall Properties bar is displayed.

3

Click the Flip Dims button.

1

On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.

2

Right-click a foundation wall on your design window. Click Convert Wall to Interior on the pop-up menu. All connected walls become interior walls, the footings disappear and the walls are moved from the Foundation Plan Tab to the Floor Plan Tab.

Adding Stiffener Beams Stiffener beams are used to support the foundation; typically they run from one end of the foundation to the other. You can control the length, width and dimension of each beam. To place stiffener beams

To control automatic flooring 1

On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.

2

Click a wall of the foundation to select it; the Wall Properties bar is displayed.

3

Check the Automatic Floor checkbox. Flooring is automatically inserted between joined exterior walls.

4

Uncheck the Automatic Flooring checkbox. The flooring disappears.

5

(optional) Type a Depth in the dialog box to customize the flooring depth.

1

On the Foundation Plan tab, click the Stiffener Beam Tool.

2

On the Beam Properties bar, type the width and depth of stiffener beam you want.

3

Press the mouse button on the design window to define the start point of the stiffener beam. A rubber-band line is displayed and follows the pointer.

12

Editing Foundation Walls At any point during design of your new home, foundation walls can be moved, reshaped, removed and so on.

4

2

Hold the mouse button down, as you extend the stiffener beam to the opposite side of the foundation.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

63

Chapter 5

10 Foundation Plan Tab

Release the mouse button to end drawing mode.

Note: Drawing is constrained to 15 degree angles. To release this constraint hold down the SHIFT key, while drawing. To change the length of a stiffener beam 1

On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.

2

Click the stiffener beam you want to alter. Selection handles appear.

3

Click an endpoint of the stiffener beam; hold down the mouse button and drag. Release the mouse button to stop lengthening the beam.

foundation to the other and are bolted into the frame and set in concrete. To place a post tension strand 1

On the Foundation Plan tab, click the Posttension Tool.

2

Press the mouse button on the design window to define the start point of the post tension strand. A rubber-band line is displayed and follows the pointer.

To change the dimensions of a stiffener beam

12

1

On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.

3

2

On the Beam Properties bar, type the width and depth of stiffener beam you want.

Hold the mouse button down, as you extend the post tension strand to the opposite side of the foundation.

4

Release the mouse button to end drawing mode.

Defining Foundation Piers

Drawing the Foundation Slope

Foundation piers support the foundation. They are concrete pads that add strength under a support column. Even after you place piers, you can customize them.

Foundation Slope is typically specified in garages or basement areas where there is a drain. It specifies which direction the floor area slopes.

To place foundation piers

To draw the foundation slope

1

On the Foundation Plan tab, click the Piering Tool.

1

On the Foundation Plan tab, click the Foundation Slope Tool.

2

On the Pier Properties bar, type the diameter of piers you want to use.

2

Click once in your plan drawing, then drag in the direction you want the floor to slope.

3

Click on the design window. A foundation pier will be placed at the location of each click.

3

Release the mouse button. The slope is defined.

To resize a foundation pier 1

On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.

2

On the Pier Properties bar, type the new diameter of piers you want to use.

Adding Post Tension Strands Post tension strands are used to prevent cracking in a concrete slab foundation. They extend from one edge of the 64

To change the slope direction 1 2

On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool. Click an end of the foundation slope indicator.

3

Move the mouse in the direction you want the slope changed.

4

Release the mouse button.

Creating a Basement Basements are easy to create with the Elevation Slider. To create a basement 1

On the Foundation Plan tab, click the Foundation Perimeter Tool.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

2

Creating a Split-Level Foundation 2

Draw a foundation. For specific information on adding foundations, see “Defining the Foundation Perimeter” on page 62.

foundations. Post tension strands are added to prevent cracking.

3

Press and hold the SHIFT key down, while clicking on each foundation wall, to select all the foundation walls.

To create a slab foundation

4

On the left side of the screen, drag the Elevation Slider down to the level of the basement.

Creating a Split-Level Foundation

1

On the Foundation Plan tab, click the Foundation Perimeter Tool.

2

Draw a foundation. For specific information on adding foundations, see “Defining the Foundation Perimeter” on page 62.

3

Click the wall of the foundation to select it; the Wall Properties bar is displayed.

4

Type 4 (or the needed depth) in the flooring depth dialog box, then click OK.

5

Draw post tension strands. For specific information on adding post tension strands, see “Adding Post Tension Strands” on page 64.

Designing a split-level home is quite simple. The foundation will need to be drawn in two parts and, with the aid of the Elevation Slider, moved into place. To create a split level 1

On the Foundation Plan tab, click the Foundation Perimeter Tool.

2

Draw the foundation of the part of your home plan that will be different from the rest of the home. If you need help drawing a foundation, please refer to “Defining the Foundation Perimeter” on page 62.

3

Press and hold the SHIFT key down, while clicking on each foundation wall, to select all the foundation walls.

4

On the left side of the screen, drag the Elevation Slider down to the level needed for the split.

5

Draw the Foundation of the rest of the home and proceed with designing your home plan.

Creating a Slab Foundation A slab foundation is the preferred foundation in many areas. Punch! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 makes it easy to draw one. Four inches is a standard thickness for slab

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

65

Chapter

66

10 Foundation Plan Tab

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

Chapter 11

Floor Plan Tab By beginning with the foundation phase of your design, the exterior walls of the first floor are automatically generated. The next step is drawing exterior walls of the upper floors and drawing interior walls on all stories. Drawing walls is simple, just click and drag. Punch! AS4000 automatically displays wall dimensions and connects corners for you. To add interactive dimensions between walls, where they are not automatically added, see “Accessing the Snaps toolbar”, which begins on page 29. Exterior walls, even those automatically generated with the foundation tools and interior walls can be resized, moved or deleted after they are placed. Punch! AS4000 makes creating the final home plan of your dreams, exactly as you want it, simple. You can define your wall thickness before placing and create custom-sized walls in a snap. Further customize your design by adding windows, doors, stairs, furniture and so on.

PowerTools to enhance your design ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

“Material Workshop” on page 183 “Door Designer” on page 197 “Window Designer” on page 203 “Cabinet Wizard” on page 209 “Fireplace Wizard” on page 219

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

67

Chapter

11 Floor Plan Tab

Drawing Exterior Walls

4

Type the length needed, then click OK.

By default, the foundation design process creates eight-foot exterior walls on the first floor. However, if you want to skip the foundation section, you can begin designing by drawing exterior walls, using the two Exterior Wall tools. With these tools you can either draw “free form” or to specific dimensions, whichever suits your needs best. Walls are automatically joined when you draw and are placed at right angles. It is extremely important to use the Exterior Wall tools to draw a complete exterior wall perimeter so Punch! AS4000 can correctly calculate the floor’s square footage.

5

Repeat steps, drawing horizontal and vertical walls. Notice that Punch! AS4000 automatically connects walls to form corners.

To draw exterior walls

Changing Exterior Wall Segment Length

1

On the Floor Plan tab, click the Exterior Wall Tool.

2

Click on the design window; hold down the mouse button and drag. Notice that the wall follows the pointer and automatically displays the wall length.

Once you have drawn exterior walls for your design, you can easily change the length of individual wall segments. You can not only change the length of a wall, but move an adjoining wall with the segment.

3

Release the mouse button when the correct wall length is reached.

4

Repeat steps, drawing horizontal and vertical walls. Notice that Punch! AS4000 automatically connects walls to form corners.

Note: Dimensions are entered in inches or feet and inches, separated by a hyphen. For example, 10-0 indicates ten feet, while 10 is interpreted as ten inches. Note: To draw the last wall perpendicular to the first wall, release the mouse button, while the cursor is atop the start point of the first wall.

To change the wall segment length from the center 1

On the Standard toolbar, click the Resize Segment (Custom Length) Tool.

2

Click an exterior wall. The Change Segment Length dialog box is displayed.

3

Type the new length in inches or feet and inches, separated by a hyphen. For example, 10-0 indicates ten feet, while 10 is interpreted as ten inches.

4

Click Change. The wall segment is resized.

Note: To draw the last wall perpendicular to the first wall, release the mouse button while the cursor is atop the start point of the first wall. Note: Drawing is constrained to 5 degree angles; to release this constraint hold down the SHIFT key, while drawing. Note: If you don’t see automatic dimensioning while you draw, it might be turned off. To enable automatic dimensioning, on the Options menu, click Automatic Dimensioning. To add interactive dimensions between walls, where they are not automatically generated, see “Accessing the Snaps toolbar”, which begins on page 29. To draw exterior walls to exact lengths 1

On the Floor Plan tab, click the Exterior Wall (Custom Length) Tool.

2

Click on the design window; hold down the mouse button and drag. Notice that the wall follows the pointer and automatically displays the wall length.

3

Release the mouse button at any point. The Custom Wall Length menu is displayed.

68

To resize a wall segment length from the end 1

On the Standard toolbar, click the Resize Segment (Custom Length) Tool.

2

Click the exterior wall to be resized. The Change Segment Length dialog box is displayed.

3

Type the new length in inches or feet and inches, separated by a hyphen. For example, 10-0 indicates ten feet, while 10 is interpreted as ten inches.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

Drawing Interior Walls 4

Click the radio button for the red dot to change the location of the left end of the wall segment, then click Change.

5

(optional) Click the radio button for the green dot to change the location of the right end of the wall segment, then click Change.

Note: Drawing is constrained to 5 degree angles; to release this constraint hold down the SHIFT key, while drawing. Note: If you don’t see automatic dimensioning, while you draw, it might be turned off. To enable automatic dimensioning, on the Options menu, click Automatic Dimensioning. To add interactive dimensions between walls, where they are not automatically generated, see “Accessing the Snaps toolbar”, which begins on page 29. To draw interior walls to exact lengths 1

On the Floor Plan tab, click the Interior Wall (Custom Length) Tool.

2

Click on the design window; hold down the mouse button and drag. Notice that the wall follows the pointer and automatically displays the wall length.

3

Release the mouse button at any point. The Custom Wall Length menu is displayed.

To draw interior walls on the fly

4

Type the exact length needed, then click OK.

1

On the Floor Plan tab, click the Interior Wall Tool.

5

2

Click on the design window; hold down the mouse button and drag. Notice that the wall follows the pointer and automatically displays the wall length.

Repeat steps above, drawing horizontal and vertical walls. Notice that Punch! AS4000 automatically connects walls to form corners.

Drawing Interior Walls Once you’ve drawn your exterior house shell, you can begin drawing the interior walls of your home. There are two interior wall tools; one draws walls on the fly, while using the other makes it easy to define an absolute length. For more information on drawing with precision using Snaps, see the chapter titled “Punch! Software Primer”, which begins on page 27.

3

Release the mouse button when the wall length you want is reached.

12 4

Note: Dimensions are entered in inches or feet and inches, separated by a hyphen. For example, 10-0 indicates ten feet while 10 is interpreted as ten inches. Note: To draw the last wall perpendicular to the first wall, release the mouse button, while the cursor is atop the start point of the first wall.

2

Repeat steps above, drawing horizontal and vertical walls. Notice that Punch! AS4000 automatically connects walls to form corners.

Tip: Punch! AS4000’s default is to track walls along adjoining walls; to avoid this constraint, begin drawing from the center of the room and drag toward the wall.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

69

Chapter

11 Floor Plan Tab

Setting Wall Options

1

On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.

Once you have drawn interior or exterior walls for your design, you have the option to customize many features. From wall thickness, floor height and stud spacing to automatic flooring options, you have alternatives for almost every feature.

2

Click a wall to select it; the Wall Properties bar is displayed.

3

Click the radio button next to Surfaces.

1

On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.

To define wall width

2

Click a wall to select it; the Wall Properties bar is displayed.

3

Click the Flip Dims button.

1

On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.

2

Click a wall to select it; the Wall Properties bar is displayed.

3

Click the radio button next to the width of walls you want to use.

4

(optional) Type in a custom measurement, if needed.

To change dimension location

Note: For changes to take effect, press ENTER after each change. To control automatic flooring To define stud spacing 1

On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.

2

Click a wall to select it; the Wall Properties bar is displayed.

3

Type the stud spacing required in the dialog box.

To hide all window and door dimensions ■

On the Options menu, click to uncheck Window/Door Callouts.

OR ■

At the bottom of the window, click the Dimension button, then click to uncheck Window/Door callouts on the pop-up menu that is displayed.

To turn off dimension or callouts for a selected wall ■

■

On the Walls Properties bar, click to uncheck the radio button next to Auto-Dim.

On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.

2

Click a wall to select it; the Wall Properties bar is displayed.

3

Check the Automatic Floor checkbox. Flooring is automatically inserted between joined exterior walls.

4

Uncheck the Automatic Flooring checkbox. The flooring disappears.

5

(optional) Type a Depth in the dialog box to customize the flooring depth.

Setting Ceiling/Floor Options Once you have drawn exterior walls for your design, you can customize several options. You can create soffit for the outside, define the depth of the floor, and define the ceiling options. You may also manually draw flooring, whenever it is needed. For more information, see “Adding Flooring”, which begins on page 81.

OR

To define ceiling options

On the Walls Properties bar, click to uncheck the radio button next to Callouts.

1

On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.

2

Click a wall to select it; the Wall Properties bar is displayed.

3

Click the Ceiling/Floor button on the Properties Bar. The Ceiling/Floor Builder dialog box is displayed

To dimension from wall surface By default, measurements are from wall center to wall center; to measure walls from surface to surface, follow these steps.

70

1

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

Editing Walls To convert exterior walls to interior walls

4

Click the Ceiling Options box.

5

Enter the dimensions in the text boxes to define the needed ceiling options.

6

Click OK.

On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.

2

Right-click an exterior wall on your design window. Click Convert Wall to Interior on the pop-up menu. All connected walls becomes interior walls.

To convert interior walls to exterior walls

To define floor options 1

On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.

2

Click a wall to select it; the Wall Properties bar is displayed.

3

Click the Ceiling/Floor button on the Properties Bar. The Ceiling/Floor Builder dialog box is displayed

4

Click the Floor Options box.

5

Enter the dimensions in the text boxes to define the needed floor options.

6

Click OK.

1

On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.

2

Right-click an interior wall on your design window. Click Convert Wall to Exterior on the pop-up menu. All connected walls becomes exterior walls.

Defining Gable Wall Segments When a wall is drawn that will be roofed by a gable roof section, you can easily match the wall to the pitch of the roof. It does not matter whether you draw the roof first or alter the wall segment first. To define a gable wall segment

To define soffit options 1

On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.

2

Click a wall to select it; the Wall Properties bar is displayed.

3

Click the Ceiling/Floor button on the Properties Bar. The Ceiling/Floor Builder dialog box is displayed

4

Click the Soffit Options box.

5

Enter the dimensions in the text boxes to define the needed soffit options.

6

(optional) Click the radio button to join the soffit pieces, if you prefer to work with the soffit as one unit or click the radio button for separate soffits to work with each side as a separate piece.

7

1

1

Click the wall section that will be fitted to the gable roof; the Wall Properties bar is displayed.

2

Click the Wall Style button, then click the Gable Style on the pop-up menu.

3

Type the Base Height. The Base Height, denoted by the blue bar, will typically be your ceiling height.

4

Type Pitch - A and B to match the pitch of the roof section they will meet.

5

Type Height - C and Height - D (if necessary, to match your roofline). Click OK.

Click OK.

Editing Walls At any point during design of your new home, both exterior and interior walls can be moved, reshaped, removed and so on.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

71

Chapter

11 Floor Plan Tab 2

Click the Wall Style button, then click the Gable Style on the pop-up menu.

3

Type the Base Height. The Base Height, denoted by the blue bar, will typically be your ceiling height.

4

Type Pitch A and B if you are matching a roofline.

5

Type Height - C and Height - D (if necessary, to match your roofline). Click OK.

To elevate walls

Drawing Irregular Walls With Punch! AS4000, you can draw diagonal walls, create gable walls and elevate wall segments. You can create a unique floor plan with just a few clicks. To draw diagonal walls

1 2

On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool. Click a wall to select it.

3

Use the Elevation Slider at the left of the window to raise or lower the wall into position.

To rotate walls 1

On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.

2

Click a wall to select it.

3

Click Rotate on the Edit menu. The Rotate dialog box is displayed.

4

Click either Degrees or Radians, then type the angle you want to rotate the wall in the Angle text box. Click OK. The wall segment or wall group you selected is rotated, based on the angle measurement you specified.

1

On the Floor Plan tab, click the Interior Wall Tool.

2

On the Preview Bar, click the wall width you want.

3

Press and hold the SHIFT key, then click on the design window and drag. Notice that the wall follows the pointer and automatically displays the wall length.

5

4

Release the mouse button when the diagonal wall length you want is reached.

Changing Interior Wall Segment Length

1

Once you have drawn exterior walls for your design, you can easily change the length of individual wall segments. You can not only change the length of a wall, but move an adjoining wall with the segment, assuring perpendicular walls. To lengthen or shorten wall segments

Tip: Punch! AS4000’s default is to track walls along adjoining walls; to avoid this constraint, begin drawing from the center of the room and drag toward the wall. To define slanted walls 1

72

Click the wall section that will be fitted to the gable roof; the Wall Properties bar is displayed.

1

On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.

2

Click an endpoint on the wall you want to resize, to select it.

3

Hold down the mouse button and drag the endpoint. Notice as you move the pointer, the wall dimensions are displayed.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

Defining Wall Height

Dr ag

4

5

(optional) Click the radio button for the green dot to change the location of the right end of the wall segment, then click Change.

6

(optional) Uncheck the Linked box if you want the wall to be resized, but do not want the adjoining wall to remain perpendicular to it.

Continue dragging, until the wall length you want is reached, then release the mouse button.

To define the wall segment length from the center 1

On Standard toolbar, click the Resize Segment (Custom Length) Tool.

2

Click an interior wall. The Change Segment Length dialog box is displayed.

Note: Dimensions are entered in inches or feet and inches, separated by a hyphen. For example, 10-0 indicates ten feet while 10 is interpreted as ten inches.

Defining Wall Height Punch! AS4000 makes setting an entire floor’s wall height easy. In addition, you can define custom wall heights for individual wall segments. To change the height of a wall

3

Type the length needed, then click Change. The wall segment is resized.

4

(optional) Uncheck the Linked box if you want the wall to be resized, but do not want the adjoining wall to remain perpendicular to it.

1 2

On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool. Click a wall segment in your drawing to select it. The Wall Properties bar is displayed.

3

Type a new height in the Wall Style section of the Wall Properties bar.

4

Press Enter.

To change the height of an entire floor

Note: Dimensions are entered in inches or feet and inches, separated by a hyphen. For example, 10-0 indicates ten feet, while 10 is interpreted as ten inches.

1

On the Design menu, click Default Ceiling Heights, First Floor. The First Floor dialog box is displayed.

2

Type a new height measurement in the Height text box, then press Enter.

To define a wall segment length from the end

Note: Changing the ceiling height this way will cause subsequently-drawn walls to be at the new height. If walls were drawn before setting the new wall height, they will need to be individually changed.

1

On the Standard toolbar, click the Resize Segment (Custom Length) Tool.

3

2

Click the interior wall to be resized. The Change Segment Length dialog box is displayed.

(optional) On the Edit Menu click Select All or type Ctrl+A to select all walls on the active floor of your drawing, then type a new height in the Wall Style section of the Wall Properties bar.

Drawing a Curved Wall With Punch! AS4000, drawing bay windows and curved walls is easy. You could even draw a round house! After drawing the walls, you can add windows, doors and so on to suit your need.

3

Type the length needed.

4

Click the radio button for the red dot to change the location of the left end of the wall segment, then click Change.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

73

Chapter

11 Floor Plan Tab

To draw a curved wall 1

On the Floor Plan tab, click the Curved Wall Tool. The Curved Wall Tool Properties dialog box is displayed.

Note: Press SHIFT to reverse the direction the arc is drawing.

Breaking a Wall With Punch! AS4000 it’s easy to paint each room in your design a different color. Once you have drawn exterior and interior walls to your specifications, you can simulate different rooms with the Wall Break Tool, making it possible to apply different colors or materials in each room. For more information, see “Applying Paint and Color”, which begins on page 179. To break a wall

2

Type the Wall Segment length in the text box, then click OK.

3

On the Design window, press the mouse button, to define one end of the circular wall segment, and drag. A rubberband line appears and follows the pointer. This line signifies the diameter of your curved wall.

4

Release the mouse button when the wall is the correct length.

5

Move the mouse clockwise or counter-clockwise until the wall is the shape you want.

6

Click to end.

Note: Press SHIFT to reverse the direction the arc is drawing. To draw a bay window 1

On the Floor Plan tab, click the Curved Wall Tool. The Curved Wall Tool Properties dialog box is displayed.

2

Type 4-0 (four feet, zero inches) as the Wall Segment length in the dialog box, then click OK.

3

On the Design window, press the mouse button to define one end of the circular wall segment and drag. A rubberband line appears and follows the pointer. This line signifies the diameter of your curved wall.

4

Release the mouse button when the wall is the correct length.

5

Move the mouse clockwise or counter-clockwise until the wall is the shape you want.

6

Click to end.

7

Drag and drop windows onto the facets of the bay window. For more information, see “Adding Windows”, which begins on page 76.

74

1

On the Floor Plan tab, click the Wall Break Tool.

2

On the Design window, click a wall where you want to position a break.

3

(optional) Hold the mouse button down and move it back and forth to position the break using associative dimensioning.

Adding Doors and Openings All doors and cased openings are automatically dimensioned to neighboring walls, doors and windows. There are three types of openings and nine door styles available in Punch! AS4000 and they are all placed in the same manner. In addition, you can design doors to your exact specifications using Punch! Door Designer. For more information, see “Door Designer”, which begins on page 197. To add a door 1

On the Floor Plan tab, click the Door Tool. The Door Properties Bar is displayed.

2

On the Door Properties Bar, click the Door Style button, then click the door style you want from the pop-up window that is displayed.

3

On the Design window, click a wall where you want to place a door.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

Changing Door Settings 4

(optional) Click to set the door swing, if necessary.

5

Type the Width, Height, Elevation and Trim Width to customize them.

6

Type the Door Swing Angle, if necessary.

Note: Any changes made on the Door Properties bar become the default and will be used the next time a door is placed.

Changing Door Settings

To change door type On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.

2

Click the door you want to modify.

3

On the Door Properties Bar, click Door Style button, then click the door style you want from the pop-up window that is displayed.

1

On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.

2

Click the door you want to modify.

3

On the Door Properties Bar, click the Flip Door button. The door flips direction.

To change door swing 1

On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.

2

Click the door you want to modify.

3

On the Door Properties Bar, type the new door swing angle. The door swing updates.

To change the elevation of a door

There is no need to redraw a door just because you need a different size or style. You can control many of its features through the Custom Door Properties Bar.

1

To flip the direction of a door

1

On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.

2

Click a door to select it.

3

On the Door Properties Bar, type a new elevation in the Elevate text box.

4

(Optional) Use the Elevation Slider at the left of the screen to raise or lower the selected door into position.

Adding Double Doors Double doors add an elegant look to any room. To simulate French Doors, use glass doors instead of the wooden ones used in this example.

To resize a door by specifying dimensions

To draw double doors

1

On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.

1

2

Click the door you want to modify.

On the Floor Plan tab, click the Door Tool. The Door Properties Bar is displayed.

3

On the Door Properties Bar, type the Width, Height, Elevation and Trim Width to customize them.

2

On the Door Properties Bar, click the Door Style button, then click the Custom Door style at the bottom of the list. The Door Preview Bar is displayed.

3

Click the arrow next to “Doors” at the top of the Preview Bar to display the door library list, then click Double Doors. Available double doors are displayed in the Preview Bar.

To resize a door by dragging 1

On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.

2

Click a door to select it.

3

Holding down the mouse button on an endpoint of the door, drag the endpoint to resize the door, then release the mouse button.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

75

Chapter 4

11 Floor Plan Tab

On the Double Door Preview Bar, click the left door.

Note: Right and left doors are placed individually. 5

On the Design window, click a wall where you want to place a door.

6

Click to set the door swing.

7

Repeat steps 4-6 for the right door. Overlap them slightly to minimize the center post.

2

On the Windows Properties Bar, click the Window Style button, then click the window style you want from the pop-up window that is displayed.

3

On the Design window, click a wall where you want to place a window.

4

Type the Width, Height, Elevation and Trim Width to customize them.

5

(optional) For double-hung or casement/picture windows, specify the grill spacing.

Note: Any changes made on the Windows Properties bar, become the default and will be used the next time a window is placed.

Changing Window Settings

Adding Windows

Once windows have been placed, it is easy to resize them. You can do this by specifying exact dimensions or by dragging one end, until you have the required size. You have control over the look of your windows by changing the grill settings. You can also flip windows vertically or horizontally to create beautiful groupings to suit any room design.

Like doors and cased openings, there are an extensive variety of windows available in Punch! AS4000. They are automatically dimensioned to neighboring walls, doors and windows. There are 19 window styles available in Punch! AS4000 and they are all placed in the same manner. In addition, you can design windows to your exact specifications using Punch! Window Designer. For more information, see “Window Designer”, which begins on page 203.

To resize a window by specifying dimensions

For information on precision placement using Snaps, see the chapter titled “Punch! Software Primer”, which begins on page 27.

1

On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.

2

Click a window to select it.

3

Holding down the mouse button on an endpoint of the window, drag the endpoint until the window is the size you want, then release the mouse button.

To add a window 1

76

On the Floor Plan tab, click the Window Tool. The Windows Properties Bar is displayed.

1 2

On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool. Click a window to select it.

3

On the Windows Properties Bar, type the Width, Height, Elevation and Trim Width to customize them.

To resize a window by dragging

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

Elevating a Window To flip a window 1 2

On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool. Click a window to select it.

3

On the Windows Properties Bar, click one of the flip buttons.

Note: Flip is not available if a Double Hung or Casement/Picture window is selected. To change the grill settings of a window

Stacking Windows

1

On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.

2

Click a window to select it.

3

On the Windows Properties Bar, click either Double Hung or Casement/Picture. The Grill settings control is displayed.

Punch! AS4000 makes it simple to create window groups or transoms. The Elevation Slider makes it almost a one-click process. For ease in selecting features which are placed close together, use the Selection Filter. For more information, see “Selection Filter”, which begins on page 10.

Note: The Grill settings dialog will appear only when a Double Hung or Casement/Picture window is selected.

To stack windows 1

Place windows using the technique outlined in “Adding Windows” on page 76.

2

On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.

3

Click the window to select it.

Elevating a Window

4

Punch! AS4000 makes it simple to create window groups or transoms. The Elevation Slider makes it almost a one-click process.

Using the Elevation Slider at the left of the screen, raise or lower the window into position.

5

Continue placing and elevating windows, until the look you want is achieved.

4

Using the scroll bars in the Grill section of the dialog box, adjust the grill appearance. The new grill settings are applied.

To elevate a window 1

Place windows, using the technique outlined in “Adding Windows” on page 76.

2

On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.

3

Click the window to select it.

4

On the Window Properties Bar, type a new elevation in the Elevate text box.

5

(Optional) Use the Elevation Slider at the left of the screen to raise or lower the selected window into position.

6

Continue selecting and elevating windows until the look you want is achieved.

Note: Stacked windows will appear on top of one another in the 2D design window. To select stacked windows, you might need to move the most recently-placed windows along the wall to gain access to those windows placed before.

Adding Accessories You can easily add drapes, curtains, blinds and so on to any window. Accessories are designed to “track the walls”, meaning they can only be placed on wall segments and will move with those walls. To add accessories 1

On the Floor Plan tab, click the Accessory Tool. The Accessory Properties Bar is displayed.

2

(optional) Click the arrow next to “Accessory” at the top of the Preview Bar to display the accessory library list, then click Blinds. Available blinds are displayed in the Preview Bar.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

77

Chapter

11 Floor Plan Tab

3

On the Preview Bar, click the Accessory you want to place.

To copy all exterior walls from the first floor to the second

4

On the Design window, click a wall where you want to place the accessory.

1

On the Foundation tab, uncheck any other plan layers you may have selected to view simultaneously.

2

Press SHIFT, while clicking each exterior wall, until they are all selected.

3

On the Edit menu, click Copy to Floor, then Upper Floor. All exterior walls are copied to the second floor.

Note: Hold the mouse button down to move the accessory along the wall. 5

Click to select the accessory. The Properties Bar is displayed.

6

Type the Width, Height, Wall Offset and Elevation to customize them.

To draw walls on the second floor

7

(optional) To create a sheer effect, set the translucency.

8

(optional) To automatically size the accessory, click the Auto/Size button, then click the window. The accessory will automatically fit to the dimensions of that window.

Adding a Second Floor With Punch! AS4000 you can create a home design with up to three stories. Once you’ve completed your foundation and other first floor features, you can begin adding upper stories to your home design. For more information on foundation design, refer to the chapter titled “Foundation Plan Tab”, which begins on page 61.

78

1

On the Design menu, click Work on Floor, Second Floor or click on the Active Floor Icon at the bottom left-hand portion of the screen, then click Work on Second Floor on the pop-up menu that is displayed.

2

On the Floor Plan tab, click the Exterior Wall Tool. Using the techniques outlined in “Drawing Exterior Walls” on page 68 and “Drawing Interior Walls” on page 69, draw Exterior and Interior Walls.

Note: The non-working floor is shown in a pale color as reference, but if you prefer, you can choose to view only the floor you are working on. Click the Active Floor Icon and click View Working Floor Only. Note: To make it easy to identify which floor is active, you can assign separate colors to the active and background floors. For more information on customizing floor colors see the chapter titled “Editing Your Drawing”, which begins on page 151. To copy everything from one floor to another 1

On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.

2

On the Design menu, click Work on Floor, Second Floor (or the floor you want to copy) or click on the Active Floor Icon, then click Work on Second Floor on the pop-up menu that is displayed.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

Creating a Split Level 3

On the Edit menu, click Select All, or press CTRL+A.

4

On the Edit menu, click Copy to Floor, Upper Floor. Select Lower Floor if you want to copy the original down one level.

Placing a Staircase

To move everything from one floor to another 1

On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.

2

On the Design menu, click Work on Floor, Second Floor (or the floor you want to move) or click on the Active Floor Icon, then click Work on Second Floor on the pop-up menu that is displayed.

3

On the Edit menu, click Select All, or press CTRL+A.

4

On the Edit menu, click Move to Floor, Upper Floor. Select Lower Floor if you want to move the original down one level.

As you create more than one floor in your design, you’ll want to draw a staircase. As you are placing stairs, Punch! AS4000 displays the stair length so you know the exact measurements, as you draw. To create an opening for the stairway in the upper floor, see “Adding a Floor Cutout”, which begins on page 82. To draw a straight staircase 1

On the Floor Plan tab, click the Straight Staircase Tool. The Staircase Properties bar is displayed.

2

Click on the design window to define the start point of the staircase. A rubber-band staircase, with dimensions, is displayed and follows the pointer.

3

Extend the staircase to the location you want, then rightclick to end drawing mode.

Creating a Split Level With Punch! AS4000’s Elevation Slider, you can easily design a split level home. With one or two mouse clicks, your split level can be perfectly positioned.

2 4

To create a split level 1

2

On the Design menu, click Work on Floor, Work on Second Floor or click on the Active Floor Icon, then click Work on Second Floor on the pop-up menu that is displayed. On the Floor Plan tab, click the Exterior Wall Tool. Using the techniques outlined in the section “Drawing Exterior Walls” on page 68, draw an entirely separate area.

3

Select all points of the newly-drawn section, by clicking on each wall, while holding down SHIFT.

4

On the left side of your window, move the Elevation Slider to the position needed for the split.

12

(optional) Press and hold the SHIFT key, while drawing to release the 15 degree constraint.

To draw a curved staircase 1

On the Floor Plan tab, click the Curved Staircase Tool. The Staircase Properties bar is displayed.

2

Click and release on the design window to define the start point of the staircase. A rubber-band staircase, with dimensions, is displayed and follows the pointer.

3

Move in the direction you want the stairs to rise, then click to place the staircase.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

79

Chapter

11 Floor Plan Tab 6

(optional) Press and hold the SHIFT key, while drawing to release the 15 degree constraint.

Modifying a Staircase 2

Once you have drawn a staircase, you can modify features and location to suit your needs. With Punch! AS4000 you have control over stairway width, riser and tread dimensions, handrail height and placement and whether the stairs are open or enclosed. 1 2

4

(optional) Press and hold the SHIFT key, while drawing, to constrain stairs to a perfect arc.

To create a landing 1

On the Floor Plan tab, click the Straight Staircase Tool. The Staircase Properties bar is displayed.

2

Click on the design window to define the start point of the staircase. A rubber-band staircase, with dimensions, is displayed and follows the pointer.

3

Click where you want the landing.

4

Extend the staircase to the location you want, then rightclick to end drawing mode.

Reversing the direction of a staircase 1

On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.

2

Right-click the center line of the staircase you want to alter.

3

Click Reverse Staircase Direction on the pop-up menu that is displayed. The direction of the staircase is reversed.

Note: This works for both curved and straight staircases. Customizing staircase features 1

On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.

2

Click the staircase you want to customize, to select it. The Staircase Properties bar is displayed.

3

(optional) Type a new staircase height and width.

4

(optional) Check the radio button to add skirt walls.

5

(optional) Type a new step height (riser).

6

(optional) Type a step depth (tread).

7

(optional) Specify handrail height and location, left or right, as you are looking from bottom of staircase.

Moving a staircase

5

Nudge points into position to refine the look of the landing.

1

On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.

2

Click the centerline of the staircase you want to reposition.

80

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

Adding Railings Note: The railing will appear angular as it is drawn, but will curve after the next point is set. 3

(optional) Press and hold the SHIFT key, while drawing, to constrain railing to a perfect arc.

Modifying a Railing

Dr ag

Once you have drawn a railing, you can modify its features. Customizing railing features

12

1

On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.

2

Click the railing you want to customize. The Railing Properties bar is displayed.

3

(optional) Type a new handrail height.

To copy and paste a staircase

4

(optional) Type a new baluster spacing.

1

On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.

5

2

Click the centerline of the staircase you want to copy.

(optional) Check whether railing posts are wanted.

3

Click Copy on the Edit menu or press CTRL+C on your keyboard.

4

Click Paste on the Edit menu, or press CTRL+V on the keyboard. The stairway you copied is displayed.

3

Click again; hold down the mouse button and drag the staircase to the new location.

Adding Railings After drawing a staircase, you’ll need to draw a railing around the opening to provide a barrier. To draw a straight railing 1

On the Floor Plan tab, click the Railing Tool. The Railing Properties bar is displayed.

2

Click on the design window to define the start point of the Railing. A rubber-band Railing, with dimensions, is displayed and follows the pointer.

3

Extend the Railing to the location you want, then rightclick to end drawing mode.

4

(optional) Press and hold the SHIFT key, while drawing, to release the 15 degree constraint.

To draw a curved railing 1

On the Floor Plan tab, click the Curved Railing Tool. The Railing Properties bar is displayed.

2

Click on the design window to define the start point of the railing. A rubber-band Railing, with dimensions, is displayed and follows the pointer.

Adding Flooring Whether you want to carpet the whole floor with one color or you want each room to have an individual feel, Punch! AS4000 helps you experiment with different flooring options, before spending hundreds of dollars on something you’re not happy with. Once drawn, you can customize the flooring by applying materials like tile, carpet, wood and so on. For more information, see “Applying Building Materials”, which begins on page 180. To draw flooring 1

On the Floor Plan tab, click the Floor Tool. The Flooring Properties bar is displayed.

Note: If necessary, you can turn off the automatic flooring option. Click an exterior wall, uncheck the Auto-Floor option on the Wall Properties bar. 2

Click on the design window to define the start point of the flooring. A rubber-band line is displayed and follows the pointer. This line signifies the first edge of the flooring. Notice that dimensions are displayed, as you draw.

12

2

52

42 32

2

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

81

Chapter

11 Floor Plan Tab

3

Click and move the pointer to the next cornerpoint. Repeat until you have completely drawn the flooring area.

4

Right-click to end drawing mode.

To reshape flooring 1

On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.

2

Click a side of the flooring you want to reshape.

3

Click a cornerpoint of the flooring; hold down the mouse button and drag.

4

Click the next cornerpoint; hold down the mouse button and drag.

5

(optional) Click a side of the flooring to move the two cornerpoints at once.

Adding a Floor Cutout Punch! AS4000, makes it easy to design lofts, creative staircase openings and so on. You can also easily convert that space over the garage to a versatile room. To draw a floor cutout 1

On the Floor Plan tab, click the Floor Cutout Tool. The Flooring Properties bar is displayed.

2

Click on the design window to define the start point of the floor cutout. A rubber-band line is displayed and follows the pointer. This line signifies the first edge of the flooring. Notice that dimensions are displayed, as you draw.

3

Click and move the pointer to the next cornerpoint. Repeat until you have completely drawn the floor cutout area.

4

Right-click to end drawing mode.

5

(optional) To customize the thickness of the cutout, type a new thickness on the Properties Bar.

To reshape a floor cutout 1

On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.

2

Click a side of the floor cutout you want to reshape.

3

Click a cornerpoint of the floor cutout; hold down the mouse button and drag.

4

Click the next cornerpoint; hold down the mouse button and drag.

5

(optional) Click a side of the floor cutout to move the two cornerpoints at once.

82

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

Part 3

Utilities in Your Home Design Chapter 12: Electrical Plan Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 Chapter 13: Plumbing Plan Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter 14: HVAC Plan Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95

Chapter 12

Electrical Plan Tab Adding electrical components to your home design is a simple matter of selecting the component you want to place and clicking on your drawing plan. You can even turn the lights on and off! Punch! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 provides handy placement features such as associative dimensioning and wall tracking. Using associative dimensioning or snaps, you can place components a specific distance from a neighboring wall or other electrical component. Automatic wall tracking makes sure you place components such as outlets and switches without error.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

85

Chapter

12 Electrical Plan Tab

Placing Outlets and Switches Punch! AS4000 makes it simple to add electrical components to your home plan. Using the convenient tabbed utility tools, simply select the components you want to place and click. Dimension lines automatically appear, making it easy to place components a specific distance from a neighboring electrical component or wall segment. You’ll notice that when placing certain outlets and switches, the object is automatically “tracked” to the wall segment, making accurate placement simple. Floor and ceiling outlets are not tracked to walls. If the outlet is to be placed within 6" of a water source, for example, in a kitchen, bath or outdoors, always use a GFI outlet. Ground Fault Interrupters are designed to shut themselves off if they get wet. For information on precision placement using Snaps, see the chapter titled “Punch! Software Primer”, which begins on page 27. To place outlets and switches

To move a ceiling or floor outlet by a specific distance 1

On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.

2

Click to select the outlet you want to move. Selection handles appear.

3

On the Edit menu, click Move. The Move dialog box is displayed.

4

Click either Cartesian or Polar coordinates.

5

Type the X and Y Axis measurements, then click OK.

6

The outlet is moved to the location you specified.

Adding Connector Switches

1

On the Electrical Plan tab, click one of the outlet or switch tools.

It’s easy to add ceiling fan switches to your home design. Using the ceiling fan switch tool, just click and drag to define the connection.

2

Click a wall segment; hold down the mouse button and drag. Dimensions will display as

To place connector switches

you drag the outlet or switch along the wall. The dimension lines indicate the distance from the center of the outlet or switch to the nearest wall or other electrical component.

1

On the Electrical Plan tab, click the Connector Switch Tool.

2

Click a wall segment; hold down the mouse button and drag. The wiring is displayed as you drag.

2

3

Dr ag

Release the mouse button to place the outlet or switch.

Note: To place a 4-Way or 5-Way switch, click the 3-Way switch button on the Switch Style Preview Bar and click the needed switch on the pop-up window that is displayed. To place ceiling or floor outlets 1

On the Electrical Plan tab, click the 110 or the 220 Ceiling/Floor Outlet Tool.

2

On the Preview Bar, click either a Floor Outlet or a Ceiling Outlet.

3

Click on the design window to place the outlet.

3

Click the ceiling fan or light you want to connect. The wiring is displayed in your drawing.

86

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

Adding Fixture Lighting 2

The Light Properties bar is displayed, showing the customizable options for this tool.

3

(optional) Click the Light Style button to access a different light style, then select an option from the pop-up menu that is displayed.

4

Click once in your plan drawing to place each light.

To move connector switches by a specific distance 1

On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.

2

Click to select the connector switch you want to move. Selection handles appear.

3

Dr ag

On the Edit menu, click Move. The Move dialog box is displayed.

Dr ag

Note: A lighting fixture will be placed at each click site. Right-click or select a different tool to end placing light fixtures. 4

Click either Cartesian or Polar coordinates.

To move a light fixture by a specific distance

5

Type the X and Y Axis measurements, then click OK.

1

On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.

6

The connector is moved to the location you specified.

2

Click to select the light fixture you want to move. Selection handles appear.

3

On the Edit menu, click Move. The Move dialog box is displayed.

4

Click either Cartesian or Polar coordinates.

5

Type the X and Y Axis measurements, then click OK.

6

The light fixture is moved to the location you specified.

Adding Fixture Lighting Adding fixture lighting to your design is very similar to adding other electrical components; however, they do not track directly to walls or automatically display dimensioning. Punch! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 provides many lights to choose from, including recessed canned lights, heat/vent lights and so on. In addition, you can control the amount of illumination that each fixture generates. To add light fixtures 1

On the Electrical Plan tab, click Light Tool. The pointer changes to reflect drawing mode.

To turn the lights on and off 1

On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.

2

Click the light fixture you want to turn on or off. The Light Style Properties bar is displayed.

3

Check or uncheck Switch On/Off. The change is displayed in the LiveView window.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

87

Chapter

12 Electrical Plan Tab

To turn glow on and off 1

On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.

2

Click the light fixture you want to turn glow on or off. The Light Style Properties bar is displayed.

3

Check or uncheck Switch Glow. The change is displayed in the LiveView window.

2

Click a wall segment; hold down the mouse button and drag. Dimensions will display as you drag along the wall. The dimension lines indicate the distance from the center of the light to the nearest wall or other electrical component.

3

Release the mouse button to place the flood light.

4

(optional) Change the elevation of the light using the Elevation Slider.

To dim the lights 1

On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.

2

Click the light fixture you want to dim. The Light Style Properties bar is displayed.

3

Click the up and down arrows on the Dimmer scroll bar or move the slider to customize the brightness of the lights. The change is displayed in the LiveView window.

To set the radius of the lights 1

On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.

2

Click the light fixture you want to customize. The Light Style Properties bar is displayed.

3

Click the up and down arrows on the Radius scroll bar or move the slider to customize the radius of the lights. The change is displayed in the LiveView window.

Adding a Ceiling Fan Placing ceiling fans is as simple as one mouse click. Once you place a ceiling fan, you can move it by dragging or by specifying exact coordinates. To place a ceiling fan 1

On the Electrical Plan tab, click the Ceiling Fan Tool.

2

Click on your plan drawing to place the ceiling fan.

To set the falloff from the lights 1

On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.

2

Click the light fixture you want to adjust. The Light Style Properties bar is displayed.

3

Click the up and down arrows on the Falloff scroll bar or move the slider to customize the Falloff of the lights. The change is displayed in the LiveView window.

To move a ceiling fan by a specific distance 1

On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.

2

Click to select the ceiling fan you want to move. Selection handles appear.

3

On the Edit Menu, click Move. The Move dialog box is displayed.

4

Click either Cartesian or Polar coordinates.

5

Type the X and Y Axis measurements, then click OK.

6

The ceiling fan is moved to the location you specified.

Adding Flood Lights Flood lights are added just like outlets and switches; they attach to and track along walls and their lighting, which can be turned off and on, is displayed in LiveView. To add a flood light 1

88

On the Electrical Plan tab, click the Flood Light Tool.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

Placing Phone and Cable Jacks

Placing Phone and Cable Jacks Placing phone and cable jacks is exactly like placing wall outlets and switches. You’ll notice that when placing jacks, the object is automatically “tracked” to the wall segment, making accurate placement simple.

2

3

Release the mouse button to place the smoke detector or thermostat.

To place phone and cable jacks 1

On the Electrical Plan tab, click the Phone or Cable Jack Tool.

2

Click a wall segment; hold down the mouse button and drag. The phone or cable jack is displayed with dimensions as you drag. The dimension lines indicate the distance from the center of the jack to the nearest wall or other electrical component.

2

3

Release the mouse button to place the phone or cable jack.

Adding Smoke Detectors and Thermostats Placing smoke detectors and thermostats is exactly like placing wall outlets and switches. You’ll notice that when placing these components, the object is automatically “tracked” to the wall segment, making accurate placement simple. For information on precision placement using Snaps, see the chapter titled “Punch! Software Primer”, which begins on page 27. To place smoke detectors and thermostats 1

On the Electrical Plan tab, click the Smoke Detector or Thermostat Tool.

2

Click a wall segment; hold down the mouse button and drag. The smoke detector or thermostat is displayed with dimensions as you drag. The dimension lines indicate the distance from the center of the smoke detector or thermostat to the nearest wall or other electrical component.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

89

Chapter

90

12 Electrical Plan Tab

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

Chapter 13

Plumbing Plan Tab Once you’ve completed your floor plan, the next step in the design process is to plan your utilities. Punch! AS4000 features a suite of plumbing fixtures from basic toilets to spa tubs. Other important considerations are gas bibs and floor drain placement, also included in Punch! AS4000. Most plumbing objects are designed to “track the walls”, meaning they can only be placed on wall segments to offer flawless design. Tubs and showers are automatically annotated and dimensions appear, as you add plumbing, to ensure accurate placement. Each plumbing symbol is simple to include in your drawing, with the flexibility to modify it at any time.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

91

Chapter

13 Plumbing Plan Tab

Placing an Outdoor Hose Bib When you place an outdoor hose bib, dimension lines automatically appear, making it easy to place objects a specific distance from a neighboring plumbing fixture or the end of a wall segment. You’ll notice that when placing hose bibs, the object is automatically “tracked” to the wall segment, making accurate placement simple.

Dr ag

3

Release the mouse button to place the gas bib.

To place an outdoor hose bib 1

On the Plumbing Plan tab, click the Hose Bib Tool.

2

Click a wall segment; hold down the mouse button and drag. The hose bib is displayed, with dimensions, as you drag. The dimension lines indicate the distance from the center of the hose bib to the nearest wall end or plumbing fixture.

Note: For information on precision placement using Snaps, see the chapter titled “Punch! Software Primer”, which begins on page 27.

Adding Floor Drains Dr ag

3

Release the mouse button to place the hose bib.

Once you’ve completed your plumbing plan, the final step is to add floor drains to your design. Adding floor drains is as simple as a mouse click. To add a floor drain 1

On the Plumbing Plan tab, click the Floor Drain Tool.

2

Click once in your plan drawing. The floor drain is placed.

Placing a Gas Bib When you place a gas bib, dimension lines automatically appear, making it easy to place objects a specific distance from a neighboring fixture or the end of a wall segment. You’ll notice that when placing gas bibs, the object is automatically “tracked” to the wall segment, making accurate placement simple. To place a gas bib 1

On the Plumbing Plan tab, click the Gas Bib Tool.

2

Click a wall segment; hold down the mouse button and drag. The gas bib is displayed, with dimensions, as you drag. The dimension lines indicate the distance from the center of the gas bib to the nearest wall end or plumbing fixture.

92

Placing Toilets Punch! AS4000 makes it simple to add plumbing to your home plan. Using the convenient tabbed utility tools, simply select the fixtures you want to place and click. Dimension lines automatically appear, making it easy to place objects a specific distance from a neighboring plumbing fixture or wall segment. You’ll notice that when placing toilets, the object is automatically “tracked” to the wall segment, making accurate placement simple. For information on precision placement using Snaps, see the chapter titled “Punch! Software Primer”, which begins on page 27.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

Placing Sinks To place toilets 1

On the Plumbing Plan tab, click the Toilet Tool.

2

Click a wall segment; hold down the mouse button and drag. The toilet is displayed, with dimensions, as you drag. The dimension lines indicate the distance from the center of the toilet to the nearest wall or plumbing fixture.

2

3

2

Click to select the sink you want to move. Selection handles appear.

3

Drag the sink to a new location. As you move the sink, associative dimensioning is displayed.

4

Release the mouse button to place the sink in the new location.

Note: For information on precision movements using Snaps, see the chapter titled “Punch! Software Primer”, which begins on page 27.

Placing Bathtubs or Spa Tubs

Release the mouse button to place the toilet.

Tubs and spas are placed in the same manner as sinks. In addition to associative dimensioning and wall tracking, as you place a tub or spa, Punch! AS4000 automatically adds annotation to your design once the tub or spa is placed. This makes reading home plans at a later date simple. If you don’t find the exact sized tub or spa you are looking for, simply place a tub that is similar in size, then adjust the tub or spa properties to the exact size you want for your home design.

Placing Sinks There are several styles of sinks available in Punch! AS4000. As with toilets, sinks are automatically tracked to wall segments as you place them, as well as automatically dimensioned to neighboring walls and plumbing fixtures. associative dimensioning makes it easy to figure pipe placement as well. While there are four sink styles available in Punch! AS4000, they are all placed in the same manner.

To place a bathtub or spa 1

On the Plumbing Plan tab, click the Bathtub or Spa Tub Tool. The Tub or Spa Properties bar is displayed.

2

On the Design window, click on the wall where you want to place a tub. The dimension lines indicate the distance from the center of the tub to the nearest wall or plumbing fixture.

3

Drag the tub along the wall until it is in position.

To place sinks 1 2

On the Plumbing Plan tab, click one of the Sink tools. Click a wall segment; hold down the mouse button and drag. The sink is displayed with dimensions, as you drag. The dimension lines indicate the distance from the center of the sink to the nearest wall or plumbing fixture.

2

4

Release the mouse button to place the tub. Notice annotation automatically is displayed on the tub symbol.

2

3

Release the mouse button to place the sink. To resize a bathtub or spa

To move a sink 1

On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.

1

On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.

2

Click the bathtub or spa to select it. The Tub or Spa Properties bar is displayed.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

93

Chapter

13 Plumbing Plan Tab

3

Type a new bathtub or spa length in the Length text box.

Placing the Hot Water Heater

4

Type a new width in the Width text box.

5

Press Enter. The bathtub or spa is resized.

Adding a hot water heater to your home plan is as simple as a mouse click.

Placing a Shower Showers are placed in the same manner as bathtubs and spas. In addition to associative dimensioning and wall tracking as you place a shower, Punch! AS4000 automatically adds annotation to your design once the shower is placed. If you don’t find the exact sized shower you are looking for, simply place a shower that is similar in size, then adjust the shower properties to the exact size you want for your home design.

To add a hot water heater 1

On the Plumbing Plan tab, click the Hot Water Heater Tool.

2

Click once in your plan drawing. The hot water heater is placed.

To place a shower 1

On the Plumbing Plan tab, click the Shower Tool. The Shower Properties bar is displayed.

2

On the Design window, click where you want to place a shower. The shower, with dimensions, is displayed. The dimension lines indicate the distance from the center of the shower to the nearest wall or plumbing fixture.

3

Drag the shower along the wall until it is in position.

2

4

Release the mouse button to place the shower. Notice annotation automatically is displayed on the shower symbol.

To resize a shower 1

On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.

2

Click the shower to select it. The Shower Properties bar is displayed.

3

Type a new shower length in the Length text box.

4

Type a new width in the Width text box.

5

Press Enter.The shower is resized.

94

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

Chapter 14

HVAC Plan Tab Correctly adding HVAC ducts and units is an important part of the home design process. Punch! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 makes it easy to flawlessly design your HVAC system, making sure all rooms receive adequate ventilation. Once you place HVAC, with a few mouse clicks, it’s easy to adjust or move components, if you change your mind. You can even move components by a specific distance, based on Cartesian or Polar coordinates, or rotate items, as needed.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

95

Chapter

14 HVAC Plan Tab

Placing Air Ducts

To move air ducts a specific distance

Punch! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 features several sized air ducts to ensure the perfect HVAC plan. To place air ducts, simply click and drag. Air ducts are drawn horizontally and vertically, just as standard HVAC ducts are actually placed in a new home. You can move air ducts by dragging or by a specific distance or rotate them to fit your home design.

1

On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.

2

Click to select the air duct you want to move. Selection handles appear.

3

On the Edit Menu, click Move. The Move dialog box is displayed.

4

Click either Cartesian or Polar coordinates.

5

Type the X and Y Axis measurements, then click OK.

6

The air duct is moved to the location you specified.

If you don’t find the perfectly-sized air duct for your home plan, you can define the size of the duct yourself, using the HVAC properties dialog box. For information on precision placement using Snaps, see the chapter titled “Punch! Software Primer”, which begins on page 27. To place air ducts 1

On the HVAC Plan tab, click the Air Duct Tool.

2

Click on the plan drawing; hold down the mouse button and drag. The duct work is displayed, as you drag, displaying the measurements of the duct.

To rotate air ducts 1

On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.

2

Click to select the air duct you want to rotate. Selection handles appear.

3

On the Edit Menu, click Rotate. The Rotate dialog box is displayed.

4

Click either Degrees or Radians, then type the angle measurement in the Angle text box.

5

Click OK. The selected air duct is rotated by the angle you specified.

Drag

Note: Drawing is constrained to 15 degree angles; to release this constraint hold, down the SHIFT key, while drawing.

To resize an air duct 1

On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.

3

2

Click the air duct to select it. The Duct Properties bar is displayed.

3

Type new width and depth measurements in the appropriate text boxes. The air duct you selected is resized.

Release the mouse button to place the air duct segment.

Placing Vents and Registers Placing vents and registers involves one mouse click. Once you’ve placed vents, you can move them by dragging or defining specific coordinates. You can even rotate vents at custom angles to fit your design. Punch! Home Design

96

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

Adding Heating, Air Conditioning Units and Pumps Architectural Series 4000 provides several vents to choose from, including floor and ceiling vents.

5

To place vents and registers

Adding Heating, Air Conditioning Units and Pumps

1

On the HVAC Plan tab, click one of the vent tools.

2

Click once in your plan drawing. The vent you selected is placed.

Click OK. The selected vent is rotated by the angle you specified.

Adding heating and air conditioning units only involves one mouse click. Once placed, you can move units by specific distances, drag to move them and even rotate them to fit your home design. To place heating and air conditioning units

Dr ag

1

On the HVAC Plan tab, click a heating or cooling unit Tool.

2

Click once in your plan drawing. The unit you selected is placed.

To move a vent or register by a specific distance 1

On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.

2

Click to select the vent you want to move. Selection handles appear.

3

On the Edit Menu, click Move. The Move dialog box is displayed.

Dr ag

To move a heating or air conditioning unit by a specific distance 4

Click either Cartesian or Polar coordinates.

1

On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.

5

Type the X and Y Axis coordinates, then click OK.

2

6

The vent is moved to the location you specified.

Click to select the unit you want to move. Selection handles appear.

3

On the Edit Menu, click Move. The Move dialog box is displayed.

4

Click either Cartesian or Polar coordinates.

5

Type the X and Y Axis coordinates, then click OK.

6

The unit is moved to the location you specified.

To rotate registers or vents 1

On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.

2

Click to select the register or vent you want to rotate. Selection handles appear.

3

On the Edit Menu, click Rotate. The Rotate dialog box is displayed.

To rotate heating or air conditioning units 4

Click either Degrees or Radians, then type the angle measurement in the Angle text box.

1

On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.

2

Click to select the unit you want to rotate. Selection handles appear.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

97

Chapter

14 HVAC Plan Tab

3

On the Edit Menu, click Rotate. The Rotate dialog box is displayed.

4

Click either Degrees or Radians, then type the angle measurement in the Angle text box.

5

Click OK. The selected unit is rotated by the angle you specified.

Placing Baseboard Heaters As you place baseboard heaters in your home plan, dimension lines automatically appear, making it easy to place heaters a specific distance from a neighboring HVAC component or wall segment. You’ll notice that, when placing heaters, the object is automatically “tracked” to the wall segment, making accurate placement simple. To place baseboard heaters 1

On the HVAC Plan tab, click the Baseboard Heater Tool.

2

Click a wall segment; hold down the mouse button and drag. The heater is displayed, as you drag, with dimensions. The dimension lines indicate the distance from the center of the heater to the nearest wall or other HVAC component.

2

3

Release the mouse button to place the heater.

To move a baseboard heater 1 2

On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool. Click to select the heater you want to move. Selection handles appear.

3

Drag the register to a new location. As you move the heater, automatic dimensioning is displayed.

4

Release the mouse button to place the heater in the new location.

98

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

Part 4

Working on Your Home’s Exterior Chapter 15: Chapter 16: Chapter 17: Chapter 18: Chapter 19: Chapter 20:

Roofing Plan Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Roofing Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Deck Plan Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Deck Designer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Landscape Plan Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Detail Plan Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

101 111 117 121 133 141

Chapter 15

Roofing Plan Tab One of the features that will set your design apart from all others will be its roofline. Using the roofing tools available in Punch! AS4000, you can design intricate roofs with ease. From basic rooflines like hipped or gable to less common ones like saltbox, gambrel, or a roof over a bay window, you will be able to create any roof to match the style of your homeplan. In this chapter you will learn how to create individual pieces which, when combined, create multifaceted roofs to fit your needs.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

101

Chapter

15 Roofing Plan Tab

Adding a Roof There are several styles of roof available in Punch! AS4000, including three powerful freehand roofing tools. To match the gable ends of these roof styles refer to “Defining Gable Wall Segments” on page 71. To draw a flat ceiling, instead of a cathedral one, see “Setting Ceiling/Floor Options” on page 70. Automatic dimensioning makes it easy to achieve exact placement. While there are nine roof tools available, six of them are placed in the same manner. These styles are: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

hip gable connector gable hip connector hip/gable cross connector

Drag

5

Release the mouse button.

The Roof Wizard PowerTool can draw an entire roof, if you prefer. For more information, see “Roofing Wizard”, which begins on page 111. To draw a roof 1

On the Roofing Plan tab, click one of the Roof Tools. The Roofs Properties bar displays the pitches that are available.

2

Click the roof pitch to select it.

3

(optional) On the Design menu, click Work on Floor, Second Floor (or the floor you want to roof) or click on the Active Floor Icon, then click Work on Second Floor on the pop-up menu that is displayed.

4

Click on the design window; hold down the mouse button and drag.

102

Note: The arrows show which way the roof section descends. The elevation of each corner is noted. To snap a roof 1

On the Roofing Plan tab, click one of the Roof Tools. The Roofs Properties bar displays the pitches that are available.

2

Click the roof pitch to select it.

3

Click the Snaps button. The Snaps toolbar is displayed.

4

On the Snaps toolbar, click the Snap to Endpoint Tool or press TAB.

5

Click a wall on the design window. The roof will “snap to” the endpoint nearest where you clicked.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

Using the Freehand Roof Tools drawing complex roofing plans. Using the three-point and four-point freehand tools, roof sections are attached to walls making it easy to draw them the necessary size the first time. After drawing roof sections, all parts of it can be customized, for example, pitch, placement, shape and so on. With the three- and four-point freehand tools you can specify a width for soffit. To draw with the freehand roof tool

6

7

8

Hold down the mouse button and drag until the cursor touches a wall.

1

On the Roofing Plan tab, click the Freehand Roof Tool. The Roofs Properties Bar displays the pitches that are available.

2

On the Properties bar, click a pitch or type a custom pitch in the dialog box.

3

(optional) Type a Pitch Angle in the dialog box.

4

Click on the design window to define the start point of the roof section. A rubberband line is displayed and follows the pointer. This line signifies the first edge of the roof section. Notice that dimensions are displayed, as you draw.

12

2

42

32

Press Tab to re-activate the Snap to Endpoint Tool. The roof will automatically extend to cover the entire perimeter.

Release the mouse button.

Using the Freehand Roof Tools Punch! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 has three Freehand Roof tools that provide versatility and power when

5

Click and move the pointer to the next cornerpoint. Repeat until you have completely drawn the roof section.

6

(optional) Click to select the arrow in the center of the roof section, then rotate the bold arrow to change the direction of the roof slope.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

103

Chapter

15 Roofing Plan Tab

Note: The elevation of each selected point of the roof section is notated; use these specs to match roof sections. 7

Click the roof section to select it. The Roofs Properties Bar displays the pitches that are available.

8

Click the Elevation Base radio button to measure from the ground to the base of the roof section.

9

Click the Elevation Peak radio button to measure from the ground to the peak of the roof section.

10 (optional) Adjust the elevation of the roof section using the Elevation Slider on the left of your screen. To draw with the four-point freehand roof tool 1

2

8

To draw with the three-point freehand roof tool 1

On the Roofing Plan tab, click the Three-Point Freehand Roof Tool. The Three-Point Freehand Roof Tool Properties dialog box is displayed.

2

Type the Soffit Depth in the dialog box, then click OK.

On the Roofing Plan tab, click the Four-Point Freehand Roof Tool. The Four-Point Freehand Roof Tool Properties dialog box is displayed.

Type the Soffit Depth in the dialog box.

Note: Dimensions are entered in inches or feet and inches, separated by a hyphen. For example, 10-0 indicates ten feet, while 10 is interpreted as ten inches. 3

Click to check the edge(s) where soffit is needed, then click OK.

4

(optional) Click to check No Soffit.

5

On the Properties bar, click a pitch or type a custom pitch in the dialog box.

6

Click a wall on the design window to define the start point of the roof section.

7

Hold down the mouse button and drag away from the wall section. A rubber-band line is displayed and follows the pointer. This line signifies the direction the roof section will rise. Notice that dimensions are displayed, as you draw.

Release the mouse button. The roof section is drawn.

Note: Dimensions are entered in inches or feet and inches, separated by a hyphen. For example, 10-0 indicates ten feet, while 10 is interpreted as ten inches. 3

(optional) Click to check No Soffit.

4

On the Properties bar, click a pitch or type a custom pitch in the dialog box.

5

Click a wall on the design window to define the start point of the roof section.

6

Hold down the mouse button and drag away from the wall section. A rubber-band line is displayed and follows the pointer. This line signifies the direction the roof section will rise. Notice that dimensions are displayed, as you draw.

104

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

Editing Roofs To change the roof’s slope direction 1

On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.

2

Click a side of the roof, to select it.

3

Rotate the bold arrow in the center of the roof section, until it points to the direction you want the section to fall.

4

Release the mouse. The slope is repositioned.

Note: Rotation is constrained to fifteen (15) degrees.

Drawing a Dormer 7

Release the mouse button. The roof section is drawn.

Editing Roofs Once drawn, roof sections can be altered to suit your design. From resizing to rotating the slope to changing its pitch, Punch! AS4000 makes it simple to create even the most complex roofline. To resize the roof 1

On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.

2

Click a side of the roof, to select it.

3

Click a cornerpoint of the roof; hold down the mouse button and drag it until the roof is the size you want.

4

Release the mouse button.

Dormers are windows set into small gables used to add light and space to the top floor of a building, typically the attic. Dormers are more easily applied after the roof has been completed. In the following example, the dormer itself is drawn on the third floor while the Dormer Cutout is drawn on the second floor. The Dormer Cutout tool must be applied to a roof object. To draw a dormer

To change the roof’s pitch

1

On the Roofing Plan tab, click the Gable Connector Roof Tool. The Roofs Properties bar displays the pitches that are available.

1

On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.

2

Click a side of the roof, to select it.

2

3

On the Properties bar, click a pitch or type a custom pitch in the dialog box.

Click the roof pitch to select it. In this example, we are using 10:12.

3

Click on the design window; hold down the mouse button and drag the Dormer roof to the shape needed.

4

(optional) Click the radio button next to Custom and type a pitch of 0.0 in the dialog box to create a flat roof.

5

Click OK.

To elevate a roof by using the Elevation Slider 1

On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.

2

Click a side of the roof, to select it.

3

On the left side of the screen, drag the Elevation Slider up or down.

4

Release the mouse. The roof is repositioned.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

105

Chapter

15 Roofing Plan Tab

4

On the Floor Plan tab, click the Exterior Wall Tool.

5

Click on the design window; hold down the mouse button and drag. Notice that the wall follows the pointer and automatically displays the wall length.

6

Release the mouse button when the correct wall length is reached.

7

On the Properties bar, enter the height of the wall. In this example, the gable wall is four feet high, with a pitch of 10:12.

8

Use the Elevation Slider to exactly position the gable wall vertically. In this example, the gable wall has an elevation of 18-6. 14 Repeat steps 9 through 13 for the opposite side wall. 15 On the Floor Plan tab, click the Window Tool. The Windows Properties Bar is displayed. 16 On the Windows Properties Bar, click the Window Style button, then click the window style you want from the pop-up window that is displayed. 17 On the Design window, click a wall where you want to place a window. 18 On the Properties bar, enter the dimensions of the window.

9

On the Floor Plan tab, click the Exterior Wall Tool.

10 Click on the design window; hold down the mouse button and drag. Notice that the wall follows the pointer and automatically displays the wall length. 11 Release the mouse button when the correct wall length is reached. In this example, the side walls are only seven inches long. 12 On the Properties bar, enter the dimensions of the side wall. In this example, the side wall is one inch high tapering to a height of four feet, with a pitch of 10:12. 13 (optional) Use the Elevation Slider to exactly position the gable wall vertically. In this example, the gable wall has an elevation of 18-6.

19 (optional) On the Design menu, click Work on Floor, Second Floor (or the floor you want to roof) or click on the Active Floor Icon, then click Work on Second Floor on the pop-up menu that is displayed. 20 On the Roofing Plan tab, click the Dormer Cutout Tool. 21 Trace the Dormer Roof leaving some space at the end where the dormer connects to the roof.

106

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

Adding a Skylight

Drawing a Gambrel Roof The Gambrel roof, or barn roof, is a popular style because it increases the usable space in the loft/attic area. A gambrel roof is composed of two pitches. The lower sections are created using the Four-Point Freehand Roof tool, while the upper pitch will be drawn using the Gable Roof Tool.

Adding a Skylight

To draw a gambrel roof

Skylights are windows cut into the roof. They add a touch of elegance in addition to letting in more natural light. You can even design custom skylights in Window Designer. For more information, see “Window Designer”, which begins on page 203.

1

On the Roofing Plan tab, click the Four-Point Freehand Roof Tool. The Four-Point Freehand Roof Tool Properties dialog box is displayed.

2

Type 1" (one inch) in the Soffit Depth dialog box.

3

(optional) Click to check No Soffit, then click OK.

4

Click 12:12 on the Properties bar.

5

Click a wall on the design window to define the start point of the roof section.

6

Hold down the mouse button and drag away from the wall section. A rubber-band line is displayed and follows the pointer. This line signifies the direction the roof section will rise. Notice that dimensions are displayed, as you draw.

To add a skylight 1

2

3

4

On the Roofing Plan tab, click the Skylight Tool. The Skylight Properties bar displays the options available. Click the Skylight Style button, then click the Skylight Style on the pop-up menu. (optional) Click the Custom Skylight option, then click the arrow next to the word Skylights to see a listing of the available custom skylights. Click a roof section on the design window to define the placement of the skylight.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

107

Chapter

15 Roofing Plan Tab

7

Release the mouse button. The roof section is drawn.

16 Type the number noted from Step 11.

8

On the Edit menu, click Copy or press CTRL+C or rightclick the selection and click Copy on the pop-up menu that is displayed.

Note: The previous example specified 12:12 and 4:12 pitches, but any combination of pitches will work for this roof.

9

On the Edit menu, click Paste or press CTRL+V or rightclick the selection and click Paste on the pop-up menu that is displayed. A duplicate roof section is created.

10 Rotate the bold arrow in the center of the roof section 180 degrees so it faces the opposite direction from the other arrow. 11 Align this roof section on the other side of the floor plan. Note the elevation that is specified in red as the upper elevation of the roof section. Note: To close the gable ends of this roof style use a combination of the Wall Break Tool and Gable Wall segments. For more information, see “Breaking a Wall”, which begins on page 74 and “Defining Gable Wall Segments” on page 71.

Drawing a Saltbox Roof Note: At this point there will be a gap between the two roof sections; this gap will be filled with the Gable Roof section. 12 On the Roofing Plan tab, click the Gable Roof Tool. 13 For the upper section, click 4:12 on the Properties bar.

Saltbox roofs are similar to gable roofs with an offset ridge. Although they are not symmetrical, they are extremely attractive and easy to create.

14 Click on the design window; hold down the mouse button and drag. 15 Right-click the upper roof section and click Elevate Roof from the pop-up menu that is displayed.

108

To draw a saltbox roof 1

On the Roofing Plan tab, click the Four-Point Freehand Roof Tool. The Four-Point Freehand Roof Tool Properties dialog box is displayed.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

Drawing a Saltbox Roof

2

Type 1" (one inch) in the Soffit Depth dialog box.

3

(optional) Click to check No Soffit, then click OK.

4

Click 8:12 on the Properties bar.

5

Click a wall on the design window to define the start point of the roof section.

6

Hold down the mouse button and drag away from the wall section. A rubber-band line is displayed and follows the pointer. This line signifies the direction the roof section will rise. Notice that dimensions are displayed, as you draw.

11 Click the lower edge of the second roof section and resize the roof.

12 Click the roof section to select it. The Roofs Properties Bar displays the pitches that are available. 13 Click the Elevation Base radio button to measure from the ground to the peak of the roof section. 7

Press the mouse button and drag a box around all points of the roof section to select it. Make a note of the elevation that is specified as the upper elevation of the roof section.

8

On the Edit menu, click Copy or press CTRL+C.

9

On the Edit menu, click Paste or press CTRL+V. A duplicate roof section is created.

14 Right-click the Elevation Slider, then click Set Working Elevation on the pop-up menu that is displayed. 15 Type the number noted from Step 7, then click OK.

10 Rotate the bold arrow in the center of the roof section 180 degrees, so it faces the opposite direction from the other arrow.

Note: To close the gable ends of this roof style refer to “Defining Gable Wall Segments” on page 71.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

109

Chapter

110

15 Roofing Plan Tab

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

Chapter 16

Roofing Wizard Punch! Home Design Architectural Series 4000’s Roofing Wizard takes the guesswork out of creating hip roofs for simple or complex home designs. Simply proceed through the Roofing Wizard, then use the manual roofing tools to tweak the design to your own specifications.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

111

Chapter

16 Roofing Wizard

Launching Roofing Wizard ■

6

(optional) Check Trim Roof Panels on Overlapping Floors to avoid drawing interior roofs on complex home designs (such as split-level home plans).

7

(optional) Check Remove Previously Generated Roof Panels to clear roof panels created in previous sessions of Roofing Wizard.

Launch Roofing Wizard by clicking the Roofing Wizard icon on the PowerTool Bar.

Designing Roofs Once you’ve drawn a building shell in Punch! Home Design Architectural Series 4000, you can use Roofing Wizard to automatically generate all or part of the roof design. When you first start the Roofing Wizard, an automated Roofing Wizard appears to guide you through the process of designing a roof for your home plan or you can launch the automated Roofing Wizard once you’ve drawn some roof sections. Note: Your design must have a completely closed perimeter, drawn with exterior walls for the Roofing Wizard to draw a roof. If your design does not have a continuous perimeter, no roof will be drawn. To create a roof using Roofing Wizard 1

Roofing Wizard will launch automatically.

Note: If Roofing Wizard does not launch automatically, the “Always Show Wizard at Startup” may be unchecked. To launch Roofing Wizard, on the File menu, click Start Roofing Wizard. 2

Click Next to set the pitch and soffit dimensions.

3

Choose Ratio or Angle in the Roof Pitch section, then enter a value in the corresponding text box.

Note: Roof sections drawn from the Roofing Plan tab in Punch! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 cannot be automatically deleted. 8

(optional) Check Lock Wall Properties to protect wall objects from edits such as changes in height or shape.

9

(optional) Check Lock Generated Roof Panels to protect roof sections generated by the Roofing Wizard from edits.

10 (optional) On the Height policy drop down menu, click the method you want the Roofing Wizard to follow for creating a regular roof across irregular walls. 11 (optional) Check Adjust Wall Heights to Match Height Policy to automatically match wall heights to the roof height. 12 (optional) Check Flatten Gable Structures to change gable walls in your design to rectangular walls. 13 Click Next to save the options and generate the roof. 14 (optional) Check Save These Roofing Options for Future Use to make the current wizard settings the default. 4

(optional) Check Include Soffit Along Roof Edges to automatically include a soffit on all exposed edges of the roof, then enter a value in the Depth text box.

5

Click Next to set the wizard options.

112

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

Designing Roofs

5 15 (optional) Check Generate Panels for All Wall Objects Now. 16 Click Finish.

(optional) Check Remove Previously Generated Roof Panels to clear roof panels created in previous sessions of Roofing Wizard.

To generate a roof with options

Note: Roof sections drawn from the Roofing Plan tab in Punch! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 cannot be automatically deleted.

1

Right-click a wall, then click Generate Roof With Options on the pop-up menu. The Roof Properties dialog box is displayed.

6

(optional) Check Lock Wall Properties to protect wall objects from edits, such as changes in height or shape.

2

(optional) On the Dimensions tab, choose Ratio or Angle in the Roof Pitch section, then enter a value in the corresponding text box.

7

(optional) Check Lock Generated Roof Panels to protect roof sections generated by the Roofing Wizard from edits.

8

(optional) On the Height policy drop down menu, click the method you want the Roofing Wizard to follow for creating a regular roof across irregular walls.

9

(optional) Check Adjust Wall Heights to Match Height Policy to automatically match wall heights to the roof height.

10 (optional) Check Flatten Gable Structures to change gable walls in your design to rectangular walls. 11 Click OK. To generate a simple roof ■

3

(optional) Check Include Soffit Along Roof Edges to automatically include a soffit on all exposed edges of the roof, then enter a value in the Depth text box.

4

(optional) On the Extended Options tab, check Trim Roof Panels on Overlapping Floors to avoid drawing interior roofs on complex home designs (such as splitlevel home plans).

Right-click a wall, then click Generate Roof on the popup menu. A roof is created that conforms to the default settings you set in the Roofing Wizard.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

113

Chapter

16 Roofing Wizard

Drawing Additional Roof Components Roofing Wizard allows you to create roof objects, using the same tools you find on the Roofing Plan tab in Punch! Home Design Architectural Series 4000. From basic roof lines, like hipped or gable, to less common ones, like saltbox, gambrel or a roof over a bay window, you can create any roof to match the style of your home plan.

12

2

42

32

In addition to the manual roof tools on the Roofing Plan Tab, Roofing Wizard has three powerful freehand roofing tools for roofing those hard-to-categorize areas. For more information on using manual roof tools, see “Roofing Plan Tab”, which begins on page 101.

7

You can also customize the shape of a roof section by adding or deleting individual points to a roof section.

To add a roof point

To draw a freehand hip roof 1

On the Standard toolbar, click the Custom Roof Region tool. The Custom Roof Region dialog box is displayed.

2

Choose Ratio or Angle in the Roof Pitch section, then enter a value in the corresponding text box.

Click and move the pointer to the next cornerpoint. Repeat until you have completely drawn the roof section.

1

Click the Add Roof Point Tool. The pointer changes to reflect drawing mode.

2

Click to enter a new point on one of the roof objects you have created.

To remove a roof point 1

Click the Remove Roof Point Tool. The pointer changes to reflect drawing mode.

2

Click to remove a point from one of the roof objects you have created.

Editing Roof and Wall Components Complex roofs sometimes have to be drawn using a known elevation. You can control the precision of your roof drawing by changing the elevation. You can also lock roof sections to protect them from unintentional edits.

3

(optional) Check Include Soffit Along Roof Edges to automatically include a soffit on all exposed edges of the roof, then enter a value in the Depth text box.

Walls can also be modified, as you design your roof. Controls on the Property bar allow you to change the wall height, stud spacing and the overall shape and dimensions of the wall. As with roof sections, you can lock walls to protect them from unintentional edits. To change the pitch of a roof section 1

On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.

2

Click a side of the roof, to select it.

Click OK. The pointer changes to a drawing tool.

3

Click on the design window to define the start point of the roof section. A rubber-band line is displayed and follows the pointer. This line signifies the first edge of the roof section. Notice that dimensions are displayed, as you draw.

On the Roof Objects Properties bar, click a different ratio in the Pitch section or click Custom and type a new ratio value.

To change the height of a wall

4

Type an elevation value for the roof peak or bottom edge in the Elevation text box.

5 6

1

On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.

114

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

Using Nudge, Snap Tools and the Grid 2

Click a wall to select it; the Wall Properties bar is displayed.

To control the lock status of a roof section 1

On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.

3

On the Walls Properties bar, click a different wall height or click Custom and type a new height value.

2

Click a side of the roof, to select it.

3

On the Property bar, check the Locked checkbox. When this control is checked, the selected roof panel cannot be altered, until the checkbox is cleared.

To define stud spacing 1

On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.

2

Click a wall to select it; the Wall Properties bar is displayed.

To control the lock status of a wall 1

On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.

3

Type a new value in the Stud Spacing text box.

2

Click a wall to select it; the Wall Properties bar is displayed.

3

On the Property bar, check the Locked checkbox. When this control is checked, the selected wall cannot be altered, until the checkbox is cleared.

To change wall types 1

On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.

2

Click a wall to select it; the Wall Properties bar is displayed.

3

Click the Wall Style button, then select a style on the pop-up menu.

4

Type new values to redefine the wall according to the shape you selected.

Note: For more information on defining slanted, gabled, or other wall types, see “Defining Gable Wall Segments”, which begins on page 71. To increase or decrease elevation of a roof section 1

On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.

2

Click the roof panel you want to elevate.

3

Click and drag the Elevation slider, on the left side of the Design window, to the desired height.

4

(optional) If you selected a freehand roof panel, click an Elevation option on the Property Bar. Clicking Base applies your elevation value to the bottom edge of the roof. Clicking Peak applies your elevation value to the top edge of the roof.

To delete generated roof sections 1

On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.

2

Right-click a wall and click Delete Generated Roof Panels on the pop-up menu.

Using Nudge, Snap Tools and the Grid Once you’ve placed a roof object, you can precisely move it into position using Nudge. Nudge utilizes the arrow keys to move selected objects, or features, a specified distance. For more information on using Nudge, see “Using Nudge”, which begins on page 153. Nudge works in tandem with the Snap Grid. To learn more about the Snap Grid, see “Using the Grid”, which begins on page 16. With snaps, you can define exactly where roof objects are placed. You can move through the Snaps Toolbar with the Tab key. Each time you press Tab, the next Snap Tool is activated, Shift-Tab reverses the process. For more information, see “Punch! Software Primer”, which begins on page 27. Grid settings have a direct impact on the ease of aligning roof objects, snapping objects to the grid and so on. When using the Snap to Grid feature, items that are dragged and dropped on the design window are automatically snapped, or placed, to align with the current grid. By default, Snap to Grid is turned on. For more information, see “Using the Grid”, which begins on page 16.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

115

Chapter

16 Roofing Wizard

Setting the Working Elevation Before you draw roof objects, be sure to set your working elevation. All objects are drawn in relation to this elevation. To set the working elevation 1

On the Design menu, click Set Working Elevation. The Set Working Elevation dialog box is displayed.

2

(optional) In the Working Elevation edit box, type a new value.

3

Click OK.

116

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

Chapter 17

Deck Plan Tab If you are looking for a way to add more living space to your existing home, but don’t want to build an addition, you might consider adding a deck. Punch! AS4000 contains an extensive toolset for designing outdoor living areas. In this chapter, you will learn how to design multi-story and multi-level decks, including options for handrails, skirt trim and steps.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

117

Chapter

17 Deck Plan Tab

Adding a Deck Adding a deck is a great way to add living space to your home. With Punch! AS4000 you can build deck sections on the fly, with or without railings. All sections can be altered if you change your mind in the middle of the design process. For information on precision placement, using Snaps, see the chapter titled “Punch! Software Primer”, which begins on page 27. To draw a deck

cutout. Notice that dimensions are displayed, as you draw. 3

Click and move the pointer to the next cornerpoint. Repeat until you have completely drawn the cutout.

Changing the Deck Height Creating multi-story and multi-level decks is easy. With just a few mouse clicks, you can design a very elaborate and elegant deck.

1

On the Deck Plan tab, click a Deck Tool.

To change deck height

2

Click on the design window to define the start point of the deck. A rubber-band line is displayed and follows the pointer. This line signifies the first edge of the deck. Notice that dimensions are displayed, as you draw.

1

On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.

2

Click the side of the deck you want to raise or lower, to select it.

3

On the Properties Bar, in the Deck Height dialog box, type the height, in inches. A positive number raises the deck, while a negative number lowers it.

12

2

Note: Fractions of inches are entered in decimal form.

Editing Skirt Trim Options

42 3

32

Click and move the pointer to the next cornerpoint. Repeat until you have completely drawn the deck.

To reshape a deck 1

On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.

2

Click the side of the deck you want to reshape.

3

Click a cornerpoint; hold down the mouse button and drag.

By default, Skirt Trim is included on all sides of the deck. In addition to including skirt trim on only the sides you want, you can customize it by applying colors or materials. For more information on color and material, see the chapter titled “Working with LiveView”, which begins on page 157. To remove skirt trim 1

On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.

2

Click the side of the deck where you want to remove skirt trim, then on the Deck Properties bar, click to uncheck Skirting.

Note: To select more than one side of your deck, hold the SHIFT key down, while clicking sides.

Creating a Deck Cutout

Editing Handrail Options

You can easily create a space in your deck to insert a pool or hot tub by using the Deck Cutout Tool.

With Punch! AS4000 you can easily customize deck options. By default, handrail height is 36" and baluster spacing is set to 6".

To create a deck cutout 1

On the Deck Plan tab, click the Deck Cutout Tool.

To remove handrails

2

Click on the design window to define the start point of the cutout. A rubber-band line is displayed and follows the pointer. This line signifies the first edge of the deck

1

118

On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

Editing Step Options 2

2

Click the steps you want to resize. The Step Properties bar is displayed.

Note: To select more than one side of your deck, hold the SHIFT key down, while clicking sides.

3

Type the new width, in inches.

3

1

On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.

2

Click the steps you want to alter. The Step Properties bar is displayed. Type the new height, in inches.

Click the side of the deck to select it. The Deck Properties bar is displayed.

To change the step height

Click to uncheck the Include Handrail checkbox.

To change handrail height 1

On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.

3

2

Click the side of the deck you want to customize.

3

On the Properties Bar, in the Handrails Height dialog box, type the height, in inches.

Note: This is especially useful when designing multi-level decks, when you do not want the steps to reach the ground, just the next deck level.

To change baluster spacing

To edit handrail placement

1

On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.

1

On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.

2

Click the side of the deck you want to customize.

2

3

On the Properties Bar, in the Handrails Baluster Spacing dialog box, type the spacing, in inches.

Click the steps you want to alter. The Step Properties bar is displayed.

3

Click to uncheck the checkbox next to Handrails on Left (or Right). The handrails on the selected side will be removed.

Editing Step Options Using Punch! AS4000, you can add steps to any side of your deck and customize them to meet your needs. By default, steps are added to the center of the deck side, but can be moved easily into any position.

Adding Custom Railings

To add steps

To draw a straight railing

1

On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.

1

2

Click the side of the deck where you want to add steps.

On the Deck Plan tab, click the Railing Tool. The Railing Properties bar is displayed.

2

3

On the Deck Steps Properties bar, click Insert New. The steps will be inserted in the middle of the selected side.

Click on the design window to define the start point of the Railing. A rubber-band Railing, with dimensions, is displayed and follows the pointer.

3

Extend the Railing to the location you want, then rightclick to end drawing mode.

To resize steps by clicking-and-dragging

4

(optional) Press and hold the SHIFT key, while drawing, to release the 15 degree constraint.

1

On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.

2

Click to select the steps you want to resize.

3

Click an endpoint of the steps; hold down the mouse button and drag to resize.

To resize steps by a specific measurement 1

On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.

Customizing railings is easy with Punch! AS4000; you can simply add railings to any side of your deck.

To draw a curved railing 1

On the Deck Plan tab, click the Curved Railing Tool. The Railing Properties bar is displayed.

2

Click on the design window to define the start point of the railing. A rubber-band Railing, with dimensions, is displayed and follows the pointer.

Note: The railing will appear angular as it is drawn, but will curve after the next point is set.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

119

Chapter 3

17 Deck Plan Tab

(optional) Press and hold the SHIFT key, while drawing, to constrain railing to a perfect arc.

Modifying a Custom Railing Once you have drawn a railing, you can modify features and location to suit your needs. Using Punch! AS4000 you gain total control over railing handrail height, baluster spacing and railing posts. Customizing railing features 1

On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.

3

Move in the direction you want the stairs to rise, then click to place the staircase.

4

(optional) Press and hold the SHIFT key, while drawing, to constrain stairs to a perfect arc.

Modifying a Custom Staircase Once you have drawn a staircase, you can modify features and location to suit your needs. With Punch! AS4000 you have total control over stairway width, riser and tread dimensions and handrail height and placement. Customizing staircase features

2

Click the railing you want to customize. The Railing Properties bar is displayed.

1

On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.

3

(optional) Type a new handrail height.

2

4

(optional) Type a new baluster spacing.

5

(optional) Check whether railing posts are wanted.

Click the staircase you want to customize to select it. The Staircase Properties bar is displayed.

3

(optional) Type a new staircase height and width.

4

(optional) Check the radio button to add skirt walls.

5

(optional) Type a new step height (riser).

6

(optional) Type a step depth (tread).

7

(optional) Specify handrail height and location, left or right, as you are looking from bottom of staircase.

8

(optional) Specify Closed Stringer and/or Large Base, if needed.

Resizing a railing 1

On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.

2

Click the railing you want to resize.

3

Click on an endpoint of the railing; hold down the mouse button and drag. The railing is resized.

Placing a Custom Staircase In addition to the Add Steps feature, Punch! AS4000 gives you the option of easily drawing custom staircases. To draw a straight staircase 1 2

On the Deck Plan tab, click the Straight Staircase Tool. The Staircase Properties bar is displayed. Click on the design window to define the start point of the staircase. A rubber-band staircase, with dimensions, is displayed and follows the pointer.

3

Extend the staircase to the location you want, then rightclick to end drawing mode.

4

(optional) Press and hold the SHIFT key, while drawing, to release the 15 degree constraint.

To draw a curved staircase 1

On the Deck Plan tab, click the Curved Staircase Tool. The Staircase Properties bar is displayed.

2

Click and release on the design window to define the start point of the staircase. A rubber-band staircase, with dimensions, is displayed and follows the pointer.

120

Resizing a staircase 1

On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.

2

Click the centerline of the staircase you want to resize.

3

Click an endpoint or midpoint of the staircase; hold down the mouse button and drag.

Reversing the direction of a staircase 1

On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.

2

Right-click the center line of the staircase you want to alter.

3

Click Reverse Staircase Direction on the pop-up menu that is displayed. The direction of the staircase is reversed.

Note: This works for both curved and straight staircases.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

Chapter 18

Deck Designer Punch! Home Design’s Deck Designer PowerTool makes designing even the most elaborate deck simple and straightforward. When you launch Deck Designer your floorplan is automatically displayed; the Deck Wizard is launched and you are ready to begin.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

121

Chapter

18 Deck Designer

Designing With the Deck Wizard The Deck Wizard makes it a snap to add a deck to your design. The Deck Wizard includes fifteen shapes; in addition, every detail is customizable to suit your needs. To choose a deck shape (step one of three) 1

Open Punch! Deck Designer by clicking the Launch Deck Designer icon on the PowerTools tab. Deck Designer loads and Deck Wizard is automatically launched.

Note: If you do not want the Wizard to launch automatically each time you load Deck Designer, uncheck the Show on Startup box. 2

Click a shape from the choices at the top of the screen. In this example, we will choose the second from the last shape.

3

Type the measurements for each side of the shape, in feet and inches, separated by a hyphen.

6

Click Next.

Note: At any time during the design process, you can go back to previous steps by clicking the Back button.

To customize the features (step two of three) 1

Type the height and elevation in the appropriate dialog boxes, in feet and inches, separated by a hyphen.

Note: To use inches, instead of feet and inches, check the Inches box under Sizing. 4

5

(optional) Click Flip (h) to flip the plan on the horizontal.

(optional) Click Flip (v) to flip the plan on the vertical.

122

Note: The height, elevation and baluster spacing measurements are applied to the entire deck, while the segment measurements are applied only to the selected side (unless you click the Apply to All Sides button).

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

Designing With the Deck Wizard 2

Click the arrow next to the selected side, then click the letter designating the side to be altered, from the drop down menu.

3

Click to uncheck the Include Skirting checkbox, if the selected side does not need skirting.

4

Click to uncheck the Handrails checkbox, if the selected side does not need handrails.

5

(optional) Type a new Handrail Height, in feet and inches, separated by a hyphen.

6

(optional) Type a new Baluster Spacing, in inches.

7

Click Next.

Moving a deck 1

On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.

To add steps (step three of three)

2

Click the deck you want to reposition.

1

Click the arrow next to the selected side, then click the letter designating the side to be altered, from the drop down menu.

3

Click again; hold down the mouse button and drag the deck to the new location.

2

Check the Steps checkbox, if the selected side is to have steps.

Note: For more information on making precision placements, using Snaps, see the chapter titled “Punch! Software Primer”, which begins on page 27. To rotate the deck a specified amount 1

On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.

2

Right-click the deck, then click Select Entire Deck, to select it.

3

Click Rotate on the Edit menu. The Rotate dialog box is displayed.

4

Click either Degrees or Radians, then type the angle you want to rotate the deck in the Angle text box.

5

Click OK. The deck is rotated, based on the angle measurement you specified.

3

(optional) Type a new Width and/or Height dimension, in feet and inches, separated by a hyphen.

4

(optional) Click Left or Right to specify the location of handrails.

5

(optional) Click Open Stairs, if needed.

To freely rotate the deck

6

Click Finish. The deck will be placed in the center of the Deck Designer design window.

1

On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.

2

Right-click the deck, then click Select Entire Deck, to select it.

3 4

On the Standard toolbar, click the Rotate Tool. Click the deck; hold down the mouse button and move the mouse.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

123

Chapter 5

18 Deck Designer

Release the mouse button when the deck is in the position you want.

Drawing a Rectangular Deck

Note: The degree of rotation is displayed in the Status Bar.

The most common shape for a deck will be rectangular and Deck Wizard makes them easy to create.

Designing a Polygon Deck

To draw a rectangular deck

The Polygon Deck tool is a very fast and easy way to begin designing your new deck. With this tool, you can create decks that conform to the shape of your exterior walls.

1

Open Punch! Deck Designer by clicking the Launch Deck Designer icon on the PowerTools tab.

2

Click the Rectangle Deck Tool. The pointer changes to reflect drawing mode.

3

The Rectangle Deck Properties bar is displayed, showing the customizable options for this tool.

4

(optional) Click the Method button to access a different drawing style, then select an option from the pop-up menu that is displayed.

To draw a polygon deck 1

Open Punch! Deck Designer by clicking the Launch Deck Designer icon on the PowerTools tab.

Note: The four predefined drawing methods are draw rectangle from corner, draw rectangle from center, draw square from corner and draw square from center.

2

Click the Polygon Deck Tool. The pointer changes to reflect drawing mode.

3

The Polygon Deck Properties bar is displayed, showing the customizable options for this tool.

4

Click on the design window to define the start point of the polygon. A rubber-band line is displayed and follows the pointer. Dimensions are displayed, as you draw.

5

Click and move the mouse to the next cornerpoint. Repeat until you have drawn the necessary shape.

6

Right-click to end drawing mode.

124

5

Click on the design window to define the start point of the rectangle. A rubber-band rectangle is displayed and follows the pointer. Dimensions are displayed, as you draw.

6

Hold the mouse button down, as you extend the rectangle to the size you want.

12

Drag

7

Release the mouse button.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

Designing a Circular Deck

Designing a Circular Deck

Designing an Arc Deck

Use the Circle Deck Tool to design decking around your pool or hot tub. You can even use this tool to build the beginning level of a gazebo.

The Arc Deck Tool makes drawing circular decks off a side of your home simple. To draw an arc deck

To draw a circular/oval deck

1

1

Open Punch! Deck Designer by clicking the Launch Deck Designer icon on the PowerTools tab.

Open Punch! Deck Designer by clicking the Launch Deck Designer icon on the PowerTools tab.

2

2

Click the Circle/Oval Deck Tool. The pointer changes to reflect drawing mode.

Click the Arc Tool. The pointer changes to reflect drawing mode.

3

3

The Circle Deck Properties bar is displayed, showing the customizable options for this tool.

The Arc Deck Properties bar is displayed, showing the customizable options for this tool.

4

4

(optional) Click the Method button to access a different drawing style, then select an option from the pop-up menu that is displayed.

(optional) Click the Method button to access a different drawing style, then select an option from the pop-up menu that is displayed.

Note: The four predefined drawing methods are draw oval from corner, draw oval from center, draw circle from corner and draw circle from center. 5

6

Click on the design window to define the start point of the shape. A rubber-band shape is displayed and follows the pointer. Dimensions are displayed, as you draw.

Note: The two predefined drawing methods are free-form arc and 90 degree arc. 5

Click on the design window to define the start point of the arc. A rubber-band line is displayed and follows the pointer. Dimensions are displayed, as you draw.

6

Hold the mouse button down, as you extend the arc to the size you want.

Hold the mouse button down, as you extend the shape to the size you want. 12

Drag

7

12

Release the mouse button.

Drag

7

Release the mouse button.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

125

Chapter

18 Deck Designer

Drawing a Circular Arc Deck Easily tuck a deck into any corner of your home’s exterior with the Circular Arc Deck Tool. 2

To draw a circular arc deck 1

Open Punch! Deck Designer by clicking the Launch Deck Designer icon on the PowerTools tab.

2

Click the Circular Arc Deck Tool. The pointer changes to reflect drawing mode.

3

The Circular Arc Deck Properties bar is displayed, showing the customizable options for this tool.

4

Press the mouse button on the design window to define the centerpoint of the circular arc. A rubber-band line is displayed and follows the pointer. This line signifies the radius of your arc.

8

Click to end drawing mode.

Drawing a Multigon Deck You can quickly draw equal-sided decks with the Multigon Deck Tool. To draw a multigon deck 1

Open Punch! Deck Designer by clicking the Launch Deck Designer icon on the PowerTools tab.

2

Click the Multigon Deck Tool. The pointer changes to reflect drawing mode.

3

The Multigon Deck Properties bar is displayed, showing the customizable options for this tool.

4

On the Properties bar, type the number of equal sides you want to draw.

5

Click on the design window to define the start point of the multigon. A rubber-band multigon is displayed and follows the pointer.

6

Hold the mouse button down, as you extend the multigon to the size you want.

Drag

1 2

5

Hold the mouse button down and extend the radius to the size you want. Dimensions appear in the position readout bar as you draw.

6

Release the mouse button.

7

Move the mouse clockwise or counter-clockwise to create the shape you want.

126

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

Adding Custom Railings To draw a straight staircase

Drag

1

Click the Straight Staircase Tool. The Staircase Properties bar is displayed.

2

Click on the design window to define the start point of the staircase. A rubber-band staircase, with dimensions, is displayed and follows the pointer.

3

Extend the staircase to the location you want, then rightclick to end drawing mode.

1 2

To draw a curved staircase 1

Click the Curved Staircase Tool. The Staircase Properties bar is displayed.

2

Click and release on the design window to define the start point of the staircase. A rubber-band staircase, with dimensions, is displayed and follows the pointer.

Note: To change the multigon’s size, but constrain its orientation, press CTRL while drawing.

3

Move in the direction you want the stairs to rise, then click to place the staircase.

Adding Custom Railings

4

(optional) Press and hold the SHIFT key, while drawing, to constrain stairs to a perfect arc.

7

Release the mouse button.

Customizing railings is easy with Punch! AS4000; you can simply add railings to any side of your deck. To draw a straight railing 1

On the Standard toolbar, click the Railing Tool. The Railing Properties bar is displayed.

2

Click on the design window to define the start point of the Railing. A rubber-band Railing, with dimensions, is displayed and follows the pointer.

3

Extend the Railing to the location you want, then rightclick to end drawing mode.

To draw a curved railing 1

Click the Curved Railing Tool. The Railing Properties bar is displayed.

2

Click on the design window to define the start point of the railing. A rubber-band Railing, with dimensions, is displayed and follows the pointer.

Note: The railing will appear angular as it is drawn, but will curve after the next point is set. 3

(optional) Press and hold the SHIFT key, while drawing, to constrain railing to a perfect arc.

Placing a Custom Staircase In addition to the Add Steps feature, Punch! AS4000 gives you the option of easily drawing custom stairs.

Tracing an Exterior Wall Perimeter The two Trace Wall Deck tools make designing a deck against an intricate set of exterior walls simple. At any time during the designing process, you can view your work in 3D. To draw a wall trace perimeter deck 1

Open Punch! Deck Designer by clicking the Launch Deck Designer icon on the PowerTools tab.

2

Click the Trace Wall Perimeter Tool. The pointer changes to reflect drawing mode.

3

Click a wall on the design window to define the start point of the rectangle. A rubber-band rectangle is displayed and follows the pointer. Dimensions are displayed, as you draw.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

127

Chapter 4

5

18 Deck Designer

Hold the mouse button down, as you extend the deck to the size you want.

4

Drag to define the direction you want the deck to be drawn. A rubber-band arrow is displayed and follows the pointer. Release the mouse button.

5

Click the wall where you want to change direction. The deck will conform to the wall perimeter.

6

Click and move the pointer to the next cornerpoint. Repeat until you have completely drawn the deck.

Release the mouse button. The deck will conform to the wall perimeter.

To draw a wall trace perimeter polygon deck 1

Open Punch! Deck Designer by clicking the Launch Deck Designer icon on the PowerTools tab.

2

Click the Trace Wall Perimeter Polygon Tool. The pointer changes to reflect drawing mode.

3

Click a wall on the design window to define the start point.

128

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

Adding and Removing Deck/Railing Points 3

Continue deleting points until you are finished, then right-click to end.

Changing the Deck Height Creating multi-story and multi-level decks is easy. With just a few mouse clicks, you can design a very elaborate and elegant deck. To change deck height

7

Right-click to end drawing mode.

1

On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.

2

Click the side of the deck you want to raise or lower, to select it.

3

On the Properties Bar, in the Deck Height dialog box, type the height, in inches. A positive number raises the deck, while a negative number lowers it.

Note: Fractions of inches are entered in decimal form.

Editing Skirt Trim Options By default, Skirt Trim is included on all sides of the deck. In addition, you may include skirt trim on selected sides. To remove skirt trim Note: Only the edges of the deck that are away from the house perimeter will have railings.

1

On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.

2

Click the side of the deck where you want to remove skirt trim, then on the Deck Properties bar, click to uncheck Skirting.

Adding and Removing Deck/Railing Points You can add or remove deck/railing points at any time to fine-tune your design.

Note: To select more than one side of your deck, hold the SHIFT key down, while clicking sides.

To add a deck/railing point

Editing Handrail Options

1

On the toolbar, click the Add Deck/Railing Point Tool. The pointer changes to reflect drawing mode.

With Punch! Deck Designer, you can easily customize deck options. By default, handrail height is 36" and baluster spacing is set to 6".

2

Click a side of the deck where you want to add a point.

3

Continue adding points until you are finished, then rightclick to end.

To remove a deck/railing point

To remove handrails 1

On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.

2

Click the side of the deck, to select it. The Deck Properties bar is displayed.

1

On the toolbar, click the Remove Deck/Railing Point Tool. The pointer changes to reflect drawing mode.

Note: To select more than one side of your deck, hold the SHIFT key down, while clicking sides.

2

Click on the point you want to remove.

3

Click to uncheck the Include Handrail checkbox.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

129

Chapter

18 Deck Designer

To change handrail height

2

Click the steps you want to alter. The Step Properties bar is displayed. Type the new height, in inches.

1

On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.

2

Click the side of the deck you want to customize.

3

3

On the Properties Bar, in the Handrails Height dialog box, type the height, in inches.

Note: This is especially useful when designing multi-level decks, when you do not want the steps to reach the ground, just the next deck level.

To change baluster spacing 1

On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.

2

Click the side of the deck you want to customize.

3

On the Properties Bar, in the Handrails Baluster Spacing dialog box, type the spacing, in inches.

Editing Step Options Using Punch! Deck Designer, you can add steps to any side of your deck and customize them to meet your needs. By default, steps are added to the center of the deck side, but can be moved easily into any position. To add steps 1

On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.

2

Click the side of the deck where you want to add steps.

3

On the Deck Steps Properties bar, click Insert New. The steps will be inserted in the middle of the selected side.

To resize steps by clicking-and-dragging 1

On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.

2

Click to select the steps you want to resize.

3

Click an endpoint of the steps; hold down the mouse button and drag to resize.

To edit handrail placement 1

On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.

2

Click the steps you want to alter. The Step Properties bar is displayed.

3

Click to uncheck the checkbox next to Handrails on Left (or Right). The handrails on the selected side will be removed.

Modifying a Custom Railing Once you have drawn a railing, you can modify features and location to suit your needs. Using Punch! Deck Designer, you gain total control over railing features, handrail height, baluster spacing and railing posts. Resizing a railing 1

On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.

2

Click to select the railing you want to resize.

3

Click on an endpoint of the railing; hold down the mouse button and drag. The railing is resized.

Modifying a Custom Staircase Once you have drawn a staircase, you can modify features and location to suit your needs. With Punch! AS4000 you have total control over stairway width, riser and tread dimensions and handrail placement. Resizing a staircase

To resize steps by a specific measurement

1

On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.

1

On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.

2

Click the centerline of the staircase you want to resize.

2

Click the steps you want to resize. The Step Properties bar is displayed.

3

Click an endpoint or midpoint of the staircase; hold down the mouse button and drag.

3

Type the new width, in inches.

4

Click again; hold down the mouse button and drag the new staircase into position.

To change the step height 1

On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.

130

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

Using Nudge, Snap Tools and the Grid Customizing staircase features 1

On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.

2

Click the staircase you want to customize. The Staircase Properties bar is displayed.

3

(optional) Type a new staircase height and width.

4

(optional) Check the radio button to add skirt walls.

5

(optional) Type a new step height (riser).

6

(optional) Type a step depth (tread).

7

(optional) Check the radio button for open stairs.

8

(optional) Specify handrail height and location, left or right as you are looking from bottom of staircase.

dropped on the design window are automatically snapped, or placed, to align with the current grid. By default, Snap to Grid is turned on. For more information, see “Using the Grid”, which begins on page 16.

Reversing the direction of a staircase 1

On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.

2

Right-click the centerline of the staircase you want to alter.

3

Click Reverse Staircase Direction on the pop-up menu that is displayed. The direction of the staircase is reversed.

Note: This works for both curved and straight staircases.

Using Nudge, Snap Tools and the Grid Once you’ve placed a roof object, you can precisely move it into position using Nudge. Nudge utilizes the arrow keys to move selected objects or features a specified distance. For more information on using Nudge, see “Using Nudge”, which begins on page 153. Nudge works in tandem with the Snap Grid. To learn more about the Snap Grid, see “Using the Grid”, which begins on page 16. With snaps, you can define exactly where deck objects are placed. You can move through the Snaps Toolbar with the Tab key. Each time you press Tab, the next Snap Tool is activated, Shift-Tab reverses the process. For more information, see “Punch! Software Primer”, which begins on page 27. Grid settings have a direct impact on the ease of aligning deck objects, snapping objects to the grid and so on. When using the Snap to Grid feature, items that are dragged and

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

131

Chapter

132

18 Deck Designer

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

Chapter 19

Landscape Plan Tab From adding a flower bed near your front door to designing an elaborate pool area, Punch! AS4000 contains an extensive toolset to help you design your outdoor living areas. In this chapter, you will learn to add a pond and add pathways and fencing to your home plan. In addition, you can create flower beds that you can landscape, using flowers, shrubs and trees accessible from the Plant Tab.

PowerTools to enhance your design ■ ■ ■

“Topo Designer” on page 49 “Deck Designer” on page 121 “Plant Editor” on page 225

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

133

Chapter

19 Landscape Plan Tab

Defining the Property Line

To draw ground fill region

If you are working in a confined or unusually-shaped area, you may want to define the property lines. The property line will only appear in the 2D design window.

1

On the Landscape Plan tab, click the Ground Fill Tool.

2

Click on the design window to define the start point of the ground fill region. A rubber-band line is displayed and follows the pointer. This line signifies the first edge of the ground fill region. Notice that dimensions are displayed, as you draw.

3

Click and move the pointer to the next cornerpoint. Repeat until you have completely drawn the ground fill region.

4

Right-click to end drawing mode.

5

(optional) Drag and drop materials onto the region in the 3D LiveView window.

To define the property line 1

On the Landscape Plan tab, click the Property Line Tool.

2

Click on the design window to define the start point of the property line. A rubber-band line is displayed and follows the pointer. This line signifies the first edge of the property line. Notice that dimensions are displayed, as you draw.

3

Click and move the pointer to the next cornerpoint. Repeat until you have completely drawn the property line.

4

Right-click to end drawing mode.

To edit the property line 1 2

On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool. Click the property line to select it.

3

Click a cornerpoint of the property line, hold down the mouse button and drag.

4

Click the next selection point, hold down the mouse button and drag.

Adding a Ground Fill Region From simple, rectangular garden entryways and flower beds to elaborate planting areas, Punch! AS4000 makes designing them easy. You can design flower beds to flawlessly integrate with your home design.

134

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

Drawing Sidewalks, Pathways or Driveways

5 To reshape a ground fill region 1

On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.

2

Click a side of the ground fill region you want to reshape.

3

Click a selection point of the ground fill region; hold down the mouse button and drag.

4

Click the next selection point; hold down the mouse button and drag.

Drawing Sidewalks, Pathways or Driveways

Note: While drawing, curved pathways will appear angular, but will curve after the second mouse click. To straighten a curved pathway 1

On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.

2

Click the pathway you want to straighten.

3

Click the Straight radio button on the Properties bar.

To curve a straight pathway

In Punch! AS4000, you can design sidewalks, pathways and driveways, using the same Tool. Once a pathway is drawn, you can customize it by applying any material to suit your needs. For more information on color and material, see the chapter titled “Working with LiveView”, which begins on page 157. To add a pathway 1

On the Landscape Plan tab, click the Pathway Tool.

2

(optional) Type a new width, in the text box, on the Properties bar.

3

Click on the design window to define the start point of the pathway. A rubber-band line is displayed and follows the pointer. Notice that dimensions are displayed, as you draw.

4

Right-click to end drawing mode.

Click and move the pointer to the next point. Repeat until you have completely drawn the pathway.

1

On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.

2

Right-click the pathway you want to curve.

3

Click the Curved radio button on the Properties bar.

To reshape a pathway 1

On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.

2

Click the center line of the pathway you want to reshape.

3

Click a selection point of the pathway; hold down the mouse button and drag.

4

Click the next selection point; hold down the mouse button and drag.

To change the width of a pathway 1

On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.

2

Click the center line of the pathway, to select it. The Pathway Properties bar is displayed.

3

Type a new width, in inches, or feet and inches, separated by a hyphen.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

135

Chapter

19 Landscape Plan Tab

Adding Fill You can use the Fill tool to show mulch around trees or shrubs or to add a pond or stream to your landscaping. To mulch around a tree 1

On the Landscape tab, click the Fill Tool.

2

Click on the design window; hold down the mouse button and drag. A rubber-band shape is displayed and follows the pointer. Notice that dimensions are displayed, as you draw.

3

Release the mouse button.

4

(optional) Move the fill area into position, if necessary.

Note: By default, mulch material will be applied to the shape you drew. To apply different mulch material, see “To apply material” on page 180.

or materials to the edging so it blends with your home plan’s color scheme. For more information on color and material, see the chapter titled “Working with LiveView”, which begins on page 157. To draw straight edging 1

On the Landscape Plan tab, click the Edging Tool.

2

Click the Straight radio button on the Properties bar.

3

Click on the design window to define the start point of the edging. A rubber-band line is displayed and follows the pointer. Notice that dimensions are displayed, as you draw.

4

Move the pointer to the next point. Right-click to end drawing mode.

To add a pond 1

On the Landscape tab, click the Fill Tool.

2

Click on the design window; hold down the mouse button and drag the shape pond you want.

3

Release the mouse button.

4

Click the Materials Toolbar, then click the arrow to the right of the word Materials above the Preview Bar and select Mulch.

5

Scroll to view the available materials, until you locate the water textures.

6

Drag and drop the water texture onto the pond in the 3D LiveView window.

To draw curved edging 1

On the Landscape Plan tab, click the Edging Tool.

Edging an Area Punch! AS4000 makes it easy to place edging around flower beds or along walkways. Once drawn, you can apply colors

136

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

Drawing Fences and Gates 2

Click the Curved radio button on the Properties bar.

2

Click Custom. The Custom Fence properties are displayed.

3

Click on the design window to define the start point of the edging. A rubber-band line is displayed and follows the pointer. Notice that dimensions are displayed, as you draw.

3

For this example, type the following measurements:

4 5

■ ■

Click and move the pointer to the next point. Repeat until you have completely drawn the edging.

■

Right-click to end drawing mode.

■

Note: While drawing, the lines will appear angular, but will curve after the second mouse click. To straighten curved edging 1

On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.

2

Click the edging you want to straighten.

3

Click the Straight radio button on the Properties bar.

■

Span Length - 72" Span Height - 48" Post Width - 2" Post Height - 48" Gate Height - 48"

Note: Press ENTER after each entry. Note: You can use other measurements to suit your needs. 4

Click on the design window to define the start point of the fence. A rubber-band line is displayed and follows the pointer. Notice that dimensions are displayed, as you draw.

To curve straight edging 1

On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.

2

Right-click the edging you want to curve.

3

Click the Curved radio button on the Properties bar.

To reshape edging 1

On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.

2

Click the edging you want to reshape.

3

Click a selection point of the edging; hold down the mouse button and drag.

4

Click the next selection point; hold down the mouse button and drag.

Start

Point 5

Click and move the pointer to the next point. Repeat until you have completely drawn the fence.

6

Right-click to end drawing mode.

Drawing Fences and Gates With Punch! AS4000, you can draw fences and gates with ease. Once a fence or gate is drawn, you can customize it by applying any material. For more information on color and material, see the chapter titled “Working with LiveView”, which begins on page 157. The following example will show you how to draw a typical fence of chain link. The material is a custom fencing material. To add and customize a fence 1

On the Landscape Plan tab, click the Fence Tool. The Properties bar displays available fence styles.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

137

Chapter

19 Landscape Plan Tab

7

Click the Materials Tab.

11 Click the Colors Tab.

8

On the Materials Tab, click the arrow next to “Materials”, then Custom & Brand Name Materials from the menu.

12 At the top of the Preview Bar, click the down arrow next to “Colors”, then click Gray Tones from the drop down menu. The color palette is displayed on the Preview Bar. 13 Select a gray to simulate the steel posts and drag and drop that color onto the posts in your LiveView window.

9

At the top of the Preview Bar, click the down arrow next to “Materials”, then click Custom Fences, then select the type of fence you want to use. Custom fence material options appear in the Preview Bar.

To reshape a fence 1

On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.

2

Click the fence you want to reshape.

3

Click a selection point of the fence; hold down the mouse button and drag.

4

Click the next selection point; hold down the mouse button and drag.

To add a gate 10 Click Chain-Linked. Drag and drop the chain link material onto your fence in the LiveView window.

138

1

On the Landscape Plan tab, click the Gate Tool. The Properties bar displays available gate widths.

2

(optional) Type a new gate width in the text box on the Properties bar.

3

On the Design window, click the fence where you want a gate placed.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

Using Fence Designer Images Note: The style of the gate will always conform to the fencing material; i.e., if a gate is placed on a privacy fence, the gate will be a privacy fence gate. To resize a gate

Drawing Retaining Walls Punch! AS4000 makes it easy to add interest and functionality to your outdoor living areas by adding retaining walls. Retaining walls can be used to create raised planting beds, to line an above-ground swimming pool and so on.

1

On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.

2

Click the gate you want to resize.

To draw a retaining wall

3

Type a new width in the Gate Properties text box.

1

On the Landscape tab, click the Retaining Wall Tool.

4

(optional) Click an endpoint of the gate; hold down the mouse button and drag.

2

5

Release the mouse button. The gate is resized.

Click on the design window; hold down the mouse button and drag. Notice that the retaining wall follows the pointer and automatically displays the length.

3

Release the mouse button when you reach the wall length you want.

4

Repeat steps 2 and 3, drawing individual walls, until the retaining wall is complete.

Using Fence Designer Images Once you’ve created your own custom fence or gate materials in Fence Designer, see “Fence Designer”, which begins on page 267, you can easily apply them back in your Punch! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 project. After you’ve drawn a fence on the Landscaping tab, simply navigate to the library where you stored the new image, and drag the image to the fence in your LiveView window.

Existing Exterior Wall

To apply Fence Designer images 1

Click the Materials Tab. The Preview Bar will display materials available for placement.

2

Click the black arrow on the Materials tab and click Custom Material Library on the pop-up menu that is displayed.

3

At the top of the Preview Bar, click the down arrow next to “Materials”, then click Custom Fences, then select the type of fence you want to use. Custom fence material options appear in the Preview Bar.

4

Click the custom fence material you want to apply; hold down the mouse button and drag it onto the fence or gate in the LiveView window. The custom fence material you selected is applied.

Note: Drawing is constrained to 15 degree angles; to release this constraint, hold down the SHIFT key, while drawing. Note: If you don’t see automatic dimensioning, while you draw, it may be turned off. To enable automatic dimensioning, click to check Automatic Dimensioning, on the Options menu.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

139

Chapter

19 Landscape Plan Tab

To change wall height 1

On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.

2

Click a wall segment in your drawing, to select it. The Wall Properties bar is displayed.

3

Type a new height in the Wall Style section of the Wall Properties bar.

Note: Measurements are measured in inches, or in feet and inches, separated by a hyphen.

Placing Sprinkler Heads Punch! AS4000 will be useful to define where the sprinkler heads of an outdoor water system should be placed. To place a sprinkler head

Note: By placing a series of sprinkler heads, with various coverages, you will achieve a complete watering pattern.

1

On the Landscape tab, click the Sprinkler Tool.

Excavating Topography

2

On the Design window, click to define the center of the sprinkler area and drag. A rubber-band line is displayed and follows the pointer. Notice that dimensions are displayed, as you draw, measuring the radius of the sprinkler area.

From earth-contact homes to split front-to-back lots, you can excavate the footprint of your floor plan with ease. To excavate an area 1

On the Landscape tab, click the Excavate Topography Tool.

2

Click on the design window to define the start point of the area to be excavated. A rubber-band line is displayed and follows the pointer. Notice that dimensions are displayed, as you draw.

Note: Drawing is constrained to 15 degree angles; to release this constraint, hold down the SHIFT key, while drawing. 3

Hold the mouse button down and drag, until the degree of coverage is reached.

3

Click and move the pointer to the next cornerpoint. Repeat until you have completely drawn the area.

4

Release the mouse button.

4

Right-click to end drawing mode.

5

(optional) On the left side of the screen, drag the Elevation Slider down to the level needed for your excavation.

Note: Default elevation is -3' (negative three feet).

5

Click to set the swing of the sprinkler head.

140

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

Chapter 20

Detail Plan Tab Punch! AS4000 provides tools specifically for 2D drawing. Items drawn with these tools will not show up in the 3D LiveView window, unless converted to 3D entities. These tools make it easy to label your plan, from description blocks that are used to label what is being printed on each page to notations about square footage on each floor. In addition, using the tools on the Detail Plan Tab, you will be able to easily convert imported DXF/DWG shapes to various “smart entities” like walls, stairways, flooring, property lines and so on.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

141

Chapter

20 Detail Plan Tab

Drawing Rectangles and Squares

Drawing Circles and Ovals

With Punch! AS4000, you can draw items that will appear only in the 2D design window. If you choose, these shapes can be converted to a variety of features, for instance walls, stairways, pathways, edging and so on.

You can draw circles and ovals, which can be converted to curved walls, curved stairways, groundfill regions and so on.

Rectangles can be used as label boxes for your printed plans or can be converted to walls or flooring. Using the Snap tools, you can easily create and place these shapes before converting them into other features. For more information, see “Punch! Software Primer”, which begins on page 27.

1

On the Detail Plan tab, click the Circle Tool. The pointer changes to reflect drawing mode.

2

The Detail Object Properties bar is displayed, showing the customizable options for this tool.

3

(optional) Click the Method button to access a different drawing style, then select an option from the pop-up menu that is displayed.

To draw rectangles and squares 1

On the Detail Plan tab, click the Rectangle Tool. The pointer changes to reflect drawing mode.

2

The Detail Object Properties bar is displayed, showing the customizable options for this tool.

3

(optional) Click the Method button to access a different drawing style, then select an option from the pop-up menu that is displayed.

Note: The four predefined drawing methods are draw rectangle from corner, draw rectangle from center, draw square from corner and draw square from center. 4

Click on the design window to define the start point of the rectangle. A rubber-band rectangle is displayed and follows the pointer. Dimensions are displayed as you draw.

5

Hold the mouse button down as you extend the rectangle to the size you want.

To draw circles and ovals

Note: The four predefined drawing methods are draw oval from corner, draw oval from center, draw circle from corner and draw circle from center. 4

Click on the design window to define the start point of the shape. A rubber-band shape is displayed and follows the pointer. Dimensions are displayed as you draw.

5

Hold the mouse button down as you extend the shape to the size you want.

1 2

Drag

12

6

Release the mouse button.

Drawing Lines You can draw lines that can in turn be converted to walls, stairs, ducts, stiffener beams, edging, pathways and so on. Dr ag

6

Release the mouse button.

To draw lines 1

On the Detail Plan tab, click the Line Tool. The pointer changes to reflect drawing mode.

142

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

Drawing Polygons 2

The Detail Object Properties bar is displayed, showing the customizable options for this tool.

3

(optional) Click the Method button to access a different drawing style, then select an option from the pop-up menu that is displayed.

Note: The two predefined drawing methods are draw from endpoint and draw from centerpoint. 4

5

12

2

52

Click on the design window to define the start point of the line. A rubber-band line is displayed and follows the pointer. Dimensions are displayed, as you draw.

42

32

6

Hold the mouse button down, as you extend the line to the length you want.

2

Right-click to end drawing mode.

Drawing Arcs With Punch! AS4000 you can draw arcs that can be easily converted into curved walls, edging, stairs and so on.

12

Drag

To draw an arc

Drawing Polygons

1

You can draw open or closed polygons that can be easily converted into walls, roof sections, floors or floor cutouts, topography and so on.

On the Detail Plan tab, click the Arc Tool. The pointer changes to reflect drawing mode.

2

The Detail Object Properties bar is displayed, showing the customizable options for this tool.

To draw a polygon

3

(optional) Click the Method button to access a different drawing style, then select an option from the pop-up menu that is displayed.

1

On the Detail Plan tab, click the Polygon Tool. The pointer changes to reflect drawing mode.

2

The Detail Object Properties bar is displayed, showing the customizable options for this tool.

3

(optional) Click the Method button to access a different drawing style, then select an option from the pop-up menu that is displayed.

Note: The two predefined drawing methods are closed polygon and open polygon. 4

Click on the design window to define the start point of the polygon. A rubber-band line is displayed and follows the pointer. Dimensions are displayed, as you draw.

5

Click and move the mouse to the next cornerpoint. Repeat until you have drawn the necessary shape.

Note: The two predefined drawing methods are free-form arc and 90 degree arc. 4

Click on the design window to define the start point of the arc. A rubber-band line is displayed and follows the pointer. Dimensions are displayed, as you draw.

5

Hold the mouse button down, as you extend the arc to the size you want.

12

Dr ag

6

Release the mouse button.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

143

Chapter

20 Detail Plan Tab

Drawing Circular Arcs With Punch! AS4000, you can draw arcs that can be easily converted into curved walls, edging, stairs and so on. 2

To draw a circular arc 1

On the Detail Plan tab, click the Circular Arc Tool. The pointer changes to reflect drawing mode.

2

The Detail Object Properties bar is displayed, showing the customizable options for this tool.

3

Press the mouse button on the design window to define the centerpoint of the circular arc. A rubber-band line is displayed and follows the pointer. This line signifies the radius of your arc.

Drag

7

Click to end drawing mode.

Drawing Multigons You can draw equal-sided decks, floors, even treehouses with the easy-to-use Multigon Tool and the Convert To feature. For more information, see “Converting Details to Intelligent Features”, which begins on page 146. To draw a multigon 1

On the Detail Plan tab, click the Multigon Tool. The pointer changes to reflect drawing mode.

2

The Detail Object Properties bar is displayed, showing the customizable options for this tool.

3

On the Properties bar, type the number of equal sides you want to draw.

4

Click on the design window to define the start point of the multigon. A rubber-band multigon is displayed and follows the pointer.

5

Hold the mouse button down, as you extend the multigon to the size you want.

1 2

4

Hold the mouse button down and extend the radius to the size you want. Dimensions appear in the position readout bar, as you draw.

5

Release the mouse button.

6

Move the mouse clockwise or counter-clockwise to create the shape you want.

Drag

12

144

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

Drawing Curves 6

To change the line style

Release the mouse button.

Note: To change the multigon’s size, but constrain its orientation, press CTRL while drawing.

1

On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.

2

Click a shape to select it.

Drawing Curves

3

On the Detail Plan tab, click the Rule Style icon. The Rule Style drop-down box is displayed.

4

Click a style on the drop-down box. The style of the rule outlining the detail shape is changed.

You can draw intricate curved flowerbeds and walls, among many other things, using the Curve Tool and the Convert To feature of Punch! AS4000. To draw a curve 1

On the Detail Plan tab, click the Curve Tool. The pointer changes to reflect drawing mode.

2

The Detail Object Properties bar is displayed, showing the customizable options for this tool.

3

(optional) Click the Method button to access a different drawing style, then select an option from the pop-up menu that is displayed.

To set the fill to transparent 1

On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.

2

Click a shape to select it.

3

On the Detail Plan tab, click the Transparent Fill icon. The shape is transparent.

Note: The two predefined drawing methods are closed curve and open curve. 4

Click on the design window to define the start point of the curve. A rubber-band curve is displayed and follows the pointer.

5

Click and move the mouse to the next point. Repeat until you have drawn the needed shape.

Note: Although the lines will initially appear to be angular, they will become curved when you end drawing mode.

To set the fill to white 1

On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.

6

2

Click a shape to select it.

3

On the Detail Plan tab, click the White Fill icon. The shape is filled with white.

Double-click to end drawing mode.

Using Rules and Fills You can change the thickness (weight) of the lines or fills of the shapes drawn with tools on the Details Plan tab. To change the line weight 1

On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.

2

Click a shape to select it.

3

On the Detail Plan tab, click the Rule Weight icon. The Rule Weight drop-down box is displayed.

4

Click a weight on the drop-down box. The weight of the rule outlining the detail shape is changed.

To set the fill to solid

(optional) Click Other to define a custom weight.

1

On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.

2

Click a shape to select it.

5

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

145

Chapter 3

20 Detail Plan Tab

On the Detail Plan tab, click the Solid Fill icon. The shape is filled with a solid color.

Converting Details to Intelligent Features With Punch! AS4000, you can draw items that will appear only in the 2D design window or you can convert them to intelligent features. For example, you can convert a line to a fence, a rectangle to four exterior walls, a circle to a deck or even a circular stairway, and so on. There is virtually no limit to what you can draw using this combination. Following are a few examples of what this powerful process can do! To convert a rectangle to your property line

To set the fill to a pattern 1

On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.

2

Click a shape to select it.

3

On the Detail Plan tab, click one of the Pattern Fill icons. The shape is filled with that pattern.

1

On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.

2

Click a rectangle to select it.

3

The Detail Object Properties bar is displayed, showing the customizable options for this tool.

4

Click the Convert To button on the Properties bar, then click Property Line on the pop-up menu.

5

The rectangle is converted to a property line.

To control layering of detail shapes 1

On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.

2

Click a shape to select it.

3

The Detail Object Properties bar is displayed, showing the customizable options for this shape.

4

Click the Bring to Front button on the Properties bar, to place the selected shape on the top of the other shapes.

5

(optional) Click the Send to Back button, on the Properties bar, to place the selected shape behind the other shapes.

146

To convert an oval to a deck 1

On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.

2

Click an oval to select it.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

Editing Detail Shapes 3

The Detail Object Properties bar is displayed, showing the customizable options for this tool.

4

Click the Convert To button on the Properties bar, then click Deck without Railing on the pop-up menu.

7

The Plant Fill dialog box is displayed.

8

Click the checkbox next to the option you want to use.

9

Type the plant spacing in the text box, then click OK.

Editing Detail Shapes 5

Object-Level Editing is active by default. Object-Level Editing, along with Point-Level Editing, controls how your edits impact your object. If you are in object selection mode, changes affect the object as a whole. If you are working in point selection mode, each edge of the object is treated separately, as you edit. To fine-tune your design further, use the Insert Point or Delete Point tools. These tools are available anytime, but are especially useful when editing shapes.

The oval is converted to a deck.

To use object selection mode

Filling a shape with plants 1

On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.

2

Click the Plants Tab. The Preview Bar will display plants available for placement.

3

At the top of the Preview Bar, click the down arrow next to “Plants” to display the plant category menu, then click to check the type of plants you want to place.

4

Use the scroll bar to view the remainder of the plant selections in the Preview Bar.

5

On the Preview Bar, click the plant you want to place.

6

Right-click a shape, then click Plant Fill on the pop-up menu that is displayed.

1

On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.

2

Click a Detail shape to select it. The Properties bar for this shape is displayed.

3

On the Properties bar, click Object in the Edit Level section.

4

Click the object and drag it into the new position or shape.

5

Release the mouse to end.

To use point selection mode 1

On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.

2

Click a Detail shape to select it. The Properties bar for this shape is displayed.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

147

Chapter

20 Detail Plan Tab

3

On the Properties bar, click Point in the Edit Level section.

4

4

Click a point on the object and drag it into the new position to reshape it.

Examples:

Type the amount of Curve Tension that you want. The Curve Tension you specified is applied.

Unsmooth (0):

Curve Tension set at 3: 5

Release the mouse to end.

To insert a point 1

On the Snaps toolbar, click the Insert Point Tool.

2

Click a shape where you want to add a point. A point is added at each click.

Curve Tension set at 6:

To delete a point 1

On the Snaps toolbar, click the Delete Point Tool.

2

Click the point you want deleted.

Adding Smoothing Tension To further control the look of the shapes drawn with any tool on the Detail Plan tab, you have control over the degree of smoothing tension applied to them. Clicking Straighten on the Properties bar will easily create angular shapes; while clicking Adjust allows you to specify precise smoothing tension. Specifying 0 in the dialog box results in no tension being applied, while specifying 10 will cause an exaggerated curve.

Curve Tension set at 10:

To change smoothing tension 1

On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.

2

Click a Detail shape to select it. The Properties bar for this shape is displayed.

3

On the Properties bar, click Adjust in the Curve section. The Smooth dialog box is displayed.

148

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

Part 5

Customizing Your Drawing Chapter 21: Chapter 22: Chapter 23: Chapter 24:

Editing Your Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Working with LiveView . . . . . . . . . . . . . Personalizing Your Design . . . . . . . . . . . Material Workshop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

151 157 169 183

Chapter 21

Editing Your Drawing In addition to standard Windows commands like cut, copy, paste and delete, Punch! AS4000 includes more sophisticated modes of manipulating your design. You can copy or move objects, walls and so on, to different floors as well as between plan layers. You can flip your entire design either vertically or horizontally to make it easy to view it from any angle or from any direction. In addition, you can move or rotate your entire floor plan at one time. More advanced concepts are also covered in this chapter, such as rotating individual objects to custom fit them into your design and elevating objects using the Elevation Slider to achieve perfect placement. Learn to customize settings like nudge factor, so Punch! AS4000 works best for you.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

151

Chapter

21 Editing Your Drawing

Editing Using Cut, Copy, Paste and Clear Cut moves the selection to the Clipboard and deletes the original. Copy places a duplicate of the selection on the Clipboard. Paste places the contents of the Clipboard into your drawing. You can place the Clipboard contents as many times as necessary. Clear removes the selection. To edit using the cut command 1 2

On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool. Click the selection you want to cut.

3

On the Edit menu, click Cut or press CTRL+X on the keyboard. The selection is removed to the Clipboard.

2

Click the Deactivate Undo (Faster) box, then click OK.

To set undo parameters 1

On the Edit menu, click Undo Preferences, the Undo Preferences dialog box is displayed.

2

Type the number of undo levels you want to use; click OK.

To edit using the copy command 1

On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.

To use redo

2

Click the selection you want to copy.

■

3

On the Edit menu, click Copy or press CTRL+C on the keyboard. The selection is copied to the Clipboard.

To edit using the paste command 1

On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.

2

On the Edit menu, click Paste or press CTRL+V on the keyboard. The selection is copied from the Clipboard to the design window.

Copying Objects to Different Floors There may be times when you want multiple floors to contain duplicates. Copy to Floor leaves the object in its original position and places a duplicate where you define. To copy from one floor to another 1

On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.

2

Click the object or objects you want duplicated.

3

On the Edit menu, click Copy to Floor, Upper Floor. Select Lower Floor if you want to copy the original down one level.

To edit using the clear command 1

On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.

2

Click the selection you want to cut.

3

On the Edit menu, click Clear or press DELETE on the keyboard. The selection is removed from your design.

Using Undo With Punch! AS4000, you can specify up to 50 levels of Undo, making it easy to recover your work. Bear in mind, the more levels of undo you specify, the more system resources will be used. To conserve system resources, set the undo level at the lowest level possible. To use undo ■

On the Edit menu, click Undo or press CTRL+Z. The previous action is reversed.

To turn off undo 1

On the Edit menu, click Undo Preferences, the Undo Preferences dialog box is displayed.

152

On the Edit menu, click Redo or press CTRL+Y. The previous action is reversed.

Moving Objects to Different Floors With Punch! AS4000, you can move selections between plan layers; Move to Floor deletes these objects from their original position. To move objects or features from one floor to another 1

On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

Moving Features to Different Plans 2

3

Click the object or objects you want moved. To select more than one object, press the SHIFT key while clicking objects. On the Edit menu, click Move to Floor, Upper Floor. Select Lower Floor if you want to move the original down one level.

To move features from one plan to another

2

Click the feature or object you want moved. To select more than one object, press the SHIFT key, while clicking objects.

3

4

3

Click OK. The plan is moved, based on the coordinates you specified.

Rotating the Entire Floor Plan

With Punch! AS4000, you can move selections to different plan layers; Move to Floor deletes these objects from their original position. This will be useful if you want to move a feature between two stories that you have drawn.

On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.

Click either Cartesian or Polar, then type amount you want the plan moved in the appropriate text boxes.

Note: Coordinates are measured in inches or they can be measured in feet and inches, separated by a hyphen.

Moving Features to Different Plans

1

2

On the Edit menu, click Move to Plan, then specify the plan where you want the feature to appear.

At any point during the design process, you can rotate the entire plan. With just a couple of mouse clicks, you can see how your dream home will look facing a different direction on your lot. To rotate the entire floor plan 1

On the Design menu, click Rotate Entire Plan. The Rotate Entire Plan dialog box is displayed.

2

Click either Degrees or Radians, then type the angle you want to rotate the plan in the Angle text box.

3

Click OK. The plan is rotated, based on the angle measurement you specified.

Flipping the Entire Floor Plan

(optional) Right-click the selection and click Move to Plan on the pop-up menu that is displayed, then click which plan. The selection is moved to a different plan.

With Punch! AS4000 you can create a mirror image of your floor plan. It is easy to see how your plan will look from various angles and directions. To flip the floor plan vertically ■

Moving the Entire Floor Plan At any point during the design process, you can move the entire plan. With just a couple of mouse clicks, you can see how your dream home will look on different parts of your lot. To move the entire floor plan 1

On the Design menu, click Move Entire Plan. The Move Entire Plan dialog box is displayed.

On the Design menu, click Flip Entire Plan, then select Vertical. The floor plan is flipped.

To flip the floor plan horizontally ■

On the Design menu, click Flip Entire Plan, then select Horizontal. The floor plan is flipped.

Using Nudge Once you’ve placed an object or feature, you can precisely move it into position using Nudge. Nudge utilizes the arrow

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

153

Chapter

21 Editing Your Drawing

keys to move selected objects or features a specified distance. Nudge works in tandem with the Snap Grid. To learn more about the Snap Grid, refer to “Using the Grid” on page 16.

2

Click the object, wall or feature you want to rotate.

3

On the Standard toolbar, click the Rotate Tool.

4

Click the object; hold down the mouse button and move the pointer in the direction that you want the object to rotate. Degree of rotation will appear in the status bar as you draw. Press SHIFT to release the 45 degree constraint.

5

Release the mouse button.

To adjust Nudge settings 1

On the Options menu, confirm there is a check next to Snap to Grid. This confirms that the Snap Grid is activated.

2

On the Options menu, click Grid Properties or press CTRL+G. The Grid Properties dialog box is displayed.

Note: The item rotates around its centerpoint. To rotate by specifying an amount

3 4

1

On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.

2

Click the object, wall or feature you want to rotate.

3

Right-click the selection and click Rotate on the pop-up menu that is displayed.

Enter, in inches, the Snap Grid distance you want to set. Click OK.

4

On the Edit menu, click Nudge, then click the direction (up, down, left, right) or use the arrow keys on your keyboard.

Type, in degrees or radians, the amount you want to rotate the object and click OK. The object is rotated.

Customizing Floorplan Colors

Note: When the “Snap to Grid” is turned off, Nudge moves the object or feature one pixel at a time instead of snapping to grid distance.

Punch! AS4000 gives you the option of assigning custom colors to areas of your design. All floorplan colors can be changed by accessing the Options Menu.

To move a selection using the Nudge feature

To assign a working floor color

1

On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.

1

2

Click the object or feature to select it.

On the Options menu, click Screen Colors, then click Working Floor Color. The Color matrix will appear.

3

On the Edit menu, click Nudge, then click the direction (up, down, left, right).

4

(optional) Use the arrow keys on your keyboard to nudge the object or feature.

2

Click a color from the Basic Color list. Click OK.

Rotating a Selection Using the rotate feature, you can easily spin an object around any point. This is useful when you want to face an object in a different direction from which it was drawn. Using the Rotate tool you can freely rotate the selection or you can specify the exact amount of rotation using the Rotate dialog box. To freely rotate an object 1

On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.

154

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

Elevating Objects Note: The Color|Solid preview box will display the chosen color.

6

(optional) Type Hue, Saturation and Luminosity variables. Click OK.

3

(optional) Click a color from the Custom Colors list. Click OK.

7

(optional) Type Red, Green and Blue variables. Click OK.

4

(optional) Move the arrow to the right of the colorbar at the right of the Color dialog box. Click OK.

5

(optional) On the Color Spectrum box, click a color or click-and-drag the color marker. Click OK.

6

(optional) Type Hue, Saturation and Luminosity variables. Click OK.

7

(optional) Type Red, Green and Blue variables. Click OK.

To assign an inactive floor color

To reset all colors ■

On the Options menu, click Screen Colors, then click Reset Colors. All colors will be reset to the default values.

Elevating Objects The elevate object command will be extremely useful. From “lifting” lamps onto tables to elevating planters and benches onto your deck, exact placement is easy.

1

On the Options menu, click Screen Colors, then click Inactive Floor Color. The Color matrix will appear.

To elevate an object 1

On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.

2

Click a color from the Basic Color list. Click OK.

2

Click the object, wall or feature you want to elevate.

3

On the Edit menu, click Set Elevation. The Set Elevation dialog box is displayed.

Type the amount you want to elevate the object and click OK. The object is elevated.

Note: The Color|Solid preview box will display the chosen color. 3

(optional) Click a color from the Custom Colors list. Click OK.

4

(optional) Move the arrow to the right of the colorbar at the right of the Color dialog box. Click OK.

5

(optional) On the Color Spectrum box, click a color or click-and-drag the color marker. Click OK.

4

6

(optional) Type Hue, Saturation and Luminosity variables. Click OK.

7

(optional) Type Red, Green and Blue variables. Click OK.

Note: To specifying an amount in inches you may use either 18 or 18". To specify an amount in feet and inches they must be separated by a hyphen, for instance 18-0, 8'-6" and so on. A single number like 20, 20" or even 20', will be understood as 20 inches.

To assign a background color 1

On the Options menu, click Screen Colors, then click Background Color. The Color matrix will appear.

2

Click a color from the Basic Color list. Click OK.

5

(optional) The Float Above Topography switch causes objects to follow the lay of the land.

Note: The Color|Solid preview box will display the chosen color. 3

(optional) Click a color from the Custom Colors list. Click OK.

4

(optional) Move the arrow to the right of the colorbar at the right of the Color dialog box. Click OK.

5

(optional) On the Color Spectrum box, click a color or click-and-drag the color marker. Click OK.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

155

Chapter

21 Editing Your Drawing

Using Elevation Slider

4

With the Elevation Slider, you can easily move selected items vertically. This feature makes it a snap to make sure windows, doors, plants and so on, are in exactly the position you want.

Note: All selected objects will be reset to the elevation specified, even if the objects were originally located at various elevations.

To use the elevation slider

To make features follow custom topography

1

On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.

1

2

Click the object, wall or feature you want to elevate.

On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.

2

Click the feature(s) you want to follow the custom topography.

3

Right-click the Elevation Slider at the left side of your window and click Float Above Topography from the pop-up menu that is displayed.

4

(optional) Right-click the Elevation Slider at the left side of your window and click Set Elevation from the pop-up menu that is displayed.

5

Check the box which specifies Float Above Topography. Click OK.

3

4

Click the Elevation Slider at the left side of your window and move the elevation control up or down until the object is in the correct position. Release the mouse. The elevation of the object is changed.

To set the working elevation 1

Type the elevation in inches or feet and inches, separated with a hyphen. Click OK.

Right-click the Elevation Slider at the left side of your window and click Set Working Elevation from the popup menu that is displayed.

2

In the Set Working Elevation dialog box, type the necessary elevation in inches, or feet and inches, separated with a hyphen. Click OK.

3

(optional) Right-click, while nothing is selected, and click Set Working Elevation from the pop-up menu that is displayed.

To set the elevation of a group of objects 1

On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.

2

Press SHIFT and click each object you want to elevate.

3

Right-click the Elevation Slider at the left side of your window and click Set Elevation from the pop-up menu that is displayed.

156

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

Chapter 22

Working with LiveView Punch! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 lets you view your home in photo-realistic 3D. You can select exterior and interior wall color, add realistic roof materials and select from a variety of wood textures to make your home design completely unique. In the LiveView Window, you can view your design from a variety of angles. Using the Designer Palettes, you can easily make changes to your decorating theme. This makes it easy to experiment with a variety of color schemes, both inside and outside your home, before picking up a paintbrush! With the powerful ClearView feature, you can literally see through the walls and view electrical, plumbing and so on.

Walk-Through and Fly-Around

Rendering Style Selector

Controlled Walk-Through and Fly-Around

Lighting

Render Final View

Show/Hide Feature Control

Shadows

Designer Palette

3D Cutaway Slider

Camera Angle

Designer Palette Access

Translucency Slider Select Material/Paint

Viewing Speed

Viewpoint Directions

Save LiveView Views

3D Selection

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

157

Chapter

22 Working with LiveView

Opening a LiveView Window There are three pre-set LiveView window sizes, but you are not limited to those three views. The LiveView window can be repositioned and resized to fit your requirements. All LiveView window pre-set sizes are accessible from the rightclick plan options menu.

To display a 3D view only ■

On the Window menu, click 3D Full View or click the 3D Full View icon or right-click, while nothing is selected, and click 3D Full View from the pop-up menu that is displayed.

To display the 2D plan view and a small 3D view ■

On the Window menu, click 3D Quarter View or click the 3D Quarter View icon or right-click while nothing is selected and click 3D Quarter View from the pop-up menu that is displayed.

Moving around in 3D

To display a split 2D and 3D view ■

On the Window menu, click Split Plan/3D View or click the Split Plan/3D View icon or right-click, while nothing is selected, and click Split Plan/3D View from the pop-up menu that is displayed.

Punch! AS4000 provides two interactive 3D viewing options, the 3D Walk-Through and Fly-Around views. Using interactive viewing, you can vary the viewing level by adjusting the altitude and height. Viewing speed and camera angle can also be adjusted to provide the best viewing capabilities available. To view your home using Walk-Through 1

Open a LiveView window, as explained previously.

2

On the View menu, click 3D Viewing Method, Walk-Through or click the Walk-Through button on the LiveView window.

3

Position the mouse pointer in the LiveView window, then click and drag up to move inward.

4

Position the mouse pointer in the LiveView window, then click and drag down to move outward.

To view your home using Controlled Walk-Through

158

1

Open a LiveView window, as explained previously.

2

Click the Controlled Walk-Through button on the LiveView window.

3

To look left, position the mouse pointer in the LiveView window, then click and drag left.

4

To look right, position the mouse pointer in the LiveView window, then click and drag right.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

Accessing the Rendering Styles 5

To look up, position the mouse pointer in the LiveView window, then click and drag away from you.

2

6

To look down, position the mouse pointer in the LiveView window, then click and drag toward you.

Note: The placement of the icon will be the point that the helicopter revolves around.

To change Walk-Through elevation with the mouse ■

Press and hold the right mouse button down to raise and lower the viewpoint, alternately.

To specify an absolute Fly-Around altitude 1

Open a LiveView window, as explained previously.

2

On the View menu, click 3D Viewing Method, FlyAround Altitude. The Fly-Around Altitude dialog box is displayed.

3

Type a new elevation measurement, then click OK.

To specify an absolute Walk-Through elevation 1

Open a LiveView window, as explained previously.

2

On the View menu, click 3D Viewing Method, WalkThrough Elevation. The Walk-Through Elevation dialog box is displayed.

3

Type a new elevation measurement in inches, then click OK.

On the design window, click the center of reference icon and drag it to a new position.

To adjust the 3D camera angle 1

Open a LiveView window, as explained previously.

2

At the bottom of the LiveView window, click the right camera angle arrow to widen the view.

To view your home using Fly-Around 1

Open a LiveView window, as explained previously.

3

2

On the View menu, click 3D Viewing Method, Fly-Around or click the Fly-Around button on the LiveView window.

To increase or decrease the Fly-Around and WalkThrough speed

3

Move the Fly-Around pointer around inside the LiveView window and watch the view move dynamically.

1

Open a LiveView window, as explained previously.

2

At the bottom of the LiveView window, click the right speed arrow to speed up the viewing method.

3

At the bottom of the LiveView window, click the left arrow to slow down the viewing method.

To view your home using Controlled Fly-Around 1

Open a LiveView window, as explained previously.

2

Click the Controlled Fly-Around button on the LiveView window.

3

Click and hold the mouse button down, then move the Fly-Around pointer around inside the LiveView window and watch the view move dynamically.

To change Fly-Around altitude with the mouse ■

Press and hold the right mouse button down to change the viewpoint.

To specify a center of reference in Fly-Around mode 1

Open a LiveView window, as explained previously.

At the bottom of the LiveView window, click the left camera angle arrow to narrow the view.

Note: The faster the viewing speed, the lower the quality of the rendered 3D image.

Accessing the Rendering Styles With Punch! AS4000’s four rendering options you can view your three dimensional floorplan in variety of ways. With ClearView you may see potential conflicts hidden by walls, for example, between utilities and so on. To render using wireframe mode 1

On the Window menu, click 3D Full View or click the 3D Full View icon.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

159

Chapter 2

22 Working with LiveView

On LiveView, click the Render Style button, then click Render Wire Frame from the pop-up menu.

Note: While in Wire Frame mode, your design will be displayed on a black background. Each feature of your floor plan will be rendered in the color of the plan tab where it is drawn. For example, walls will be displayed in the color you have defined for the Floorplan Tab. To render using shaded wireframe mode

Note: The Translucency Slider will only appear while working in ClearView. To render view with materials

1

On the Window menu, click 3D Full View or click the 3D Full View icon.

1

On the Window menu, click 3D Full View or click the 3D Full View icon.

2

On LiveView, click the Render Style button, then click Render Shaded Wire Frame from the pop-up menu.

2

On LiveView, click the Render Style button, then click Render Materials from the pop-up menu.

Note: While in Shaded Wire Frame mode, your design will be displayed on a black background. Each feature of your floor plan will be rendered in the color of the material you have applied to it.

Adjusting Rendering Quality Punch! AS4000 technology includes anti-aliased, photorealism. With this technology you can view your plan with incredible detail, whether you are in ClearView, viewing materials, viewing framing and so on.

To view a room using ClearView 1 2

On the Window menu, click 3D Full View or click the 3D Full View icon.

To render a plan in 3D final quality 1

Open a LiveView window, as explained previously.

On LiveView, click the Render Style button, then click Render ClearView from the pop-up menu.

2

On the View menu, click Render 3D Final Quality or click the 3D Final Quality button on the LiveView window.

To set 3D render quality ■ ■

■

To control the opacity of a ClearView rendering 1

On the View menu, click Render ClearView or click the ClearView Tool.

2

Click the left arrow on the Translucency Slider. Your floorplan will appear more translucent.

3

Click the right arrow on the Translucency Slider. Your floorplan is displayed more solidly.

■

On the View menu, click 3D Final Quality, Low. This results in a fast rendering speed, but lower quality output. On the View menu, click 3D Final Quality, High. This results in a moderate rendering speed and average quality output. On the View menu, click 3D Final Quality, Ultra High. This results in a slower rendering speed and a high quality output. On the View menu, click 3D Final Quality, Excellent. This results in a very slow rendering speed, but a very high quality, sharp output.

Note: You can stop the rendering process at any time by pressing the ESC key.

160

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

Setting Rendering Options

Setting Rendering Options With Punch! AS4000 you can customize the render quality of many of the customized features you use. By setting these features to a lower render quality, you can speed up the rendering time. To set the render options 1

Open a LiveView window, as explained previously.

2

On the View menu, click Render Options. The Render Options dialog box is displayed.

3

Click and drag the slider to set the rendering quality for each feature you want to change.

4

Click OK.

Note: The lower the render quality is set, the faster LiveView will render your design.

Adding Lighting and Shadows With Punch! AS4000 you can customize the lighting and shadows. You can virtually see how that big oak tree casts shadows into your living room window.

3

Click the direction from which you want the light to originate in the Direction section of the 3D Lighting dialog box.

4

Increase or decrease the light intensity by clicking and dragging the intensity slider.

5

Increase or decrease the overall brightness by clicking and dragging the brightness slider.

6

Click OK.

To render shadows to a 3D view 1

Open a LiveView window, as explained previously.

2

On the View menu, click 3D Shadows or click the 3D Shadows button on the LiveView window.

Note: Shadows will also render when the Render Final Quality selection is clicked. To control shadow quality ■

On the View menu, click Shadow Quality and click either High (slow) or Low (fast).

To adjust the lighting intensity in a 3D View 1

Open a LiveView window, as explained earlier.

2

On the View menu, click 3D Lighting or click the 3D Lighting button on the LiveView window. The 3D Lighting dialog box is displayed.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

161

Chapter

22 Working with LiveView

Using Designer Palettes

To create a group

Punch! Designer Palettes allow you to construct lists of commonly-used colors and materials so they can be easily used throughout your home design. Each palette is divided into as many as 15 groups, allowing you to assign each group to a room or other segment of your design.

1

Select the materials and colors you want to bring to the palette. Click and drag the color or material onto a blank palette tile.

2

Once you have all the materials and colors you want, click the Group 1 label, then click Rename Section on the drop-down menu.The Palette Section Name dialog box is displayed.

3

Type a name for the group in the Palette Section Name text box and click OK. The name you entered is displayed in the group label.

You simply load the Designer Palette with the colors and materials you want to apply to your 3D view, then save the palette for use in later sessions. Designer Palettes can even be exported and imported for use in different drawings.

To collapse a group ■

To build a palette

OR

1

Click the Show/Hide Palettes button in the LiveView window. The default palette is displayed.

■

2

If the Colors and Materials tabs are not visible, position the LiveView window so you can access these tabs.

3

Click and drag a color or material from Punch! Interiors and place it on a blank palette tile.

Applying colors and materials from palette ■

Click and drag the color or material you want from the palette tile to the area of your design. Your selection is displayed in LiveView.

Note: To apply the same color or material to multiple surfaces in LiveView, be sure AutoClick Placement is checked in the palette drop-down menu. To clear a palette entry 1

Right click the entry you want to delete and click Clear Palette Entry.

2

Click Yes at the prompt to remove the entry.

Managing Groups You can organize the colors and materials of each room by assigning groups. Palette Designer provides you with 15 blank group labels.

162

Click the group label and select Collapse Section.

Click the minus box on the group label. The group collapses displaying only its assigned name.

To expand a group ■

Click the group label and select Expand Section.

OR ■

Click the plus box on the group label. The group expands, displaying your entries.

To expand all groups ■

Click the group label and select Expand All. All of your groups expand, displaying your entries.

To collapse all groups ■

Click the group label and select Collapse All. All of your groups collapse, displaying only their assigned names.

Managing LiveView Palettes Your LiveView palettes are saved separately from the rest of your design. That means you can use the same palette in different drawings, different sessions, or even share palettes with colleagues.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

Customizing LiveView To save a custom palette 1

2

(optional) To move a palette up the list in priority, click the palette name and click the upward arrow on the lefthand side of the window.

3

(optional) To move a palette down the list in priority, click the palette name and click the downward arrow on the left-hand side of the window.

4

(optional) To rename a palette, select the name of the palette you want to change and click the Rename Palette button at the bottom of the window and the Palette Name dialog box is displayed.

5

(optional) Type the name you want in the Palette Name text box and click OK. The palette appears under its new name.

6

(optional) To delete a palette, select the name of the palette you want to delete and click the Delete Palette button. Click Yes to delete that palette completely.

7

Click Close.

Click the palette drop-down menu and click Save Palette As. The Palette Name dialog box is displayed.

Specify your palette by typing a name in the Palette Name text box and click OK. Your palette is saved and the name of your palette is displayed..

To import a custom palette 1

Click the palette drop-down menu bar and click Import Palette. The Open dialog box is displayed.

2

Click the palette you want to import and click Open. The Palette Name dialog box is displayed.

3

Type a new Palette Name if you want to, then click OK. The palette is displayed.

To export a palette 1

Click the palette drop-down menu bar and select Export Palette. The Save As box is displayed.

2

To a different drive or folder, click a different drive and folder, or type the complete path in the File Name text box. Click Save.

To organize palettes 1

2

Click the palette menu and select Organize Palettes. The Palettes dialog box is displayed with the names of each of your palettes.

Customizing LiveView There may be times when you will need to see your design without specific features, objects and so on. With Punch! AS4000 you have complete control over what parts of your design are visible. Clicking the Show/Hide Components Tool activates a pop-up toolbar where you can access the individual controls. These controls operate simply, if there is a red “X” through the icon, that feature is hidden; if there is not an “X”, that feature is visible. To hide/view doors in 3D 1

Open a LiveView window, as explained previously.

2

On the LiveView menu, click the Show/Hide Components Tool, then click the Show/Hide 3D Doors icon on the pop-up toolbar.

To hide/view objects in 3D 1

Open a LiveView window, as explained previously.

2

On the LiveView menu, click the Show/ Hide Components Tool, then click the Show/Hide 3D Objects icon on the pop-up toolbar.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

163

Chapter

22 Working with LiveView 2

On the LiveView menu, click the Show/Hide Components Tool, then click the Show/Hide 3D Plumbing icon on the pop-up toolbar.

Saving 3D LiveView Views You can save pre-set LiveView views that can be easily accessed at any time. To hide/view roofs in 3D

To save a LiveView view

1

Open a LiveView window, as explained previously.

1

2

On the LiveView menu, click the Show/Hide Components Tool, then click the Show/Hide 3D Roofs icon on the pop-up toolbar.

Using the tools described earlier in this chapter, set the LiveView window from the direction and angle that you want to save.

2

On the LiveView Window, click the LiveView View icon, then click Save 3D View on the popup menu. The View Name dialog box is displayed.

3

Type the name in the dialog box. Click OK.

To hide/view materials in 3D 1

Open a LiveView window, as explained previously.

2

On the LiveView menu, click the Show/Hide Components Tool, then click the Show/Hide 3D Materials icon on the pop-up toolbar.

To hide/view topography in 3D 1

Open a LiveView window, as explained previously.

2

On the LiveView menu, click the Show/Hide Components Tool, then click the Show/Hide 3D Topography icon on the pop-up toolbar.

Note: To hide the topography lines on the 2D design window, on the Options menu, click to uncheck Show Topography Lines.

To access a saved view ■

To suppress background animation in 3D 1

Open a LiveView window, as explained previously.

2

On the LiveView menu, click the Show/Hide Components Tool, then click the Animate 3D Background icon on the pop-up toolbar.

On the LiveView Window, click the LiveView View icon, then click the view on the pop-up menu. The LiveView window will display the selected view.

To update a saved view ■

Note: When background animation (cloud movement) is suppressed, no resources will be used to move the clouds in the sky.

Reposition the view. On the LiveView Window, click the LiveView View icon, then click Update: on the pop-up menu.

To organize the LiveView views To hide/view electrical in 3D 1

Open a LiveView window, as explained previously.

2

On the LiveView menu, click the Show/Hide Components Tool, then click the Show/Hide 3D Electrical icon on the pop-up toolbar.

To hide/view plumbing in 3D 1

Open a LiveView window, as explained previously.

1

On the LiveView Window, click the LiveView View icon, then click Organize Views on the pop-up menu. The 3D Views organizer is displayed.

164

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

Using the 3D Cutaway Slider To view a room using the 3D Cutaway Slider

2

Click to select a view, then click the arrows on the left to reorder the list.

3

(optional) Click to select a view, then click Rename View. The View Name dialog box is displayed. Type the name in the dialog box. Click OK.

4

(optional) Click to select a view, then click Delete View. Confirm that you want the view deleted, then click OK.

5

Click Close once you have organized the views to your satisfaction.

1

On the Window menu, click 3D Full View or click the 3D Full View icon.

2

(optional) Click one of the direction buttons to select from which direction to cut away.

3

On the LiveView window, click and drag the 3D Cutaway Slider up and down to see a cutaway view of your design.

Using the 3D Cutaway Slider With Punch! AS4000’s 3D Cutaway Slider you peel away layers of your floor plan with ease. You can slice away layer after layer of your design from any of the four sides or from the top, making it easy to see room arrangements, furniture placement and so on.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

165

Chapter

22 Working with LiveView

Setting the Viewpoint Angle

Selecting Features in 3D

Punch! AS4000 has four pre-set viewpoint angles and from those angles, moving to the needed viewpoint is easy.

With Punch! AS4000’s 3D Selection Tool, you can click features on the LiveView window and have them be selected on your 2D plan. This makes fine-tuning your design much easier. For example, you can easily select windows that may be stacked on top of each other in the 2D design view.

To set a viewpoint angle 1 2

On the Window menu, click 3D Full View or click the 3D Full View icon. In the LiveView window, click one of the Viewpoint Direction buttons.

Note: By clicking the other three Viewpoint Direction buttons, you will view your floorplan from the other edges of your lot.

166

To use the 3D selection tool 1 2

Click the 3D Selection Tool. On the LiveView window, click a feature to select it. That feature is activated on the design window and its properties are displayed on the Properties Toolbar.

Note: You can select features on the active floor only. If the feature you click does not become active, make sure it is on the active floor.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

Identifying Colors and Materials

Identifying Colors and Materials As you experiment with different colors and materials during the design process, you may want to identify a previouslyused material. This is easy with Punch! AS4000’s Select Material/Paint Tool. To use the select material/paint tool 1

Click the Select Material/Paint Tool.

2

On the LiveView window, click the color or material that you want to identify. That color or material will be displayed in the Preview Bar.

Note: The material being identified in this example is on the pillow on the sofa.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

167

Chapter

168

22 Working with LiveView

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

Chapter 23

Personalizing Your Design Punch! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 lets you view your home in photo-realistic 3D. You can select exterior and interior wall color, add realistic roof materials and select from a variety of woods to make your home design completely unique. View all your customizations in the LiveView Window. By adding color, trim and materials, you can make decorative changes to your home design as quickly as you think of them. This makes it easy to experiment with a variety of colors, both inside and outside your home, before picking up a paintbrush! You can even furnish your dream home from Punch! Home Design Architectural Series 4000’s library of objects!

PowerTools to enhance your design ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

“Material Workshop” on page 183 “Door Designer” on page 197 “Window Designer” on page 203 “Cabinet Wizard” on page 209 “Trim Designer” on page 229 “3D Custom Workshop” on page 341

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

169

Chapter

23 Personalizing Your Design

Objects Preview Bar Punch! AS4000 lets you add details to any room using a variety of objects, included in the library are 3D Objects, 2D Symbols and Accessories. The Objects Preview Bar is accessible at any time and objects can be placed on any plan tab. The Accessories category is very large and includes drapes, blinds, curtains, shutters and so on. An Accessory can only be placed on a wall segment. In addition, you can create your own filing system for the objects you create with 3D Custom Workshop or rearrange the objects to suit your needs.

3

When you see the name of the file you want to open, click to select it.

4

Click OK. The object will be imported and placed in the center of the design.

5

(optional) Click the Selection tool, then click the object you just placed to drag it to another location on your design window.

To add 2D symbols 1

Click the Objects Tab.

2

On the Objects Tab, click the arrow next to “Objects”, then select 2D Symbol Library from the menu.

3

At the top of the Preview Bar, click the down arrow next to “Symbols”, then select exactly what type of Symbol you want to use. 2D Symbol options appear in the Preview Bar.

4

Click the symbol you want to place; hold down the mouse button and drag the symbol onto your design window.

5

(optional) Click the Selection tool, then click the symbol you just placed to drag it to another location on your design window.

It is important to keep in mind that the objects only appear in 3D when you are viewing in 3D mode. In the plan drawing, objects appear as 2D symbols. To add 3D objects using drag-and-drop 1

Click the Object Tab. The Preview Bar displays design objects.

2

(optional) On the Objects Tab, click the arrow next to “Objects”, then select the needed object library from the menu.

3

(optional) Click the arrow next to “Objects” at the top of the Preview Bar to display the object library list, then click another object library.

Tip: To further personalize your design, you can create custom 2D Symbols. For more information, see “Symbol Editor”, which begins on page 301. To add accessories

4

Scroll to view the available objects.

1

Click the Objects Tab.

5

Click the object you want to place; hold down the mouse button and drag the object onto your design window.

2

6

(optional) Click the Selection tool, then click the object you just placed to drag it to another location on your design window.

On the Objects Tab, click the arrow next to “Objects”, then select Accessories Library from the menu.

3

At the top of the Preview Bar, click the down arrow next to “Accessory”, then select the type of Accessory you

To add 3D objects using import 1

On the File menu, click Import, then Punch! Custom Workshop Object.

2

In the File Name box, type the name of the file you want to open, or search for the file by switching folders or drives.

170

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

AutoClick Placement want to use. Accessory options appear in the Preview Bar. 4

On the Preview Bar, click the Accessory you want to place.

5

On the Design window, click a wall where you want to place the accessory.

Note: Hold the mouse button down to move the accessory along the wall. 6

Click to select the accessory. The Properties Bar is displayed.

7

Type the Width, Height, Wall Offset and Elevation to customize them.

To add log home components using drag-and-drop 1

Click the Object Tab. The Preview Bar displays furnishing objects.

2

(optional) Click the arrow next to “Objects” at the top of the Preview Bar, then click Log Home Components.

3

Scroll to view the available components.

4

Click the component you want to place; hold down the mouse button and drag the object onto your design window.

5

(optional) Click the Selection tool, then click the component you just placed to drag it to another location on your design window.

AutoClick Placement You can apply the same object, plant, trim and so on by using the AutoClick Placement toggle. We will use “Trim” in this example, but the steps for using AutoClick Placement are the same, regardless of what you are inserting or applying.

8

(optional) To create a sheer effect, set the translucency.

9

(optional) To automatically size the accessory, click the Auto/Size button, then click the window, for example. The accessory will automatically fit to the dimensions of that window.

To use AutoClick Placement

Note: When you click an Accessory in the Preview Bar, the Accessory Tool on the Floor Plan Tab automatically is selected, too.

1

Click the Trim Tab that contains the feature you want to place. The Preview Bar will display trims available for placement.

2

On the Trim Tab, click the arrow next to “Trim”, then click AutoClick Placement.

3

At the top of the Preview Bar, click the down arrow next to “Trim”, then select the needed trim from the menu. Trim options appear in the Preview Bar.

4

Click the trim you want to apply.

5

Click on each wall section where you want the trim to appear.

6

Right-click to end. The trim you selected is applied.

Tip: To further personalize your design, you can create custom Accessories. For more information, see “Material Workshop”, which begins on page 183.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

171

Chapter

23 Personalizing Your Design

Editing Objects Once you’ve placed objects in your drawing, it’s easy to move, delete, copy and rotate objects, usually involving just one or two mouse clicks. You can also edit objects using 3D Custom Workshop. For more information, see “3D Custom Workshop”, which begins on page 341.

Note: Rotation is constrained to 45 degrees, to release this constraint, press the SHIFT key while rotating. To rename objects 1

On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.

2

Right-click an object. The Custom Workshop Object Name dialog box is displayed.

3

Type a new name in the dialog box, then click OK.

To resize an object 1

On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.

2

Click an object to select it. The Workshop Object Properties Bar is displayed.

3

Type the Width, Height and Depth to customize them.

4

(optional) Type the percent sizing dimensions.

5

(optional) Uncheck the Cast Shadow box if shadows are not needed.

6

(optional) Type an angle, if you want to rotate the object.

To rotate objects a specified amount

Note: This is the name that will be listed in the spreadsheet created by Punch! Estimator.

Moving Objects Once you’ve placed objects, you can move them by dragging, by making very precise movements using Nudge, for more information see “Using Nudge” on page 153, or by specifying exact cartesian or polar coordinates that correspond to the reference grid. For more information on the reference grid, see “Using the Grid” on page 16.

1

On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.

2

Click an object to select it. To select more than one object; hold down the SHIFT key while clicking.

To move objects by dragging 1

On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.

3

Click Rotate on the Edit menu. The Rotate dialog box is displayed.

2

Click an object to select it. To select more than one object; hold down the SHIFT key while clicking.

3

Holding down the mouse button, drag the object or object group to a new location, then release the mouse button.

4

Click either Degrees or Radians, then type the angle you want to rotate the object in the Angle text box.

5

Click OK. The object or object group you selected is rotated, based on the angle measurement you specified.

To freely rotate objects 1

On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.

2

Click object to be rotated to select it.

3 4

On the Standard toolbar, click the Rotate Tool. Click the object; hold down the mouse button and move the mouse.

5

Release the mouse button when the object is in the position you want.

172

Note: For more information on making precision movements using Snaps, see the chapter titled “Punch! Software Primer”, which begins on page 27. To move objects by specifying coordinates 1

On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.

2

Click an object to select it. To select more than one object, hold down the SHIFT key while clicking.

3

Click Move on the Edit menu. The Move dialog box is displayed.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

Elevating Objects 4

Click either Cartesian or Polar, then type new X- and Y-Axis coordinates in the appropriate text boxes.

5

Click OK. The object or object group you selected is moved based on the coordinates you specified.

2

Click the arrow next to “Objects” at the top of the Preview Bar to display the object library list, then click Object Organizer. The Object Organizer dialog is displayed.

Elevating Objects With Punch! AS4000 you can elevate objects based on a measurement you define. This is handy if you want to place something on top of a table, for example. To elevate objects by specifying a measurement 1 2

On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool. Click an object to select it. To select more than one object, hold down the SHIFT key while clicking.

3

On the Edit Menu, click Set Object Elevation. The Set Elevation dialog box is displayed.

4

Type the measurement, in inches, that you want to elevate the object, then click OK.

To move objects from one category to another 1

Click the Object Tab.

2

Click the arrow next to “Objects” at the top of the Preview Bar to display the object library list, then click Object Organizer. The Object Organizer dialog is displayed.

3

Click the arrow above the right column to access a listing of available object categories. Click the category where you want the object to be moved.

4

Click the object in the left column that you want to move to the new category, then click the right arrow button. The object is moved from the category on the left to the category on the right.

5

(optional) Repeat step 6 until all the objects you want to reorganize have been moved to the new category.

Note: Use this feature to lower objects by typing a negative number in the Set Elevation dialog box. To elevate objects by using the Elevation Slider 1

On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.

2

Click an object to select it. To select more than one object, hold down the SHIFT key while clicking.

3

On the left side of the screen, drag the Elevation Slider up or down.

4

Release the mouse. The object will be repositioned.

Organizers You can create categories and customize lists of objects, trim, accessories and so on to make Punch! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 more personal. In this example we will use the Object Organizer, but all Organizers work the same. To open Object Organizer 1

Click the Object Tab.

To access information about an object 1

Click the Object Tab.

2

Click the arrow next to “Objects” at the top of the Preview Bar to display the object library list, then click Object Organizer. The Object Organizer dialog is displayed.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

173

Chapter

23 Personalizing Your Design

3

Click Info in the Object section of the Object Organizer Preview Bar. The Object Info dialog is displayed.

4

(optional) Type a new name or a different description in the text box, then click OK.

5

Type the name of the new category and click OK. The Object Organizer is displayed with your new category.

To delete an object from a category 1

Click the Object Tab.

2

Click the arrow next to “Objects” at the top of the Preview Bar to display the object library list, then click Object Organizer. The Object Organizer dialog is displayed.

3

Click Delete in the Object section of the Object Organizer Preview Bar. The Object is removed from the listing.

Note: To access all the objects you have deleted, click the Recycle Button. A listing of all deleted objects is displayed. To create a new category 1

Click the Object Tab.

2

Click the arrow next to “Objects” at the top of the Preview Bar to display the object library list, then click Object Organizer. The Object Organizer dialog is displayed.

3

Click New in the Category section of the Object Organizer Preview Bar. The Browse for Folder dialog is displayed.

To delete an entire category 1

Click the Object Tab.

2

Click the arrow next to “Objects” at the top of the Preview Bar to display the object library list, then click Object Organizer. The Object Organizer dialog is displayed.

3

Click Delete in the Category section of the Object Organizer Preview Bar. The Browse for Folder dialog is displayed.

4

Click the category you want to delete, then click OK. The category is removed.

To rename a category

4

1

Click the Object Tab.

2

Click the arrow next to “Objects” at the top of the Preview Bar to display the object library list, then click Object Organizer. The Object Organizer dialog is displayed.

3

Click Rename in the Category section of the Object Organizer Preview Bar. The Browse for Folder dialog is displayed.

Click the folder where you want to add a new category and click OK. The Category Name dialog is displayed.

174

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

Building Rooms Using Templates 4

Click the folder you want to rename, then click OK. The Category Name dialog is displayed.

Creating New Templates With Punch! AS4000 you can easily create room templates to suit your specific needs. To create a template

5

1

Once your room is designed exactly to your liking, select all walls, doors and other features that you want to include in your template.

2

Click the Templates Tab. The Preview Bar displays room templates.

3

Click the arrow next to “Templates” at the top of the Preview Bar to display the listing, then click Create Template. The Save Template to Category dialog is displayed.

4

Click the Template Category, then select the appropriate category from the drop down menu that appears.

5

Type a Template Name.

6

Type a Template Description, then click OK. The template is added to that category and displayed in the Preview Bar.

Type the new name, then click OK. The Object Organizer is displayed with your renamed category.

Building Rooms Using Templates Punch! AS4000 includes dozens of room templates, which will make designing your home easy and fun. Divided into several categories, choose the template that suits you needs best. To place a template 1

Click the Templates Tab. The Preview Bar displays room templates.

2

(optional) Click the arrow next to “Templates” at the top of the Preview Bar to display the room libraries, then click another library.

3

Scroll to view the available templates.

4

Click the template you want to place; hold down the mouse button and drag it onto your design window.

5

(optional) Click the Selection tool, then click the template you just placed to drag it to another location on your design window.

To choose a new category

Plants Preview Bar

1

Click the Templates Tab. The Preview Bar displays room templates.

2

(optional) Click the arrow next to “Templates” at the top of the Preview Bar to display the room libraries, then click another library.

Punch! AS4000 includes thousands of plants to make designing your landscape easy and fun. Divided into several categories, choose the ones that grow best in your area of the country.

3

Scroll to view the available templates.

4

Click the template you want to place; hold down the mouse button and drag it onto your design window.

To add plants 1

Click the Landscape Tab.

2

Click the Plants Tab. The Preview Bar will display plants available for placement.

3

At the top of the Preview Bar, click the down arrow next to “Plants” to display the plant category menu, then click to check the type of plants you want to place.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

175

Chapter 4

23 Personalizing Your Design

Use the scroll bar to view the remainder of the plant selections in the Preview Bar.

Note: Hold your cursor over the preview of the plant and that plant’s description will be displayed in the Status Bar. 5

On the Preview Bar, click the plant you want to place; hold down the mouse button and drag it onto your design window.

2

Click the plant you want to customize.

3

On the Plant Preview Bar, type the age of the plant at the time of planting.

Note: Planting age can be adjusted only after a plant is placed. To identify which plant has been placed 1

On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.

2

On the design window, right-click the plant you want to identify, then click Plant Details on the pop-up menu.

Viewing Hardiness Zones Punch! AS4000 includes USDA Hardiness Zone maps for the contiguous 48 states, Alaska and Hawaii, Canada, Europe and Australia. All plants included in Punch! AS4000 can be sorted using this information. To view a hardiness zone map 1

Click the Plants Tab. The Preview Bar will display plants available for placement.

2

At the top of the Preview Bar, click the down arrow next to “Plants” to display the plant category menu, then click the Hardiness Zone map you want to view.

To move a plant 1

On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.

2

Click the plant you want to move.

3

Click again; hold down the mouse button and drag the plant to the new location.

To customize the planting age 1

On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.

176

To hide the hardiness zone map ■

Click anywhere on the zone map.

PlantFinder Punch! AS4000 includes thousands of plants to make designing your landscape easy and fun. PlantFinder is a

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

Making Plants Grow powerful sorting engine that lets you see only the plants that fit your particular criteria.

To find a plant by name 1

Click the Plants Tab. The Preview Bar will display plants available for placement.

2

At the top of the Preview Bar, click the down arrow next to “Plants” to display the plant category menu, then click Find Plant by Name. The Find Plant by Name dialog box is displayed.

3

Type the botanical or common name of the plant in the dialog box.

4

Uncheck the criteria that does not meet your needs, then click OK. A plant matching the criteria you specified will be displayed in the Preview Bar.

To sort plants 1

Click the Plants Tab. The Preview Bar will display plants available for placement.

2

At the top of the Preview Bar, click the down arrow next to “Plants” to display the plant category menu, then click PlantFinder. The PlantFinder dialog box is displayed.

Note: If you do not specify a category to be searched, Punch! AS4000 will search the “Trees” category by default. 3

Uncheck the criteria that does not meet your needs, then click OK.

Note: Only the plants matching all the variables selected will be displayed in the Preview Bar. To broaden your search, check fewer boxes. 4

(optional) Click the View All buttons to select all options in a category.

To view all plants ■

At the top of the Preview Bar, click the down arrow next to “Plants” to display the plant category menu, then click View All Plants.

Making Plants Grow

To locate a plant on the Preview Bar

With Punch! AS4000 you can watch your landscape grow from year to year. With just a couple of mouse clicks you can watch your landscape change over 20 years.

1

To grow your landscape

On the design window, right-click the plant you want to locate, then click Locate Plant on the pop-up menu that is displayed. The plant will be selected and displayed on the Preview Bar.

1

On the Window menu, open a LiveView window and position it to easily see the area of your landscape you want to watch mature.

2

Clicking the smaller tree to the left of the Plant Growth Meter makes the plants appear younger, while pressing the larger tree on the right makes them appear older.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

177

Chapter

23 Personalizing Your Design

Note: The age is displayed in the status bar.

Note: To change the planting age for individual plants, see “To customize the planting age” on page 176.

Applying Trims All interior walls are drawn with standard 6" base trim. It is easy to add base trim, crown molding or library paneling for an elegant appearance or use wainscotting if you want to apply two different materials on one wall. You can also add casing molding around doors and windows. Plus, you can even design your own trim using Trim Designer. For more information, see “Trim Designer”, which begins on page 229. In this example we will use Base Trim, but crown molding, door casings, library paneling and wainscotting will be applied in exactly the same way. To apply base trim

178

1

Click the Trim Tab.

2

On the Trim Tab, click the arrow next to “Trim”, then select the needed trim library from the menu.

3

At the top of the Preview Bar, click the down arrow next to “Base Trim”, then select exactly what type of Base Trim you want to use. Base Trim options appear in the Preview Bar.

4

Click the trim you want to apply; hold down the mouse button and drag it onto the wall of your home in the LiveView window. The trim you selected is applied.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

Removing Wall Trims

Removing Wall Trims All wall trims are removed in the same way, drag and drop a “no trim” material onto the wall. To remove wall trim 1

Click the Trim Tab. The Preview Bar will display trims available for placement.

2

At the top of the Preview Bar, click the down arrow next to “Trim”, then select Standard Base Trim from the menu. Base trim options appear in the Preview Bar.

3

Apply the last trim option on the Preview Bar to remove wall trim entirely.

Applying Paint and Color With Punch! AS4000, you can try out various color schemes with ease. Now you can choose between paint libraries and color families with just a few mouse clicks. Walls are just one example of what can be colorized; you can also apply color to furniture, window trim, doors and so on. To apply different paint colors to different rooms, refer to “Breaking a Wall” on page 74. To make designing easier, you can create custom Designer Palettes. For more information, see “Using Designer Palettes”, which begins on page 162. To apply paint 1

Click the Colors Tab. The Preview Bar will display paint colors available for placement.

2

(optional) At the top of the Preview Bar, click the down arrow next to “Paint” to display the available Paint Libraries. Click to select which one you want to use. The paint colors are displayed on the Preview Bar.

To apply color from a customizable palette 1

Click the Colors Tab. The Preview Bar will display materials available for placement.

2

(optional) At the top of the Preview Bar, click the down arrow next to “Colors” to display the Colors style menu, then click to check Spring or whichever category you prefer. The color palette is displayed on the Preview Bar.

3

Scroll to view the available spring colors.

4

Click the color you want to apply; hold down the mouse button and drag the color onto the exterior walls of your home in the LiveView window. The color you selected is applied.

Note: To customize a color, see “To define a custom color” on page 180. To apply color from the color ramp

3

Scroll to view the available paint colors.

4

Click the paint color you want to apply; hold down the mouse button and drag it onto the exterior walls of your home in the LiveView window. The paint you selected is applied.

Note: To customize a color, see “To define a custom color” on page 180. 5

Note: The actual name of the paint is displayed in the upper right for ease in purchasing the correct color.

(optional) To view larger paint chips, click “Paint” at the top of the Preview Bar, like in Step 2 above. Then click Paint Chooser from the drop down menu. The Paint Chooser is displayed.

1

Click the Colors Tab. The Preview Bar will display materials available for placement.

2

On the Colors Tab, click the arrow beneath the word Colors, then click Color Ramp. Twentyfive shades of the same color appear in the Preview Bar.

3

(optional) At the top of the Preview Bar, click the plus (+) or minus (-) signs next to the color spectrum to change the color family.

4

Scroll to view the variations of that color.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

179

Chapter 5

23 Personalizing Your Design

Click the color you want to apply; hold down the mouse button and drag the color onto the exterior walls of your home in the LiveView window. The color you selected is applied.

To apply a series of the same color 1

Click the Colors Tab. The Preview Bar will display materials available for placemen.

2

(optional) At the top of the Preview Bar, click the down arrow next to “Colors” to display the Colors style menu, then click to check Spring. The Spring color palette is displayed on the Preview Bar.

4

3

Scroll to view the available Spring colors.

Click one of the Basic or Custom colors or click on the color spectrum block to select a color.

5

4

Right-click the color you want to apply.

(optional) Adjust the current Red, Green and Blue values to create a custom color.

5

On the LiveView window, right-click on each wall where you want the chosen color to appear.

6

(optional) Click an area on the color spectrum window to select a color, then adjust the RGB values, if necessary.

6

Click the left mouse button to end. The color you selected is applied.

7

Click OK. The color you defined is displayed on the Preview Bar.

Using Custom Colors With Punch! AS4000, you can define your own custom color with the Color dialog box. You can start with one of the basic colors available, then change its red, blue or green values or click on a color in the color spectrum window to “mix” your own color. By customizing colors, you are sure to find the exact color you want. To define a custom color 1

Click the Colors Tab. The Preview Bar will display materials available for placement.

2

(optional) At the top of the Preview Bar, click the down arrow next to “Colors” to display the Colors style menu, then click to check Summer. The Summer color palette is displayed on the Preview Bar.

3

Applying Building Materials With Punch! AS4000, customizing the exterior of your home is a simple drag and drop procedure. Available materials include brick, stucco, gravel, roofing and so on. You can create your own custom materials. For more information, see “Material Workshop”, which begins on page 183. You can even apply two different materials to a wall using the Wainscotting feature. For more information, see “Applying Trims”, which begins on page 178. To apply material 1

Click the Materials Tab. The Preview Bar will display materials available for placement.

2

(optional) At the top of the Preview Bar, click the down arrow next to “Materials” to display the Materials style menu, then click to check the material you want, for instance brick, stucco, stone, siding and so on. Options of the selected material will be displayed on the Preview Bar.

3

Scroll to view the available materials.

4

Click the material you want to apply; hold down the mouse button and drag the material onto the exterior

Double-click one of the colors on the Preview Bar. The Color dialog box is displayed.

180

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

Applying Building Materials walls of your home in the LiveView window. The material you selected is applied. Note: To increase the accuracy of applying materials, it may help to zoom in closer to what you are texturing. To apply custom materials 1

Click the Materials tab. The Preview Bar will display materials available for placement.

2

On the Materials Tab, click the arrow next to “Materials”, then Custom & Brand Name Materials from the menu.

3

At the top of the Preview Bar, click the down arrow next to “Materials”, then select a library from the menu. Custom material options appear in the Preview Bar.

4

Click the custom material you want to apply; hold down the mouse button and drag it onto a surface of your home in the LiveView window. The custom material you selected is applied.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

181

Chapter

182

23 Personalizing Your Design

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

Chapter 24

Material Workshop Whether it’s paint or brickwork, carpet or draperies, the Material Workshop lets you customize photorealistic images of real-world textures so you can tour a realistic rendering of your home plan in Punch! Home Design Architectural Series 4000. Modify one of the materials in Punch! Home Design Architectural Series 4000’s libraries or import one of your own, using Material Workshop’s powerful image editing and management tools.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

183

Chapter

24 Material Workshop

Launching Material Workshop ■

Launch Material Workshop by clicking the Material Workshop icon on the PowerTool Bar.

File Management There are several ways you can create a new material image in Material Workshop. You can import a digital image of a texture, such as brickwork or wallpaper, you can create a new material from scratch or you can modify one of Punch! Home Design Architectural Series 4000’s existing materials. With Material Workshop, you can save your new image as a new BMP image and/or you can save the image in one of Material Workshop’s libraries. In addition, you have complete control on how your material library is organized. This makes remembering where you have stored all the materials you created for the Living Room, for example.

To open an existing material definition 1

Click the Material tab, or click the Material Library button. The Preview Bar displays the materials in the current library.

2

(optional) Click the Materials drop-down menu above the Preview Bar and click to select a new library collection.

3

Click the material image you want to modify and drag it into the design window or click the Open Selected Material button.

Note: You can use this same method to retrieve an image from Custom Materials library. To update a material or accessory image 1

On the File menu, click Save to Library or click the Save/Update to Library button. The Save to Library dialog box is displayed.

2

Choose to save your new image in the material library or accessories library, then click OK. The Save/Update Material dialog box is displayed.

3

Click Update Existing to replace the current material or accessory definition.

4

Click Yes to merge all of the image objects in your drawing into one image or click No to maintain separate objects. This will make future edits to the saved image easier.

To import a new image file 1

On the File menu, click Open New Image. The Open dialog box is displayed.

To save a new material or accessory image

2

In the Look In box, type the name of the file you want to insert or search for the file by switching folders or drives.

3

When you see the name of the file you want to open, click to select it.

4

Click Open.

1

On the File menu, click Save to Library or click the Save/Update to Library button. The Save to Library dialog box is displayed.

2

Choose to save your new image in the material library or accessories library, then click OK. The Save Material to Library dialog box is displayed.

3

(optional) Click New to create a new library. Select a folder in which to create the library, then type a name for the new library and click OK.

To open a blank image file 1

On the File menu, click Blank Canvas. The Color dialog box is displayed.

2

Click an area on the color spectrum window to select a background color, then adjust the values, if necessary.

3

(optional) Adjust the current Red, Green and Blue values to create a custom color.

4

Click Open. The color you defined is applied to the drawing background.

184

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

Organizers 4

Type a name for the new material in the Material Name text box. New material names can contain up to 44 characters.

5

Type a description of the new material in the Material Description text box. New material descriptions can contain up to 78 characters.

6

Type the real-world dimensions of the material image in the Width and Height text boxes.

7

(optional) Check Stretch for width or height to stretch the image in that direction, rather than replicate it.

8

(optional) Check Transparent Black to designate all black areas (RGB=0,0,0) of the material image as transparent.

Tip: Transparent black is not only useful for things like window panes, it’s also helpful in images like trellises, chain link fences or between blind slats. 9

(optional) Check Retain State to save the image with all of its layers intact. This will make future edits to the saved image easier.

10 Click OK.

3

On the left side of the Material Organizer, select a category.

4

On the right side of the Material Organizer, select a category.

5

Click to select the material you want to move.

6

(optional) Click the Info button to display information about the selected material.

7

(optional) Click the Delete button to permanently remove the selected material.

8

Click an arrow button to move the selected material from one of the selected categories to the other.

9

Click Close.

Organizers You have complete control on how your libraries are organized. This makes it easier to remember where you have stored all the materials and accessories that you created for the Living Room, for example. To use the Material Organizer 1

2

Click the Custom tab or click the Custom Material Library tool. The Preview Bar displays the contents of the current Custom Material Library. Click the down-arrow at the top of the Preview BarPreview Bar, then click Material Organizer on the drop-down menu. The Material Organizer dialog box is displayed.

To create, delete or rename a material category 1

Click the Custom tab or click the Custom Material Library tool. The Preview Bar displays the contents of the current Custom Material Library.

2

Click the down-arrow at the top of the Preview Bar, then click Material Organizer on the drop-down menu. The Material Organizer dialog box is displayed.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

185

Chapter

3

4

24 Material Workshop

(optional) In the Category section, click the New button. Select a folder in which to create the new category, then type a name for the new category and click OK. (optional) In the Category section, click Delete. Select a folder to delete and click OK.

5

(optional) In the Category section, click Rename. Select a folder to rename and click OK. Type a new name for the category and click OK again.

6

Click Close.

3

On the left side of the Accessory Organizer, select a category.

4

On the right side of the Accessory Organizer, select a category.

5

Click to select the accessory you want to move.

6

(optional) Click the Info button to display information about the selected accessory.

7

(optional) Click the Delete button to permanently remove the selected accessory.

8

Click an arrow button to move the selected accessory from one of the selected categories to the other.

9

Click Close.

To create, delete or rename an accessory category 1

Click the Accessory tab or click the Accessories Library tool. The Preview Bar displays the contents of the current Accessory Library.

2

Click the down-arrow at the top of the Preview Bar, then click Accessory Organizer on the drop-down menu. The Accessory Organizer dialog box is displayed.

3

(optional) In the Category section, click the New button. Select a folder in which to create the new category, then type a name for the new category and click OK.

4

(optional) In the Category section, click Delete. Select a folder to delete and click OK.

5

(optional) In the Category section, click Rename. Select a folder to rename and click OK. Type a new name for the category and click OK again.

6

Click Close.

To use the Accessory Organizer 1

Click the Accessory tab or click the Accessories Library tool. The Preview Bar displays the contents of the current Accessory Library.

2

Click the down-arrow at the top of the Preview Bar, then click Accessory Organizer on the drop-down menu. The Accessory Organizer dialog box is displayed.

186

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

Editing Material Workshop Images To open a custom color list 1

On the File menu, click Open Custom Color List. The Open Color List dialog box is displayed.

2

In the File Name box, type the name of the file you want to open or search for the file by switching folders or drives.

3

When you see the name of the file you want to open, click to select it.

4

Click OK.

To save a custom color list 1

On the File menu, click Save Custom Color List. The Save Color List dialog box is displayed.

2

Type a file name in the File Name text box.

3

Click OK.

Tip: When drawing multiple instances of a CAD object, be sure that Keep Tool Selected is checked on the Edit menu. When Keep Tool Selected is checked, you can draw concurrent CAD objects without selecting the corresponding CAD tool each time.

Editing Material Workshop Image Properties With Punch! Material Workshop, you can control additional properties for your image—for instance, you can add information to materials in your own custom libraries or the permanent Punch! libraries. You can also control the way each instance of your image blends with its neighbors. The seamless tool lets you eliminate the tell-tale borderlines between instances of the same material image. To make an image seamless

Editing Material Workshop Images With Punch! Material Workshop, you can draw shapes that will be used to color, fill, replicate or add materials to your image. Simply select a tab, choose a color or material from the Preview Bar, then draw a shape using one of the drawing tools.

1

Click the Seamless tool. The Seamless Material dialog box is displayed.

2

Click one of the seamless options. Horizontal blends images along their sides, Vertical blends images along the top and bottom, Both blends horizontally and vertically, None does not blend.

3

Click one of the blend options. Click Low to concentrate blending at the edges of the image. Click High to concentrate blending across the entire image.

4

Click the preview buttons to see how your image will look when tiled horizontally, vertically or both.

5

Click Seamless.

The eight editing modes available in Material Workshop are: ■ ■

■ ■

■

■

■ ■

Color. Tools in this mode will add a tint in your selected area. Fill. Tools in this mode will completely replace the original color in your selected area with a color of your choice. Replicate. This tool copies the selected area so it can be placed elsewhere. Material. Tools in this mode completely replace the original material in your selected area with a standard Punch! material of your choice. Custom. If you have already saved custom materials, tools in this mode completely replace the original material in your selected area with a custom material of your choice. Accessory. Tools in this mode completely replace the original material in your selected area with an accessory of your choice. Brightness. This tool adjusts the brightness of your selected area. Opacity. This tool adjusts the opacity of your selected area. You can change the background color by clicking the color area at the bottom of the Preview Bar.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

187

Chapter

24 Material Workshop

To add information to a material object

To control layering

1

1

On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.

2

Right-click a shape to select it.

3

Click Bring to Front, on the pop-up menu that is displayed, to place the selected shape on the top of the other shapes.

4

(optional) Click Send to Back button, on the pop-up menu that is displayed, to place the selected shape behind the other shapes.

2

Click the Material Info tool. The Material Info dialog box is displayed.

Type a description of the new material in the Material Description text box. New material descriptions can contain up to 78 characters.

To use object selection mode 1

On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.

3

Type the real-world dimensions of the material image in the Width and Height text boxes.

2

Right-click a shape to select it, then click ObjectLevel Editing on the pop-up menu that is displayed.

4

(optional) Check Stretch for width or height to stretch the image in that direction, rather than replicate it.

3

Click the object and drag it into the new position or shape.

5

(optional) Check Transparent Black to designate all black areas (RGB=0,0,0) of the material image as transparent.

6

Click OK.

4

Release the mouse to end.

Editing Shapes All shapes drawn in Material Workshop can be edited in a variety of ways. They can be moved specified amounts, rotated, layered, cropped and even converted to other types of drawing shapes. Object-Level Editing is active by default. Object-Level Editing, along with Point-Level Editing, controls how your edits impact your object. If you are in object selection mode, changes affect the object as a whole. If you are working in point selection mode, each edge of the object is treated separately, as you edit. To crop an image 1

On the Standard toolbar, click the Crop Image tool.

2

Click on the design window to define the start point of the crop rectangle. A rubber-band rectangle is displayed and follows the pointer. Dimensions are displayed, as you draw.

3

Hold the mouse button down, as you extend the rectangle to the size you want.

4

Release the mouse button.

5

On the Standard toolbar, click the Crop Image tool again.

188

To use point selection mode 1

On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.

2

Right-click a shape to select it, then click PointLevel Editing on the pop-up menu that is displayed.

3

Click a point on the object and drag it into the new position to reshape it.

4

Release the mouse to end.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

Editing Material Perspective To select all color objects in the drawing ■

On the Edit menu, click Select Objects, All Color Objects.

To set the perspective angle ■ ■

To select all fill objects in the drawing ■

On the Edit menu, click Select Objects, All Fill Objects.

To select all replicate objects in the drawing ■

On the Edit menu, click Select Objects, All Replicate Objects.

To select all material objects in the drawing ■

On the Edit menu, click Select Objects, All Material Objects.

To select all brightness objects in the drawing ■

On the Edit menu, click Select Objects, All Brightness Objects.

To select all opacity objects in the drawing ■

On the Edit menu, click Select Objects, All Opacity Objects.

Click and rotate the Blue arrow to change the location of the vanishing point. (optional) Right-click the material, then click Change Material Angle on the pop-up menu that is displayed. Type the angle in the text box, then click OK.

To change the centerline ■

Click & Drag a Yellow dot to change the centerline of the material.

To set the scale ■

Right-click the material, then click Change Material Scale on the pop-up menu that is displayed. Type the new percentage(s) in the text box, then click OK.

To reset perspective changes ■

Right-click the material, then click Reset Material Attributes on the pop-up menu that is displayed.

Using Material Workshop Images in Your Punch! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 Project

1

On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.

Once you’ve created your own custom materials and accessories in the Material Workshop, you can easily apply them back in your Punch! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 project. Simply navigate to the library where you stored the new image and drag the image to a surface in your LiveView window.

2

Right-click a shape to select it, then click Convert To on the pop-up menu that is displayed.

To apply custom accessories

3

Click to select the type of object you want.

1

Click the Objects tab. The Preview Bar will display objects available for placement.

2

On the Objects Tab, click the arrow next to “Objects”, then select Accessories Library from the menu.

3

At the top of the Preview Bar, click the down arrow next to “Accessory”, then select the appropriate location for your custom accessory from the menu. Custom accessory options appear in the Preview Bar.

To select all objects in the drawing ■

On the Edit menu, click Select All.

To convert to another drawing style

Editing Material Perspective In addition to the ability to rotate, move, point-level edit and so on, Material shapes can be edited to conform to the perspective in the image. Click a shape to select it. This will activate Perspective Editing Mode. In this mode, there will be different colored controls that manipulate different things. To change the size of the shape ■

Click & Drag the Red dots to control the area of the shape. Drag a corner to make the shape larger or smaller.

To set the perspective ■

Click & Drag a Green dot to change the vanishing point of the material.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

189

Chapter 4

24 Material Workshop

Click the custom accessory you want to apply; hold down the mouse button and drag it onto a surface of your home in the LiveView window. The custom material you selected is applied.

Tip: To apply the same accessory to multiple surfaces, select AutoClick Placement on the pop-up menu (see Step 2 above). Then simply select an accessory from the Preview Bar and click each surface where you want the accessory placed, right-click when you are finished.

■ ■ ■

image is not square, use your graphics software to rotate it in half-degree increments until it is. Photograph the feature when the sun is shining. This ensures more color saturation and detail of the image. Images should touch the bottom of the image area. If it is centered in the area, it will float above ground level. When saving an image to the Material library, check Retain State to save the image with all of its layers intact. This will make future edits to the saved image easier.

To apply custom materials 1

Click the Materials tab. The Preview Bar will display materials available for placement.

2

On the Materials Tab, click the arrow beneath the word Materials, then click Custom Material Library on the pop-up menu that is displayed.

3

At the top of the Preview Bar, click the down arrow next to “Materials”, then select the appropriate location for your custom material from the menu. Custom material options appear in the Preview Bar.

4

Click the custom material you want to apply; hold down the mouse button and drag it onto a surface of your home in the LiveView window. The custom material you selected is applied.

Tip: To apply the same custom material to multiple surfaces, select AutoClick Placement on the pop-up menu (see Step 2 above). Then simply select a custom material from the Preview Bar and click each surface where you want the material placed, right-click when you are finished.

Tips for Using Material Workshop Punch! AS4000’s Material Workshop lets you take digital pictures and use them as custom textures in your home design. Although this is a straightforward process, there are a few hints that will make the ultimate result much more satisfying. ■

Verify that the image is level and square when taking a digital picture or scanning a photograph. If the initial

190

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

Part 6

Design Aid PowerTools Chapter 25: Chapter 26: Chapter 27: Chapter 28: Chapter 29: Chapter 30: Chapter 31: Chapter 32:

Site Planner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Door Designer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Window Designer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cabinet Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fireplace Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Plant Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Trim Designer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pool Designer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

193 197 203 209 219 225 229 233

Chapter 25

Site Planner Punch! Site Planner lets you duplicate your lot exactly from your surveyor’s report. Site Planner has three methods of defining points to your lot: Azimuth: Defines points in degrees, minutes and seconds clockwise from North. Bearing: Defines points in angles, minutes and seconds, using North, South, East and West as guides. Relative: Defines points in feet and inches, using the previous point as a reference.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

193

Chapter

25 Site Planner

Launching Site Planner

Defining a drawing method

If you have a survey plat of your property, you can exactly draw your property lines using Punch! Site Planner.

1

Launching Punch! Site Planner

2

■

Launch Site Planner by clicking the Site Planner icon on the PowerTool Bar.

On the Survey Definition toolbar, click the needed tool. (optional) On the View Menu, click Direction Mode, then click the method you want to use.

Managing Points

Choosing a Drawing Method

You can quickly add, delete and edit points in Site Planner.

There are three methods of drawing in Punch! Site Planner. Points are defined almost identically in the three methods; choose the one that is most comfortable for you.

Adding a point 1

On the Survey Definition toolbar, click the Add Point Tool. The Add Point menu is displayed.

2

Choose North or South as the Reference Meridian.

3

Type the Angles, Minutes and Seconds in the text boxes.

4

Choose the Line Direction.

5

Type the Line Length. Click OK.

6

Continue defining points until you have defined your entire lot perimeter.

Azimuth: Defines points in degrees, minutes and seconds, clockwise from North.

Bearing: Defines points in angles, minutes and seconds, using North, South, East and West as guides.

Relative: Defines points in feet and inches, using the previous point as a reference.

194

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

Managing Line Dimensions Deleting a point

Managing Line Dimensions

1

On the design window, click the point you want to delete.

2

On the Survey Definition toolbar, click the Delete Point Tool. The Point Deletion Confirmation dialog is displayed.

In each drawing method, the line dimensions are displayed on your drawing with the point ID, the direction and length. You can choose to display any or all of these definitions.

3

Click Yes to delete the point.

4

(optional) Click No, if you have chosen the point by mistake.

Managing line dimensions ■

On the Options menu, click Line Dimensions, then click Show Point ID. If a checkmark is displayed on this choice, the ID is visible. If there is no checkmark, the ID is hidden.

■

On the Options menu, click Line Dimensions, then click Show Point. If a checkmark is displayed on this choice, the direction is visible. If there is no checkmark, the direction is hidden.

■

On the Options menu, click Line Dimensions, then click Show Length. If a checkmark is displayed on this choice, the length is visible. If there is no checkmark, the length is hidden.

Note: To turn off the Point Deletion Confirmation, click Confirm Point Deletion on the Options menu. Inserting a point 1

On the design window, click the point before which you want to add a point.

Note: Points are always added before the point you have selected. 2

On the Survey Definition toolbar, click the Insert Point Tool. The Insert Point menu is displayed.

3

Choose North or South as the Reference Meridian.

4

Type the Angles, Minutes and Seconds in the text boxes.

5

Choose the Line Direction.

6

Type the Line Length. Click OK.

Editing a point 1

On the design window, click the point you want to edit.

2

On the Survey Definition toolbar, click the Edit Point Tool. The Edit Point menu is displayed.

3

Make the necessary edits in the menus and dialog boxes.

4

Click OK.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

195

Chapter

25 Site Planner

Saving Your Property Lines When you open a file, Punch! Site Planner copies the file to your computer’s memory. As you work, you modify the copy stored in memory. Any system failure or loss of power destroys that copy. To save your work permanently, you must save it to a file on a disk. A good rule of thumb is to save every 15 minutes or after you’ve completed any work you wouldn’t want to redo. When you click the Save command, Site Planner saves the active drawing using the name and location you specify. You can create more than one version of a drawing or save copies on another disk for safekeeping. You can save each version under a different name or you can save them under the same name in different folders or on different disks. To save an existing file ■

On the File menu, click Save or press CTRL+S.

To save a new, unnamed file 1

On the File menu, click Save As. The Save As dialog box is displayed.

2

In the File Name text box, type a name. Surveyor automatically adds the SDO extension.

3

Click Save.

Closing a File When you finish working with a file, close it to remove the window from the screen and to free up your computer’s memory. You have the option of placing your property lines into your home plan. To close a file ■

On the File menu, click Exit. If you have unsaved changes, Punch! AS4000 prompts you to save them before it closes the file and asks if you want the survey added to your Punch! home design file. Click Yes. The property lines will be placed in the center of the design window.

196

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

Chapter 26

Door Designer Whether it’s drawing custom grillwork or simply designing a door for a unique space, Punch! Door Designer lets you create custom doors that behave and render like any other door in Punch! AS4000.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

197

Chapter

26 Door Designer

Designing Custom Doors

Editing Your Door Design

With Door Designer you can create custom doors by using an unlimited variety of the three door components.

Rather than draw each geometric feature of your door casing, panel or grill separately, use Door Designer’s editing tools to reshape, reposition, re-orient or even join existing door elements.

Door Casing is the trim that surrounds the door opening. You can draw a simple rectangular opening or you can combine shapes to create a more ornate door casing. Door Panels are added to your design by drawing 2D shapes within the confines of the casing. By varying the thickness of the panels, you can create raised panels to define the door. Raised Grills add elegance to your door design after you have added the casing and panels. As you draw, you can set the width of the grills on the Property bar. If you want your door design to include glass, simply leave those areas empty.

The following procedures explain steps for moving, resizing or rotating door elements. For more information on reshaping and joining objects, see “Reshaping Elements” on page 36. For more information on flipping and mirroring objects, see “Using Flip and Mirror” on page 37. To resize door elements 1

On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.

2

Click a door element to select it.

3

Click and hold down the mouse button, drag the segment or point to a new location, then release the mouse button.

Launching Door Designer ■

Launch Door Designer by clicking the Door Designer icon on the PowerTool Bar.

Note: To constrain movements horizontally or vertically, press SHIFT while reshaping the object.

Drawing Door Components

To move door elements

You can modify an existing door design or draw your own custom doors from scratch. As you draw each component, Punch! displays your door design in 3D. Door Designer has three drawing modes that let you design doors from the outside to the inside.

1

On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.

2

Click a door element to select it.

3

On the Edit menu, click Move. The Move dialog box is displayed.

4

Click either Cartesian or Polar, then type amount you want the object moved in the appropriate text boxes.

5

Click OK. The object is moved based on the coordinates you specified.

■ ■ ■

Casing. Start by drawing the trim to surround your custom door. Panels. Next, draw the wood panels that comprise the visible body of your door. Grills. Finally, add detailed grillwork to define windows in a door. If you want your door design to include glass, simply leave those areas empty.

Each of the three drawing modes features an assortment of 2D drawing tools. The geometry of all three modes are drawn the same. For best results, use these tools in conjunction with snaps and editing tools to reshape door elements, minimize repetition and increase accuracy. For more information about snaps, see “Snap Basics” on page 29. For more information about using editing tools, see “Editing Your Door Design” on page 198. Tip: When drawing multiple instances of a door object, be sure to turn Auto Reset off. On the Options menu, click to uncheck Auto Reset Tools. When Auto Reset Tools is unchecked, you can draw concurrent door objects without selecting the corresponding door tool each time.

Note: Coordinates are measured in inches or they can be measured in feet and inches, separated by a hyphen. To place a door element on top of another object 1

On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.

2

Click the object you want to place on top.

3

On the Edit menu, click Bring To Front, or click Bring To Front on the Property bar that is displayed.

To place a door element behind another object 1

198

On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

Controlling Drawing Settings 2

Click the group you want to place on bottom.

To control automatic dimensioning

3

On the Edit menu, click Send To Back, or click Send To Back on the Property bar that is displayed.

■

While in an active drawing mode, on the Property bar, check the Auto Dim checkbox to insert a dimension for any door element you draw.

To select the next door element ■

On the Standard toolbar, click the Select Next Object tool. Door Designer selects the objects in the order you placed them.

To select the previous door element ■

On the Standard toolbar, click the Select Previous Object tool. Door Designer selects the objects in reverse order.

Controlling Drawing Settings There are a variety of tools that allow you to control how you draw, select, or modify door elements. The Property bar lets you modify a variety of settings, including the number of sides on a multigon or the size of your workspace.

1

On the Property bar, type new values in the Width and Height text boxes and press ENTER.

2

(optional) If you have already drawn objects in the design window, check Scale Objects to resize them accordingly.

To adjust the nudge rate On the Property bar, type a new value in the Nudge Rate text box, then press ENTER.

To adjust the join sensitivity ■

On the Property bar, type a new value in the Join Sensitivity text box then press ENTER. A lower value means that you must position objects closer to join them.

To adjust the drawing precision ■

On the Property bar, click Inches or Feet - Inches, in the Precision section. Measurements on the status bar change to reflect your preference.

To set the tracking constraints ■

Object Selection Mode is active by default. Object selection, along with point selection, controls how your edits impact your object. If you are in object selection mode, changes affect the object as a whole. If you are working in point selection mode, each edge or corner of the object is treated separately, as you edit. In point selection mode, you are able to resize or reshape an object by moving one of its individual points. While it is easy to move an entire object in object selection mode, it is much more convenient to handle detailed edits, using point selection mode. To use object selection mode ■

To set the workspace boundary

■

Using Object or Point Selection Modes

On the Property bar, click Constrain to Angle or Constrain to Roof Pitch in the Tracking Constraints section. When Constrain to Roof Pitch is selected, polygons and lines at the top of the door design automatically constrain to the roof pitch in your home design.

On the Property bar, click Object in the Edit Level section or right-click an object and click Object Selection.

To use point selection mode ■

On the Property bar, click Points in the Edit Level section or right-click an object and click Point Selection.

Using Nudge, Snap Tools and the Grid Once you’ve placed a door object, you can precisely move it into position using Nudge. Nudge utilizes the arrow keys to move selected objects, or features, a specified distance. For more information on using Nudge, see “Using Nudge”, which begins on page 153. Nudge works in tandem with the Snap Grid. To learn more about the Snap Grid, see “Using the Grid”, which begins on page 16. With snaps, you can define exactly where door objects are placed. You can move through the Snaps Toolbar with the Tab key. Each time you press Tab, the next Snap Tool is activated, Shift-Tab reverses the process. For more information, see “Punch! Software Primer”, which begins on page 27. Grid settings have a direct impact on the ease of aligning door objects, snapping objects to the grid and so on. When using the Snap to Grid feature, items that are dragged and dropped on the design window are automatically snapped, or placed, to align with the current grid. By default, Snap to

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

199

Chapter

26 Door Designer

Grid is turned on. For more information, see “Using the Grid”, which begins on page 16.

To move doors between categories 1

On the Property bar, click the down arrow next to Doors, then select Door Organizer. The Door Organizer dialog box is displayed.

2

On the left side of the Door Organizer, select a category.

3

On the right side of the Door Organizer, select a category.

4

Click to select the door you want to move.

5

(optional) Click the Info button to display information about the selected door.

6

(optional) Click the Delete button to permanently remove the selected door.

7

Click an arrow button to move the selected door from one of the selected categories to the other.

8

Click Close.

Managing Door Designs Door Designer not only allows you to save new doors for use in your Punch! drawings, it also has easy-to-use tools for organizing and managing door libraries. To import an existing door design 1

On the Property bar, click the down arrow next to Doors, then select a Door library. The Preview Bar changes to display doors in this library.

2

(optional) On the Property bar, check the Replace Existing checkbox to remove existing door designs from the design window as you import from the library. When this checkbox is unchecked, imported designs are placed on top of existing designs.

3

(optional) On the Property bar, check the Scale to Workspace checkbox to automatically resize the door design to the current workspace size as you import from the library.

4

Click a door design on the Preview Bar and drag it into the Design Window.

To save a new door design 1

On the File menu, click Save Door to Library or click the Save Door to Library button on the Property bar. The Save Door to Category dialog box is displayed.

2

(optional) In the Door Category section, click to save the door to a different category.

To create, delete or rename a door category 1

3

(optional) Click New to create a new door category. Select a folder in which to create the new category, then type a name for the new category and click OK.

4

Type a name for the new door in the Door Name text box. New door names can contain up to 44 characters.

5

Type a description of the new door in the Door Description text box. New door descriptions can contain up to 78 characters.

6

Click OK.

200

On the Property bar, click the down arrow next to Doors, then select Door Organizer. The Door Organizer dialog box is displayed.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

Placing Custom Doors In Your Punch! Drawing

2

(optional) In the Category section, click the New button. Select a folder in which to create the new category, then type a name for the new category and click OK.

3

(optional) In the Category section, click Delete. Select a folder to delete and click OK.

4

(optional) In the Category section, click Rename. Select a folder to rename and click OK. Type a new name for the category and click OK again.

5

Click Close.

6

(optional) Click to set the door swing, if necessary.

7

(optional) Type the Width, Height, Elevation and Trim Width to customize them.

Note: Any changes made on the Door Properties bar, become the default and will be used the next time a door is placed.

Placing Custom Doors In Your Punch! Drawing Once you’ve designed a custom door, you can place it in your Punch! design as you would any other door, making sure to select the custom door library before you place the door. In the 2D design window, custom doors are displayed the same as standard doors, but they are fully rendered in LiveView. To add a custom door 1

On the Floor Plan tab, click the Door Tool. The Door Properties Bar is displayed.

2

On the Door Properties Bar, click theDoor Style button, then click Custom from the popup window that is displayed. The Preview Bar displays the doors available in the current library.

3

Click the down arrow next to Doors at the top of the Preview Bar, then select a library.

4

Click a door in the Preview Bar to select it.

5

On the Design window, click a wall where you want to place a door.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

201

Chapter

202

26 Door Designer

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

Chapter 27

Window Designer Whether it’s selecting the number of panes in a bay window, or detailing window shapes, Window Designer lets you create custom windows that behave and render like any other window in Punch! AS4000.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

203

Chapter

27 Window Designer

Designing Custom Windows

Editing Your Window Design

With Punch! Window Designer, you can create custom windows by using an unlimited combination of the three window components.

Rather than draw each geometric feature of your window casing, sill or grill separately, use Window Designer’s editing tools to reshape, reposition, re-orient or even join existing window elements.

Window Casing is the trim that surrounds the window opening. You can draw a simple rectangular opening or you can combine shapes to create a more ornate window casing. Window Sills are added to your design by drawing 2D shapes within the confines of the casing. Raised Grills add elegance to your window design after you have added the casing and sills. As you draw, you can set the width of the grills on the Property bar. Wherever you want your window design to include glass, simply leave those areas empty.

The following procedures explain steps for moving, resizing, or rotating window elements. For more information on reshaping and joining objects, see “Reshaping Elements” on page 36. For more information on flipping and mirroring objects, see “Using Flip and Mirror” on page 37. To nudge a window element 1

On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.

2

Click the object to select it.

3

On the Edit menu, click Nudge, then click the direction (up, down, left, right).

4

(optional) Use the arrow keys on your keyboard to nudge the object or feature.

Launching Window Designer ■

Launch Window Designer by clicking the Window Designer icon on the PowerTool Bar.

Drawing Window Components You can modify an existing window design or draw your own custom windows from scratch. As you draw each component, Punch! displays your window design in 3D. Window Designer has three drawing modes that let you design windows from the outside to the inside. ■ ■ ■

Casing. Start by drawing the trim to surround your custom window. Sills. Next, draw the wood trim that comprises the base of your window. Grills. Finally, add detailed grillwork to define panes in a window. Wherever you want your window design to include glass, simply leave those areas empty.

Each of the three drawing modes features an assortment of 2D drawing tools. For best results, use these tools in conjunction with snaps and editing tools to reshape window elements, minimize repetition and increase accuracy. For more information about snaps, see “Snap Basics” on page 29. For more information about using editing tools, see “Editing Your Window Design” on page 204. Tip: When drawing multiple instances of a window object, be sure to turn Auto Reset off. On the Options menu, click to uncheck Auto Reset Tools. When Auto Reset Tools is unchecked, you can draw concurrent window objects without selecting the corresponding window tool each time.

204

Note: For more information on adjusting the Nudge Rate, see “Controlling Drawing Settings” on page 205. To resize window elements 1

On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.

2

Click a window element to select it.

3

Click and hold down the mouse button, drag the segment or point to a new location, then release the mouse button.

Note: To constrain movements horizontally or vertically, press SHIFT, while reshaping the object. To move window elements 1

On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.

2

Click a window element to select it.

3

On the Edit menu, click Move. The Move dialog box is displayed.

4

Click either Cartesian or Polar, then type amount you want the object moved in the appropriate text boxes.

5

Click OK. The object is moved based on the coordinates you specified.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

Controlling Drawing Settings Note: Coordinates are measured in inches or they can be measured in feet and inches, separated by a hyphen.

To adjust the join sensitivity ■

To place a window element on top of another object 1

On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.

2

Click the object you want to place on top.

3

On the Edit menu, click Bring To Front or click Bring To Front on the Property bar that is displayed.

To adjust the drawing precision

To place a window element behind another object 1

On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.

2

Click the group you want to place on bottom.

3

On the Edit menu, click Send To Back or click Send To Back on the Property bar that is displayed.

■

Click the object to select it then right-click and click Clear.

■

To select the next window element On the Standard toolbar, click the Select Next Object tool. Window Designer selects the objects in the order you placed them.

To select the previous window element ■

On the Standard toolbar, click the Select Previous Object tool. Window Designer selects the objects in reverse order.

Controlling Drawing Settings

On the Property bar, click Constrain to Angle or Constrain to Roof Pitch, in the Tracking Constraints section. When Constrain to Roof Pitch is selected, polygons and lines at the top of the window design automatically constrain to the roof pitch in your home design.

To control automatic dimensioning ■

■

On the Property bar, click Inches or Feet - Inches, in the Precision section. Measurements on the status bar change to reflect your preference.

To set the tracking constraints

To remove window elements ■

On the Property bar, type a new value in the Join Sensitivity text box, then press ENTER. A lower value means that you must position objects closer to join them.

While in an active drawing mode, on the Property bar, check the Auto Dim checkbox to insert a dimension for any window element you draw.

Using Object or Point Selection Modes Object Selection Mode is active by default. Object selection, along with point selection, controls how your edits impact your object. If you are in object selection mode, changes affect the object as a whole. If you are working in point selection mode, each edge or corner of the object is treated separately, as you edit.

There are a variety of tools that allow you to control how you draw, select or modify window elements. The Property bar lets you modify a variety of settings, including the number of sides on a multigon or the size of your workspace.

In point selection mode, you are able to resize or reshape an object by moving one of its individual points. While it is easy to move an entire object in object selection mode, it is much more convenient to handle detailed edits using point selection mode.

To set the workspace boundary

To use object selection mode

1

On the Property bar, type new values in the Width and Height text boxes and press ENTER.

■

2

(optional) If you have already drawn objects in the design window, check Scale Objects to resize them accordingly.

■

To use point selection mode ■

To adjust the nudge rate On the Property bar, type a new value in the Nudge Rate text box, then press ENTER.

On the Property bar, click Object, in the Edit Level section, or right-click an object and click Object Selection.

On the Property bar, click Points, in the Edit Level section, or right-click an object and click Point Selection.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

205

Chapter

27 Window Designer

Using Nudge, Snap Tools and the Grid

To save a new window design

Once you’ve placed a window object, you can precisely move it into position using Nudge. Nudge utilizes the arrow keys to move selected objects, or features, a specified distance. For more information on using Nudge, see “Using Nudge”, which begins on page 153.

1

On the File menu, click Save Window to Library or click the Save Window to Library button on the Property bar. The Save Window to Category dialog box is displayed.

2

(optional) In the Window Category section, click to save the window to a different category.

3

(optional) Click New to create a new window category. Select a folder in which to create the new category, then type a name for the new category and click OK.

4

Type a name for the new window in the Window Name text box. New window names can contain up to 44 characters.

5

Type a description of the new window in the Window Description text box. New window descriptions can contain up to 78 characters.

Window Designer not only allows you to save new windows for use in your Punch! drawings, it also has easy-to-use tools for organizing and managing window libraries.

6

Click OK.

To import an existing window design

1

On the Property bar, click the down arrow next to Windows, then select Window Organizer. The Window Organizer dialog box is displayed.

2

On the left side of the Window Organizer, select a category.

Nudge works in tandem with the Snap Grid. To learn more about the Snap Grid, see “Using the Grid”, which begins on page 16. With snaps, you can define exactly where window objects are placed. You can move through the Snaps Toolbar with the Tab key. Each time you press Tab, the next Snap Tool is activated, Shift-Tab reverses the process. For more information, see “Punch! Software Primer”, which begins on page 27. Grid settings have a direct impact on the ease of aligning window objects, snapping objects to the grid and so on. When using the Snap to Grid feature, items that are dragged and dropped on the design window are automatically snapped, or placed, to align with the current grid. By default, Snap to Grid is turned on. For more information, see “Using the Grid”, which begins on page 16.

Managing Window Designs

1

On the Property bar, click the down arrow next to Windows, then select a Window library. The Preview Bar changes to display windows in this library.

2

(optional) On the Property bar, check the Replace Existing checkbox to remove existing window designs from the design window, as you import from the library. When this checkbox is unchecked, imported designs are placed on top of existing designs.

3

(optional) On the Property bar, check the Scale to Workspace checkbox to automatically resize the window design to the current workspace size, as you import from the library.

4

Click a window design on the Preview Bar and drag it into the Design Window.

206

To move windows between categories

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

Placing Custom Windows In Your Punch! Drawing 3

On the right side of the Window Organizer, select a category.

4

Click to select the window you want to move.

5

(optional) Click the Info button to display information about the selected window.

6

(optional) Click the Delete button to permanently remove the selected window.

7

Click an arrow button to move the selected window from one of the selected categories to the other.

8

Click Close.

To create, delete or rename a window category 1

On the Property bar, click the down arrow next to Windows, then select Window Organizer. The Window Organizer dialog box is displayed.

displayed the same as standard windows, but they are fully rendered in LiveView. To add a custom window 1

On the Floor Plan tab, click the Window Tool. The Window Properties Bar is displayed.

2

On the Window Properties Bar, click Window Style button, then click Custom from the popup window that is displayed. The Preview Bar displays the windows available in the current library.

3

Click the down arrow next to Windows, at the top of the Preview Bar, then select a library.

4

Click a window in the Preview Bar to select it.

5

On the Design window, click a wall where you want to place a window.

6

(optional) Type the Width, Height, Elevation and Trim Width to customize them.

7

(optional) For double-hung or casement/picture windows, specify the grill spacing.

Note: Any changes made on the Window Properties bar become the default and will be used the next time a window is placed. 2

(optional) In the Category section, click the New button. Select a folder in which to create the new category, then type a name for the new category and click OK.

3

(optional) In the Category section, click Delete. Select a folder to delete and click OK.

4

(optional) In the Category section, click Rename. Select a folder to rename and click OK. Type a new name for the category and click OK again.

5

Click Close.

Placing Custom Windows In Your Punch! Drawing Once you’ve designed a custom window, you can place it in your Punch! design as you would any other window, making sure to select the custom window library before you place the window. In the 2D design window, custom windows are

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

207

Chapter

208

27 Window Designer

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

Chapter 28

Cabinet Wizard Punch! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 has a complete line of cabinets, furniture and appliances that you can drag and drop onto your design from the Object Preview Bar. For more information, see “Objects Preview Bar”, which begins on page 170. In addition to the available pre-drawn objects, with Punch! Cabinet Wizard you can build custom cabinets to fit almost any design. Whether you choose to add cabinets to your workshop, kitchen or bathroom and so on, Cabinet Wizard makes it easy. Although they are not set in stone, here are some basic kitchen design dimensions and clearances: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Stock sizes begin at 9" width and increase in 3" increments Standard base cabinets are 36" high and at least 21" deep Standard wall cabinets are 12" deep and 30" high (they may be shorter if they are over a refrigerator, microwave and so on) Allow 18" between the countertop and the bottom of the wall cabinet above it Leave 24" of countertop space on at least one side of the sink Place the dishwasher within 3 feet of the sink Leave 15-18" of free counter space beside both the refrigerator and the cooking surface Cook tops should be no closer than 3" to the wall Electrical outlets that are near water should be specified as GFI Leave at least 30" of clearance in front of the tub or shower stall Standard vanity height is 32", but you may prefer higher or lower Whirlpool tubs typically need a space that is 36" x 72", but many take a larger area Allow at least 36" of clear space in front of the toilet or bidet Keep the sink at least 15" from the nearest wall and, when designing a bathroom with twin lavatories, at least 30" from each other

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

209

Chapter

28 Cabinet Wizard

Designing Full Cabinets A full cabinet is one that has both a base and a top cabinet. Stock sizes begin at 9" and increase in 3" increments. With Cabinet Wizard, you can design custom cabinets with just a few mouse clicks. Standard base cabinets are 36" high and at least 21" deep. Standard wall cabinets are 12" deep and 30" high, although they may be shorter if they are over a refrigerator, microwave and so on. Allow 18" between the countertop and the bottom of the wall cabinet above it. To design a full cabinet 1

Open Cabinet Wizard from Punch! AS4000 by clicking the Launch Cabinet Wizard icon on the PowerTools tab, the Cabinet Wizard dialog is displayed.

6

Type the base length, width and depth you require in the A, B and C text boxes.

7

Type the top cabinet elevation, height and depth you require in the D, E and F text boxes.

8

Specify the width and height of the toekick you require in the G text box.

9

Specify the thickness of the countertop you plan to use in text box H.

10 Type the rail and stile dimensions in the I and J text boxes. 11 Type the door height in text box K. 12 Specify the number of doors you want. 13 Click to uncheck drawers, if you do not want drawers in the base cabinet. 2

Click the radio button next to Full Cabinet; the cabinet rendering changes to reflect your choice.

3

Click Next.

14 Click to uncheck backsplash, if you do not want this feature or type the backsplash height in text box L. 15 Click the radio button next to the style of trim you require. Click Finish. 16 (optional) At any point, click Back to return to the previous dialog box.

Designing Base Cabinets

4

5

Click the radio button next to the direction the cabinet will face, when imported into your design, then click Next. (optional) Type an angle in the dialog box, then click Next.

210

Cabinet Wizard has four styles of base cabinets, including one standard base cabinet and three that feature built-in appliances. Standard base cabinets are 36" high and at least 21" deep. You may choose to design base cabinets at two heights, one height for standing activities (usually 36-45") and a lower height for activities performed while seated (usually 28-36"). To design a base cabinet 1

Launch Cabinet Wizard.

2

Click the radio button next to Base Cabinet; the cabinet rendering changes to reflect your choice.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

Designing Top Cabinets 3

Click Next.

2

4

Click the radio button next to the direction the cabinet will face, when imported into your design, then click Next.

Click the radio button next to Top Cabinet; the cabinet rendering changes to reflect your choice.

3

Click Next.

4

Click the radio button next to the direction the cabinet will face, when imported into your design, then click Next.

5

(optional) Type an angle in the text box, then click Next.

6

Type the base length in text box A.

7

Type the rail and stile dimensions in the I and J text boxes.

8

Specify the number of doors you want.

9

Click the radio button next to the style of trim you require. Click Finish.

5

(optional) Type an angle in the text box, then click Next.

6

Type the base length, width and depth you require in the A, B and C text boxes.

7

Specify the width and height of the toekick you require in the G text box.

8

Specify the thickness of the countertop you plan to use in text box H.

9

Type the rail and stile dimensions in the I and J text boxes.

10 Type the door height in text box K. 11 Specify the number of doors you want.

10 (optional) At any point, click Back to return to the previous dialog box.

12 Click to uncheck drawers, if you do not want drawers in the base cabinet.

Designing Islands

13 Click to uncheck backsplash, if you do not want this feature or type the backsplash height in text box L. 14 Click the radio button next to the style of trim you require. Click Finish. 15 (optional) At any point, click Back to return to the previous dialog box.

You can increase counter space by designing an island. Islands come in many styles and may contain cooktops, sinks and so on. In a well-designed kitchen, an island will not inhibit the “work triangle”, the pattern beginning at the sink, then going to the refrigerator, continuing on to the cooking surface, then returning to the sink. To design an island

Designing Top Cabinets Cabinet Wizard has two styles of top cabinets, including one standard top cabinet and one featuring a built-in microwave. Standard base cabinets are 36" high, at least 21" deep and 18" above the base cabinet.

1

Launch Cabinet Wizard.

2

Click the radio button next to Island Cabinet; the cabinet rendering changes to reflect your choice.

3

Click Next.

4

Click the radio button next to the direction the cabinet will face, when imported into your design, then click Next.

5

(optional) Type an angle in the text box, then click Next.

To design a top cabinet 1

Launch Cabinet Wizard.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

211

Chapter

28 Cabinet Wizard

6

Type the base length, width and depth you require in the A, B and C text boxes.

6

Type the base length, width and depth you require in the A, B and C text boxes.

7

Specify the width and height of the toekick you require in the G text box.

7

Type the rail and stile dimensions in the I and J text boxes.

8

Specify the thickness of the countertop you plan to use in text box H.

8

Specify the number of doors you want.

9

9

Type the rail and stile dimensions in the I and J text boxes.

Click the radio button next to the style of trim you require. Click Finish.

10 Type the door height in text box K. 11 Specify the number of doors you want. 12 Click to uncheck drawers, if you do not want drawers in the base cabinet. 13 Click the radio button next to the style of trim you require. Click Finish. 14 (optional) At any point, click Back to return to the previous dialog box.

10 (optional) At any point, click Back to return to the previous dialog box. To design an oven built into cabinets 1

Launch Cabinet Wizard.

2

Click the radio button next to Double-Oven, SingleOven or Range-Oven Combo; the cabinet rendering changes to reflect your choice.

3

Click Next.

4

Click the radio button next to the direction the cabinet will face, when imported into your design, then click Next.

5

(optional) Type an angle in the text box, then click Next.

6

Type the base length, width and depth you require in the A, B and C text boxes.

Designing Cabinets with Built-in Appliances Cabinet Wizard lets you install your appliances, too. Refrigerators, both side-by-side and stacked, range tops and ovens are easy to add to your design. To design a refrigerator built into cabinets 1

Launch Cabinet Wizard.

2

Click the radio button next to Refrigerator Cabinet (Sideby-Side) or Refrigerator Cabinet (Stacked); the cabinet rendering changes to reflect your choice.

3

Click Next.

4

Click the radio button next to the direction the cabinet will face, when imported into your design, then click Next.

5

(optional) Type an angle in the text box, then click Next.

212

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

Defining Dimension Increments 7

Type the rail and stile dimensions in the I and J text boxes.

8

Specify the number of doors you want.

9

Click the radio button next to the style of trim you require. Click Finish.

10 (optional) At any point, click Back to return to the previous dialog box. To elevate a built-in oven 1

Open Cabinet Wizard from Punch! AS4000 by clicking the Launch Cabinet Wizard icon on the PowerTools tab; the Cabinet Wizard dialog is displayed.

2

Click the radio button next to Double-Oven or SingleOven; the cabinet rendering changes to reflect your choice.

3

Click Next.

4

Click the radio button next to the direction the cabinet will face, when imported into your design, then click Next.

5

(optional) Type an angle in the text box, then click Next.

11 On the Size menu, click Appliance Elevation. The Appliance Elevation text box is displayed.

12 Type the dimension in the text box, then click OK.

Defining Dimension Increments 6

Type the base length, width and depth you require in the A, B and C text boxes.

7

Type the rail and stile dimensions in the I and J text boxes.

8

Specify 0 (zero) doors.

9

Click the radio button next to the style of trim you require.

You can gain great control over changes in the dimensions of each cabinet by specifying a dimension increment. This increment will be the measurement amount used when you click the arrows to alter each dimension. To change the dimension increment 1

On the Standard toolbar, click the Dimension Increment Tool. The Increments text box is displayed.

2

Type the dimension in the text box, then click OK.

10 (optional) At any point, click Back to return to the previous dialog box. Click Finish.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

213

Chapter

28 Cabinet Wizard

Specifying a Trim Style

To change the base cabinet height

Punch! AS4000 offers three trim styles for the front of your cabinets. You can mix and match or specify that all cabinets use the same trim.

1

On the Standard toolbar, click the Base Cabinet Height tool or, on the Size menu, click Base Cabinet Height. The Base Cabinet Height dialog box is displayed.

2

Type the height of the cabinet in the text box.

3

Click OK. The cabinet height changes to reflect the new measurement.

To specify a trim style 1

On the Options menu, click Trim Style. The Trim Style dialog box is displayed.

To change the base cabinet height by set increments ■

2

Click the radio button next to the trim style you want to use for your cabinetry, then click OK.

On the Standard toolbar, click the up or down arrow next to the Base Cabinet Width Tool. Each click will increase (or decrease) the dimension by the set increment.

Customizing Cabinet Features

Note: The current measurement is always displayed next to the incremental arrows.

Once the Cabinet Wizard has placed the cabinet in the center of the design window, you can customize the size, material, color and so on.

To change the base cabinet depth 1

On the Standard toolbar, click the Base Cabinet Depth tool or, on the Size menu, click Base Cabinet Depth. The Base Cabinet Depth dialog box is displayed.

2

Type the depth of the cabinet in the text box.

3

Click OK. The cabinet depth changes to reflect the new measurement.

To change the base cabinet length 1

On the Standard toolbar, click the Base Cabinet Length tool or, on the Size menu, click Base Cabinet Length. The Base Cabinet Length dialog box is displayed.

2

Type the length of the cabinet in the text box.

3

Click OK. The cabinet length changes to reflect the new measurement.

To change the base cabinet length by set increments ■

On the Standard toolbar, click the up or down arrow next to the Base Cabinet Length Tool. Each click will increase (or decrease) the dimension by the set increment.

Note: The current measurement is always displayed next to the incremental arrows.

214

To change the base cabinet depth by set increments ■

On the Standard toolbar, click the up or down arrow next to the Base Cabinet Width Tool. Each click will increase (or decrease) the dimension by the set increment.

Note: The current measurement is always displayed next to the incremental arrows. To change the top cabinet elevation 1

On the Standard toolbar, click the Top Cabinet Elevation tool or, on the Size menu, click Top Cabinet Elevation. The Top Cabinet Elevation dialog box is displayed.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

Customizing Cabinet Features 3

Click OK. The cabinet width changes to reflect the new measurement.

To change the top cabinet depth by set increments 2

Type the elevation of the cabinet in the text box.

3

Click OK. The cabinet elevation changes to reflect the new measurement.

To change the top cabinet elevation by set increments ■

On the Standard toolbar, click the up or down arrow next to the Top Cabinet Elevation Tool. Each click will increase (or decrease) the dimension by the set increment.

■

On the Standard toolbar, click the up or down arrow next to the Top Cabinet Depth Tool. Each click will increase (or decrease) the dimension by the set increment.

Note: The current measurement is always displayed next to the incremental arrows. To change the countertop thickness 1

On the Standard toolbar, click the Countertop Thickness tool or, on the Size menu, click Countertop Thickness. The Countertop Thickness dialog box is displayed.

2

Type the thickness of the countertop in the text box.

3

Click OK. The countertop thickness changes to reflect the new measurement.

Note: The current measurement is always displayed next to the incremental arrows. To change the top cabinet height 1

On the Standard toolbar, click the Top Cabinet Height tool or, on the Size menu, click Base Cabinet Height. The Top Cabinet Height dialog box is displayed.

To change the countertop thickness by set increments 2

Type the height of the cabinet in the text box.

3

Click OK. The cabinet height changes to reflect the new measurement.

To change the top cabinet height by set increments ■

On the Standard toolbar, click the up or down arrow next to the Top Cabinet Height Tool. Each click will increase (or decrease) the dimension by the set increment.

Note: The current measurement is always displayed next to the incremental arrows.

■

Note: The current measurement is always displayed next to the incremental arrows. To change the backsplash height 1

On the Standard toolbar, click the Backsplash Height tool or, on the Size menu, click Backsplash Height. The Backsplash Height dialog box is displayed.

2

Type the height of the backsplash in the text box.

3

Click OK. The backsplash height changes to reflect the new measurement.

To change the top cabinet depth 1

2

On the Standard toolbar, click the up or down arrow next to the Countertop Thickness Tool. Each click will increase (or decrease) the dimension by the set increment.

On the Standard toolbar, click the Top Cabinet Depth tool or, on the Size menu, click Top Cabinet Depth. The Top Cabinet Depth dialog box is displayed.

Type the depth of the cabinet in the text box.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

215

Chapter

28 Cabinet Wizard

To change the backsplash height by set increments ■

On the Standard toolbar, click the up or down arrow next to the Backsplash Height Tool. Each click will increase (or decrease) the dimension by the set increment.

Note: The current measurement is always displayed next to the incremental arrows.

Note: The current measurement is always displayed next to the incremental arrows. To change the rail height 1

On the Standard toolbar, click the Rail Height tool or, on the Size menu, click Rail Height. The Rail Height dialog box is displayed.

2

Type the rail height in the text box.

3

Click OK. The rail height changes to reflect the new measurement.

To change the backsplash thickness 1

On the Standard toolbar, click the Backsplash Thickness tool or, on the Size menu, click Backsplash Thickness. The Backsplash Thickness dialog box is displayed.

To change the rail height by set increments 2

Type the thickness of the backsplash in the text box.

3

Click OK. The backsplash thickness changes to reflect the new measurement.

To change the backsplash thickness by set increments ■

On the Standard toolbar, click the up or down arrow next to the Backsplash Thickness Tool. Each click will increase (or decrease) the dimension by the set increment.

■

On the Standard toolbar, click the up or down arrow next to the Rail Height Tool. Each click will increase (or decrease) the dimension by the set increment.

Note: The current measurement is always displayed next to the incremental arrows. To change the stile width 1

On the Standard toolbar, click the Stile Width tool or, on the Size menu, click Stile Width. The Stile Width dialog box is displayed.

2

Type the stile width in the text box.

3

Click OK. The stile width changes to reflect the new measurement.

Note: The current measurement is always displayed next to the incremental arrows. To change the toe kick dimension 1

On the Standard toolbar, click the Toe Kick tool or, on the Size menu, click Toe Kick Size. The Toe Kick Height dialog box is displayed.

To change the stile width by set increments ■

2

Type the toe kick size in the text box.

3

Click OK. The toe kick dimensions change to reflect the new measurement.

To change the toe kick by set increments ■

On the Standard toolbar, click the up or down arrow next to the Toe Kick Tool. Each click will increase (or decrease) the dimension by the set increment.

216

On the Standard toolbar, click the up or down arrow next to the Stile Width Tool. Each click will increase (or decrease) the dimension by the set increment.

Note: The current measurement is always displayed next to the incremental arrows. To change the door height 1

On the Standard toolbar, click the Door Height tool or, on the Size menu, click Door Height. The Door Height dialog box is displayed.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

Rendering Options

2

Type the door height in the text box.

3

Click OK. The door height changes to reflect the new measurement.

To change the door height by set increments ■

On the Standard toolbar, click the up or down arrow next to the Door Height Tool. Each click will increase (or decrease) the dimension by the set increment.

Note: The current measurement is always displayed next to the incremental arrows.

Rendering Options With Cabinet Wizard’s rendering options you can view your cabinet in either Final Quality or ClearView. To view a cabinet using ClearView ■

On the View menu, click Render ClearView or click the ClearView Tool.

Exporting to 3D Custom Workshop By exporting a Cabinet Wizard design to 3D Custom Workshop, the smallest details can be added or altered. For example, add knobs to cabinet doors, change the handles from the right side to the left side of the refrigerator and so on. For more information, see “3D Custom Workshop”, which begins on page 341. To export a cabinet to 3D Custom Workshop 1

On the File menu, click Export to Custom Workshop. The Save As dialog box is displayed.

2

In the File Name text box, type a name. Cabinet Wizard automatically adds the POB extension. Click OK.

Note: You may then open the file in 3D Custom Workshop.

To render a cabinet in 3D final quality ■

On the View menu, click Render 3D Final Quality or click the 3D Final Quality Tool.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

217

Chapter

218

28 Cabinet Wizard

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

Chapter 29

Fireplace Wizard Adding a fireplace is now #10 on the “Things that Add Value to Your Home” list! With Punch! Fireplace Wizard, it’s a snap to do. Once you have stepped through the Wizard you are able to customize every feature of your Fireplace. Then you can add materials and colors to create a truly individual home feature!

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

219

Chapter

29 Fireplace Wizard

Fireplace Wizard Punch! Fireplace Wizard walks you through the initial design process, then allows total customization of each feature. To design a full fireplace 1

Open Fireplace Wizard from Punch! AS4000 by clicking the Launch Fireplace Wizard icon, on the PowerTools tab; the Fireplace Wizard dialog is displayed.

4

(optional) Type new dimensions in the appropriate text box, then click Next.

Note: Don’t worry, you can always change these dimensions at a later time.

2

3

Click Next.

5

(optional) Check the feature(s) you want and type new dimensions in the appropriate dialog box(es).

6

Click Finish. Your fireplace is displayed.

Click the radio button next to the type of fireplace you want to design, then click Next.

220

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

Defining Dimension Increments

Defining Dimension Increments

To change the firebox dimensions

You can gain great control over changes in the dimensions of each area of fireplace design by specifying a dimension increment. This increment will be the measurement amount used when you click the arrows to alter each dimension.

1

On the General tab, type a dimension in the Firebox Width text box or click the up or down arrow. Each click will increase (or decrease) the dimension by the set increment.

To change the dimension increment

2

On the General tab, type a dimension in the Firebox Height text box or click the up or down arrow. Each click will increase (or decrease) the dimension by the set increment.

3

On the General tab, type a dimension in the Firebox Depth text box or click the up or down arrow. Each click will increase (or decrease) the dimension by the set increment.

4

On the General Tab, type a dimension in the Firebox Elevation text box or click the up or down arrow. Each click will increase (or decrease) the dimension by the set increment.

1

2

On the Design menu, click Set Dimensions Increment. The Increment Value dialog box is displayed.

Type the dimension in the text box, then click OK.

Customizing the General Dimensions The General Tab in Punch! Fireplace Wizard allows total control over dimensions of each face and even the firebox. As you make changes, the preview window will display them. To select a face

Customizing Hearth & Mantel Dimensions

1

On the Design menu, click Face, then click the needed face on the pop-up menu.

The Hearth & Mantel Tab is where you can customize these features. As you make changes, the preview window will display them.

2

(optional) Click a Work on Face button above the Face Dimension section of the General Tab.

To specify a hearth Check the Include Hearth box on the Hearth & Mantel tab.

Note: All faces may not be available at all times. Some fireplaces may have three faces, while others may have only one face.

■

To change the face dimensions

1

On the General tab, type a dimension in the Face Width text box or click the up or down arrow. Each click will increase (or decrease) the dimension by the set increment.

On the Hearth & Mantel tab, type a dimension in the Hearth Width text box or click the up or down arrow. Each click will increase (or decrease) the dimension by the set increment.

2

On the General tab, type a dimension in the Face Height text box or click the up or down arrow. Each click will increase (or decrease) the dimension by the set increment.

On the Hearth & Mantel tab, type a dimension in the Hearth Height text box or click the up or down arrow. Each click will increase (or decrease) the dimension by the set increment.

3

On the Hearth & Mantel tab, type a dimension in the Hearth Depth text box or click the up or down arrow. Each click will increase (or decrease) the dimension by the set increment.

1

2

3

On the General tab, type a dimension in the Face Depth text box or click the up or down arrow. Each click will increase (or decrease) the dimension by the set increment.

To change the hearth dimensions

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

221

Chapter

29 Fireplace Wizard

To specify a mantel ■

Check the Include Mantel box on the Hearth & Mantel tab.

To change the chimney pot dimensions 1

On the Chimney tab, type a dimension in the Pot Width text box or click the up or down arrow. Each click will increase (or decrease) the dimension by the set increment.

2

On the Chimney tab, type a dimension in the Pot Height text box or click the up or down arrow. Each click will increase (or decrease) the dimension by the set increment.

3

On the Chimney tab, type a dimension in the Pot Depth text box or click the up or down arrow. Each click will increase (or decrease) the dimension by the set increment.

To change the mantel dimensions 1

2

3

4

On the Hearth & Mantel tab, type a dimension in the Mantel Width text box or click the up or down arrow. Each click will increase (or decrease) the dimension by the set increment. On the Hearth & Mantel tab, type a dimension in the Mantel Height text box or click the up or down arrow. Each click will increase (or decrease) the dimension by the set increment. On the Hearth & Mantel tab, type a dimension in the Mantel Depth text box or click the up or down arrow. Each click will increase (or decrease) the dimension by the set increment. On the Hearth & Mantel Tab, type a dimension in the Mantel Elevation text box or click the up or down arrow. Each click will increase (or decrease) the dimension by the set increment.

Rendering Options With Fireplace Wizard’s rendering options you can view your fireplace in either Final Quality or ClearView. To view a fireplace using ClearView ■

On the View menu, click Render ClearView or click the ClearView Tool.

Customizing the Chimney Dimensions The Chimney Tab in Punch! Fireplace Wizard allows you to update whether or not you want a chimney and lets you specify its dimensions. As you make changes, the preview window will display them. To specify a chimney ■

Check the Include Chimney box on the Chimney tab.

To change the chimney dimensions 1

On the Chimney tab, type a dimension in the Chimney Width text box or click the up or down arrow. Each click will increase (or decrease) the dimension by the set increment.

2

On the Chimney tab, type a dimension in the Chimney Height text box or click the up or down arrow. Each click will increase (or decrease) the dimension by the set increment.

3

On the Chimney tab, type a dimension in the Chimney Depth text box or click the up or down arrow. Each click will increase (or decrease) the dimension by the set increment.

222

To render a fireplace in 3D final quality ■

On the View menu, click Render 3D Final Quality or click the 3D Final Quality Tool.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

Saving a Fireplace

Closing a File When you finish working with a file, close it to remove the window from the screen and to free up your computer’s memory. You have the option of placing your fireplace into your home plan and moving it into position. To close a file ■

On the File menu, click Exit PowerTool. The update current design menu is displayed. Click Yes. The fireplace will be placed in the center of the design window.

Exporting to 3D Custom Workshop Note: If your fireplace is currently in ClearView mode, you must click the ClearView Tool to render with materials.

Saving a Fireplace When you open a file, Fireplace Wizard copies the file to your computer’s memory. As you work, you modify the copy stored in memory. Any system failure or loss of power destroys that copy. To save your work permanently, you must save it to a file on a disk. A good rule of thumb is to save every 15 minutes, or after you’ve completed any work you wouldn’t want to redo. When you click the Save As command, Fireplace Wizard saves the active drawing, using the name and location you specify. You can create more than one version of a drawing or save copies on another disk for safekeeping. You can save each version under a different name or you can save them under the same name, in different folders or on different disks.

By exporting a Fireplace Wizard design to 3D Custom Workshop, the smallest details can be added or altered. For more information, see “3D Custom Workshop”, which begins on page 341. To export a fireplace to 3D Custom Workshop 1

On the File menu, click Export to Custom Workshop. The Save As dialog box is displayed.

2

In the File Name text box, type a name. Fireplace Wizard automatically adds the POB extension. Click OK.

Note: You may then open the file in 3D Custom Workshop.

To save an existing file ■

On the File menu, click Save or press CTRL+S.

To save a new, unnamed file 1

On the File menu, click Save As. The Save As dialog box is displayed.

2

In the File Name text box, type a name. Fireplace Wizard automatically adds the PFW extension.

3

Click Save.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

223

Chapter

224

29 Fireplace Wizard

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

Chapter 30

Plant Editor Punch! Plant Editor lets you take digital pictures of your favorite plants and add them to your landscape design. Although this is a straightforward process, there are a few hints that will make the ultimate result much more satisfying.

Tips for Using Plant Editor ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Verify that the image is level and square when taking a digital picture or scanning a photograph. If the initial photograph is not square, use your graphics software to rotate it in half-degree increments until it is. Photograph the feature when the sun is shining. This ensures more color saturation and detail of the image. Take your time masking the plant; the better the mask, the better the end result. Be sure to mask out the areas where the sun shines through the plant. This will create more realistic shadows. Images should touch the bottom of the image area. If it is centered in the area, it will float above ground level.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

225

Chapter

30 Plant Editor

Plant Editor You can now create custom libraries of plants with Punch! Home Design Architectural Series 4000’s powerful Plant Editor! Launching Plant Editor 1

Launch Plant Editor by clicking the Plant Editor icon on the PowerTool Bar. Plant Editor Wizard automatically opens and the Open Bitmap File dialog box is displayed.

2

In the File Name box, type the name of the file you want to open, or search for the file by switching folders or drives.

3

When you see the name of the file you want to open, click to select it.

4

Click Open.

5

The Plant Editor Welcome message is displayed. Click Next.

6

(optional) Click Import and select a *.PTI file that contains the needed plant data.

226

7

The Plant Description menu is displayed. Type appropriate information in the dialog boxes. Click Next.

8

The Plant Requirements menu is displayed. Enter the appropriate information in the dialog boxes. Click Next.

9

The Miscellaneous menu is displayed. Enter the appropriate information. Click Next.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

Replicating Parts of the Plant Saving an image 1

On the File menu, click Save Image as BMP, the Save Image dialog box is displayed.

2

Type a file name in the File Name text box.

3

Click Save.

Opening an overlay mask 1

On the File menu, click Open Overlay Mask, the Open Overlay Mask dialog box is displayed.

2

In the File Name box, type the name of the file you want to open, or search for the file by switching folders or drives.

3

When you see the name of the file you want to open, click to select it.

4

Click Open.

10 The Finish screen is displayed. Click where you want the plant saved, then type a file name. 11 Click Finish. The BMP file is displayed in the Plant Editor edit window.

Saving an overlay mask 1

On the File menu, click Save Overlay Mask, the Save Overlay Mask dialog box is displayed.

2

Type a file name in the File Name text box.

3

Click Save.

Replicating Parts of the Plant You can duplicate parts of your plant with the Replicate Tool, making it easy to add a leaf here or a branch there. To replicate parts of the plant 1

Click the Replicate Tool.

2

Click on the design window to define the start point. A rubber-band rectangle is displayed and follows the pointer.

3

Hold the mouse button down, as you define the area you want to duplicate.

4

Release the mouse button. The selection will be active.

5

Click the selection and move it into position.

File Management With Plant Editor you can save your image as a new BMP image, or you can overwrite the existing file.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

227

Chapter

228

30 Plant Editor

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

Chapter 31

Trim Designer In much the same way that ornate trim pieces are milled from basic lumber, Punch! Trim Designer lets you fashion trims by editing a basic shape. Modify one of the trims in Punch! Home Design Architectural Series 4000’s libraries or create one of your own, using Trim Designer’s powerful image editing and management tools.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

229

Chapter

31 Trim Designer

Launching Trim Designer ■

Launch Trim Designer by clicking the Trim Designer icon on the PowerTool Bar.

Controlling Drawing Settings There are a variety of tools that allow you to control how you draw, select or modify trim segments in Trim Designer.

Designing Custom Trims

To adjust the nudge rate

Rather than drawing your custom base and crown trims, Trim Designer lets you create custom trims for your home plan by reshaping a rectangular base shape—in much the same way that trims are milled from boards. You can also modify existing trims from the Trim Library. Using standard editing tools to change the location, shape or angle of individual segments of the trim face, you can add graceful curves or carve precision angles into the face of your custom trims.

■

To nudge a trim segment

Trim Designer not only allows you to save new trims for use in your Punch! drawings, it also has easy-to-use tools for organizing and managing trim libraries.

1

On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.

2

Click the object to select it.

3

On the Edit menu, click Nudge, then click the direction (up, down, left, right).

4

(optional) Use the arrow keys on your keyboard to nudge the object or feature.

On the Property bar, type a new value in the Nudge Rate text box, then press ENTER.

To control automatic dimensioning ■

On the Options menu, check Automatic Dimensioning to insert a dimension for any trim segment you draw.

Managing Trim Designs

To open a new trim design 1

On the File menu, click New Trim. The Trim Design Selection dialog bog is displayed.

2

Click one of the basic trim templates to select it.

3

(optional) Type new values in the Width and Height text boxes.

4

Click OK.

Note: For more information on adjusting the Nudge Rate, see “Controlling Drawing Settings” on page 230. To resize trim segments 1

On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.

2

Click a trim segment to select it.

3

Click and hold down the mouse button, drag the segment to a new location, then release the mouse button.

To resize the entire trim object 1

On the Property bar, click Resize Trim. The Trim Size dialog box is displayed.

To import an existing trim design

2

Type new values in the Width and Height text boxes.

3

Click OK.

230

1

On the Property bar, click the down arrow next to Trims, then select a Trim library. The Preview Bar changes to display trims in this library.

2

Double-click a trim design on the Preview Bar to place it in the Design Window.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

Placing Custom Trims In Your Punch! Drawing To save a new trim design 1

2

On the File menu, click Save Trim to Library, or click the Save Trim to Library button on the Property bar. The Save Trim to Category dialog box is displayed. (optional) In the Trim Category section, click to save the trim to a different category.

5

(optional) Click the Info button to display information about the selected trim.

6

(optional) Click the Delete button to permanently remove the selected trim.

7

Click an arrow button to move the selected trim from one of the selected categories to the other.

8

Click Close.

To create, delete or rename a trim category

3

(optional) Click New to create a new trim category. Select a folder in which to create the new category, then type a name for the new category and click OK.

4

Type a name for the new trim in the Trim Name text box. New trim names can contain up to 44 characters.

5

Type a description of the new trim in the Trim Description text box. New trim descriptions can contain up to 78 characters.

6

Click OK.

1

On the Property bar, click the down arrow next to Trims, then select Trim Organizer. The Trim Organizer dialog box is displayed.

2

(optional) In the Category section, click the New button. Select a folder in which to create the new category, then type a name for the new category and click OK.

3

(optional) In the Category section, click Delete. Select a folder to delete and click OK.

4

(optional) In the Category section, click Rename. Select a folder to rename and click OK. Type a new name for the category and click OK again.

5

Click Close.

To move trims between categories 1

On the Property bar, click the down arrow next to Trims, then select Trim Organizer. The Trim Organizer dialog box is displayed.

Placing Custom Trims In Your Punch! Drawing

2

On the left side of the Trim Organizer, select a category.

3

On the right side of the Trim Organizer, select a category.

4

Click to select the trim you want to move.

Once you’ve created your own custom trims in the Trim Designer, you can easily apply them back in your Punch! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 project. Simply navigate to the library where you stored the new trim and drag the image to a surface in your LiveView window.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

231

Chapter

31 Trim Designer

To apply custom trims

Printing Files

1

Click the Trim tab. The Preview Bar will display trims available for placement.

2

On the Trim Tab, click the arrow next to “Trim”, then select the needed trim library from the menu.

Punch! Trim Designer prints using the current Windows printer. You can, however, print using any installed printer. Your can print your drawing in color or in black and white.

3

On the Preview Bar, click the custom trim you want to apply; hold down the mouse button and drag it onto a surface of your home in the LiveView window. The custom trim you selected is applied.

Tip: To apply the same trim to multiple surfaces, select AutoClick Placement on the pop-up menu. Then simply select a trim from the Preview Bar and click each surface you want to place it on, right-clicking when you are finished.

232

To print to fit page 1

On the File menu, click Print to Fit Page or press Ctrl+P. A Print Manager menu will ask if you want to print your drawing in color. Click Yes to print in color; click no to print in greyscale. The Print dialog box is displayed.

2

Click the down arrow next to the printer name.

3

Click the printer you want to use.

4

Click the Properties button. The Properties menu is displayed.

Note: The following Properties menu is that of a popular color printer. Refer to your printer’s documentation on the use of its specific features. 5

Select the paper orientation.

6

Select the paper size. Typically, this will be either 8.5x11 in (letter) or 8.5x14 in (legal).

7

Click the down arrow next to media type. Then select the required media.

8

Click either Auto Feeder or Manual Feed as your paper feed method, then click Print.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

Chapter 32

Pool Designer Imagine the pool of your dreams, picture it in your mind. Now make it a reality with Punch! Pool Designer! Create a pool as extravagant or intimate as you like. Create the ultimate atmosphere by selecting just the right accessories from Pool Designer. Get started now...

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

233

Chapter ■

32 Pool Designer

Launch Pool Designer by clicking the Pool Designer icon on the PowerTool Bar.

Create a Pool Using Pool Wizard The Punch! Pool Wizard guides you through the process of selecting more advanced shaped pools, plus defining the coping (the tiles that edge your in-ground pool), water, liner and sizing properties of your pool. Pool Wizard also allows you to create an above-ground pool and defines its properties. To create a pool using Pool Wizard 1

From the Shape tab click the Pool Wizard tool. Pool Wizard appears.

To customize coping properties in Pool Wizard 1

To change the coping width, type the width you want in the Coping Width text box on the Properties bar.

2

To change the coping thickness, type the thickness you want in the Coping Thickness text box on the Properties bar.

To customize water properties in Pool Wizard 2

There are three tabs of pool types for you to choose from: Basic Shapes, Advanced Shapes and Above Ground. Click the thumbnail for a large full-color preview of the pool shape.

1

Your pool appears filled with water when viewed in LiveView. If you want your pool to appear empty in LiveView, uncheck the checkbox next to Fill Pool.

2

To change the water level, type the distance you want the water to appear from the top edge of the pool in the Water Level text box.

To customize liner properties in Pool Wizard

3

After selecting your shape, customize the properties on the Properties bar.

234

1

Liner Properties specifies the depth of your pool. By default, your pool features both a shallow end and a deep end. Click the checkbox next to User Defined Depth Areas to disable this feature and specify your own shallow and deep sections on the workspace.

2

Type the depth for the shallow end of your pool in the Shallow End Depth text box.

3

By default, the Deep End Depth checkbox is selected. Type the depth for the Deep End of your pool in the Deep End text box.

Note: If you uncheck the Deep End checkbox a Deep End won’t be automatically generated.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

Shaping your pool 4

(optional) Deselect User Defined Depth Areas if you want to create custom shallow and deep ends using the methods described in the section “Editing Your Pool Design” on page 242.

5

Place the crosshair where you want the shape to begin and click and drag to the needed size. Notice Punch! automatically displays the shape’s dimensions. Release your mouse to place the shape. The shape appears on your workspace.

To customize the size of your pool in Pool Wizard 1

You can change the Sizing properties by entering custom dimensions for your pool. In the Pool Width text box, type the width you want.

To create an oval/circle shape 1

On the Shape tab, click the Oval/ Circle Pool tool. The Pool Shape Properties bar appears.

Note: By default, Punch! Pool Wizard automatically calculates the aspect ratio to keep your shape intact. Deselect the Maintain aspect ratio checkbox to override this feature.

2

Click the Method button on the Pool Shape Properties bar. The Method options appear.

3

Click the Default button to return to the pool’s original width and height.

■

4

When you have finished selecting your pool’s shape and customizing its properties, click OK. Your pool appears on the Pool Designer workspace.

Draw an oval starting from the top-left side Draw an oval starting from the center Draw a circle starting from the top-left side Draw a circle starting from the center

2

In the Pool Height text box, type the height you want.

Shaping your pool The first step to creating the pool of your dreams is to select the shape you want. Punch! offers Pool Tools to create a pool from basic shapes and a Pool Wizard to create a more advanced design.

■ ■ ■

3

Select which Method you want. A crosshair appears on the workspace as you move your mouse over it.

4

Place the crosshair where you want the shape to appear and click and drag to your desired size. Notice Punch! automatically displays the shape’s dimensions. Release your mouse to place the shape. The shape appears on your workspace and the Pool Shape Properties bar appears.

To create a rectangle shape 1

Click the Shape tab. The Shape options are displayed.

To create a polygon shape

2

Click the Rectangle Pool tool from the Shape tab. The Pool Shape Properties bar is displayed.

3

Click the Method button on the Pool Shape Properties bar. The Method options appear.

■

Draw a rectangle starting from the topleft side Draw a rectangle starting from the center Draw a square starting from the top-left side Draw a square starting from the center

■ ■ ■

4

1

On the Shape tab, click the Polygon Pool tool. A crosshair appears on the workspace as you move your mouse over it.

2

Place the crosshair where you want the shape to appear. Click and extend the rubber band line to where you want it. Click to place each side and continue until your shape is complete.

3

Double-click to place the shape. Your Polygon Pool shape appears on your workspace and the Pool Shape Properties bar is displayed.

Select which Method you want. A crosshair appears on the workspace as you move your mouse over it.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

235

Chapter

32 Pool Designer

To create a multigon shape 1

6

Place the crosshair where you want the depth to appear and click and drag to your desired size. Notice Punch! automatically displays the depth’s dimensions. Release your mouse to place the depth. The depth appears on your workspace and the Depth Area Properties bar appears.

7

Type the depth you want in the Area Depth text box on the Properties bar and press ENTER.

On the Shape tab, click the Multigon Pool tool. The Pool Shape Properties bar is displayed. 2

3

On the Properties bar, type the number of sides you want your shape to have in the #Sides text box and press ENTER. A crosshair appears on the workspace as you move your mouse over it. Place the crosshair where you want the shape to appear. Click and drag to extend the shape to the size you want. Release to place the shape. Your Multigon shape appears on your workspace and the Pool Shape Properties bar appears.

To create a curved shape 1

2

On the Shape tab, click the Curved Pool tool. A crosshair appears on the workspace as you move your mouse over it. Place the crosshair where you want the shape to begin. Click and extend the rubber band line to where you want it. Click to place the side and continue until your shape is complete.

Defining the depth of your pool After you have fine-tuned the shape of your pool, you can set the depth by drawing shapes with the tools that work just like those on the Shapes Tab.

To create a polygon depth level in your pool 1

Click the Depth tab. The Depth options are displayed.

2

Click the Polygon Depth tool from the Depth tab. A crosshair appears on the workspace as you move your mouse over it. Place the crosshair where you want the depth to begin.

3

Left-click and extend the rubber band line to where you want it. Click to place the side and continue until your shape is complete.

4

Double-click to place the depth. Your Polygon Depth appears on your workspace and the Depth Area Properties bar is displayed.

5

Type the depth you want in the Area Depth text box on the Properties bar and press ENTER.

To create a multigon depth level in your pool 1

Click the Depth tab. The Depth options are displayed.

2

Click the Multigon Depth tool from the Depth tab.

3

On the Properties bar, type the number of sides you want your Multigon to have in the #Sides text box and press ENTER. A crosshair appears on the workspace as you move your mouse over it.

4

Place the crosshair where you want the depth to appear. Click and drag to extend the Multigon to the size you want. Release to place the depth. Your Multigon Depth appears on your workspace and the Depth Area Properties bar is displayed.

5

Type the depth you want in the Area Depth text box on the Properties bar and press ENTER.

To create an oval/circle depth level in your pool 1

2

Click the Depth tab. The Depth options are displayed.

Click the Oval/Circle Depth tool from the Depth tab. The Depth Area Properties bar is displayed.

3

Click the Method button on the Depth Area Properties bar. The Method options are displayed.

4

Click the Method you want to draw your depth:

■

Draw an oval starting from the top-left side Draw an oval starting from the center Draw a circle starting from the top-left side Draw a circle starting from the center

■ ■ ■

5

Select which Method you want. A crosshair appears on the workspace as you move your mouse over it.

236

To create a curved depth level in your pool 1

Click the Depth tab. The Depth options are displayed.

2

Click the Curved Depth tool from the Depth tab. A crosshair appears on the workspace as you move your mouse over it.

3

Place the crosshair where you want the depth to begin. Left-click and extend the rubber band line to where you

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

Equipping Your Pool want it. Click to place the side and continue until your shape is complete. 4

Double-click to place the depth. Your Curved Depth appears on your workspace and the Depth Area Properties bar is displayed.

5

Type the depth you want in the Area Depth text box on the Properties bar and press ENTER.

To create parallel depth 1

To create a depth parallel to the current depth, click the Parallel Depth button on the Pool Shape Properties bar. The Build Parallel Depth dialog box is displayed.

To edit your depth 1

Once you’ve placed a depth from the Depth tab (including a Parallel Depth), the Depth Area Properties bar is displayed.

2

You can edit your depth on two levels: Object and Points.

2

■

Object Edit allows you to click and drag the object into the new position or shape Points Edit allows you to click a point on the object and drag it into the new position to reshape it

By default, the Parallel Depth is offset 6” from the inside edge. To increase or decrease the Offset Distance, type the amount of space you want between the edge and the Parallel Depth.

3

To create your Parallel Depth click OK. The Parallel Depth appears inside your pool.

■

3

Click the Auto-Dim checkbox to automatically display your depth’s dimensions on your workspace.

Note: Dimensions are not available for Oval/Circle or Curved depths. 4

Use the Curve sector of the Depth Area Properties bar to customize the shape of your depth.

5

Click the Adjust button to on the Depth Area Properties bar, the Smooth dialog box is displayed.

6

To create round edges all around your depth, increase the Smoothing Tension. To create more defined edges decrease the Smoothing Tension. Once you have set the tension you want, click OK. Your depth appears with the Smoothing Tension you’ve selected.

7

To completely square off each edge, click the Straighten button on the Properties bar. Each edge appears square.

8

To set the depth, type the depth you want in the Area Depth text box on the Properties bar and press ENTER.

Equipping Your Pool Punch! Pool Designer gives you all the tools and equipment you’ll need to create a realistic pool setting. Add the steps, railings, and equipment that allow you to enjoy and maintain your pool. To add a standard ladder 1

Click the Ladders tab. The Ladder style options are displayed.

2

Click the Standard Ladders tool from the Ladders tab. The Standard Ladder Style button appears on the Properties bar.

3

Click the Standard Ladder Style button. The ladder styles are displayed.

4

Select which ladder style you want. A crosshair appears on the workspace as you move your mouse over it.

5

Place the crosshair where you want the ladder to appear and click and drag so the two red arrows are pointing towards the center of the pool. Release your mouse to place the ladder. The ladder appears on your workspace.

Note: To create an island in your pool, type 0 in the Area Depth text and press ENTER.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

237

Chapter

32 Pool Designer Release your mouse to place the ladder. The rail appears on your workspace. To add p-rails

To add a camelback ladder

1

Click the Ladders tab. The Ladder style options are displayed.

1

Click the Ladders tab. The Ladder style options are displayed.

2

2

Click the CamelBack Ladders tool from the Ladders tab. The CamelBack Ladder Style button appears on the Properties bar.

Click the P-Rails tool from the Ladders tab. A crosshair appears on the workspace as you move your mouse over it.

3

Place the crosshair where you want the ladder to appear and click and drag so the two red arrows are pointing towards the center of the pool. Release your mouse to place the ladder. The rail appears on your workspace.

3

Click the CamelBack Ladder Style button. The ladder styles are displayed.

4

Select which ladder style you want. A crosshair appears on the workspace as you move your mouse over it.

5

Place the crosshair where you want the ladder to appear and click and drag so the two red arrows are pointing towards the center of the pool. Release your mouse to place the ladder. The ladder appears on your workspace.

To add a parallel-look ladder 1

Click the Ladders tab. The Ladder style options are displayed.

2

Click the Parallel-Look Ladders tool from the Ladders tab. The Parallel-Look Ladder Style button appears on the Properties bar.

3

Click the Parallel-Look Ladder Style button. The ladder styles are displayed.

4

Select which ladder style you want. A crosshair appears on the workspace as you move your mouse over it.

5

Place the crosshair where you want the ladder to appear and click and drag so the two red arrows are pointing towards the center of the pool. Release your mouse to place the ladder. The ladder appears on your workspace.

To add figure-4 hand rails 1

Click the Ladders tab. The Ladder style options are displayed.

2

Click the Figure-4 Hand Rails tool from the Ladders tab. A crosshair appears on the workspace as you move your mouse over it.

3

Place the crosshair where you want the ladder to be placed and click and drag so the two red arrows are pointing towards the center of the pool. Release your mouse to place the ladder. The rail appears on your workspace.

To add a 2-bend hand rail 1

Click the Rail & Step tab. The Rail & Step style options are displayed.

2

Click the 2-Bend Hand Rail tool from the Rail and Step tab. The 2-Bend Hand Rail Style button appears on the Properties bar.

3

Click the 2-Bend Hand Rail Style button. The rail styles are displayed.

4

Select which rail style you want. A crosshair appears on the workspace as you move your mouse over it.

5

Place the crosshair where you want the rail to appear and click and drag so the two red arrows are pointing towards the center of the pool. Release your mouse to place the rail. The rail appears on your workspace.

To add mounted hand rails 1

Click the Ladders tab. The Ladder style options are displayed.

2

Click the Mounted Hand Rails tool from the Ladders tab. A crosshair appears on the workspace as you move your mouse over it.

3

Place the crosshair where you want the ladder to appear and click and drag so the two red arrows are pointing towards the center of the pool.

238

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

Equipping Your Pool To add a 3-bend hand rail 1

Click the Rail & Step tab. The Rail & Step style options are displayed.

2

Click the 3-Bend Hand Rail tool from the Rail and Step tab. The 3-Bend Hand Rail Style button appears on the Properties bar.

3

Click the 3-Bend Hand Rail Style button. The rail styles are displayed.

4

Select which rail style you want. A crosshair appears on the workspace as you move your mouse over it.

5

Place the crosshair where you want the rail to appear and click and drag so the two red arrows are pointing towards the center of the pool. Release your mouse to place the rail. The rail appears on your workspace.

To add deck mounted stair rails 1

Click the Rail & Step tab. The Rail & Step style options are displayed.

2

Click the Deck Mounted Stair Rails tool from the Rail and Step tab. The Stair Rail Style button appears on the Properties bar.

3

Click the Stair Rail Style button. The rail styles are displayed.

4

5

Select which rail style you want. A crosshair appears on the workspace as you move your mouse over it.

3

Click the Build Style button and select which step style you want.

4

Click the Step Stagger Style button and select which stagger style you want your steps to have.

5

By default, Perimeter Steps appear with rounded corners. To square the step corners, deselect the checkbox next to Round Step Corners.

6

You can customize the tread that appears on your steps in the Tread sector of the Auto-Steps Properties bar.

■

Type the tread count you want in the Count text box and press ENTER. Type the tread height you want in the Height text box and press ENTER. Type the tread depth you want in the Depth text box and press ENTER.

■

7

Place the crosshair where you want the rail to appear and click and drag so the two red arrows are pointing towards the center of the pool. Release your mouse to place the rail. The rail appears on your workspace.

Click the Rail & Step tab. The Rail & Step style options are displayed.

2

Click the Spa-Rail tool from the Rail and Step tab. A crosshair appears on the workspace as you move your mouse over it.

3

Place the crosshair where you want the rail to appear and click and drag so the two red arrows are pointing towards the center of the pool. Release your mouse to place the rail. The rail appears on your workspace.

To add perimeter steps 1

Click the Perimeter Steps tool from the Rail and Step tab. The Auto-Steps Properties bar is displayed.

■

To add a spa-rail 1

2

Click the Rail & Step tab. The Rail & Step style options are displayed.

Once you’ve set the Perimeter Steps properties, select the location you want your steps to appear. Click and drag to extend your steps to the size you want. Notice Punch! displays the dimensions as you draw. Release your mouse to place the rail. The steps appears on your workspace.

To add a freehand-drawn step 1

Click the Rail & Step tab. The Rail & Step style options are displayed.

2

Click the Freehand Step tool from the Rail and Step tab. The Freehand Step Properties bar is displayed.

3

Select the location you want your steps to appear. Leftclick and extend the rubber-band line to create the sides

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

239

Chapter

32 Pool Designer

of your steps. Notice Punch! displays the line’s dimensions as you draw.

3

Click the Pool System Options button. The Pool System options appear.

4

Click to place each side of your steps. Double-click to finish. Your steps are displayed.

4

5

(optional) On the Properties bar, type the height you want your step to appear in the Height text box and press ENTER.

Select which support system you want. A crosshair appears on the workspace as you move your mouse over it.

5

Place the crosshair where you want the support system to appear and click to place it. The support system appears on your workspace.

6

(optional) Click the Adjust button on the Properties bar, the Smooth dialog box is displayed.

7

To create round edges all around your steps, increase the Smoothing Tension. To create more defined edges decrease the Smoothing Tension. Once you have set the tension you want, click OK. Your steps appears with the Smoothing Tension you’ve selected.

8

To completely square off each edge, click the Straighten button on the Properties bar. Each edge appears square.

To add an automatic pool cleaner 1

Click the Equipment tab. The Equipment options are displayed.

2

Click the Automatic Cleaner tool from the Equipment tab. The Auto-Cleaners button appears on the Properties bar.

3

Click the Auto-Cleaners button. The Auto-Cleaner options are displayed.

4

Select which Automatic Cleaner you want. A crosshair appears on the workspace as you move your mouse over it.

5

Place the crosshair where you want the Automatic Cleaner to appear and click to place it. The Automatic Cleaner appears on your workspace.

To add pre-built steps 1

Click the Rail & Step tab. The Rail & Step style options are displayed.

2

Click the Pre-Built Steps tool from the Rail and Step tab. The Pool Step Style button appears on the Properties bar.

3

Click the Pool Step Style button. The step styles are displayed.

4

Select which step style you want. A crosshair appears on the workspace as you move your mouse over it.

5

Place the crosshair where you want the steps to appear and click to place the steps. The steps appears on your workspace.

To add a pool support system 1

2

Click the Equipment tab. The Equipment options are displayed.

Click the Pool Support Systems tool from the Equipment tab. The Pool System Options button appears on the Properties bar.

240

To add a surface skimmer 1

Click the Equipment tab. The Equipment options are displayed.

2

Click the Surface Skimmer tool from the Equipment tab. A crosshair appears on the workspace as you move your mouse over it.

3

Place the crosshair on the edge you want the Surface Skimmer to appear and click to place it. The Surface Skimmer appears on your workspace.

Note: If you do not click an edge, Punch! automatically places the Surface Skimmer on the closest edge.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

Equipping Your Pool To add a drain

To add a liner vacuum

1

Click the Equipment tab. The Equipment options are displayed.

1

Click the Equipment tab. The Equipment options are displayed.

2

Click the Drain tool from the Equipment tab. A crosshair appears on the workspace as you move your mouse over it.

2

Click the Liner Vacuums tool from the Equipment tab. The Vacuums button appears on the Properties bar.

3

Place the crosshair where you want the Drain to appear and click to place it. The Drain appears on your workspace.

3

Click the Vacuum button. The Vacuums options are displayed.

4

Select which Vacuum you want. A crosshair appears on the workspace as you move your mouse over it.

5

Place the crosshair where you want the Vacuum to appear and click to place it. The Vacuum appears on your workspace.

To add a leaf skimmer 1

Click the Equipment tab. The Equipment options are displayed.

2

Click the Leaf Skimmer tool from the Equipment tab. The Leaf Skimmers button appears on the Properties bar.

To add a liner broom

3

Click the Leaf Skimmers button. The Leaf Skimmers options are displayed.

1

Click the Equipment tab. The Equipment options are displayed.

4

Select which Leaf Skimmer you want. A crosshair appears on the workspace as you move your mouse over it.

2

Click the Liner Brooms tool from the Equipment tab. The Brooms button appears on the Properties bar.

5

Place the crosshair where you want the Leaf Skimmer to appear and click to place it. The Leaf Skimmer appears on your workspace.

3

Click the Brooms button. The Broom options are displayed.

4

Select which Broom you want. A crosshair appears on the workspace as you move your mouse over it.

5

Place the crosshair where you want the Broom to appear and click to place it. The Broom appears on your workspace.

To add a floating thermometer 1

Click the Equipment tab. The Equipment options are displayed.

2

Click the Floating Thermometer tool from the Equipment tab. A crosshair appears on the workspace as you move your mouse over it.

3

Place the crosshair where you want the Floating Thermometer to appear and click to place it. The Floating Thermometer appears on your workspace.

To add a chlorinator 1

Click the Equipment tab. The Equipment options are displayed.

2

Click the Chlorinator tool from the Equipment tab. A crosshair appears on the workspace as you move your mouse over it.

3

Place the crosshair where you want the Chlorinator to appear and click to place it. The Chlorinator appears on your workspace.

To add a volleyball net 1

Click the Accessory tab. The Accessory options are displayed.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

241

Chapter

32 Pool Designer

2

Click the Volleyball Net tool from the Accessory tab. A crosshair appears on the workspace as you move your mouse over it.

5

3

The Volleyball Net extends across your pool from one edge to another so place the crosshair on the edge you want to start your Volleyball Net. Click and drag across the pool to the opposite edge. Release to place. The Volleyball Net appears on your workspace.

Editing Your Pool Design

To add a basketball goal 1

Click the Accessory tab. The Accessory options are displayed.

2

Click the Basketball Goal tool from the Accessory tab. A crosshair appears on the workspace as you move your mouse over it.

3

Place the crosshair where you want the Basketball Goal to appear and click and drag so the red arrow is pointing towards the center of the pool. Release your mouse to place the Basketball Goal. The Basketball Goal appears on your workspace.

To add a diving board 1

Click the Accessory tab. The Accessory options are displayed.

2

Click the Diving Boards tool from the Accessory tab. The Diving Boards button appears on the Properties bar.

Place the crosshair where you want the Slide to appear and click to place it. The Slide appears on your workspace.

Pool Designer offers a variety of ways to customize and edit your pool. You can control the shape, walls and coping (the tile lip that surrounds the top edge of your pool). Pool Designer also allows you to create and store templates, plus add colors and materials to your pool. After you create your pool using Pool Tools, click the pool to select it and click the Properties tab. The Pool Shape Properties bar appears. To edit your pool’s size or position 1

Click the pool shape to select it. The Pool Shape Properties bar for this shape appears.

2

On the Properties bar, click Object in the Edit Level section. Edit handles appear at the corners of the object extents.

3

Click and drag the object handles into the new position or shape.

4

Release your mouse to place the shape.

To edit your pool’s shape 1

Click the pool shape to select it. The Pool Shape Properties bar is displayed.

3

Click the Diving Boards button. The Vacuums options are displayed.

2

On the Properties bar, click Points in the Edit Level section. Edit handles appear at every point in the object.

4

Select which Diving Board you want. A crosshair appears on the workspace as you move your mouse over it.

3

Click a point on the object and drag it into the new position to reshape it.

5

Place the crosshair where you want the Diving Board to appear and click to place it. The Diving Board appears on your workspace.

To add a slide 1

Click the Accessory tab. The Accessory options are displayed.

2

Click the Slides tool from the Accessory tab. The Slides button appears on the Properties bar.

3

Click the Slides button. The Slides options are displayed.

4

Select which Slide you want. A crosshair appears on the workspace as you move your mouse over it.

242

To display the dimensions of your pool ■

Click the Auto-Dim checkbox to automatically display your pool’s dimensions on your workspace.

Note: Dimensions are not available for Oval/Circle or Curved pools. To customize the shape of your pool 1

Click the Adjust button in the Curve section of the Properties bar. The Smooth dialog box is displayed.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

Using Templates To customize coping

2

3

1

To remove the coping from the top edge of your pool, deselect the checkbox next to Coping On on the Properties bar.

2 To create round edges all around your pool, increase the Smoothing Tension. To create more defined edges decrease the Smoothing Tension. Once you have set the tension you want, click OK. Your pool appears with the Smoothing Tension you’ve selected.

To change the coping width, type the width you want in the Coping Width text box on the Properties bar and press ENTER.

3

To change the coping thickness, type the thickness you want in the Coping Thickness text box on the Properties bar and press ENTER.

To completely square off each edge, click the Straighten button on the Properties bar. Each edge appears square.

To customizing the depth of your pool ■

To choose your liner color

To change the depth, type the depth you want in the Depth text box on the Properties bar and press ENTER.

1

Click the pool shape to select it. The Pool Shape Properties bar is displayed.

To create rectangle depth levels in your pool

2

Click the color block next to Liner Color to choose the color of your liner. The color palette is displayed.

1

Click the Depth tab. The Depth shape options appear.

2

3

Select the color you want and click OK. The color you chose appears as the Liner Color.

Click the Rectangle Depth tool from the Depth tab. The Depth Area Properties bar appears.

3

Click the Method button on the Depth Area Properties bar. The Method options appear.

To set water levels

4

Click the Method you want to draw your depth:

1

■

Draw a rectangle starting from the top-left side Draw a rectangle starting from the center Draw a square starting from the top-left side Draw a square starting from the center

Click the Fill checkbox in the Water section of the Properties bar to display your pool with water when viewed in LiveView after your exit Pool Designer.

■ ■

Note: To view your pool without water after you exit Pool Designer, deselect the checkbox next to Fill on the Properties bar. 2

■

To change the water level, type the distance you want the water to appear from the top edge of the pool in the Level text box and press ENTER.

5

Select which Method you want. A crosshair appears on the workspace as you move your mouse over it.

6

Place the crosshair where you want the depth to appear and click and drag to your desired size. Notice Punch! automatically displays the depth’s dimensions. Release your mouse to place the depth. The depth appears on your workspace.

7

Type the depth you want in the Area Depth text box on the Properties bar and press ENTER.

To customize walls 1

To remove the Side Walls, deselect the checkbox next to Side Walls On on the Properties bar.

2

To change the wall width, type the width you want in the Width text box on the Properties bar and press ENTER.

Using Templates Punch! Pool Designer provides prefabricated templates for you to quickly place an original pool style. You can also create and manage your own templates independent of specific drawings you have saved. The Template Organizer is particularly useful when you’re working with multiple pool designs because you can organize your designs by category.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

243

Chapter

32 Pool Designer

To use templates 1

Click the Templates tab. The Templates drop-down appears in the Properties bar.

2

Click the Templates drop-down box and the Template categories and options are displayed.

To organize templates 1

2

Click the Templates drop-down menu and select Pool Template Organizer. The Pool Organizer is displayed. 3

Select the folder you want your new category to appear in and click OK. The Category Name dialog box is displayed.

4

Type the name of your new category in the Category Name text box and click OK. Your new category appears on the right side of the Pool Organizer.

5

To delete a category from Pool Organizer, click the Delete button under Category. The Browse for Folder dialog box is displayed.

6

Select the category you want to delete and click OK. The delete confirmation box is displayed.

7

Click Yes to permanently delete the category from Pool Designer.

8

To rename a category click the Rename button under Category. The Browse for Folder dialog box is displayed.

To create a new category click the New button under Category. The Browse for Folder dialog box is displayed

244

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

Using the Colors Tab 17 To delete a template from the library, click the Delete button. The delete confirmation box is displayed.

18 Click Yes to permanently delete the pool template from the library. 19 Once you’ve finished organizing your pool templates, click the Close button to close Pool Organizer and return to the Templates tab. 9

Select the category you want to rename and click OK. The Category Name dialog box is displayed.

10 Type the new name in the Category Name text box and click OK. The new category name appears in Pool Organizer.

To create a pool template 1

Create a pool design you want to save as a template and click the Templates tab. Templates appears on the Properties bar.

2

Click the Templates drop-down menu and select Create Pool Template. The Save Pool To Category dialog box appears.

3

Click the Pool Category drop-down menu to select the category you want to save your pool template to.

4

Type the name of your pool in the Pool Name text box.

5

Type a description of your pool in the Pool Description text box.

6

Once you’ve finished entering the information on your new pool, click OK. Your design appears in the Templates Properties bar.

11 To move templates from one category to another, open both categories using the category drop-down menu in Pool Organizer.

12 Use the navigation arrows to move templates from one category to the other. The templates appear under the category where you move them. 13 To review information on a particular template, select the pool from the library and click the Info button. The Pool Info dialog box is displayed.

Tip: Use the Templates drop-down menu to navigate through your categories quickly. 14 To customize the Pool Name, type the name you want in the Pool Name text box. 15 To customize the Pool Description, type the description you want in the Pool Description text box. 16 Once you have updated all the Pool Info you want to, click OK and the information is updated.

Using the Colors Tab You can choose from an extensive library of colors as well as find just the right shade and hue using the Color Ramp. Placing colors is as easy as clicking and dragging them into place!

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

245

Chapter

32 Pool Designer

To use the custom colors library 1

2

Click the Colors tab and the Custom Colors library appears in the Properties bar, as well as the Quarter Page LiveView window. Click the Colors drop-down menu and the color options are displayed.

2

Click the Materials drop-down menu. The list of materials appears.

3

Select which Material library you want and click it. The library appears in the Properties bar.

4

From the Properties bar, click and drag the material you want onto the workspace. The material appears on the surface you dropped it onto.

To use custom and brand-name library

3

Select which color type you want and the color library appears in the Properties bar.

1

Click the Materials tab. The Materials library pop-out menu appears.

2

Click Custom and Brand-Name Library from the drop-down menu and the Custom and Brand-Name Library appears in the Properties bar.

3

Click the Custom drop-down menu. The list of brandname products appears.

4

Select which brand-name you want. A drop-down menu is displayed featuring the products available for that brand-name.

5

Select the product you want and the library is displayed in the Properties bar.

6

From the Properties bar, click and drag the material you want onto the workspace. The surface changes to reflect the new material choice.

To use the color ramp 1

Click the Colors tab and select Color Ramp. The Color Ramp appears in the Properties bar, as well as the Quarter Page LiveView window.

2

Use the navigation tools on either side of the Color Ramp to select the color you want, then scroll through the library to select the shade you want.

To apply colors to your pool ■

From the Properties bar, click and drag the color you want onto your pool. The surface changes to reflect the new color choice.

To use AutoClick placement ■

There is a feature available on the Colors tab called AutoClick Placement. This allows you to place one color on multiple surfaces without having to drag and drop it each time. Click the Colors tab and select AutoClick Placement.

Using the Materials Tab You can change the style and composition of your pool’s coping or lining by dragging new textures into your LiveView window. To use Punch! materials library 1

To calculate your pool’s volume ■

Click the Calculate Pool Volume button. A dialog box appears displaying your Pool Volume, Perimeter Length and Pool Surface Area.

Click the Materials tab. The Materials Preview bar is displayed.

246

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

Controlling Your Working Plan Views To customize your pool’s options 1

2

By default, if you have created a design from a tab, it is visible on the workspace and has a check-mark next to it in the drop-down menu. To hide a specific plan or plans, click the plan(s) you want to hide. The check-mark and plan(s) disappear.

3

Click the plan(s) you want to view and a check-mark appears next to the plan and it appears on the workspace.

Click the Options button. The Options dialog box is displayed.

To customize a plan’s color on the workspace 1

Click a tab to display the drop-down menu. The working plans are displayed.

2

Click the Plan Color. The color palette is displayed.

3

Select the color you want the contents of that plan to appear on the workspace.

4

Click OK. The contents of that plan appear in the color you chose.

2

(optional) Move the slider side to side to increase or decrease the Pool Liner Rendering Quality.

3

(optional) Move the slider side to side to increase or decrease the Water Transparency.

4

(optional) To enable equipment to move with your pool, select the checkbox next to Move Equipment With Pool. Your equipment stays in place anytime you move or resize your pool.

1

Click a tab to display the drop-down menu. The working plans appear.

2

Select Home Design Plans to display the drop-down menu. The drop-down menu appears.

(optional) To enable steps to move with your pool, select the checkbox next to Move Steps With Pool. Your steps stay in place anytime you move or resize your pool.

3

To hide a specific plan or plans, click the plan(s) you want to hide. The check-mark and plan(s) disappear.

4

Click the plan(s) you want to view and a check-mark appears next to the plan and it appears on the workspace.

5

6

To display or hide your pool plans

Click OK.

Controlling Your Working Plan Views You can control which plans are visible while editing your design. Each tab has a drop-down box which allows you to view or hide the work you’ve done in each other plan. To display or hide your working plan 1

Click a tab to display the drop-down menu. The working plans are displayed.

Note: You cannot hide the active plan.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

247

Chapter

248

32 Pool Designer

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

Part 7

General PowerTools Chapter 33: Chapter 34: Chapter 35: Chapter 36: Chapter 37: Chapter 38: Chapter 39:

FloorPlan Trace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PhotoView & PhotoView Editor . . . . . . DXF/DWG Export & Import . . . . . . . . . Fence Designer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Elevation Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Framing Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Estimator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

251 255 263 267 273 277 285

Chapter 33

FloorPlan Trace Punch! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 lets you import a scanned image into the background of your design. Once scanned and loaded into your design file, you can trace it to create a Punch! AS4000 floor plan. You can even set the scale of the new drawing to the scale of the image. When you are done tracing, you can save the new file without the background bitmap image. Find or sketch your favorite floor plan design. Using a scanner, digital camera or with the help of a scanning service, scan the plan and save it in most of the popular formats. The designer or owner of most homeplans hold the copyright to them. Make sure you have permission before you copy a plan.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

251

Chapter

33 FloorPlan Trace

Importing a Floorplan Image After you have scanned the plan you want to trace and saved it, you are ready to import it into Punch! AS4000. You can import a floorplan image onto the second or third floor also. To be sure all floors line up correctly, scan all plans at the same size and match the scale identically (see following section). To load a floorplan trace image 1

On the Design menu, click Load Floorplan Trace Image.

2

Locate the directory where you saved the file.

3

Click the filename, then click Open. The floorplan loads into the window.

7

On the Design menu, click Resize Floorplan Trace Image. The Resize Floorplan Trace Image dialog box is displayed.

8

Type values in the Horizontal and Vertical text boxes to equal amounts to change the scale of the entire drawing in proportion. Repeat until you have matched the scale.

9

Click OK.

Matching the Drawing Scale If the floorplan is not the correct size, you can scale it in Punch! AS4000. Be sure to use the same scale when preparing to trace an upper floor. To match the drawing scale 1

On the Design menu, click Load Floorplan Trace Image.

2

Find a wall section with a known length on the scanned image.

Note: If you need the imported image to be larger, the percent you enter will be greater than 100%. Conversely, if you need the image to be smaller, the percent will be less than 100%.

Tracing the Imported Floorplan Tracing the image is an easy, straight-forward process. Using the tools explained earlier in this User’s Guide, you will soon have an editable floorplan of your scan. To trace the floorplan image 3

Click the Virtual Ruler. For information on how to use the Virtual Ruler, see “Virtual Ruler” on page 9. If you do not see the Virtual Ruler, zoom out until you locate it.

■ ■

4

Move the Virtual Ruler into position along the wall of the scanned image.

■

5

Extend the Virtual Ruler to match the known length on the image.

■

6

Set the Virtual Ruler parallel to the wall segment.

■

To trace the foundation, see “To define the foundation perimeter”, which begins on page 62. To trace exterior walls, see “To draw exterior walls”, which begins on page 68. To trace interior walls, see “To draw interior walls on the fly”, which begins on page 69. To add electrical features, see “Electrical Plan Tab”, which begins on page 85. To place landscape plants, see “To add plants”, which begins on page 175.

Note: It is best to measure along a longer wall to minimize the margin of error when scaling.

252

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

Hiding an Imported Floorplan

Hiding an Imported Floorplan There may be times when it is easier to work on your floorplan if the tracing image is not visible. It is easy to toggle the Floorplan Trace image on and off. To hide the floorplan trace image ■

On the Design menu, click Floorplan Trace Image Visible. The image is visible when there is no check mark next to this menu listing.

To show the floorplan trace image ■

On the Design menu, click Floorplan Trace Image Visible. The image is hidden when there is a check mark next to this menu listing.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

253

Chapter

254

33 FloorPlan Trace

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

Chapter 34

PhotoView & PhotoView Editor Punch! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 lets you import a digital photograph or a scanned image of your home and landscape around it. From window and door treatments to entire facades, you can simulate your home with ease. From cars to pets, windows to chimneys, doors to neighbors, you can customize your design to match your dreams. You can even place an imported image of your own backyard, so when you look out a window, you’re home. With PhotoView Editor, you can apply different building materials onto your home’s picture. No redrawing walls, no adding windows and doors - just click and drag a new material onto your home!

Tips for Using PhotoView Punch! AS4000’s PhotoView lets you take digital pictures and add them to your landscape design. Although this is a straightforward process, there are a few hints that will make the ultimate result much more satisfying. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Verify that the image is level and square, when taking a digital picture or scanning a photograph. If the initial photograph is not square, use your graphics software to rotate it in half-degree increments, until it is. Photograph the feature when the sun is shining. This ensures more color saturation and detail of the image. Double-check the dimensions when importing PhotoView images. Take your time masking the image; the better the mask, the better the end result. Images are placed in the center of the lot. When importing multiple images, move each image, as it is placed, to avoid stacking them on top of each other. Images should touch the bottom of the image area. If it is centered in the area, it will float above ground level.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

255

Chapter

34 PhotoView & PhotoView Editor

Importing PhotoView Images Whether you want to import an image of your home’s facade to landscape around or you want to add a custom door or window, Punch! PhotoView makes it easy. You can import any image you want, even your pet or your neighbor. To import PhotoView images 1

On the File menu, click Insert PhotoView Image or click the PhotoView icon. The Open dialog box is displayed.

Note: PhotoView Images appear in the 2D window as lines, similar to walls.

2

In the Look In box, type the name of the file you want to insert or search for the file by switching folders or drives.

To delete PhotoView images

Note: As you scroll through the available images, when one is highlighted, the image will be displayed in the preview box.

1 2

On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool. On the Design window, click a PhotoView image to select it.

3

When you find the file you want to open, click to select it.

3

Press the DELETE key on the keyboard.

4

Click Open. The PhotoView Properties dialog box is displayed.

Moving PhotoView Images When you import a PhotoView image into your file, it will be placed in the center of the lot. You have freedom to move the image anywhere on the plan window and between plan tabs. To move PhotoView images by dragging

5

Type width and height, in inches, or feet and inches, separated by a hyphen, then click OK.

1

On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.

2

On the Design window, click a PhotoView image to select it.

Note: In 2D plan, a PhotoView image is displayed as a line. 3

Holding down the mouse button, drag the image to a new location, then release the mouse button.

Note: Be sure to drag the image from the center; dragging an endpoint resizes the image.

256

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

Replacing PhotoView Images To move PhotoView images from one plan tab to another 1

On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.

2

On the Design window, click the image you want moved. To select more than one image, press the SHIFT key, while clicking objects.

3

On the Edit menu, click Move to Plan. Then specify the plan where you want the feature to appear, in the pop-up menu that is displayed.

4

(optional) Right-click the selection and click Move to Plan on the pop-up menu that is displayed, then click which plan. The selection is moved to a different plan.

Replacing PhotoView Images You can try out different window or door images, for example, by using the Set PhotoView Image option on the right-click pop-up menu.

3

(optional) Click Set Image to load another file.

Tip: You will find it useful to store PhotoView images in the Content folder in the Punch! AS4000 directory. The content folder is designed to be the first place searched for missing files, for instance, PhotoView files, custom materials, custom trims, and so on.

Elevating PhotoView Images You can elevate PhotoView images, based on a measurement you define. To elevate PhotoView images by specifying a measurement

To replace PhotoView images

1

On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.

1

On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.

2

2

On the Design window, click the PhotoView image. Then click Set Image on the Properties toolbar. The Open PhotoView Image File dialog box is displayed.

On the Design window, click an image to select it. To select more than one image; hold down the SHIFT key while clicking.

3

On the Edit menu, click Set Object Elevation. The Set Elevation dialog box is displayed.

4

Type the measurement, in inches, that you want to elevate the image, then click OK.

3

In the File Name text box, type the name of the file you want to insert or search for the file by switching folders or drives.

4

When you see the name of the file you want to open, click to select it.

5

Click OK. The PhotoView Properties dialog box is displayed.

6

(optional) Type the width and height, in inches, or feet and inches, separated by a hyphen in the text boxes on the Properties toolbar. The image is resized.

To locate PhotoView images 1

On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.

2

On the Design window, click the PhotoView image. Then click Image Info on the Properties toolbar. The Open dialog box is displayed and shows the path where the file is located on your hard drive.

Note: Use this feature to lower objects by typing a negative number in the Set Elevation dialog box. To elevate PhotoView images by using the Elevation Slider 1

On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.

2

On the Design window, click an image to select it. To select more than one object, hold down the SHIFT key, while clicking.

3

On the left side of the window, drag the Elevation Slider up or down.

4

Release the mouse. The image will be repositioned.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

257

Chapter

34 PhotoView & PhotoView Editor

Altering PhotoView Images

To mask PhotoView images

Once you have imported your PhotoView image, you have the option of further customizing its appearance. This can be done at any time during the design process. You can resize, change elevation, rotate or flip it and so on.

1

On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.

2

On the Design window, click the PhotoView image you want to mask.

3

On the PowerTools toolbar, click the Launch PhotoView Editor button. The selected image will be automatically opened in Editor.

To resize PhotoView images by dragging

4

Click the Fill Tab.

1 2

On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool. On the Design window, click a PhotoView image, to select it.

5

3

Holding down the mouse button on an endpoint of the image, drag the endpoint, until the image is the size you want, then release the mouse button.

Double-click one of the colors on the Preview Bar. The Color dialog box is displayed. Define the black color used to mask as 0-0-0. If this mix is not used, the mask will not appear transparent in Punch! AS4000.

6

Using the PhotoView Editor tools, color everything you want to appear transparent in Punch! AS4000.

To resize PhotoView images by specifying dimensions 1

On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.

2

On the Design window, click the PhotoView image you want to resize.

3

Type the width and height, in inches or feet and inches, separated by a hyphen, in the text boxes on the Properties toolbar. The image is resized.

Note: Dragging an endpoint only changes the width of the image; to keep proportions accurate, update the height in the PhotoView Properties text box, as shown above. To flip PhotoView images 1

On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.

2

On the Design window, click the PhotoView image you want to flip, then click <> on the Properties toolbar. The image is flipped.

Masking PhotoView Images If you prefer that your images blend more completely into Punch! Home Design Architectural Series 4000, you may want to mask (coloring black) parts of the image. The masking process deletes those parts of the photograph that are not necessary, like signs, mailboxes, driveways, grass, trees and so on. Although other programs are available, we recommend you use the Punch! PhotoView Editor PowerTool to make any alterations necessary to your PhotoView images.

258

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

Landscaping Using PhotoView Images 7

8

When you are finished editing, on the File Menu, click Exit and Return to Punch! Home Design. The Exit confirmation dialog box is displayed.

3

Using tools and techniques described in previous chapters, add pathways, plants, furniture, topography and so on.

Click OK. To save a copy of the unaltered file, check the box by Save Backup Copy and follow the prompts that appear.

Result: The original, unmasked house on the left and the masked version on the right.

Landscaping Using PhotoView Images One way to get started landscaping your yard is to import a PhotoView image of your home. You can then embellish your design with landscaping and other objects. To landscape using PhotoView images 1

from the pop-up menu that is displayed. Choose a different LiveView size, if you prefer.

Import the image of your home, as explained previously.

Note: PhotoView images appear in the 2D design window as lines, similar to interior walls.

Right in Your Own Backyard In Punch! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 you can even look out the window of your new home design and see your own backyard. By taking a digital picture of your backyard, you can position it so when you view your design in LiveView, you’re home. To view your own backyard 1

Create your home design, using tools and techniques outlined in previous chapters.

2

On the Window menu, click 3D Quarter View, click the 3D Quarter View icon or right-click, while nothing is selected, and click 3D Quarter View from the pop-up menu that is displayed. Choose a different LiveView size if you prefer.

Note: It’s very important to input the correct dimensions of your home. For more information, see “To import PhotoView images”, which begins on page 256. 2

On the Window menu, click 3D Quarter View, click the 3D Quarter View icon or right-click, while nothing is selected, and click 3D Quarter View

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

259

Chapter

34 PhotoView & PhotoView Editor

4

In the Look In box, type the name of the file you want to insert or search for the file by switching folders or drives.

3

Import the PhotoView image of your own backyard.

5

4

On the Design window, move the PhotoView image to a position where it can be viewed from your virtual home.

When you see the name of the file you want to open, click to select it.

6

Click OK.

Note: If you have a PhotoView image selected, when you click the Launch PhotoView Editor icon, that image will be loaded into Editor.

File Management With PhotoView Editor you can save your personalized image as a new file or you can overwrite the existing file. Saving an image

Note: In this example, the PhotoView image is the line at the bottom of the Design window.

PhotoView Editor You can now take a digital picture of your house and apply materials and colors directly to it with PhotoView Editor, then import it into Punch! AS4000!

1

On the File menu, click Save Image as BMP, the Save Image dialog box is displayed.

2

Type a file name in the File Name text box.

3

Click OK.

Opening an overlay mask 1

On the File menu, click Open Overlay Mask; the Open Overlay Mask dialog box is displayed.

2

In the File Name box, type the name of the file you want to open, or search for the file by switching folders or drives.

Launching PhotoView Editor 1

On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.

3

2

On the Design window, click the PhotoView image you want to mask.

When you see the name of the file you want to open, click to select it.

4

Click OK.

3

Launch PhotoView Editor by clicking the PhotoView Editor icon on the PowerTool Bar. The Open dialog box is displayed.

260

Saving an overlay mask 1

On the File menu, click Save Overlay Mask; the Save Overlay Mask dialog box is displayed.

2

Type a file name in the File Name text box.

3

Click OK.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

Editing Your PhotoView Image Opening a custom color list 1

On the File menu, click Open Custom Color List; the Open Color List dialog box is displayed.

2

In the File Name box, type the name of the file you want to open or search for the file by switching folders or drives.

3

When you see the name of the file you want to open, click to select it.

4

Click OK.

Saving a custom color list 1

On the File menu, click Save Custom Color List; the Save Color List dialog box is displayed.

2

Type a file name in the File Name text box.

3

Click OK.

2

Right-click the shape you want to move, then click Move on the pop-up menu that is displayed. The Move dialog box is displayed.

3

Click either Cartesian or Polar coordinates.

4

Type the X and Y Axis measurements, then click OK.

5

The shape is moved to the location you specified.

To rotate by specifying an amount 1

On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.

2

Right-click the shape you want to rotate, then click Rotate on the pop-up menu that is displayed. The Rotate dialog box is displayed.

3

Type, in degrees or radians, the amount you want to rotate the object and click OK. The shape is rotated.

Editing Your PhotoView Image With Punch! PhotoView Editor, you can draw shapes that will be used to color, fill, replicate or add materials to your photograph. The four drawing styles available in PhotoView Editor are: ■ ■ ■ ■

Color. Tools on this tab will create shapes that add a tint to your photograph. Fill. Tools on this tab will completely replace the original color with a color of your choice. Replicate. Tools on this tab copy what is on the original photograph, so it can be placed elsewhere. Material. Tools on this tab completely replace the original material with a material of your choice.

Note: Rotate is not available on the Replicate tab. To control layering 1

On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.

2

Right-click a shape to select it.

3

Click Bring to Front on the pop-up menu that is displayed, to place the selected shape on the top of the other shapes.

4

(optional) Click Send to Back button on the pop-up menu that is displayed, to place the selected shape behind the other shapes.

Editing Shapes All shapes drawn in PhotoView Editor can be edited in a variety of ways. They can be moved specified amounts, rotated, layered, edited and even converted to other types of drawing shapes. Object-Level Editing is active by default. Object-Level Editing, along with Point-Level Editing, controls how your edits impact your object. If you are in object selection mode, changes affect the object as a whole. If you are working in point selection mode, each edge of the object is treated separately, as you edit. To move a shape 1

To convert to another drawing style 1

On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.

2

Right-click a shape to select it, then click Convert To on the pop-up menu that is displayed.

3

Click to select the type of feature you want.

On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

261

Chapter

34 PhotoView & PhotoView Editor

Editing Material Perspective In addition to the ability to rotate, move, point-level edit and so on, Material shapes can be edited to conform to the perspective in the photograph. Click a shape to select it. This will activate Perspective Editing Mode. In this mode, there will be different colored controls that manipulate different things. To change the size of the shape ■

Click & Drag the Red dots to control the area of the shape. Drag a corner to make the shape larger or smaller.

To set the perspective ■

Click & Drag a Green dot to change the vanishing point of the material.

To set the perspective angle ■ ■

Click and rotate the Blue arrow. (optional) Right-click the material, then click Change Material Angle on the pop-up menu that is displayed. Type the angle in the text box, then click OK.

To flip material orientation ■

■

Right-click the material, then click Flip Material Orientation on the pop-up menu that is displayed. The material orientation is flipped. (optional) Right-click the material, then click Restore Material Orientation to reset the orientation back to the original direction.

To change the centerline ■

Click & Drag a Yellow dot to change the centerline of the material.

To set the scale ■

Right-click the material, then click Change Material Scale on the pop-up menu that is displayed. Type the new percentage(s) in the text box, then click OK.

To reset perspective changes ■

Right-click the material, then click Reset Material Attributes on the pop-up menu that is displayed.

262

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

Chapter 35

DXF/DWG Export & Import Among the Punch! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 Power Tools, are the DXF/DWG Importer and Exporter. DXF stands for Drawing Exchange File and is an industry-standard format for sharing drawing files. DXF is a two-dimensional graphic file format supported by almost all PC-based CAD programs. DWG is the extension used by Autodesk for its AutoCAD drawing files. It has become a industry standard format for CAD applications.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

263

Chapter

35 DXF/DWG Export & Import

Exporting and Importing a DXF/DWG File You may find it useful to share files with your architect, builder and so on. Importing and exporting your home plan to DXF or DWG format will make sharing your files simple. To export a DXF/DWG floorplan 1

Click the DXF/DWG Exporter on the PowerTools bar. The Export Options dialog box is displayed.

2

Click the radio button next to Format and Version you want to use.

3

Click OK. The Export DXF dialog box is displayed.

2

In the File Name box, type the name of the file you want to open or search for the file by switching folders or drives.

3

When you see the name of the file you want to open, double-click to select it. The Scale menu is displayed.

4

Click the radio button next to the scale you want to use.

5

Click OK.

Note: Once you have imported your file, you will need to convert the lines into Punch! intelligent objects before they can be views in 3D. For more information, see “Converting Details to Intelligent Features”, which begins on page 146.

Copying Objects to Different Floors

4

5

Type a file name in the File Name text box. Punch! AS4000 DXF Exporter automatically adds the DXF or DWG extension. Click Save.

To import a DXF/DWG floorplan 1

Click the DXF/DWG Importer on the PowerTools bar. The Import DXF dialog box is displayed.

264

There may be times when you want multiple floors to contain duplicates. Copy to Floor leaves the object in its original position and places a duplicate where you define. To copy from one floor to another 1

On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.

2

Click the object or objects you want duplicated.

3

On the Edit menu, click Copy to Floor, Upper Floor. Select Lower Floor, if you want to copy the original down one level.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

Moving DXF/DWG Features

Moving DXF/DWG Features As with Punch! AS4000, you can move selections between plan layers and between floors. Move to Floor deletes these objects from their original position. To move everything from one floor to another 1

On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.

2

Click the object or objects you want moved. To select more than one object, press the SHIFT key, while clicking objects.

3

On the Edit menu, click Move to Floor, Upper Floor. Select Lower Floor, if you want to move the original down one level.

To move features from one plan to another 1

On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.

2

Click the feature or object you want moved. To select more than one object, press the SHIFT key, while clicking objects.

3

On the Edit menu, click Move to Plan, then specify the plan where you want the feature to appear.

4

(optional) Right-click the selection and click Move to Plan on the pop-up menu that is displayed, then click which plan. The selection is moved to a different plan.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

265

Chapter

266

35 DXF/DWG Export & Import

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

Chapter 36

Fence Designer Whether it’s selecting the picket type for an ornamental iron fence, setting the railing heights on a gate or adding color or texture to fence sections, the Fence Designer lets you customize images of fences and gates so you can tour a realistic rendering of your garden plan in Punch! Home Design Architectural Series 4000.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

267

Chapter

36 Fence Designer

Designing Fences

7

Fence Designer gives you two powerful toolsets to use in your fence designs. Controlled Detailing tools allow you to control attributes such as rail placement and picket caps. Freehand Detailing tools allow you to modify the appearance of those elements or even draw new elements.

On the Chain Link Fabric tab, select the size of each square in the chain-linked mesh, from the Dimensions drop-down menu.

8

On the Chain Link Fabric tab, select the size of the wire used in the mesh, on the Thickness drop-down menu.

9

On the Framework tab, specify (in inches) the height and elevation of the upper frame rai,l in the corresponding text boxes.

Launching Fence Designer ■

Launch Fence Designer by clicking the Fence Designer icon on the PowerTool Bar.

Specifying Fence Attributes Fence Designer’s easy-to-use Controlled Detailing tools let you specify the structural attributes of a fence or gate. Simply select a fence or gate type from the New Design dialog box, then enter your preferences on a series of tabs. The display in the design window updates to reflect each design decision you make.

10 (optional) If you are designing a gate, on the Framework tab, specify the width (in inches) of the side frame rails, in the Width text box. 11 (optional) If you want to include a rail at the bottom of the fence, on the Framework tab, place a check in the Lower Beam checkbox, then specify the height (in inches) of the lower rail in the Height text box. To design an ornamental iron fence or gate 1

On the File menu, click New or click the New Design button on the toolbar. The New Design dialog box is displayed.

2

Click either Fence Section Design or Fence Gate Design.

3

Select Ornamental Iron on the Component Style dropdown menu.

4

Specify (in inches) the width and height of each gate or section in the corresponding text boxes.

5

Click OK. The iron fence is displayed in the design window.

6

Click the Controlled Detailing tab; tabs are displayed on the right side of the design window.

7

On the Iron Pickets tab, specify (in inches) the width, height and spacing of individual iron pickets in the corresponding text boxes.

8

On the Iron Pickets tab, select the cap style for individual iron pickets on the Cap Style drop-down menu, then specify the cap’s height and width in the corresponding text boxes.

9

On the Railing tab, select one of the rails, check the corresponding checkbox to include it in the design, then specify (in inches) the height and elevation for each rail.

To design a chain-linked fence or gate 1

On the File menu, click New or click the New Design button on the toolbar. The New Design dialog box is displayed.

2

Click either Fence Section Design or Fence Gate Design.

3

Select Chain-Linked on the Component Style drop-down menu.

4

Specify (in inches) the width and height of each gate or section in the corresponding text boxes.

5

Click OK. The chain-linked fence is displayed in the design window.

6

Click the Controlled Detailing tab; tabs are displayed on the right side of the design window.

268

Note: Clicking each rail allows you to control its properties individually. 10 On the Embellishment tab, select one of the ornamental accessories; check the corresponding checkbox to include it in the design.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

Specifying Fence Attributes 11 Select a style and thickness for each accessory in the corresponding drop-down menus.

6

Click the Controlled Detailing tab; tabs are displayed on the right side of the design window.

12 Specify (in inches) the height and elevation for each accessory.

7

On the Boards tab, specify (in inches) the width, height, and spacing of individual boards in the corresponding text boxes.

8

(optional) To leave a small space between the fence boards, check the Include Gap Between Boards checkbox. On the Boards tab, select the cap style for individual boards on the Cap Style drop-down menu, then specify the cap’s height in the Height text box.

Note: Clicking each accessory allows you to control its properties individually. To design a picket fence or gate 1

On the File menu, click New or click the New Design button on the toolbar. The New Design dialog box is displayed.

9

2

Click either Fence Section Design or Fence Gate Design.

3

Select Picket on the Component Style drop-down menu.

4

Specify (in inches) the width and height of each gate or section in the corresponding text boxes.

10 On the Back Railing tab, select one of the rails, check the corresponding checkbox to include it in the design, then specify (in inches) the height and elevation for each rail.

5

Click OK. The picket fence is displayed in the design window.

6

Click the Controlled Detailing tab; tabs are displayed on the right side of the design window.

7

On the Pickets tab, specify (in inches) the width, height, and spacing of individual pickets in the corresponding text boxes.

8

On the Pickets tab, select the cap style for individual pickets on the Cap Style drop-down menu, then specify the cap’s height in the Height text box.

Note: Clicking each rail allows you to control its properties individually. To design a rail fence or gate 1

On the File menu, click New or click the New Design button on the toolbar. The New Design dialog box is displayed.

2

Click either Fence Section Design or Fence Gate Design.

3

Select Rail on the Component Style drop-down menu.

4

Specify (in inches) the width and height of each gate or section in the corresponding text boxes.

5

Click OK. The rail fence is displayed in the design window.

6

Note: Clicking each rail allows you to control its properties individually.

Click the Controlled Detailing tab; tabs are displayed on the right side of the design window.

7

10 On the Top Edge tab, select a shape for the fence section or gate on the Style drop-down menu, then specify the lowest top point (in inches) in the Min. Height text box.

On the Rails tab, select one of the rails from the Rail drop-down menu, then specify (in inches) the height and elevation for each rail.

8

(optional) To include a third rail, check the Tertiary Rail checkbox, then specify (in inches) the height and elevation for the third rail.

9

On the Back Railing tab, select one of the rails, check the corresponding checkbox to include it in the design, then specify (in inches) the height and elevation for each rail.

To design a privacy fence or gate 1

On the File menu, click New or click the New Design button on the toolbar. The New Design dialog box is displayed.

2

Click either Fence Section Design or Fence Gate Design.

3

Select Privacy on the Component Style drop-down menu.

4

Specify (in inches) the width and height of each gate or section in the corresponding text boxes.

5

Click OK. The privacy fence is displayed in the design window.

To resize a fence section or gate 1

On the Edit menu, click Adjust Design Dimensions. The Design Dimensions dialog box is displayed.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

269

Chapter

36 Fence Designer completely replace the original material in your selected area with a custom material of your choice. To apply color or texture to a fence component or shape

2

Click either Resize Using Dimensions or Resize Using Percentages, then enter new values for the width and height in the corresponding text boxes.

3

(optional) Check Rescale Freehand Geometry if you want to scale any shapes you have already drawn in the design.

4

Click OK.

Editing Your Custom Fence In Freehand Detailing mode, you can move, rotate, or apply colors and textures to individual components of the fence or gate. You can even add custom shapes to the design. All shapes drawn in Fence Designer can be edited in a variety of ways. They can be moved specified amounts, rotated, layered, and even converted to other types of drawing shapes. Object-Level Editing is active by default. Object-Level Editing, along with Point-Level Editing, controls how your edits impact your object. If you are in object selection mode, changes affect the object as a whole. If you are working in point selection mode, each edge of the object is treated separately as you edit. The four editing modes available in Fence Designer are: ■

■

■

■

Color Ramp. Tools in this mode will completely replace the original color in your selected area with a color of your choice. Custom Color. Tools in this mode will completely replace the original color in your selected area with a custom color of your choice. Material Library. Tools in this mode completely replace the original material in your selected area with a standard Punch! material of your choice. Custom Material Library. If you have already saved custom materials, tools in this mode

270

1

Click the Freehand Detailing tab; a toolbar is displayed at the top of the design window.

2

Click the editing mode that you want to apply, then select a color or material from the Preview Bar.

3

Select a fence component (such as a rail or a picket) or a shape. The color or texture is applied to that shape.

To change the material scale 1

Right-click an object to which material has been applied, then click Change Material Scale. The Material Scale dialog box is displayed.

2

Specify a new horizontal and vertical scale in the corresponding text boxes.

3

Click OK.

File Management You can return to a Fence Designer project simply by opening an existing fence design file. Fence designs are saved with the file extension *.FDD. When you’re ready to use your fence design in a home design project, simply export it to one of the custom material libraries. To open an existing fence definition 1

On the File menu, click Open or click the Open button. The Open Design dialog box is displayed.

2

In the File Name box, type the name of the file you want to open or search for the file by switching folders or drives.

3

When you see the name of the file you want to open, click to select it.

4

Click Open.

To save a fence image to a material library 1

On the File menu, click Export to Material Library. The Fence Designer dialog box is displayed.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

Using Fence Designer Images in Your Punch! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 Project

2

Type a name for the new fence or gate in the Material File Name text box.

3

Type a description of the new fence or gate in the Material Description text box.

4

Click OK.

4

Click the custom fence material you want to apply; hold down the mouse button and drag it onto the fence or gate in the LiveView window. The custom material you selected is applied.

Using Fence Designer Images in Your Punch! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 Project Once you’ve created your own custom fence or gate materials in Fence Designer you can easily apply them back in your Punch! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 project. After you’ve drawn a fence on the Landscaping tab, simply navigate to the library where you stored the new image, and drag the image to the fence in your LiveView window. To apply Fence Designer images 1

Click the Materials Tab. The Preview Bar will display materials available for placement.

2

Click the black arrow on the Material tab and click Custom Material Library on the pop-up menu that is displayed.

3

At the top of the Preview Bar, click the down arrow next to “Materials”, then click Custom Fences, then select the type of fence you want to use. Custom fence material options appear in the Preview Bar.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

271

Chapter

272

36 Fence Designer

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

Chapter 37

Elevation Editor Punch! Home Design Architectural Series 4000’s powerful Elevation Editor allows you to view and edit your design in 3D! You can add and remove windows or doors, or change their elevation, and all your changes are automatically applied to your 2D floorplan. You can even save the finished image for use in the Layout Manager!

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

273

Chapter

37 Elevation Editor

Launching Elevation Editor

Changing Door Settings

Punch! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 includes a PowerTool called Elevation Editor.

There is no need to redraw a door just because you need a different size or style. You can control many of the door’s features through the Custom Door dialog box.

Launching Elevation Editor ■

Launch Elevation Editor by clicking the Elevation Editor icon on the PowerTool Bar.

To change door type 1

On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.

2

Right-click a door in your drawing, then click Door Properties on the pop-up menu that is displayed. The Door Properties dialog box is displayed.

Punch! AS4000 takes the guesswork out of placing doors and windows by allowing you to add and modify doors and windows, while viewing your design in 3D.

3

Click a new door type in the Type section of the Door Properties dialog box, then click OK.

There are many styles of openings and doors available in Elevation Editor and they are all placed in the same manner.

To resize a door by specifying dimensions

Adding and Modifying Doors and Windows

To add an opening or door 1

Click the Door Tool.

2

The Preview Bar displays the styles that are available.

3

Click the arrow to the right of the word Doors above the Preview Bar to select either painted or stained.

4

Click the Door style of your choice.The Door Properties menu is displayed.

1

On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.

2

Right-click a door in your drawing, then click Door Properties on the pop-up menu that is displayed. The Door Properties dialog box is displayed.

3

Type the new dimensions in the Dimensions area of the dialog box, then click OK.

To change door swing 1

On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.

2

Right-click a door in your drawing, then click Door Properties on the pop-up menu that is displayed. The Door Properties dialog box is displayed.

3

Type the new door swing angle in the text box in the Door Attributes section. Click OK. The door swing updates.

5

(optional) Click the radio button next to another style to choose a different door style.

6

Type the Width, Height, Elevation and Trim Width to customize them.

7

Click OK.

To change the flip the direction of a door

8

Click a wall in the Elevation Editor window where you want to place the door or opening.

1

On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.

2

Right-click a door in your drawing, then click Door Properties on the pop-up menu that is displayed. The Door Properties dialog box is displayed.

274

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

Adding Windows 3

Check Reverse Hinges in the Door Attribute Section. Click OK. The door flips direction.

To change the elevation of a door

9

Click a wall in the Elevation Editor window where you want to place a window.

Note: If you change the elevation, all windows placed after this are placed at the newly-specified elevation.

1

On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.

2

Click a door to select it.

Changing Window Settings

3

Right-click a door in your drawing, then click Door Properties on the pop-up menu that is displayed. The Door Properties dialog box is displayed.

4

Type the elevation in the text box. Click OK. The door is raised or lowered into position.

The Elevation Editor allows you to resize, reposition or change the properties on windows. You can specify exact dimensions, change the grill settings, flip windows vertically or horizontally or change their elevations.

5

(optional) Use the Elevation Slider at the left of the screen to raise or lower the selected door into position.

To resize a window by specifying dimensions 1

On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.

2

Right-click a window in your drawing, then click Window Properties on the pop-up menu that is displayed. The Window Properties dialog box is displayed.

3

Type the new sizes in the Dimensions area of the Window Properties dialog box, then click OK.

Adding Windows Like doors and cased openings, there are an extensive variety of windows available in the Elevation Editor and they are all placed in the same manner. To add a window 1

Click the Window Tool.

2

The Preview Bar displays the available styles.

3

Click the arrow to the right of the word Windows above the Preview Bar to select either painted or stained.

4

Click the Window style of your choice. The Window Properties dialog box is displayed.

To flip a window

5

Type the Width, Height, Elevation and Trim Width to customize them.

6

(optional) For double-hung or casement/picture windows, specify the grill spacing.

7

(optional) Click the radio button next to another style to choose a different window.

8

Click OK.

1

On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.

2

Right-click a window in your drawing, then click Window Properties on the pop-up menu that is displayed. The Window Properties dialog box is displayed.

3

Check the box next to Flip Horizontally, Flip Vertically or both, then click OK.

Note: Flip is not available for Double Hung or Casement/ Picture windows. To change the grill settings of a window 1

On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.

2

Right-click a window in your drawing, then click Window Properties on the pop-up menu that is displayed. The Window Properties dialog box is displayed.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

275

Chapter

37 Elevation Editor Outputting Elevation Data When you’ve finished modifying your design in the Elevation Editor, you can save the view as a bitmap, print the view or save the changes in Punch! AS4000 and close the Elevation Editor. To save an elevation view

3

Click either Double Hung or Casement/Picture. The Grill settings dialog is displayed.

Note: The Grill settings dialog box only appears when a Double Hung or Casement/Picture window option is chosen. 4

Using the scroll bars in the Grill section of the dialog box, adjust the grill appearance, then click OK. The new grill settings are applied.

To elevate a window 1 2

On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool. Click the window to select it.

3

Raise or lower the window into position using the Elevation Slider at the left of the screen.

276

1

On the File menu, click Export Image, then click the format you prefer. The Export Image dialog box is displayed.

2

Type a name in the File Name text box. Punch! AS4000 automatically adds the appropriate extension, then click OK.

To save your changes and return to Punch! Home Design ■

On the File menu, click Exit and Return to Punch! Home Design. Your changes are saved and the Elevation Editor window closes.

To print your elevation view 1

On the File menu, click Print, then select the quality needed. The print dialog box is displayed.

2

Click the down arrow next to the printer name.

3

Click the printer you want to use.

4

Click the Properties button. The Properties dialog box is displayed.

5

Select the paper orientation.

6

Select the paper size. Typically, this is either 8.5x 11 in (letter) or 8.5x14 in (legal).

7

Click the down arrow next to media type, then select the required media.

8

Click either Auto Feeder or Manual Feed as your paper feed method.

9

Click OK.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

Chapter 38

Framing Editor Punch! Home Design Architectural Series 4000’s versatile Framing Editor allows you to view and edit the framing of your design. You can add beams, joists and other supports, plus you have total control over what size lumber is used for what purpose. All modifications made in Framing Editor can be applied back to Punch! AS4000.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

277

Chapter

38 Framing Editor

Launching Framing Editor

2

Punch! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 includes a PowerTool called Framing Editor.

Click the radio button next to the type of material you want to use or specify a Custom Wall type.

3

(optional) Click the Insulated Wall button to add or remove insulation.

Launching Framing Editor

4

(optional) Click the Load Bearing Wall button to suit your design.

■

Launch Framing Editor by clicking the Framing Editor icon on the PowerTool Bar.

Customizing Wall Framing Properties

To specify floor cutout properties 1

Click a floor cutout, then click Floor Cutout Properties on the pop-up menu that is displayed. The Floor Cutout Properties menu is displayed.

2

Click the radio button next to Frame Rim Header Joists to specify that the cutout is framed.

3

Click the radio button next to the type of material you want to use or specify a Custom Joists type.

Although you draw walls in Punch! Home Design Architectural Series 4000, Framing Editor lets you specify which walls are insulated, which are load bearing, and so on. To specify insulation ■

■

Click a wall, then click Insulated Wall on the pop-up menu that is displayed. or Click a wall, then click Wall Framing Properties on the pop-up menu that is displayed. Check the Insulated Wall box.

To specify load bearing ■

■

Click a wall, then click Load Bearing on the pop-up menu that is displayed. or Click a wall, then click Wall Framing Properties on the pop-up menu that is displayed. Check the Load Bearing Wall box.

To specify wall framing properties 1

Click a wall, then click Wall Framing Properties on the pop-up menu that is displayed. The Wall Framing Properties menu is displayed.

278

Adding Structural Components Framing Editor lets you define exactly where and what kind of lumber or other material is to be used for the framing phase of your design. To add a framing beam 1

Click the Framing Beam Tool. The Preview Bar displays predefined beam sizes.

2

On the Preview Bar, click the size of beam you want.

3

Press the mouse button on the design window to define the start point of the beam. A rubber-band line is displayed and follows the pointer.

4

Hold the mouse button down, as you extend the beam to the length you want.

5

Release the mouse button to end drawing mode.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

Customizing Framing Beam Properties Note: Drawing is constrained to 15 degree angles; to release this constraint hold down the SHIFT key, while drawing.

To specify beam type 1

Double click a framing beam. The Beam Properties menu is displayed.

2

Click the radio button next to the type of beam you want.

3

Click OK.

To add flooring joists 1

Click the Joists Tool. The Preview Bar displays predefined joists sizes.

2

On the Preview Bar, click the size of flooring joists you want.

3

Click on the design window to define the start point of the flooring joists. A rubber-band line is displayed and follows the pointer. This line signifies the first edge of the flooring joists. Notice that dimensions are displayed, as you draw.

2

12

To customize beam type 1

Double click a framing beam. The Beam Properties menu is displayed.

2

Click the radio button next to Custom Beam Type.

3

beamClick Material. The Choose Framing Material menu

52 2

42 3 2

4

5

Click and move the pointer to the next cornerpoint. Repeat until you have completely drawn the flooring joists area. Right-click to end drawing mode.

To place support columns 1

Click the Support Column Tool. The Preview Bar displays predefined column diameters.

2

On the Preview Bar, click the column diameter you want.

3

Click on the design window. A support column will be placed at the location of each click.

is displayed. 4

Click the radio button next to the material you want to use.

5

(optional) Click Color and choose a custom color.

6

Click OK.

To change framing beam size 1

Double click a framing beam. The Beam Properties menu is displayed.

2

Type the width and depth of the beam to be used.

3

Click OK.

Customizing Joist Properties Framing Editor automatically frames each floor, wall and roof section with specifications set in Punch! Home Design Architectural Series 4000. You can easily modify all of these settings.

Customizing Framing Beam Properties After adding a framing beam you can change its type and size.

To specify joist material 1

Double click the perimeter of a framing section. The Joists Properties menu is displayed.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

279

Chapter

38 Framing Editor To specify rim joists 1

Double click the perimeter of a framing section. The Joists Properties menu is displayed.

2

Check the box next to Rim Joists (Headers).

3

Click OK.

Specifying Support Column Properties 2

Click the radio button next to the material you want.

3

Click OK.

To customize joist material 1

Double click the perimeter of a framing section. The Joists Properties menu is displayed.

2

Click the radio button next to Custom Joists Type.

3

Type the name you want to call the custom joists type.

4

Click Material. The Choose Framing Material menu is displayed.

5

Click the radio button next to the material you want to use.

6

(optional) Click Color and choose a custom color.

7

Click OK.

To change joists angle

After adding a support column in Framing Editor you can change its material and size. To specify column material 1

Double click a support column. The Column Properties menu is displayed.

2

Click the radio button next to the type of column you want.

3

Click OK.

1

Double click the perimeter of a framing section. The Joists Properties menu is displayed.

To customize column material

2

Type the degree you want the joists to be placed.

1

3

Click OK.

Double click a support column. The Column Properties menu is displayed.

2

Click the radio button next to Custom Column Type.

To change joists spacing

3

Type the name you want to call the custom column type.

1

Double click the perimeter of a framing section. The Joists Properties menu is displayed.

4

Click Material. The Choose Framing Material menu is displayed.

2

Type the new spacing in inches or feet and inches, separated by a hyphen. For example, 10-0 indicates ten feet while 10 is interpreted as ten inches.

5

Click the radio button next to the material you want to use.

6

(optional) Click Color and choose a custom color.

3

Click OK.

7

Click OK.

To change joists size

To change column size

1

Double click the perimeter of a framing section. The Joists Properties menu is displayed.

1

Double click a support column. The Column Properties menu is displayed.

2

Type the new size in inches or feet and inches, separated by a hyphen. For example, 10-0 indicates ten feet while 10 is interpreted as ten inches.

2

Type the diameter and height of the column to be used.

3

Click OK.

3

Click OK.

280

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

Customizing Door and Window Headers

Customizing Door and Window Headers

2

Click the radio button next to Custom Rafter Type.

Framing Editor automatically adds 2"x12" door and window headers above all openings. You can change this preset if you want a different sized header.

3

Type the name you want to call the custom rafter type.

4

Click Material. The Choose Framing Material menu is displayed.

5

Click the radio button next to the material you want to use.

6

(optional) Click Color and choose a custom color.

7

Click OK.

To specify header size 1

Click a window or door on the design window, then click Header Size on the pop-up box. The Header Size menu is displayed.

To change rafter spacing

2

Click the radio button next to the size header you want.

3

Click OK.

1

Click the perimeter of a roof section, then click Roof Properties on the pop-up menu. The Rafter Properties menu is displayed.

2

Type the new spacing in inches or feet and inches, separated by a hyphen. For example, 10-0 indicates ten feet, while 10 is interpreted as ten inches.

3

Click OK.

To change rafter size 1

Framing Editor automatically frames each roof section with specifications set in Punch! Home Design Architectural Series 4000. You can easily modify all of these settings.

Click the perimeter of a roof section, then click Roof Properties on the pop-up menu. The Rafter Properties menu is displayed.

2

Type the new size in inches or feet and inches, separated by a hyphen. For example, 10-0 indicates ten feet while 10 is interpreted as ten inches.

To specify rafter material

3

Click OK.

Customizing Rafter Properties

1

Click the perimeter of a roof section, then click Roof Properties on the pop-up menu. The Rafter Properties menu is displayed.

To specify estimation options 1

Double click the perimeter of a framing section. The Joists Properties menu is displayed.

2

Click the radio button next to the option you want estimated.

3

Click OK.

To specify roofing trusses

2

Click the radio button next to the material you want.

3

Click OK.

1

Click the perimeter of a roof section, then click Roof Properties on the pop-up menu. The Rafter Properties menu is displayed.

2

Click the radio button next to Frame Trusses.

To customize rafter material 1

Click the perimeter of a roof section, then click Roof Properties on the pop-up menu. The Rafter Properties menu is displayed.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

281

Chapter

38 Framing Editor To edit deck framing properties

3

Type the truss spacing in the text box. Click OK.

Customizing Deck Properties Framing Editor automatically frames each deck section with specifications set in Punch! Home Design Architectural Series 4000. You can easily modify all of these settings.

1

Click the perimeter of a deck section, then click Deck Properties on the pop-up menu. The Deck Properties menu is displayed.

2

Type a Decking Angle in the text box. Decking Angle is measured in degrees.

3

Type the the Board Spacing in the text box. Board Spacing is the space between each board in the deck.

4

Type the the Board Size in the text box. .

5

(optional) Check Fascia if fascia is needed.

6

Click OK.

To specify concrete deck pier/posts 1

Click pier or post at the corner of a deck section, then click Deck Pier/Post Properties on the pop-up menu. The Deck Pier/PostProperties menu is displayed.

2

Click the radio button next to concrete.

3

Click OK.

To specify deck material 1

Click the perimeter of a deck section, then click Deck Properties on the pop-up menu. The Deck Properties menu is displayed.

2

Click the radio button next to the material you want.

3

Click OK.

To customize deck material

To customize deck pier/post material 1

Click the perimeter of a deck section, then click Deck Properties on the pop-up menu. The Deck Properties menu is displayed.

Click pier or post at the corner of a deck section, then click Deck Pier/Post Properties on the pop-up menu. The Deck Pier/PostProperties menu is displayed.

2

Click the radio button next to Custom.

2

Click the radio button next to Custom.

3

Type the name you want to call the custom material.

3

Type the name you want to call the custom material.

4

4

Click Material. The Choose Framing Material menu is displayed.

Click Material. The Choose Framing Material menu is displayed.

5

5

Click the radio button next to the material you want to use.

Click the radio button next to the material you want to use.

6

(optional) Click Color and choose a custom color.

6

(optional) Click Color and choose a custom color.

7

Click OK.

7

Click OK.

1

282

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

Specifying Estimation Options To edit deck pier/post properties

To print to fit page

1

Click pier or post at the corner of a deck section, then click Deck Pier/Post Properties on the pop-up menu. The Deck Pier/PostProperties menu is displayed.

1

2

Type a Pier Depth in the text box.

On the File menu, click Print to Fit Page or press Ctrl+P. A Print Manager menu will ask if you want to print your drawing in color. Click Yes to print in color, click no to print in greyscale.

3

Type a Pier Width in the text box.

2

The Print dialog box is displayed.

4

Type a Pier Elevation in the text box.

5

Click OK.

3

Click the down arrow next to the printer name.

4

Click the printer you want to use.

5

Click the Properties button. The Properties menu is displayed.

Specifying Estimation Options Framing Editor uses many settings from Punch! AS4000 to estimate your design after framing. You can customize these settings to fit your needs. To specify estimation options 1

On the Options menu, click Estimation Options. The Estimation Options menu is displayed.

Note: The following Properties menu is that of a popular color printer. Refer to your printer’s documentation on the use of its specific features. 6

Select the paper orientation.

7

Select the paper size. Typically, this will be either 8.5x11 in (letter) or 8.5x14 in (legal).

2

Type the needed measurements in the appropriate text boxes.

8

Click the down arrow next to media type. Then select the required media.

3

Click OK.

9

Click either Auto Feeder or Manual Feed as your paper feed method, then click OK.

To print to scale

Printing and Exporting Files Punch! Framing Editor prints using the current Windows printer. You can, however, print using any installed printer. Your can print your drawing in color or in black and white; it can be printed to scale or you can print it all on one page, whatever you require. You can also export a rendering to BMP format for use in Layout Manager.

1

On the File menu, click Print to Scale. A Print Manager menu will ask if you want to print your drawing in color. Click Yes to print in color, click no to print in greyscale.

2

The Print dialog box is displayed.

3

Click the down arrow next to the printer name.

4

Click the printer you want to use.

5

Click the Properties button. The Properties menu is displayed.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

283

Chapter

38 Framing Editor

6

Select the paper orientation.

7

Select the paper size. Typically, this will be either 8.5x11 in (letter) or 8.5x14 in (legal).

8

Click the down arrow next to media type. Then select the required media.

9

Click either Auto Feeder or Manual Feed as your paper feed method, then click OK.

4

(optional) Right-click the selection and click Move to Plan on the pop-up menu that is displayed, then click which plan. The selection is moved to the plan you specified.

Note: Items on a hidden layer are not available during a Select All process and will not be moved along with the other items and features in your drawing.

To print a 3D LiveView rendering 1

On the File menu, click Print 3D LiveView, then select the quality needed. The print dialog box is displayed.

2

Click the down arrow next to the printer name.

3

Click the printer you want to use.

4

Click the Properties button. The Properties menu is displayed.

5

Select the paper orientation.

6

Select the paper size. Typically, this will be either 8.5x 11 in (letter) or 8.5x14 in (legal).

7

Click on the down arrow next to media type. Then select the required media.

8

Click either Auto Feeder or Manual Feed as your paper feed method.

9

Click OK.

To export to BMP 1

On the File menu, click Export BMP. The Export BMP dialog box is displayed.

2

In the File Name text box, type a name. Punch! Framing Editor automatically adds the BMP extension, then click OK.

Moving Features to Different Plans Just like in Punch! AS4000, you can move selections to different plan layers. Move to Plan deletes these objects from their original position. To move features from one plan to another 1

On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.

2

Click the feature or object you want moved. To select more than one object, press the SHIFT key, while clicking objects.

3

On the Edit menu, click Move to Plan, then specify the plan, where you want the feature to appear, in the pop-up menu that is displayed.

284

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

Chapter 39

Estimator Punch! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 keeps track of building materials, as you design your home. Estimator continually and automatically tallies your expenses and building materials. This information is presented in an editable, printable, exportable spreadsheet format. Estimator also utilizes the Plan Tabs from Punch! Home Design Architectural Series 4000, so you can easily find the materials for a specific part of your design. As you input the material costs for your area, Estimator calculates the subtotals of each size door and window, each plant type, including sod, roofing materials and roof trusses and computes the grand total for the entire project. You can even create custom pricelists, so you use appropriate vendors or wholesalers for specific parts of the job.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

285

Chapter

39 Estimator

Launching Estimator

6

Press OK.

Punch! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 includes an extremely versatile PowerTool called Estimator. Estimator inventories almost every feature of your design. Prices may be higher during the peak building season and will depend on the part of the country where you are building your new home. You can obtain specific costs from your local supplier or contractor.

7

(optional) Click “Exit and Return to Home Design”, if you do not want to launch Estimator and, instead, want to return to Punch! AS4000.

Launching Estimator 1

Launch Estimator by clicking the Estimator icon on the PowerTool Bar. The Setup Options menu is displayed.

2

Click the Dry Wall Estimation option you want. By default, Estimator will estimate dry wall usage without regard to where doors or windows are placed. Click “Take out Window and Door Area”, if you want to subtract those areas from the calculation.

3

Click the Wall Material Estimation options you want. By default, Estimator will make estimations without regard to where doors or windows are placed or whether or not the walls have base trim. Click “Take out Window and Door Area” and/or “Take out Base Trim Area”, if you want to subtract those areas from the calculation.

4

Click the Insulation option you want. By default, Estimator will estimate insulation needed without regard to where doors or windows are placed. Click “Take out Window and Door Area”, if you want to subtract those areas from the calculation.

5

Click the Calculate Roofing Squares option you want. By default, Estimator will estimate the number of roofing squares needed for your design. Click “Off”, if you do not need this calculation.

286

Customizing the Spreadsheet You may find it easier to use or read the data, if you change the colors of specific areas of your spreadsheet. Punch! AS4000 makes this easy. You can assign any color you want to certain parts of the spreadsheet. To customize colors 1

Click Set Colors on the Options menu. The Colors dialog box is displayed.

2

Click the color block next to the feature you want to customize. The Color dialog box is displayed.

3

Click one of the Basic or Custom colors or click on the color spectrum block to select a color.

4

(optional) Adjust the current Red, Green and Blue values to create a custom color.

5

(optional) Click an area on the color spectrum window to select a color, then adjust the RGB values, if necessary.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

Selecting a Plan Tab 6

Click OK. The color you defined is displayed on the color block on the Change color dialog box.

7

Click OK. The color is applied to the spreadsheet.

To reset a color back to the default ■

Click the Reset button next to the feature you want to reset to the default color. Then click OK.

To reset all colors ■

1

Click the green cell next to Construction Square Foot Cost.

2

Type the estimated cost.

3

Press ENTER. Punch! AS4000 automatically calculates the total and places it in the grey-shaded cell across from Total Cost.

Completing the Various Schedules

Click the Reset All button. Then click OK.

To hide tools ■

To calculate construction costs

Click to uncheck Show Tools on the View menu. The tool icons on the spreadsheet are hidden.

Estimator catalogs the features of your design that appear on each Plan Tab. From cubic yards of concrete, for a slab foundation, to light switches, everything is displayed on individual lines and calculations are based upon prices that you obtain from a building supply company near you. To complete Estimator schedules 1

Click the green-shaded cell for the Unit Cost of each material or feature of your design.

2

Type the estimated cost.

3

Press ENTER. Punch! AS4000 automatically calculates the total and displays it in the Total Cost column, then keeps a running Grand Total of each schedule.

Note: Use the arrow keys on your keyboard to move around your spreadsheet.

Creating a Master Pricelist Selecting a Plan Tab Estimator will automatically display features and materials used on all plan tabs of your design. You can choose to estimate specific areas of your design, for instance just the HVAC materials or just the materials for your deck.

Estimator saves the prices you enter in a master pricelist file to make it easy to create a new estimate after making alterations to your design. In addition, you can create individual pricelists for each building supply company, vendor or wholesaler that you make purchases from. To store a master pricelist 1

To select a plan tab 1

Click the plan tab you want to use. The plan tab is selected and the materials list for that tab appears.

2

(optional) Click Estimates on the View Menu, then click the individual plan you want.

On the View menu, click Plan Cost List. The Filtered Cost List menu is displayed.

Calculating Construction Costs Estimator automatically calculates the total square footage for each floor of your design. The Construction Cost Per Square Foot is dependent upon variables specific to your area. You can obtain specific costs from your local supplier or contractor.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

287

Chapter

39 Estimator

2

Type the costs from the source where you plan to purchase materials.

3

Click Save as a Master when you have finished updating your prices. The Save As dialog box is displayed.

3

Type a file name in the File Name text box or click to select the Master List you want to use. Click Save.

Exporting a Pricelist 4

Type a file name in the File Name text box, the extension is automatically added. Click Save.

5

Click Save.

6

(optional) If you want to save the drawing to a different drive or folder, click a different drive and folder or type the complete path in the File Name text box. Click Save.

You can export the information contained in an Estimator spreadsheet so you can use the information in other programs. To export a pricelist to Excel 1

Click Export on the File menu, then click Excel File. The Save As dialog box is displayed.

2

Type a file name in the File Name text box, the extension is automatically added. Click Save.

To open a master pricelist 1

On the View menu, click Plan Cost List. The Filtered Cost List menu is displayed.

To export a comma delimited file 1

Click Export on the File menu, then click Comma Delimited. The Save As dialog box is displayed.

2

Type a file name in the File Name text box, the extension is automatically added. Click Save.

To export a tab delimited file 2

Click Open Master List. The Open dialog box is displayed.

288

1

Click Export on the File menu, then click Tab Delimited. The Save As dialog box is displayed.

2

Type a file name in the File Name text box, the extension is automatically added. Click Save.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

Printing a Pricelist To export an HTML file 1

Click Export on the File menu, then click HTML File. The Save As dialog box is displayed.

2

Type a file name in the File Name text box, the extension is automatically added. Click Save.

Note: All necessary graphics are copied to the directory where you save the HTM file. You will need to upload all files to your web server to make them available to be viewed by others. To export a QuickBooks list 1

Click Export on the File menu, then click QuickBooks Item List. The Save As dialog box is displayed.

2

Type a file name in the File Name text box, the extension is automatically added. Click Save.

Printing a Pricelist You can print pricelists any way you need them. There are many ways to customize your estimations. To print a pricelist 1

Click Print on the File menu. The Print Preview Setup dialog box is displayed.

2

Click to check the options you want to have printed and uncheck any options you don’t want to print.

3

Click Portrait or Landscape.

4

Click Printer Setup to specify what printer you want to use. For more information on printer setup, see “Printing Floorplans”, which begins on page 22.

5

Click Preview to see what the page will look like before you actually print it.

6

Click Print when you have finished setting the options.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

289

Chapter

290

39 Estimator

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

Part 8

Presentation & CAD PowerTools Chapter 40: Chapter 41: Chapter 42: Chapter 43: Chapter 44:

RealModel® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Layout Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Symbol Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Section Detailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Global Sun Positioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

293 297 301 309 317

Chapter 40

RealModel® Punch! AS4000 integrates the exclusive, patented RealModel® technology, making it easy to construct an actual scale model of any home you draw. Once you have completed your home design, details are automatically transferred to the RealModel application. Instructions on building your home model are printed, with numbered sections and floor plan templates that make assembling it simple. This hands-on model shows you how to improve your design and save on construction costs, before you break ground. This is the perfect tool for presenting your ideas to your builder or architect.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

293

Chapter

40 RealModel®

Preparing to Construct a RealModel

Setting Print Setup

When constructing a RealModel, you’ll need to get a few supplies together first. Visit your local craft supply or hobby store to purchase these materials.

Punch! AS4000 prints using the current Windows printer. You can, however, print using any installed, Windowscompatible printer. Through the Print dialog box you can specify a printer or plotter from those currently installed.

Items you’ll need to construct a RealModel: ■

Construction material — foam board or poster board Adhesive — spray adhesive, rubber cement, or glue stick and so on. Tape Straight pins Straight-edge ruler Artist’s knife or scalpel

To set print setup parameters 1

On the File Menu, click Printer Setup. The Printer Setup dialog box is displayed.

2

Click on the down arrow next to the printer name.

3

Click the printer you want to use.

To select scale

4

Click on the down arrow next to paper size.

1

On the Model menu, click Scale.

5

2

Click an architectural scale, then click OK.

Select the size of paper in your printer. Typically, this will be either 8.5x11 in (letter) or 8.5x14 in (legal).

6

Click on the down arrow next to paper source.

7

Click the correct option. Typically, this will be either AutoSelect or Manual Feed.

8

Click either Portrait or Landscape in the Orientation area.

9

Click OK.

■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Launch RealModel by clicking the RealModel button on the PowerTool tab or by clicking Launch RealModel on the File menu.

Defining Scale The scale you choose will define the actual size of your model. All model templates will print in this scale. For example, if you choose 1/2"=1' - a ten-foot wall will print as a five-inch template.

Choosing the Construction Material Choose a sturdy construction material such as foamcore for construction of walls and roofs. Choose a thinner material for the base of the second and third floors, since using thick material may cause a gap in the Material between floors of your final product. To select construction material

Printing Templates The templates are used to guide you as you build your RealModel. They will specify which wall section is attached to other walls and where doors and windows are placed. Floor templates show where each wall is placed. You have the choice of printing all wall, roof or floor templates at one time or printing each individually.

1

On the Model menu, click Construction Material.

2

Select the button corresponding to the thickness of the material you will use to construct your model. A preview of the actual size of your construction material is displayed.

3

(optional) If the exact measurement is not displayed, use the material thickness slider bar to select your construction material.

To print wall templates 1

On the File menu, click Print All Wall Templates. The Print dialog box is displayed.

Click OK.

2

Confirm your default printer selection, then click OK.

4

294

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

Constructing Wall Templates To print roof templates 1 2

2

On the File menu, click Print All Roof Templates. The Print dialog box is displayed.

Cut out each roof section to the exact size of the template.

3

Attach each roof template to its appropriate counterpart.

Confirm your default printer selection, then click OK.

4

Secure the roof to the walls.

To print floor templates

Printing Template Materials and Colors

1

On the File menu, click Print Floor Template, then click First Floor (or the floor you want to print). The Print dialog box is displayed.

2

Confirm your default printer selection, then click OK.

To add a realistic look to your RealModel, you can print sheets of materials and colors to be applied to your model and trimmed to size. With this process you can see what your design will look like. Follow these steps for every wall and roof on your model.

To print a specific, individual template 1

On the File menu, click Print Template. The Print Template dialog box is displayed.

2

Type the number of the template you want to print, then click Print. The Print dialog box is displayed.

3

Confirm your printer settings, then click OK.

To print template materials and colors 1

Decide which material you want to print first.

2

On the File menu, click Print Template Materials and Colors. The Print Template Materials and Colors dialog box is displayed.

3

Type the template number of the material and color you want to print, then click Print. The Print dialog box is displayed.

4

Confirm your printer settings, then click OK.

Constructing Wall Templates You will notice that some wall templates will have darker shaded edges. These shaded areas indicate the thickness of your construction material. Use these as guidelines on where to attach adjoining walls. The directions for connecting the walls will be printed on each page. Be sure to transfer this information to the template before cutting it out. To construct a wall template 1

Attach each wall template to your construction material, using a permanent adhesive.

2

Cut out each wall section to the exact size of the template. Be sure to include shaded areas.

3

Attach each template to its appropriate counterpart.

Constructing Roof Templates Although your roof templates may print attached at points, cut out each roof section separately from your construction material to the exact size of the template. To construct a roof template 1

Note: It is best to print and assemble the material and color on each wall before moving on to the next wall. If you choose not to do this, you should label each material template and color, as they are printed, to make identifying them easier when attaching them to your model.

Attach each roof template to your construction material, using a permanent adhesive.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

295

Chapter

40 RealModel®

Attaching Template Materials and Colors to Your Model Once the materials and colors have been printed, you will need to affix them to the appropriate template and trim them to size. It is best to use spray adhesive, glue stick or tape for this step, as using white glue may cause the paper to wrinkle. To attach the template materials and colors 1

Affix the material to the proper wall template, which has already been attached to the construction material.

2

Carefully trim around the outside edges of the wall template.

3

Cut out the door and window openings.

4

Attach each template to its appropriate counterpart.

296

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

Chapter 41

Layout Manager Among the Punch! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 PowerTools, is the Layout Manager. Layout Manager makes it easy to create presentations with your design. You can create a presentation of elevations which shows all four sides on one sheet or you can show a floorplan in 2D and a 3D LiveView with the roof cutaway to reveal that floor. The combinations are as varied as your needs.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

297

Chapter

41 Layout Manager

Launching Layout Manager

To change the active floor

Punch! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 includes a PowerTool called Layout Manager.

1

Click a Home Design Layout box to select it; right-click and select Home Design Layout Properties. The Layout Box Properties dialog box is displayed.

Launching Layout Manager

2

Under Active Floor, select the floor(s) you want displayed.

3

Click OK.

■

Launch Layout Manager by clicking the Layout Manager icon on the PowerTool Bar.

Creating a Layout Punch! AS4000 allows you to draw three types of layout boxes: ■

■

■

Home Design Layout Boxes display a 2D plan view of your home. You can display single or multiple floors, as well as select which plan views to display. Image Layout Boxes display a bitmap image of your home, created in the Elevation Editor or exported from Punch! Home Design. LiveView Layout Boxes display a live, interactive 3D image of your home. You can use the fly-around feature to create a custom view of your home or use the 3D Cutaway Slider to reveal interior features of your home.

Adding Home Design Layout Boxes You can have any number of layout boxes in your presentation to display all aspects of your home plan.

To delete layout boxes ■

Click a Home Design Layout box to select it; right-click and select Clear or press DELETE.

Adding Image Layout Boxes Using the Image Layout Box, you can import an image of the house plan in the presentation. To insert an Image Layout Box

To insert a Home Design Layout Box

1

Click the Image Layout Box icon.

2

Click and drag to create a rectangle. The Load Layout Image dialog box is displayed.

3

Select the file for the plan you want to display.

To change the visible plans

4

Click Open.

1

To change the image in an Image Layout Box

1

Click the Home Design Layout Box icon.

2

Click and drag to create a rectangle. The floor plan is displayed.

Click a Home Design Layout box to select it; right-click and select Home Design Layout Properties. The Layout Box Properties dialog box is displayed.

1

Click an Image Layout Box to select it; right-click and select Change Image. The Load Layout Image dialog box is displayed.

2

Select the file.

To change the visible floors

3

Click Open.

1

To change the image ratio

2

Under Visible Plans, select the plans you want displayed.

3

Click OK.

Click a Home Design Layout box to select it; right-click and select Home Design Layout Properties. The Layout Box Properties dialog box is displayed.

2

Under Visible Floors, select the floor(s) you want displayed.

3

Click OK.

298

■

Click the Image Layout Box to select it; right-click and select Stretch to fit or Maintain Ratio.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

Adding LiveView Layout Boxes

Adding LiveView Layout Boxes

Printing your Layout

Using the LiveView Layout Box, you can include a real-time view of the house plan as part of your presentation.

Punch! AS4000 prints using the current Windows printer. To modify print settings

To insert a LiveView Layout Box

■

1

Click the LiveView Layout Box icon.

2

Click and drag to create a rectangle. A Live View of the house is created and the LiveView toolbar appears.

To print your layout ■

Manipulating Layout Boxes

On the File menu, click Print to display the Print dialog box.

Using Layout Templates

To duplicate an existing layout box ■

On the Setup menu, click Paper Size to display the Print Setup dialog box.

Click the layout box to select it; right-click and select Duplicate Layout.

To move a layout box 1

Click the layout box you want to move.

2

On the Edit menu, click Move. The Move dialog box is displayed.

Layout templates allow you to design a layout page, then save that design as a generic template. If you open another drawing and apply the Layout Template, the new layout will feature the same overall arrangement. If you used Home Design Layout Boxes in the template, those layout boxes will display the new drawing with the same options. The new layout will even display the LiveView of the new drawing! To save your layout as a template

3

Click either Cartesian or Polar, then type amount you want the layout box moved in the appropriate text boxes.

4

Click OK. The layout box is moved, based on the coordinates you specified.

1

On the File menu, click Save as Layout Template. The Save to Layout Template Library dialog box is displayed.

2

Enter a name and description for the layout template.

3

Click OK.

Note: Coordinates are measured in inches or they can be measured in feet and inches, separated by a hyphen. To nudge a layout box 1

Click the layout box you want to move.

To apply a template to your layout

2

On the Edit menu, click Nudge, then click the direction (up, down, left, or right) or use the arrow keys on your keyboard.

■

To delete a layout template

To clear a layout box ■

If you have already saved a template, open the Layout Manager and click and drag a template from the Templates Preview Bar.

Click the layout box to select it; right-click and select Clear or press DELETE.

■

Right-click a template from the Templates Preview Bar and click Delete Layout on the pop-up menu.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

299

Chapter

300

41 Layout Manager

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

Chapter 42

Symbol Editor Punch! Home Design Architectural Series 4000’s Symbol Editor lets you create custom symbols, or modify existing symbols, for use in your 2D drawing plans. Using standard 2D design tools, you can draw the symbol, save it to a library and even record a brief description of the symbol. You can manage your custom symbols, and the entire library of Punch! AS4000 symbols, using the Symbol Organizer.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

301

Chapter

42 Symbol Editor

Launching Symbol Editor ■

Launch Symbol Editor by clicking the Symbol Editor icon on the PowerTool Bar.

Managing Symbols Symbol Editor not only allows you to save new symbols for use in your 2D drawings, it also has easy-to-use tools for organizing symbols and managing symbol categories. To save a new symbol 1

On the Symbols drop-down menu, click Create Symbol or click the Add Symbol to Library button. The Save Symbol to Library dialog box is displayed.

2

(optional) In the Symbol Category section, click to save the symbol to a different category.

3

(optional) Click New to create a new symbol category. Select a folder in which to create the new category, then type a name for the new category and click OK.

4

Type a name for the new symbol in the Symbol Name text box. New symbol names can contain up to 44 characters.

5

Type a description of the new symbol in the Symbol Description text box. New symbol descriptions can contain up to 78 characters.

6

Click OK.

2

On the left side of the Symbol Organizer, select a category.

3

On the right side of the Symbol Organizer, select a category.

4

Click to select the symbol you want to move.

5

(optional) Click the Info button to display information about the selected symbol.

6

(optional) Click the Delete button to permanently remove the selected symbol.

7

Click an arrow button to move the selected symbol from one of the selected categories to the other.

8

Click Close.

To create, delete or rename a symbol category 1

On the Symbols drop-down menu, click Symbol Organizer. The Symbol Organizer dialog box is displayed.

To move symbols between categories 1

On the Symbols drop-down menu, click Symbol Organizer. The Symbol Organizer dialog box is displayed.

302

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

Editing CAD Objects 2

(optional) In the Category section, click the New button. Select a folder in which to create the new category, then type a name for the new category and click OK.

3

(optional) In the Category section, click Delete. Select a folder to delete and click OK.

4

(optional) In the Category section, click Rename. Select a folder to rename and click OK. Type a new name for the category and click OK again.

5

Click Close.

3

On the Edit menu, click Move. The Relocate Tool dialog box is displayed.

4

Click either Cartesian or Polar, then type amount you want the object moved in the appropriate text boxes.

5

Click OK. The object is moved, based on the coordinates you specified.

Note: Coordinates are measured in inches or they can be measured in feet and inches, separated by a hyphen. To scale CAD objects

Editing CAD Objects You can move, rotate and modify CAD objects, using the array of editing tools in Symbol Editor. To nudge a CAD object 1

On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.

2

Click the object or feature to select it.

3

On the Edit menu, click Nudge, then click the direction (up, down, left, right).

4

(optional) Use the arrow keys on your keyboard to nudge the object or feature.

1

On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.

2

Click a CAD object to select it.

3

On the Options menu, click Scale Selection or click the Resize Selected Tool. The Scale Selection dialog box appears.

4

(optional) Click either Object Size or Percentage then enter values to scale the object.

5

(optional) In the Scale From section, click a location to use as the basepoint during the scaling operation. For instance, clicking Bottom Right means that location will remain constant.

6

Click OK.

To resize CAD objects 1

On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.

2

Click a CAD object to select it.

3

Click and hold down the mouse button, drag the segment or point to a new location, then release the mouse button.

Note: To constrain movements horizontally or vertically, press SHIFT, while reshaping the object. To move CAD objects 1

On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.

2

Click a CAD object to select it.

To skew CAD objects 1

On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.

2

Click a CAD object to select it.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

303

Chapter

42 Symbol Editor

3

On the Standard toolbar, click the Skew Tool.

4

Click a cornerpoint of the object; hold down the mouse button and move the pointer in the direction that you want the object to be slanted. Dimensions appear in the position readout bar, as you draw.

Drag

5

3

On the Edit menu, click Duplicate Offsets. The Duplicate Offsets dialog box is displayed.

4

Type the horizontal and vertical offsets and the number of duplicates.

Release the mouse to stop skewing the object.

To trim a CAD object 1

On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.

2

Click the object you want to trim. Selection handles appear around the object.

3

On the Standard toolbar, click the Trim Tool.

4

Click the point on the segment where you want to trim (or break) the object into two separate segments.

Duplicating Objects Similar to cutting and pasting, the duplicate feature creates an exact copy of the object you select. In the Duplicate Offsets dialog box, you can specify the number and specific offset of a series of duplicates.

Note: These variables control the distance apart that the duplicates are placed. 5

Click OK. The object is duplicated at the offset you defined.

To create a duplicate 1

On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.

2

Click the object you want to duplicate.

3

On the Edit menu, click Duplicate Object or press CTRL+D.

To create a series of duplicate objects 1

On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.

2

Click the object you want to duplicate.

Grouping Objects By defining a Group, you create a set of selected objects that are then treated as one item. You can have unlimited groups in a drawing. To group objects

304

1

On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.

2

Hold down SHIFT and click on each object that you want to be included in the group.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

Locking Objects 3

On the Arrange menu, click Group or right-click and click Group on the pop-up menu that is displayed or click the Group button.

To ungroup objects 1

On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.

2

Click the group you want to ungroup.

3

On the Arrange menu, click Ungroup or rightclick and click Ungroup on the pop-up menu that is displayed or click the Ungroup button.

2

(optional) Type a new value in the Multigon Sides text box. This value controls the number of sides on a selected multigon and changes the number of sides multigons are drawn with.

3

(optional) Type a new value in the Curve Smoothness text box. Lower values result in less curvature.

4

(optional) Type a new value in the Zoom Percentage text box. This controls the amount of magnification that is applied each time you click the Zoom Tool.

5

(optional) Increase or decrease the Pixels setting in the Scrolling Speed section. This value controls the rate at which the drawing window moves when you click the scroll arrows.

6

(optional) Increase or decrease the Snap Tool & Selection Sensitivity. A lower value means that you must click closer to an object to snap to or select it.

7

(optional) Increase or decrease the Join Sensitivity. A lower value means that you must position objects closer to join them.

8

(optional) Uncheck Auto Reset Tools. When Auto Reset Tools is unchecked, you can draw concurrent CAD objects without selecting the corresponding CAD tool each time.

9

Click OK.

Locking Objects You can protect CAD objects or symbols from accidental modifications by locking them. You can have unlimited locked objects in a drawing. To lock objects 1

On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.

2

Click the object you want to lock.

3

On the Arrange menu, click Lock or click the Lock button.

To unlock objects 1

On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.

2

Click the locked object you want to unlock.

3

On the Arrange menu, click Unlock or click the Unlock button.

Controlling Drawing Settings There are a variety of tools that allow you to control how you draw, select or modify CAD objects and symbols. The Preferences dialog box lets you modify a variety of settings, including the number of sides on a multigon or the sensitivity of snap or join tools. Tools along the bottom of the drawing window allow you draw parallel segments, switch between object and point selection modes or center and corner drawing modes.

To change the drawing scale 1

On the Project menu, click Drawing Scale. The Drawing Scale dialog box is displayed.

To change drawing preferences 1

On the Options menu, click Preferences. The Preferences dialog box is displayed.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

305

Chapter 2

3

42 Symbol Editor

(optional) In the Screen Units section enter a new value and change the units of measurement. Higher values in the screen units section make it easier to draw small details. (optional) In the World Units section enter a new value and change the units of measurement. Higher values in the world units section make it easier to draw large details.

4

(optional) Check Rescale Objects to change existing objects to the new scale.

5

Click OK.

3

(optional) Type a new value in the Vertical text box.

4

(optional) Click Move. The drawing origin is moved by the horizontal and vertical increment you specified.

5

(optional) Click Reset. The drawing origin is returned to its the default location.

To display the drawing pages ■

On the Project menu, click to check Draw Page Breaks. When this item is checked, Symbol Editor displays the actual page breaks in the drawing.

To display the drawing axis To change the paper size 1

■

On the Project menu, click Paper Size. The Paper Size dialog box is displayed.

On the Project menu, click to check Draw Axis. When this item is checked, Symbol Editor displays the actual horizontal and vertical drawing axes in the drawing.

To change the axis color 1

On the Project menu, click Axis Color. The Color dialog box is displayed.

2

Click an area on the color spectrum window to select a color, then adjust the values, if necessary.

3

(optional) Adjust the current Red, Green and Blue values to create a custom color.

4

Click OK. The color you defined is applied to the axis.

To change the drawing color 1

On the Project menu, click Drawing Color. The Color dialog box is displayed.

2

(optional) Click one of the four output styles, then select a standard size from the corresponding drop down menu.

2

3

(optional) Click Custom, type new values in the Width and Height text boxes, then select a Units of Measurement from the drop down menu.

Click an area on the color spectrum window to select a color, then adjust the values, if necessary.

3

(optional) Adjust the current Red, Green and Blue values to create a custom color.

4

Click OK.

4

Click OK. The color you defined is applied to the drawing.

To move the drawing origin 1

On the Project menu, click Move Origin. The Move Origin dialog box is displayed.

Drawing Parallel Segments You can draw one or more parallel segments for any CAD object. Use the Parallel dialog box to specify the number of parallel segments, as well as their distance and direction from the original. To draw parallel segments ■

2

Click Turn On Draw Parallel in the lower left corner of the window.

(optional) Type a new value in the Horizontal text box.

306

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

Using Object or Point Selection Modes To draw single segments ■

To use point selection mode

Click Turn Off Draw Parallel in the lower left corner of the window.

■

corner of the window.

To control the settings for parallel segments 1

On the Options menu, click Parallel. The Parallel dialog box is displayed.

On the Options menu, click Point Selection or click on the Point Selection tool in the lower left

Drawing from Corner or Center You can draw a CAD object from corner to corner or from center to corner. Draw from Corner makes drawing cabinets, tables and most other angular objects much easier. Draw from Corner works with the rectangle, oval and line/plane tools only. To draw from corner ■

On the Options menu, click Draw From Corner or click on the Draw from Corner Tool in the lower left corner of the window.

To draw from center 2

(optional) Click a direction to draw the offset parallel.

3

(optional) Type a new value in the Parallel Width text box. This controls the distance between the original and parallel segments.

4

(optional) Check Group to automatically group the original and parallel segments.

5

Click OK.

Using Object or Point Selection Modes Object Selection Mode is active by default. Object selection, along with point selection, controls how your edits impact your object. If you are in object selection mode, changes affect the object as a whole. If you are working in point selection mode, each edge of the object is treated separately, as you edit. In point selection mode, you are able to resize or reshape an object by moving one of its individual points. While it is easy to move an entire object in object selection mode, it is much more convenient to handle detailed edits using point selection mode.

■

Exporting and Importing There may be times that you want your symbol exported to DXF/DWG format. To export a DXF/DWG symbol 1

On the File menu, click Export DXF/DWG. The Export Options dialog box is displayed.

2

Click the radio button next to Format and Version you want to use.

3

Click OK. The Export DXF/DWG dialog box is displayed.

To use object selection mode ■

On the Options menu, click Object Selection or click on the Object Selection tool in the lower left

On the Options menu, click Draw from Center or click on the Draw from Center Tool in the lower left corner of the window.

corner of the window.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

307

Chapter

42 Symbol Editor To modify print settings ■

On the Setup menu, click Printer Setup to display the Print Setup dialog box.

To print your drawing ■

4

Type a file name in the File Name text box. Symbol Editor automatically adds the extension.

5

Click Save.

On the File menu, click Print to display the Print dialog box.

To import a DXF/DWG symbol 1

On the File menu, click Import DXF/DWG. The Import DXF dialog box is displayed.

2

In the File Name box, type the name of the file you want to open or search for the file by switching folders or drives.

3

When you see the name of the file you want to open, double-click to select it. The Scale menu is displayed.

4

Click the radio button next to the scale you want to use.

5

Click OK.

Printing your Drawing Symbol Editor prints using the current Windows printer.

308

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

Chapter 43

Section Detailer You can store even more details of your home design, without cluttering your project, using Punch! Home Design Architectural Series 4000’s Section Detailer. Create a separate detailed drawing of built-in book shelving or an electrical sub-panel, then simply place a reference marker to the detail in your main project.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

309

Chapter

43 Section Detailer

Launching Section Detailer

To open an existing detail 1

On the Project menu, click Switch Details or click the Switch Working Detail button. The Choose Detail dialog box appears.

Managing Section Details

2

Section Detailer not only allows you to save Details for use in your 2D drawings, it also has easy-to-use tools for managing how those details are displayed in the 2D drawing.

Click the name of the detail you want to open, in the Detail Link Name window.

3

Click OK.

■

Launch Section Detailer by clicking the Section Detailer icon on the PowerTool Bar.

To open a new detail 1

To change a detail’s link properties 1

On the Project menu, click Detail Link Properties or click the Detail Properties button. The Detail Link Style dialog box appears.

2

Click on of the six detail link styles to choose the detail link that will appear in your drawing.

3

Enter a name in the Detail Label text box.

4

Click a Detail Link Size to choose the size of the detail link that will appear in your drawing.

5

(optional) Check the Thick Line checkbox to set the line weight in your detail drawing to thick.

6

Click OK.

On the Project menu, click Switch Details or click the Switch Working Detail button. The Choose Detail dialog box appears.

Editing CAD Objects 2

Check the Create New Detail Link checkbox.

3

Click one of the six detail link styles to choose the detail link that will appear in your drawing.

4

Enter a name in the Detail Name text box.

5

Click a Detail Link Size to choose the size of the detail link that will appear in your drawing.

6

(optional) Check the Thick Line checkbox to set the line weight in your detail drawing to thick.

7

Click OK.

310

You can move, rotate and modify CAD objects using the array of editing tools in Section Detailer. To scale CAD objects 1

On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.

2

Click a CAD object to select it.

3

On the Options menu, click Scale Selection or click the Resize Selected Tool. The Scale Selection dialog box appears.

4

(optional) Click either Object Size or Percentage then enter values to scale the object.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

Duplicating Objects Note: The endpoints of each object must be nearby for those objects to be joined. You can increase or decrease the necessary distance by changing the Join Sensitivity. For more information, see “Controlling Drawing Settings”, which begins on page 313. 3

5

(optional) In the Scale From section, click a location to use as the basepoint during the scaling operation. For instance, clicking Bottom Right, means that location will remain constant.

6

Click OK.

To skew CAD objects 1

On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.

2

Click a CAD object to select it.

3

On the Standard toolbar, click the Skew Tool.

4

Click a cornerpoint of the object; hold down the mouse button and move the pointer in the direction that you want the object to be slanted. Dimensions appear in the position readout bar, as you draw.

On the Standard toolbar, click the Join Tool. The objects are joined into a polyline.

Note: You can separate the segments of any polyline (whether or not you created it using the Join Tool) by selecting the polyline and clicking the Unjoin Tool on the Standard toolbar. To add additional points to a CAD object 1

Click the Add Point Tool. The pointer changes to reflect drawing mode.

2

Click to enter a new point on one of the CAD objects you have created.

To remove a point from a CAD object 1

Click the Remove Point Tool. The pointer changes to reflect drawing mode.

2

Click to remove a point from one of the CAD objects you have created.

To place a CAD object on top of another object Drag

5

Release the mouse to stop skewing the object.

To trim a CAD object 1

On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.

2

Click the object you want to trim. Selection handles appear around the object.

3

On the Standard toolbar, click the Trim Tool.

4

Click the point on the segment where you want to trim (or break) the object into two separate segments.

To join arcs, lines or polylines

1

On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.

2

Click the group you want to place on top.

3

On the Arrange menu, click Bring To Front or right-click and click Bring To Front on the pop-up menu that is displayed or click the Bring To Front button.

To place a CAD object behind another object 1

On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.

2

Click the group you want to place on bottom.

3

On the Arrange menu, click Send To Back or right-click and click Send To Back on the pop-up menu that is displayed or click the Send To Back button.

To clear CAD objects ■

Click the object to select it, then right-click and click Clear.

1

On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.

Duplicating Objects

2

Hold down SHIFT and click on each object that you want to be joined.

Similar to cutting and pasting, the duplicate feature creates an exact copy of the object you select. In the Duplicate Offsets

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

311

Chapter

43 Section Detailer

dialog box, you can specify the number and specific offset of a series of duplicates. To create a duplicate 1

On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.

2

Click the object you want to duplicate.

3

On the Edit menu, click Duplicate Object or press CTRL+D.

To create a series of duplicate objects 1

On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.

2

Click the object you want to duplicate.

Grouping Objects By defining a Group, you create a set of selected objects that are then treated as one item. You can have unlimited groups in a drawing. To group objects

3

On the Edit menu, click Duplicate Offsets. The Duplicate Offsets dialog box is displayed.

1

On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.

2

Hold down SHIFT and click on each object that you want to be included in the group.

3

On the Arrange menu, click Group or right-click and click Group on the pop-up menu that is displayed or click the Group button.

To ungroup objects 1

On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.

2

Click the group you want to ungroup.

3

On the Arrange menu, click Ungroup or rightclick and click Ungroup on the pop-up menu that is displayed or click the Ungroup button.

Locking Objects 4

Type the horizontal and vertical offsets and the number of duplicates.

You can protect CAD objects or symbols from accidental modifications by locking them. You can have unlimited locked objects in a drawing.

Note: These variables control the distance apart that the duplicates are placed.

To lock objects 1

On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.

5

2

Click the object you want to lock.

3

On the Arrange menu, click Lock or click the Lock button.

Click OK. The object is duplicated at the offset you defined.

To unlock objects

312

1

On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.

2

Click the locked object you want to unlock.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

Controlling Drawing Settings 3

On the Arrange menu, click Unlock or click the Unlock button.

8

(optional) Uncheck Auto Reset Tools. When Auto Reset Tools is unchecked, you can draw concurrent CAD objects without selecting the corresponding CAD tool each time.

9

Click OK.

Controlling Drawing Settings There are a variety of tools that allow you to control how you draw, select or modify CAD objects and symbols. The Preferences dialog box lets you modify a variety of settings, including the number of sides on a multigon or the sensitivity of snap or join tools.

To change the drawing scale 1

On the Project menu, click Drawing Scale. The Drawing Scale dialog box is displayed.

2

(optional) In the Screen Units section, enter a new value and change the units of measurement. Higher values in the screen units section make it easier to draw small details.

3

(optional) In the World Units section, enter a new value and change the units of measurement. Higher values in the world units section make it easier to draw large details.

4

(optional) Check Rescale Objects to change existing objects to the new scale.

5

Click OK.

Tools along the bottom of the drawing window allow you to draw parallel segments, switch between object and point selection modes or center and corner drawing modes. To change drawing preferences 1

2

On the Options menu, click Preferences. The Preferences dialog box is displayed.

(optional) Type a new value in the Multigon Sides text box. This value controls the number of sides on a selected multigon and changes the number of sides with which multigons are drawn.

3

(optional) Type a new value in the Curve Smoothness text box. Lower values result in less curvature.

4

(optional) Type a new value in the Zoom Percentage text box. This controls the amount of magnification that is applied each time you click the Zoom Tool.

5

(optional) Increase or decrease the Pixels setting in the Scrolling Speed section. This value controls the rate at which the drawing window moves when you click the scroll arrows.

6

(optional) Increase or decrease the Snap Tool & Selection Sensitivity. A lower value means that you must click closer to an object to snap to or select it.

7

(optional) Increase or decrease the Join Sensitivity. A lower value means that you must positions objects closer to join them.

To change the paper size 1

On the Project menu, click Paper Size. The Paper Size dialog box is displayed.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

313

Chapter

43 Section Detailer

2

(optional) Click one of the four output styles, then select a standard size from the corresponding drop down menu.

3

(optional) Click Custom; type new values in the Width and Height text boxes, then select a Units of Measurement from the drop down menu.

4

Click OK.

To move the drawing origin 1

On the Project menu, click Move Origin. The Move Origin dialog box is displayed.

2

(optional) Type a new value in the Horizontal text box.

3

(optional) Type a new value in the Vertical text box.

4 5

Click an area on the color spectrum window to select a color, then adjust the values, if necessary.

3

(optional) Adjust the current Red, Green and Blue values to create a custom color.

4

Click OK. The color you defined is applied to the axis.

To change the drawing color 1

(optional) Click Move. The drawing origin is moved by the horizontal and vertical increment you specified.

On the Project menu, click Drawing Color. The Color dialog box is displayed.

2

(optional) Click Reset. The drawing origin is returned to its default location.

Click an area on the color spectrum window to select a color, then adjust the values, if necessary.

3

(optional) Adjust the current Red, Green and Blue values to create a custom color.

4

Click OK. The color you defined is applied to the drawing.

To display the drawing pages ■

2

On the Project menu, click to check Draw Page Breaks. When this item is checked, Section Detailer displays the actual page breaks in the drawing.

To change the background color 1

On the Project menu, click Background Color. The Color dialog box is displayed.

2

Click an area on the color spectrum window to select a color, then adjust the values, if necessary.

3

(optional) Adjust the current Red, Green and Blue values to create a custom color.

4

Click OK. The color you defined is applied to the drawing background.

To display the drawing axis ■

On the Project menu, click to check Draw Axis. When this item is checked, Section Detailer displays the actual horizontal and vertical drawing axes in the drawing.

To change the axis color 1

On the Project menu, click Axis Color. The Color dialog box is displayed.

Drawing Parallel Segments You can draw one or more parallel segments for any CAD object. Use the Parallel dialog box to specify the number of parallel segments, as well as their distance and direction from the original. To draw parallel segments ■

314

Click Turn On Draw Parallel in the lower left corner of the window.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

Using Object or Point Selection Modes To draw single segments ■

To use point selection mode

Click Turn Off Draw Parallel in the lower left corner of the window.

■

corner of the window.

To control the settings for parallel segments 1

On the Options menu, click Parallel. The Parallel dialog box is displayed.

On the Options menu, click Point Selection or click on the Point Selection tool in the lower left

Drawing from Corner or Center You can draw a CAD object from corner to corner or from center to corner. Draw from Corner makes drawing cabinets, tables and most other angular objects much easier. Draw from Corner works with the rectangle, oval and line/plane tools only. To draw from corner ■

On the Options menu, click Draw From Corner or click on the Draw from Corner Tool in the lower left corner of the window.

To draw from center 2

(optional) Click a direction to draw the offset parallel.

3

(optional) Type a new value in the Parallel Width text box. This controls the distance between the original and parallel segments.

4

(optional) Check Group to automatically group the original and parallel segments.

5

Click OK.

Using Object or Point Selection Modes Object Selection Mode is active by default. Object selection, along with point selection, controls how your edits impact your object. If you are in object selection mode, changes affect the object as a whole. If you are working in point selection mode, each edge of the object is treated separately. as you edit.

■

On the Options menu, click Draw from Center or click on the Draw from Center Tool in the lower left corner of the window.

Exporting and Importing a DXF/DWG File You may find it useful to share files with your architect, builder and so on. Importing and exporting your detail drawings to DXF or DWG format will make sharing your files simple. To export a DXF/DWG drawing 1

On the File menu, click Export DXF/DWG. The Export Options dialog box is displayed.

2

Click a format for your file.

3

Click a version for your file.

4

Click OK. The Export DXF/DWG dialog box is displayed.

In point selection mode, you are able to resize or reshape an object by moving one of its individual points. While it is easy to move an entire object in object selection mode, it is much more convenient to handle detailed edits using point selection mode. To use object selection mode ■

On the Options menu, click Object Selection or click on the Object Selection tool in the lower left corner of the window.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

315

Chapter 5

6

43 Section Detailer

Type a file name in the File Name text box. Punch! AS4000 DXF Exporter automatically adds the DXF or DWG extension.

Printing your Drawing

Click Save.

To modify print settings

To import a DXF/DWG drawing 1

On the File menu, click Import DXF/DWG. The Import DXF dialog box is displayed.

Section Detailer prints using the current Windows printer.

■

To print your drawing ■

2

In the File Name box, type the name of the file you want to open or search for the file by switching folders or drives.

3

Click the name of the file you want to select it.

4

(optional) Check the Group Objects on Import checkbox to group all elements in the DXF/DWG together.

5

Click Open.

On the Setup menu, click Printer Setup to display the Print Setup dialog box.

On the File menu, click Print to display the Print dialog box.

To import a Symbol 1

On the File menu, click Import Symbol. The Import Symbol dialog box is displayed.

2

In the File Name box, type the name of the file you want to open or search for the file by switching folders or drives.

3

Click the name of the file you want to select it.

4

(optional) Check the Rescale to Current checkbox to use the scale currently set.

5

Click Open.

316

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

Chapter 44

Global Sun Positioning Global Sun Positioning allows you to establish your site’s location, relative to the sun, anywhere in the world. This ensures that your design will render with accurate sun angle and intensity any time, any day of the year.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

317

Chapter ■

44 Global Sun Positioning

Launch Global Sun Positioning by clicking the Global Sun Positioning icon on the PowerTool Bar.

Establishing Your Site’s Global Sun Positioning You can pinpoint a specific time of day and year, as well as a location anywhere in the world, using Punch! Global Sun Positioning. Global Sun Positioning also offers an easy way to render from day to night quickly, without having to adjust the sunlight settings in LiveView. To set date and time 1

Click the navigation arrows on either side of the month and year title bar to move through the calendar months.

4

Click the hour, minute or seconds in the Time bar to select it, then click the navigation arrows to change the time.

Note: You can manually type the time by selecting the hour, minute or second and typing the time you want. 5

(optional) Click the checkbox to select Daylight Savings Time.

6

Click the Use Current Date button to use today’s date on the calendar. Today’s date automatically appears on the calendar.

7

Click the Use Current Time button to update the Time to the current hour, minute and second. The current time automatically appears in the Time bar.

To set a location

2

3

(optional) Click the month and year title bar, then click the month from the drop-down menu.

Click the year, then use the navigation buttons to move through the years.

318

1

Click the Country drop-down box to display the Country list. The list appears alphabetically.

2

Click the country from the list. A red crosshair appears on the map, targeting the country you chose.

3

Click the City drop-down box to display the list of cities in the country you chose. The list appears alphabetically.

4

Click the city from the list. A red crosshair appears on the map, targeting the city you selected.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

Establishing Your Site’s Global Sun Positioning Note: If you momentarily place your mouse above the crosshair on the map, a popup displays the city, state, country, longitude and latitude of the selected location. 5

Click the Add City button to add a city that does not appear in the database. The New City dialog box is displayed.

6

Type the name of the city in the City Name text box.

7

(optional) You can pinpoint a location by clicking on the map or by typing the location’s latitude in the Latitude text box and selecting South or North from the dropdown box then typing the longitude in the Longitude text box and selecting West or East from the drop-down box.

8

Click the UTC Offset drop-down box to select the time zone where you want your design located. Click the time zone you want to use.

9

After you’ve entered the information about your New City, click OK. Your city is added to the database.

2

Click the text box of the information you want to change.Type the updated information.

3

Click the UTC Offset drop-down box to edit the time zone.

4

After you’ve entered the updated information about your city, click OK. The city is updated in the database.

To delete a location 1

From the Country drop-down menu, select the country from which you want to delete a city. Click the country and its cities appear in the City drop-down menu.

2

Click the Delete button to delete a city from the country you chose. The Delete Locations dialog box is displayed with that country’s cities in the database.

To edit a location 1

Click the Edit City button to edit information about any city in the database. The Edit City dialog box is displayed.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

319

Chapter 3

4

44 Global Sun Positioning

Click on the city you want to delete. Click DELETE. The confirmation box appears.

To change date and time options 1

On the Options menu, click General. The Global Sun Positioning Options dialog box is displayed.

2

(optional) To disable calendar synchronization, click to uncheck the checkbox next to Synchronize date using my PC calendar.

3

(optional) To disable time synchronization, click to uncheck the checkbox next to Synchronize time using my PC clock.

Click YES to delete your selection(s) from the database.

Note: You can delete multiple cities at one time by pressing and holding SHIFT or CTRL, while you select the cities with your mouse.

Controlling Settings To ensure accurate rendering, Punch! automatically synchronizes Global Sun Positioning with your PC’s calendar and clock. This way the sun’s intensity and angle are time and date sensitive. However, you can change these and other settings, such as date and time synchronization, crosshair settings, database options, as well as customize the lighting settings for your design. Global Sun Positioning can incorporate seasonal aspects into your design, but it cannot always predict the topography of your exact location. The Lighting Settings give you control of the intensity and shadows to create the natural effect of a specific location, based on your own landscape and topography.

320

To change map options 1

On the Options menu, click General. The Global Sun Positioning Options dialog box is displayed.

2

Select the checkbox next to Show Longitude and Latitude grid. The Longitude and Latitude grid is displayed on the Global Sun Positioning map.

3

(optional) The Location Indicator specifies your current location on the map. To enable this feature select the checkbox next to Show Location Indicator on map. The Location Indicator type and Location Indicator color sections appear.

4

Click the Location Indicator drop-down menu to select which type of Location Indicator appears on the map. Three options appear.

5

Click the red block next to Location Indicator color to chose the color of the Location Indicator. The color palette is displayed.

6

Choose the color you want and click OK. The Location Indicator changes color.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

Establishing True North To customize lighting settings 1

On the Options menu, click Lighting. The Lighting Settings window is displayed.

2

Click and drag the sliders to brighter or darker settings to customize how your design is displayed in 3D LiveView.

3

Once you’ve established your Lighting Settings, click OK to return to Global Sun Positioning.

4

(optional) Right-click on any of the three custom lighting areas and click Reset Defaults to use the program’s default settings.

2

Use the slider bar to adjust the compass needle to your site’s orientation. The angle is displayed beneath, as you move the slide.

3

Click OK.

Establishing True North True North refers to the location of the North Pole, relative to the navigator’s position. By orienting your drawing to True North, you allow Punch! to more accurately calculate the sun’s intensity and angle at your location for any given time and date. To establish True North 1

Click the True North button at the lower right of the drawing window. The True North Angle dialog box is displayed.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

321

Chapter

322

44 Global Sun Positioning

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

Part 9

Punch! Animator Chapter 45: Chapter 46: Chapter 47: Chapter 48:

File Management and Editing Controls . KeyPoints and Animation Paths . . . . . . . Segment Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Video Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

325 329 333 337

Chapter 45

File Management and Editing Controls When you start Punch! Animator, the current file from your Punch! PowerTool-enabled software program will be loaded into memory and displayed. If you are returning to work on an existing animation file, you must open it or display it, on the screen. Opening a file involves clicking Open on the File menu and specifying the name of the file you want to open. Once you have opened a file, you can edit, import, export, print, view and save it. The changes you make to a plan drawing occur only in your computer’s memory, until you save them. To preserve a drawing for later use, you must save it to a file. If you want to save a drawing using its current name or if you want to save a new, untitled drawing, use Save. If you want to save a drawing using a new name, use Save As. In addition to standard Windows commands like cut, copy, paste and delete, Punch! Animator includes more sophisticated modes of manipulating your design. You can move or rotate selected KeyPoints, Animation Segments or Animation Paths. Learn to customize settings like nudge factor, so Punch! Animator works best for you.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

325

Chapter

45 File Management and Editing Controls

Exporting an AVI File

Opening a Video File

Punch! Animator exports AVI files to make it easier to show your architect, friends, colleagues and so on, the ins and outs of your newly designed home plan.

You can view any exported video file at any time.

To export an AVI file 1

On the File menu, click Export Animation Video or press Ctrl+S. The Save Animation Video dialog box is displayed.

2

(optional) On the Toolbar, click the Export Animation Video button. The Save Animation Video dialog box is displayed.

3

In the File Name text box, type a name. Punch! Animator automatically adds the AVI extension.

4

(optional) If you want to save the drawing to a different drive or folder, click a different drive and folder or type the complete path in the File Name text box.

5

Click Save.

To open and play an existing AVI file 1

On the File menu, click Open Video File or press Ctrl+O. The Open dialog box is displayed.

2

In the File Name text box, type the name of the file you want to open or search for the file by switching folders or drives.

3

When you see the name of the file you want to open, click to select it.

4

Click OK. Depending on the media player installed on your computer, a player window similar to this one is displayed.

5

View your movie using Play, Pause, Stop and so on, available from your media playing software.

Note: To play back the video after exporting, make sure the Play Video After Export option is checked on the Video Tab. To set the temporary directory 1

On the Video Tab, click Temp Directory. The Browse for Folder dialog box is displayed.

Saving Animation Paths With Punch! Animator you can save a variety of Animation Paths to be sure you have just the right viewpoints recorded. To save an animation path

2

Click the folder where you want your working files to be saved. Click OK.

1

On the File menu, click Save Animation Paths. The Save As dialog box is displayed.

2

If you want to save the path under another name, type a name in the File Name text box.

3

If you want to save the path to a different drive or folder, click a different drive and folder or type the complete path in the File Name text box.

4

Click Save.

Importing Animation Paths When you decide which view you like, you can import any of the saved Animation Paths.

326

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

Closing a File To import an animation path

To set undo parameters

1

On the File menu, click Import Animation Paths. The Open dialog box is displayed.

1

On the Edit menu, click Undo Preferences; the Undo Preferences dialog box is displayed.

2

In the File Name text box, type the name of the file you want to open or search for the file by switching folders or drives.

2

Type the number of undo levels you want to use; click OK.

3

When you see the name of the file you want to open, click to select it.

To use redo

4

Click Open.

■

On the Edit menu, click Redo or press CTRL+Y. The previous action is reversed.

Closing a File

Editing Using Cut, Copy, Paste and Clear

When you finish working with a file, close it to remove the window from the screen and to free up your computer’s memory. When you are done working in Punch! Animator, close all your files and return to Punch! Home Design.

Cut moves the selection to the Clipboard and deletes the original. Copy places a duplicate of the selection on the Clipboard. Paste places the contents of the Clipboard into your drawing. You can place the Clipboard contents as many times as necessary. Clear removes the selection.

To close a file ■

On the File menu, click Exit & Return to Punch! Home Design or press Ctrl+Q. If you have unsaved changes in your plan drawing, Punch! Animator prompts you to save them before it closes the file.

To edit using the cut command 1

On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.

2

Click the selection you want to cut.

3

On the Edit menu, click Cut or press CTRL+X. The selection is removed to the Clipboard.

Using Undo With Punch! Animator you can specify up to 50 levels of Undo, making it easy to recover your work. Bear in mind, the more levels of undo you specify, the more system resources will be used. To conserve system resources, set the undo level at the lowest level possible. To use undo ■

On the Edit menu, click Undo or press CTRL+Z. The previous action is reversed.

To turn off undo 1

2

On the Edit menu, click Undo Preferences; the Undo Preferences dialog box is displayed.

Click the Deactivate Undo (Faster) box, then click OK.

To edit using the copy command 1

On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.

2

Click the selection you want to copy.

3

On the Edit menu, click Copy or press CTRL+C. The selection is copied to the Clipboard.

To edit using the paste command 1

On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.

2

On the Edit menu, click Paste or press CTRL+V. The selection is copied from the Clipboard to the design window.

To edit using the clear command 1

On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.

2

Click the selection you want to cut.

3

On the Edit menu, click Clear or press DELETE or rightclick the selection and click Clear on the pop-up menu that is displayed. The selection is removed from your design.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

327

Chapter

328

45 File Management and Editing Controls

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

Chapter 46

KeyPoints and Animation Paths Among the most common functions of Punch! Animator are KeyPoints, Animation Segments and Animation Paths. These three terms will be used throughout this User’s Guide. All AVI files will be composed of combinations of these three entities. The AVI files you create with Punch! Animator are limited only by the amount of free hard disk space on your computer!

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

329

Chapter

46 KeyPoints and Animation Paths

Drawing Animation Paths With Punch! Animator, you can draw extremely intricate Animation Paths. Then, you can set each KeyPoint’s view individually. For more information on customizing KeyPoint views, see “Segment Tab”, which begins on page 333. To draw an animation path

3

Continue deleting KeyPoints until you are finished, then right-click to end.

1

On the toolbar, click the Animation Path tool. The pointer changes to reflect drawing mode.

2

Click on the design window to define the start point of the Animation Path. A rubber-band curve is displayed and follows the pointer.

Punch! Animator makes it easy to set the exact order of multiple Animation Paths. Adding descriptive names to each path will make it easier to set their order in the final video.

3

Click and move the mouse to the next point. Repeat until you have drawn the needed shape.

To name an Animation Path

Right-click to end drawing mode.

1

On the design window, click a KeyPoint or Animation Segment to select it.

2

On the Segment Tab, click the Name icon on the “Name” section. The Name Animation Path dialog box will be displayed.

Type the name in the dialog box, then click OK.

4

Note: Although the lines will initially appear to be angular, they will become curved as you continue drawing.

Naming and Ordering Animation Paths

Adding and Deleting KeyPoints You can add or delete KeyPoints at any time on any Animation Path you have drawn. To add KeyPoint(s) to an Animation Path 1

On the toolbar, click the Add KeyPoint tool. The pointer changes to reflect drawing mode.

3

2

Click on an Animation Path where you want to add a KeyPoint.

Note: Path names are restricted to 22 characters, including spaces. To set the order of Animation Paths

3

1

On the toolbar, click the Order Paths tool. The Animation Path Order dialog box is displayed.

2

Click a path name on the Active (export to AVI) section to select it.

Continue adding KeyPoints until you are finished, then right-click to end.

To remove KeyPoint(s) from an Animation Path 1

On the toolbar, click the Remove KeyPoint tool. The pointer changes to reflect drawing mode.

2

Click on an Animation Path where you want to remove a KeyPoint.

330

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

Previewing 3

Click the Order arrows to change the order of the Animation Paths.

4

(optional) Click the arrows between the Active and Inactive menus to suppress export of specified Animation Paths.

5

When you are finished ordering Animation Paths, click OK.

Previewing At any point you can view your video. You can view it in its entirety or you can view individual Animation Segments. To preview Animation Segments 1

On the design window, click an Animation Segment to select it.

2

(optional) Hold down the shift key and click several Animation Segments.

3

On the toolbar, click the Preview Selected Segments tool. A LiveView window will open and the selected Animation Segments will be played.

2

(optional) On the File menu, click Export Animation Video or press Ctrl+S. The Save Animation Video dialog box is displayed.

3

In the File Name text box, type a name. Punch! AS4000 automatically adds the AVI extension.

4

(optional) If you want to save the video to a different drive or folder, click a different drive and folder or type the complete path in the File Name text box.

5

Click Save.

Note: To play back the video after exporting, make sure the Play Video After Export option is checked on the Video Tab.

To preview the entire animation ■

On the toolbar, click the Preview Animation tool. A LiveView window will open and the Animation will be played.

To set the preview speed ■

On the Video Tab, click the left or right scroll arrows on the “Preview Speed” section. To increase the speed in larger increments, click the control shaft, between the scroll box and a scroll arrow.

Exporting an AVI File Punch! Animator exports AVI files to make it easier to show your architect, friends, colleagues and so on, the ins and outs of your newly designed home plan. To export an AVI file 1

On the Toolbar, click the Export Animation Video button. The Save Animation Video dialog box is displayed.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

331

Chapter

332

46 KeyPoints and Animation Paths

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

Chapter 47

Segment Tab Many of the controls that allow you to customize your video are contained on the Segment Tab. Using these tools in Punch! Animator gives you total control over how and what your video displays at any KeyPoint along the Animation Path. Controls on the Segment Tab can be used to change a single KeyPoint. They impact only that KeyPoint or Animation Segment that is selected. Controls on the Video Tab have a global effect on the entire video.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

333

Chapter

47 Segment Tab

Defining Segment Times

To snap KeyPoints to a point on the plan

Each Animation Segment is treated separately by Punch! Animator. You have the ability to control how long each segment takes to complete. Segments can be defined to last from one to sixty seconds, or anywhere in between.

1

On the design window, click a KeyPoint or Animation Segment to select it.

2

On the Segment Tab, click the Snap to Mouse icon on the “Viewing Angles” section.

3

On the design window, click to set the direction you want the KeyPoint to face.

4

Right-click to end Snap to Mouse mode.

To define a segment time 1

2

On the design window, click an Animation Segment. The KeyPoints on both ends should be highlighted (red) to indicate the segment is selected. On the Segment Tab, click the scroll arrow on the “Sec” section. To increase the time in larger increments, click the control shaft, between the scroll box and a scroll arrow.

Defining Path Transitions When you define more than one Animation Path, you will want to make the transition easy on the eye for the person watching your video file. With Punch! Animator you can define exactly how these transitions happen.

Tip: To easily select all points along an Animation Path, on the design window, right-click, then click Select All from the pop-up menu that is displayed.

To fade in at the begining of a path 1

On the design window, click an Animation Path to select it.

Note: Changing the seconds per segment will not be noticeable during segment preview, but will impact the exported video.

2

On the Segment Tab, check the box next to Fade In on the “Path Transitions” section.

Defining Viewing Angles

To fade out at the end of a path

Punch! Animator’s useful Viewing Angle controls make it easy to set exactly the KeyPoint view that you want.

1

On the design window, click an Animation Path to select it.

2

On the Segment Tab, check the box next to Fade Out on the “Path Transitions” section.

To define viewing pitch 1

On the design window, click a KeyPoint to select it.

2

On the Segment Tab, click the left arrow on the Vertical Pitch slider to look down.

3

Click the right arrow on the Vertical Pitch slider to look up.

To snap KeyPoints to the path 1

To fade on segments 3

On the Segment Tab, check the box next to On Segments on the “Path Transitions” section.

To define a custom transition color 1

On the Segment Tab, click the Color box on the “Path Transitions” section. The Color dialog box is displayed.

On the design window, click a KeyPoint or Animation Segment to select it.

Note: To easily select all points along an Animation Path, on the design window, right-click, then click Select All from the pop-up menu that is displayed. 2

On the Segment Tab, click the Snap to Path icon on the “Viewing Angles” section. The KeyPoint will automatically snap to the direction the Animation Path was drawn.

334

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

Customizing Point Tension 2

Click one of the Basic or Custom colors or click on the color spectrum block to select a color.

3

(optional) Adjust the current Red, Green and Blue values to create a custom color.

4

(optional) Click an area on the color spectrum window to select a color, then adjust the RGB values, if necessary.

5

Click OK. Default Point Tension is “8”.

Customizing Point Tension As you draw each Animation Path, you can adjust the tension of each point. This function lets you define the exact path your video will show. To define point tension 1

On the design window, click an Animation Path to select it.

2

On the Segment Tab, click a number, or none, on the “Point Tension” section. A low number will result in a more angular path, while a higher number will create a sweeping curved path.

Point Tension set at “10”.

Examples:

Point Tension for only 2 KeyPoints set at “1”.

Customizing KeyPoint Views

Point Tension set at “1”.

There will be times when you will want to alter what is visible and what is hidden around KeyPoint intersections. Punch! Animator lets you have total control. These controls operate simply; if there is a red “X” through the icon, that feature is hidden; if there is not an “X”, that feature is visible.

View all.

Point Tension set at “4”. Hide all.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

335

Chapter

47 Segment Tab

To hide/view KeyPoints

To name an Animation Path

1

On the design window, click a KeyPoint or Animation Path to select it.

1

On the design window, click a KeyPoint or Animation Segment to select it.

2

On the Segment Tab, click the Show/Hide KeyPoints icon on the “View” section.

2

On the Segment Tab, click the Name icon on the “Name” section. The Name Animation Path dialog box will be displayed.

Type the name in the dialog box, then click OK.

To hide/view Point Elevations 1

On the design window, click a KeyPoint or Animation Path to select it.

3

2

On the Segment Tab, click the Show/Hide Point Elevations icon on the “View” section.

Note: Path names are restricted to 22 characters, including spaces. To set the order of Animation Paths 1

On the toolbar, click the Order Paths tool. The Animation Path Order dialog box is displayed.

2

Click a path name on the Active (export to AVI) section to select it.

To hide/view Segment Times 1

On the design window, click a KeyPoint or Animation Path to select it.

2

On the Segment Tab, click the Show/Hide Segment Times icon on the “View” section.

To hide/view Path Name 1

On the design window, click a KeyPoint or Animation Path to select it.

3

2

On the Segment Tab, click the Show/Hide Path Name icon on the “View” section.

Click the Order arrows to change the order of the Animation Paths.

4

(optional) Click the arrows between the Active and Inactive menus to suppress export of specified Animation Paths.

5

When you are finished ordering Animation Paths, click OK.

Note: The Path Name is only displayed on the first KeyPoint.

Naming and Ordering Animation Paths Punch! Animator makes it easy to set the exact order of multiple Animation Paths. Adding descriptive names to each path will make it easier to set their order in the final video.

336

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

Chapter 48

Video Tab Many of the controls that allow you to customize the way your video is presented are contained on the Video Tab. Using these tools in Punch! Animator, you take total control over how your video file exports and plays back. Each control on the Video Tab will have a global effect for the entire video. They will directly impact the file size when the video is exported or the time it takes to export. Punch! Animator keeps track of many details of your video on the Video Properties section. You can choose which codec, installed on your computer, to use when exporting your AVI file.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

337

Chapter

48 Video Tab

Setting the Display Size You can select the size of the media player window. Display size affects file size of the exported AVI file; the larger the display, the larger the file.

will anti-alias (final quality) each frame before exporting it, which can take considerably more time. To set the export quality ■

To set the display size ■

On the Video Tab, click the radio button next to the size of the display you want.

Note: If you have dragged a corner of the LiveView window to a size you like, you can set that size by clicking the radio button next to “Current Size”. To set a custom display size 1

On the Video Tab, click the Custom button. The Custom Video Pixel Size dialog box is displayed.

On the Video Tab, click the radio button next to the export quality you want.

Note: These options do not affect file size, but greatly impact the time it takes to export the AVI file. Some codecs export the video faster and with better quality, but the file size is much larger. In addition, some shareware and freeware codecs are of lower quality and if one of them is being used, it may not matter what export quality is selected.

Setting the Blank Frames You can specify the number of blank frames at the beginning, end, or both, of your video. To specify blank frames ■

2

Enter, in pixels, the Width and Height you want to set.

3

Click OK.

Setting the Frames per Second Frames per second, also refered to as frame rate, is the frequency in which video frames are displayed on a monitor. High frame rates improve the appearance of video motion. For example, the frame rate for professional motion pictures is 24 fps, television is 30 fps, while your PC processor may only be capable of playing 10-15 frames per second. To set the frames per second ■

On the Video Tab, click the up or down scroll arrows on the “fps” section. To increase the depth in larger increments, click the control shaft, between the scroll box and a scroll arrow.

Setting the Export Quality

On the Video Tab, check Beginning or End on the “Blank Frames” section. If a checkmark is next to the word, the specified number of blank frames will be placed appropriately.

To set the number of blank frames ■

On the Video Tab, click the up or down scroll arrows on the “Blank Frames” section.

Note: If you want one second of black before fading into your video, you would set the blank frames the same as your “fps” setting.

Assigning a Codec Every codec residing on your computer is available for use with Punch! Animator, although some might not be compatible. While some codecs on your computer export to MPG or other video formats, Punch! Animator only exports to AVI format. To choose a codec 1

On the Video Tab, click the Compression button on the “Video Properties” section. The Video Compression dialog box is displayed.

The export quality controls the final quality render of each scene before exporting to the AVI file. If this is set at standard quality, the export will not be anti-aliased and the export will be faster. Any of the other export quality settings

338

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

Assigning a Temporary Directory

2

Scroll though the list of installed codecs and choose the one you want to use. Click OK.

3

(optional) Click Default and the codec will be reset to the Cinepak codec.

To configure the selected codec 1

On the Video Tab, click the Compression button on the “Video Properties” section. The Video Compression dialog box is displayed.

2

Click the folder where you want your working files to be saved. Click OK.

Setting the Preview Speed With Punch! Animator you can set the exact preview speed you want; this will make previewing your video much easier. You can also preview with or without shadows. To set the preview speed

2

■

Click Configure. The configuration dialog for that specific codec is displayed.

On the Video Tab, click the left or right scroll arrows on the “Preview Speed” section. To increase the speed in larger increments, click the control shaft, between the scroll box and a scroll arrow.

To preview with shadows ■

On the Video Tab, check the box next to Shadows In Preview on the “Preview Speed” section.

Note: This is just one example of a configuration dialog; each codec will have a unique set of controls.

Assigning a Temporary Directory You can specify a directory where all your video files can be saved. To set the temporary directory 1

On the Video Tab, click Temp Directory. The Browse for Folder dialog box is displayed.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

339

Chapter

340

48 Video Tab

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

Part 10

3D Custom Workshop Chapter 49: Chapter 50: Chapter 51: Chapter 52: Chapter 53: Chapter 54: Chapter 55: Chapter 56: Chapter 57:

Window Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . File Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drawing Grids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drawing in 3D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drawing in 2D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Converting 2D Objects to 3D . . . . . . . . . Editing 3D Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Controlling Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Applying Color and Material . . . . . . . . .

343 347 351 357 367 375 379 389 395

Chapter 49

Window Layout The Punch! 3D Custom Workshop window provides an assortment of features that make it easy to create custom objects. This chapter describes the basic components. In most cases, this chapter does not provide detailed information on standard Windows concepts or on specific menu items. For information on standard Windows concepts, such as the mouse, the control menu, the window border, the maximize button, dialog box controls and so on, refer to Windows online Help.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

343

Chapter

49 Window Layout

Title Bar

Color and Material Toolbar

The title bar extends across the top of the application window. It displays the name of the program and the name of the current drawing file. With the buttons at the right end of the title bar you can minimize, maximize, close or restore the window. You can also maximize or restore a window by double-clicking on the title bar. Double-clicking the Control menu box at the left end of the title bar is a quick way to exit. If the application is running in a window rather than maximized, dragging the title bar moves the entire window on the desktop.

From the Color and Material Toolbar you can easily choose between all the colors and materials available. You can even control how the colors and materials are applied.

Standard Toolbar The Standard Toolbar contains the six most commonly-used tools; namely the Selection, Rotate, Skew, Extrude, Pan and Zoom tools.

Menu Bar You can choose menu items using either the mouse or the keyboard. To use the mouse, click the menu name. When the menu drops down, click the item you want. Menu items with an arrow to the right display cascading menus when you place the pointer over one of them. When you highlight a menu item, a description is displayed on the status bar. To use the keyboard, press the ALT key and type the underlined letter in the menu name, then type the underlined letter in the menu item’s name. If there is a cascading menu, you must type another letter. You can also use the arrow keys to move through menu items and press ENTER to select one. The ESC key backs out of the menu items one level at a time. There are single-key or key combination shortcuts for certain frequently-used menu items. Each menu lists available shortcut keys to the right of the item’s name. You can use the techniques for choosing menu items in combination.

Viewpoint Toolbar The Viewpoint Toolbar contains the Fly-Around Tool and two tools to set the viewpoint. The Set Rotation Origin tool allows you set the exact point you want the viewpoint to rotate around. Whereas the Center Origin On Object tool allows you an easy way to center on a specific object, for instance the chair at the head of the dining room table.

Grid Toolbar

Toolbars

The Grid Toolbar contains four tools that control the grid functions. These tools make it easy to turn the snap grid on and off, to switch between show and hide grid and to keep objects from disappearing behind an active grid. There is even a button to access the Grid Properties menu.

Clicking a button on a toolbar has the same effect as choosing the menu item or feature it represents.

Position Readout Bar

To find out what a certain tool represents, hold the pointer over the tool and read the description on the status bar at the bottom of the window.

The position readout bar displays the exact measurements of your object as you draw. The scale of your drawing is also displayed here.

Design Toolbar The Design Toolbar contains all the drawing tools, plus the 2D/3D toggle. In addition, there are tools that control which drawing grid is active and how the entire design is displayed.

344

Status Bar The status bar displays prompts and other program messages and is a good place to look when you are holding the pointer over a button or menu item to find its function.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

Control Toolbar

Control Toolbar

Scroll Bars

The Control Toolbar contains sets of frequently used tools; group and ungroup, lock and unlock, flip, mirror, hide detection, and duplicate are all easily accessible at all times.

Using the scroll bars, you can pan across the drawing, that is, to change the part of the drawing visible in the window, without changing the level of magnification.

Preview Bar

■ ■

You can click and drag objects from the Preview Bar onto your design window. The Preview Bar changes to reflect the current design mode. For instance, if the color tool is selected, palettes of colors will appear and if you are using the material tool, collections of materials are available. The Preview Bar is the easiest and quickest way to customize your drawing.

■ ■

To pan the drawing in small increments, click the scroll arrow that points in the direction you want to pan. To pan in larger increments, click the control shaft, between the scroll box and a scroll arrow. To pan by a custom increment, drag the scroll box in the direction you want to pan. To position at a specific area of the page, right-click the scroll bar and click the wanted area on the pop-up menu that is displayed.

Elevation Slider With the Elevation Slider, you can easily move selected items vertically off “ground level” without activating the Floor Grid. This feature makes it a snap to make sure features are in exactly the position you want. Simply select the object or feature to be raised and move the slider by clicking and dragging with the mouse. The Elevation Slider works in the unit of measure that is specified in the home design program.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

345

Chapter

346

49 Window Layout

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

Chapter 50

File Management When you start 3D Custom Workshop, a new blank drawing grid is displayed with the floor grid active. The foreground and background colors will be those that were assigned in the home design program, as will the unit of measurement (inches or metric). If you start 3D Custom Workshop by double clicking an object in your home design program, that object is displayed on the design window. If you are returning to work on an existing drawing, you must open, or display it, on the screen. Opening a file involves clicking Open on the File menu and specifying the name of the file you want to open. When you open a file, 3D Custom Workshop displays it in a new window. The changes you make to an object occur only in your computer’s memory, until you save them. To preserve a drawing for later use, you must save it to a file. If you want to save a drawing, using its current name or if you want to save a new, untitled drawing, use Save. If you want to save a drawing with a new name, use Save As.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

347

Chapter

50 File Management

Opening a New File Opening a new file creates a new blank drawing grid with the floor grid active. The foreground and background colors will be those that were assigned in the home design program. To open a new file ■

On the File menu, click New or press CTRL+N. An empty drawing grid is displayed.

Note: If you were working on an object, you will be prompted to save your work.

Opening an Existing Object Opening a file copies the data it contains into memory, making it available for you to edit or print.

Saving a File When you open a file, 3D Custom Workshop copies the file to your computer’s memory. As you work, you modify the copy stored in memory. Any system failure or loss of power destroys that copy. To save your work permanently, you must save it to a file on a disk. A good rule of thumb is to save every 15 minutes or after you’ve completed any work you wouldn’t want to redo. When you click the Save command, 3D Custom Workshop saves the active drawing, using the name and location you last gave it. You can create more than one version of a drawing or save copies on another disk for safekeeping. You can save each version under a different name or you can save them under the same name in different folders or on different disks. To save an existing file

To open an existing file 1

On the File menu, click Open. The Open dialog box is displayed.

2

In the File Name box, type the name of the file you want to open or search for the file by switching folders or drives.

3

When you see the name of the file you want to open, click to select it.

4

Click Open.

■

On the File menu, click Save or press CTRL+S.

To save a new, unnamed file 1

On the File menu, click Save As. The Save As dialog box is displayed.

2

In the File Name text box, type a name. 3D Custom Workshop automatically adds the POB extension.

3

Click Save.

To save an object to an object library To open objects using drag-and-drop 1

On the Design Toolbar, click the Object Tool. The Preview Bar displays furnishing objects.

2

(optional) Click the arrow next to “Objects” at the top of the Preview Bar to display the object library list, then click another object library.

3

Scroll to view the available objects.

4

Click the object you want to place; hold down the mouse button and drag the object onto your design window.

5

(optional) Click the object you just placed to select it; then click and drag it to another location on your design window.

348

1

On the File menu, click Save to Object Library. The Save to Object Library dialog box is displayed.

2

Click the Object Category button, then click the category where you want the object filed.

3

Type the Object Name in that dialog box. This will appear in the status bar when the mouse is held over the object on the Preview Bar.

4

(optional) Type a description of the object in the Object Description dialog box.

5

Click Save. The Save As dialog box is displayed.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

Closing a File 6

In the File Name text box, type a name. 3D Custom Workshop automatically adds the POB extension.

7

Click Save.

Note: This process also creates the preview file that is displayed in the Preview Bar, under the Object Category selected in Step 2. You can change the appearance of the preview by changing the position of the object on the design window. The object will always appear on a light blue background.

Closing a File When you finish working with a file, close it to remove the window from the screen and to free up your computer’s memory.

3

Note: The background of the file will be white, regardless of what color is specified in 3D Custom Workshop. To export to 2D DXF 1

On the File menu, click Export>DXF (2D). The Export DXF dialog box is displayed.

2

In the File Name text box, type a name. 3D Custom Workshop automatically adds the DXF extension.

3

Locate the directory where you want the file exported, then click Save.

To close a file ■

On the File menu, click Close. If you have unsaved changes in your plan drawing, 3D Custom Workshop prompts you to save them before it closes the file.

Importing 3DS Files With 3D Custom Workshop, you can import 3DS files. After importing you can alter them to suit your design. To import a 3DS file

In the File Name text box, type a name. 3D Custom Workshop automatically adds the extension, then click OK.

To export to 3D DXF 1

On the File menu, click Export>DXF (3D). The Export DXF dialog box is displayed.

2

1

On the File menu, click Import 3DS. The Open dialog box is displayed.

In the File Name text box, type a name. 3D Custom Workshop automatically adds the DXF extension.

3

2

In the File Name box, type the name of the file you want to import or search for the file by switching folders or drives.

Locate the directory where you want the file exported, then click Save.

To export to 7.0 3D Custom Workshop format

3

When you see the name of the file you want to import, click to select it.

1

On the File menu, click Export>7.0 Custom Workshop Object. The dialog box is displayed.

4

Click OK.

2

In the File Name text box, type a name. 3D Custom Workshop automatically adds the extension.

Exporting Files

3

With 3D Custom Workshop, you can export your design. Files can be exported to a variety of formats in Textured, Wire Frame and ClearView modes.

Locate the directory where you want the file exported, then click Save.

Printing Objects

To export a 3D rendering 1

Click the Rendering Style button or on the View menu, click 3D Rendering Style, then click the rendering style you want.

2

On the File menu, click Export, then click to select the format you want. The Export Image dialog box is displayed.

3D Custom Workshop prints using the current Windows printer. You can, however, print using any installed printer. Using the Print dialog box you can specify a printer or plotter from those currently installed. Your object can be printed in Textured, Wire Frame, or ClearView modes. In rendered mode, you have the choice of four qualities.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

349

Chapter

50 File Management

To print in wire frame mode ■

Click the Rendering Style button or on the View menu, click 3D Rendering Style, Wire Frame.

1

On the File menu, click Print, then click Print Wire Frame or press Ctrl+P.

To print in rendered mode 1

On the File menu, click Print, then click the Quality you want to use.

2

On the Print dialog box, click the down arrow next to the printer name.

3

Click the printer you want to use.

2

On the Print dialog box, click the down arrow next to the printer name.

4

Click the Properties button. The Properties menu is displayed.

3

Click the printer you want to use.

5

Select the paper orientation.

6

Select the paper size. Typically, this will be either 8.5x11 in (letter) or 8.5x14 in (legal).

7

Click the down arrow next to media type. Then select the required media.

8

Click either Auto Feeder or Manual Feed as your paper feed method, then click Print.

4

(optional) Click the Properties button. The Properties menu is displayed.

5

(opional)

Note: This Properties menu is from a popular color printer. Refer to your printer’s documentation on the use of its specific features. 6

Select the paper orientation.

7

Select the paper size. Typically, this will be either 8.5x11 in (letter) or 8.5x14 in (legal).

8

Click the down arrow next to media type. Then select the required media.

9

Click either Auto Feeder or Manual Feed as your paper feed method, then click Print.

350

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

Chapter 51

Drawing Grids By using the Drawing Grids in 3D Custom Workshop you can work on any object from three distinct 3D angles. Each grid controls two axes. You can also draw or edit in 2D from any of six directions, which will make editing and detailed alignment simple. The 3D drawing grids are the Front, Floor and Side grids. The X (Width) and Y (Height) dimensions are the dominant axes when drawing on the Front Grid. While the Floor Grid controls the X (Width) and Z (Depth) dimensions, the Side Grid controls the Z (Depth) and Y (Height) dimensions. Using these grids in concert will give you the ability to design anything you want.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

351

Chapter

51 Drawing Grids

Drawing on the Front Grid Using the Front Grid, you can concentrate on the X (Width) and Y (Height) dimensions. You can extrude objects along the Z (Depth) axis. You will be able to tell by the tighter grid pattern which drawing grid is active. To draw on the front grid 1

On the Design menu, click Draw on Front Grid (X-Y Axis) or click the Front Grid tool on the toolbar.

2

On the View menu, click to check 3D Design tools.

3

On the Design toolbar, click the Rectangle Tool. The pointer changes to reflect rectangle drawing mode.

4

Press the mouse button on the design window to define the start point of the rectangle. A rubber-band rectangle is displayed and follows the pointer.

5

Hold the mouse button down, while you extend the rectangle front to back and left to right (along the X and Y axes), until it reaches the size you want. Notice that dimensions appear in the status bar, as you draw.

6

Release the mouse button.

7

Move the cursor to extrude the rectangle along the Z Axis to the depth you want.

8

Click to finish drawing and place the rectangle.

Note: If your drawing “snaps” to the bottom of the drawing grid or another specific height, your Elevation Slider is open and set to 0”. For more information, see “Elevation Slider”, which begins on page 355.

Drawing on the Floor Grid From the Floor Grid you concentrate on the X (Width) and Z (Depth) dimensions. You will be able to extrude objects along the Y (Height) axis.

352

To draw on the floor grid 1

On the Design menu, click Draw on Floor Grid (X-Z Axis) or click the Floor Grid tool on the toolbar.

2

On the Design toolbar, click the Rectangle Tool. The pointer changes to reflect rectangle drawing mode.

3

Press the mouse button on the design window to define the start point of the rectangle. A rubber-band rectangle is displayed and follows the pointer.

4

Hold the mouse button down, while you extend the rectangle front to back and left to right (along the X and Z axes), until it reaches the size you want. Notice that dimensions appear in the status bar, as you draw.

5

Release the mouse button.

6

Move the cursor to extrude the rectangle along the Y Axis to the height you want.

7

Click to finish drawing and place the rectangle.

Drawing on the Side Grid The Side Grid activates the Z (Depth) and Y (Height) dimensions. You will be able to extrude objects along the X (Width) axis. To draw on the side grid 1

On the Design menu, select Draw on Side Grid (Z-Y Axis) or select the Side Grid icon from the toolbar.

2

On the Design toolbar, click the Rectangle Tool. The pointer changes to reflect rectangle drawing mode.

3

Press the mouse button on the design window to define the start point of the rectangle. A rubber-band rectangle is displayed and follows the pointer.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

Changing Grid Settings

To change snap grid spacing

4

Hold the mouse button down, while you extend the rectangle front to back and left to right (along the Z and Y axes), until it reaches the size you want. Notice that dimensions appear in the status bar, as you draw.

5

Release the mouse button.

6

Move the cursor, to extrude the rectangle along the X Axis to the height you want.

7

Click to finish drawing and place the rectangle.

Note: If your drawing “snaps” to the bottom of the drawing grid or another specific height, your Elevation Slider is open and set to 0”. For more information, see “Elevation Slider”, which begins on page 355.

Changing Grid Settings

1

On the Design menu, click Grid Spacing. The Grid Spacing dialog box is displayed.

2

(optional) On the Grid Toolbar, click the Grid Spacing Tool. The Grid Spacing dialog box is diaplayed.

3

Type Horizontal and Vertical measurements for the Snap Grid, then click OK.

To turn off the snap grid ■

By default, the Grid is visible and set at twelve inches. This way you can visualize that each large square on the floorplan is one (1) square foot. By defining a customized Grid, you can design to fit your specific needs. In addition, by turning the Snap Grid on and off, you will be able to make detailed placement of the components simple. To keep things from slipping behind the active grid, use the Grid Constrain feature. To change grid spacing

To hide the grid from view ■

On the Design menu, click Grid Spacing. The Grid Spacing dialog box is displayed.

2

(optional) On the Grid Toolbar, click the Grid Spacing Tool. The Grid Spacing dialog box is diaplayed.

3

Type Horizontal and Vertical measurements, then click OK.

On the Grid Toolbar, click the Grid On/Off Toggle or on the Design menu, click to uncheck Grid Visible. If Grid Visible is checked it is displayed. If unchecked, the grid is hidden from view.

To toggle the grid constrain ■

1

On the Grid Toolbar, click the Snap Grid On/Off Toggle or on the Design menu, click to uncheck Snap to Grid.

On the Grid Toolbar, click the Grid Constrain Toggle.

To change the grid size 1

On the Design menu, click on Grid Size. The Grid Size dialog box is displayed.

2

Type Width and Depth measurements, then click OK.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

353

Chapter

51 Drawing Grids

Setting a Nudge Distance With Nudge, you can move objects in a specific direction and in definable increments. The up, down, left and right selections are also available by using the arrow keys on your keyboard. Through the distance dialog box, distances as small as one inch may be defined. To change the nudge distance 1

2

On the Edit menu, click Nudge, Distance. The Nudge Distance dialog box is displayed.

5

On the View menu, click 2D View, click Top or rightclick anywhere on the design window, then click 2D Top View on the pop-up menu that is displayed.

6

Click the object to select it.

7

Click-and-drag a corner of the object to reshape it. The dimensions will appear in the status bar, as you reshape the object.

8

Release the mouse button.

9

Right-click, then click Reset View on the pop-up menu that is displayed to view the resized object.

Type a new distance, then click OK.

To move an object by nudging 1

Click the object you want to move.

2

On the Design menu, click a drawing grid.

3

On the Edit menu, click Nudge, then click the direction (up, down, left, or right) or use the arrow keys on your keyboard.

Using 2D Views 2D Views work in harmony with the 3D Views. The 2D Top and Bottom Views are used in tandem with the 3D Floor Grid; the Front and Back Views are used with the 3D Front Grid; the Left and Right Views work with the Side Grid. The 2D Views make complex alignment straightforward and simple. It is easy to toggle back and forth, using the pop-up menu. All 2D views work in the same manner. To edit using 2D view 1

On the Design toolbar, click the Object Tool.

2

At the top of the Preview Bar, click the down arrow next to “Objects” to display the object libraries, then click to check Exterior Accessories category. Exterior Accessories objects are displayed on the Preview Bar.

3

Click to select an object on the Preview Bar. As you pass the mouse over objects, their names appear on the status bar.

4

Click-and-drag the object into the design window.

354

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

Elevation Slider To specify an exact elevation 1

Right-click the Elevation Slider and click Set Elevation from the pop-up menu that is displayed.

2

Type the necessary elevation in inches, or feet and inches, separated with a hyphen. Click OK.

To set the working elevation 10 On the File menu, click Exit & Return to Punch! Home Design.

1

Right-click the Elevation Slider at the left side of your window and click Set Elevation from the pop-up menu that is displayed.

2

Type the necessary elevation in inches, or feet and inches, separated with a hyphen. Click OK.

11 Click Yes to place the object in the center of your design. 12 Drag the modified object into position.

Elevation Slider With the Elevation Slider, objects can easily be moved vertically, regardless of which grid is active at the time. The Elevation Slider will display in the unit of measure specified in the home design program; for example, measurements will be displayed in metric automatically, if you are designing in your home design program, using metric measurements.

To set the elevation of a group of objects 1

On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.

2

Press SHIFT and click each object you want to elevate.

3

Right-click the Elevation Slider at the left side of your window and click Set Elevation from the pop-up menu that is displayed.

4

Type the elevation in inches, or feet and inches separated with a hyphen. Click OK.

Accessing the elevation slider ■ ■

Click the Show/Hide Elevation Slider Tool. The Elevation Slider is displayed. Click the Show/Hide Elevation Slider Tool again to hide the Elevation Slider.

Note: To specify an exact elevation where you want your object drawn, be sure the Elevation Slider is open and set to that height. All subsequent shapes will be set to that elevation. To use the elevation slider 1

On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.

2

Click the object or feature you want to elevate.

3

Click the Elevation Slider at the left side of your window and move the elevation control up or down until the object is in the correct position.

4

Release the mouse. The elevation of the object is changed.

Note: All selected objects will be reset to the elevation specified, even if the objects were originally located at various elevations.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

355

Chapter

356

51 Drawing Grids

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

Chapter 52

Drawing in 3D 3D Custom Workshop is an extremely powerful CAD (computer-aided design) program. Whether you want to draw angular objects like cabinets, desks and so on, or curved objects like lamps, mirrors and so on, there is a tool to match each task. In this chapter, each drawing tool’s function will be explained. You will also learn the Draw from Center, Draw from Corner, Object Editing and Point Editing techniques, which will make drawing any object you want easier.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

357

Chapter

52 Drawing in 3D

Drawing a 3D Rectangle In rectangle drawing mode, you can draw cubes and boxes. You will find this tool useful when drawing tables, cabinets, counters and so on. 2

To draw a rectangle 1

On the Design toolbar, click the Tool Toggle to access the 3D Design Toolbar. If the 3D Design Toolbar is already active, please skip to step 2.

Note: Other ways to access the 3D design toolbar are on the View menu, click 3D Design Tools or press CTRL+3. 2

On the Design menu, click a drawing grid. If the appropriate drawing grid was previously selected, please skip to step 3.

8

Click to end.

Drawing a 3D Oval

3

Click the Rectangle Tool. The pointer changes to reflect drawing mode.

In ellipse drawing mode, you can draw circles and ovals. You will find this tool useful when drawing lamps, couches, planters, rugs and so on.

4

Press the mouse button on the design window to define the start point of the rectangle. A rubber-band rectangle is displayed and follows the pointer.

To draw an oval 1

On the Design toolbar, click the Tool Toggle to access the 3D Design Toolbar. If the 3D Design Toolbar is already active, please skip to step 2.

Note: Other ways to access the 3D design toolbar are on the View menu, click 3D Design Tools or press CTRL+3.

12

Drag

5

Hold the mouse button down as you extend the rectangle to the size you want. Dimensions will appear in the position readout bar, as you draw.

6

Release the mouse button.

7

Move the mouse in the direction you want to extrude the rectangle.

2

On the Design menu, click a drawing grid. If the appropriate drawing grid was previously selected, please skip to step 3.

3

Click the Oval Tool. The pointer changes to reflect drawing mode.

4

Press the mouse button on the design window to define the start point of the oval. A rubber-band oval is displayed and follows the pointer.

12

Drag

358

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

Drawing a 3D Multigon 5

Hold the mouse button down as you extend the oval to the size you want. Dimensions will appear in the position readout bar, as you draw.

6

Release the mouse button.

7

Move the mouse in the direction you want to extrude the oval. During the extruding process, only the perimeter will be visible. The 3D oval is displayed once drawing mode has ended.

5

Type the number of equal-length sides you want, then click OK.

6

Click on the design window to define the start point (center) of the multigon. A rubber-band multigon is displayed and follows the pointer.

Note: Although you can define any number of sides, the more sides you specify, the more the multigon will begin to look like a circle.

2

8

Click to end.

9

(optional) Press and hold SHIFT, while drawing, to draw a perfect circle from its centerpoint.

12 Drag

Drawing a 3D Multigon In multigon drawing mode, you will be able to draw objects with a specified number of equal-length sides. You will find this tool useful when drawing mirrors, tabletops, hot tubs and so on.

7

Hold the mouse button down while you draw the multigon to the size you want. The radius measurement will appear in the position readout bar, as you draw.

To draw a multigon

8

Release the mouse button.

1

9

Move the mouse in the direction you want to extrude the multigon.

On the Design toolbar, click the Tool Toggle to access the 3D Design Toolbar. If the 3D Design Toolbar is already active, please skip to step 2.

Note: Other ways to access the 3D design toolbar are on the View menu, click 3D Design Tools or press CTRL+3 or right-click anywhere on the design window, then click 3D Design Tools from the pop-up menu that is displayed. 2

On the Design menu, click a drawing grid. If the appropriate drawing grid was previously selected, please skip to step 3.

3

Click the Multigon Tool. The pointer changes to reflect drawing mode.

4

On the Options menu, click Custom Options. The Custom Options dialog box is displayed.

2

10 Click to end.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

359

Chapter

52 Drawing in 3D

Drawing a 3D Polygon In polygon drawing mode, you can draw an object with any number of sides at any angle or length. You will find this tool useful when drawing corner cabinets, futons and so on.

52

To draw a polygon 1

On the Design toolbar, click the Tool Toggle to access the 3D Design Toolbar. If the 3D Design Toolbar is already active, please skip to step 2.

Note: Other ways to access the 3D design toolbar are on the View menu, click 3D Design Tools or press CTRL+3. 2

On the Design menu, click a drawing grid. If the appropriate drawing grid was previously selected, please skip to step 3.

3

Click the Polygon Tool. The pointer changes to reflect drawing mode.

4

Click on the design window to define the start point of the polygon. A rubber-band line is displayed and follows the pointer. This line signifies the first side of the polygon.

8

Click to end.

Drawing a 3D Closed Arc In closed arc drawing mode, you will be able to draw an elliptical arc, which will automatically close along the bottom. You will find this tool useful when drawing couches, chairs, drop-leaf tables and so on. To draw a closed arc 1

On the Design toolbar, click the Tool Toggle to access the 3D Design Toolbar. If the 3D Design Toolbar is already active, please skip to step 2.

Note: Other ways to access the 3D design toolbar are on the View menu, click 3D Design Tools or press CTRL+3. 4 2

2

On the Design menu, click a drawing grid. If the appropriate drawing grid was previously selected, please skip to step 3.

3

Click the Closed Arc Tool. The pointer changes to reflect drawing mode.

4

Press the mouse button on the design window to define the start point of the closed arc. A rubber-band line is displayed and follows the pointer.

32 12

2

5

Click and move the mouse to the next cornerpoint. Repeat until you have drawn the shape.

6

Double-click to end drawing the 2D shape.

7

Move the mouse in the direction you want to extrude the object.

12 Drag

360

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

Drawing a 3D Circular Closed Arc 5

Hold the mouse button down while you extend the arc to the size you want. Dimensions appear in the position readout bar, as you draw.

6

Release the mouse button.

7

Move the mouse in the direction you want to extrude the object. 12

2

8

Click to end.

9

(optional) Press and hold SHIFT, while drawing, to constrain the arc to 90 degrees.

Drag

5

Hold the mouse button down while you extend the radius to the size you want. Dimensions appear in the position readout bar, as you draw.

6

Release the mouse button.

7

Move the mouse clockwise or counter-clockwise to create the shape you want.

Drawing a 3D Circular Closed Arc In circular closed arc drawing mode, you will be able to draw closed circular objects that have a cutout area. You will find this tool useful when drawing mouldings for cabinets and so on.

2

To draw a circular closed arc 1

On the Design toolbar, click the Tool Toggle to access the 3D Design Toolbar. If the 3D Design Toolbar is already active, please skip to step 2.

Note: Other ways to access the 3D design toolbar are on the View menu, click 3D Design Tools or press CTRL+3. 2

On the Design menu, click a drawing grid. If the appropriate drawing grid was previously selected, please skip to step 3.

3

Click the Circular Closed Arc Tool. The pointer changes to reflect drawing mode.

4

8

Click to end drawing the 2D shape.

9

Move the mouse in the direction you want to extrude the object.

3 2

Press the mouse button on the design window to define the centerpoint of the arc. A rubber-band line is displayed and follows the pointer. This line signifies the radius of your arc.

10 Click to end.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

361

Chapter

52 Drawing in 3D

Drawing a 3D Open Arc In open arc drawing mode, you will be able to draw an elliptical arc which will remain open along the bottom. You will find this tool useful when drawing outdoor bridges, slides and so on. To draw an open arc 1

On the Design toolbar, click the Tool Toggle to access the 3D Design Toolbar. If the 3D Design Toolbar is already active, please skip to step 2.

2

Note: Other ways to access the 3D design toolbar are on the View menu, click 3D Design Tools or press CTRL+3.

8

Click to end.

2

On the Design menu, click a drawing grid. If the appropriate drawing grid was previously selected, please skip to step 3.

9

(optional) Press and hold SHIFT, while drawing, to constrain the arc to 90 degrees.

3

Click the Open Arc Tool. The pointer changes to reflect drawing mode.

4

Press the mouse button on the design window to define the start point of the closed arc. A rubber-band line is displayed and follows the pointer.

Drawing a 3D Circular Arc In circular arc drawing mode, you can draw an arc of any radius. You will find this tool useful when drawing decorative edges, barrel planters and so on. To draw a circular arc 1

On the Design toolbar, click the Tool Toggle to access the 3D Design Toolbar. If the 3D Design Toolbar is already active, please skip to step 2.

Note: Other ways to access the 3D design toolbar are on the View menu, click 3D Design Tools or press CTRL+3.

1 2

2

On the Design menu, click a drawing grid. If the appropriate drawing grid was previously selected, please skip to step 3.

3

Click the Circular Arc Tool. The pointer changes to reflect drawing mode.

4

Press the mouse button on the design window to define the centerpoint of the arc. A rubber-band line is displayed and follows the pointer. This line signifies the radius of your arc.

Drag

5

Hold the mouse button down while you extend the arc to the shape you want. Dimensions appear in the position readout bar, as you draw.

6

Release the mouse button.

7

Move the mouse in the direction you want to extrude the object.

362

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

Drawing a 3D Plane

Drawing a 3D Plane In plane drawing mode, you will be able to draw flat planes to the size you want. You will find this tool useful when adding angular details to cabinets and so on. To draw a plane

Dr ag

1

1 2

On the Design toolbar, click the Tool Toggle to access the 3D Design Toolbar. If the 3D Design Toolbar is already active, please skip to step 2.

Note: Other ways to access the 3D design toolbar are on the View menu, click 3D Design Tools or press CTRL+3. 5

Hold the mouse button down while you extend the radius to the size you want. Dimensions appear in the position readout bar, as you draw.

6

Release the mouse button.

7

Move the mouse clockwise or counter-clockwise to create the shape you want.

2

On the Design menu, click a drawing grid. If the appropriate drawing grid was previously selected, please skip to step 3.

3

Click the Plane Tool. The pointer changes to reflect drawing mode.

4

Press the mouse button on the design window to define the start point of the line. A rubber-band line is displayed and follows the pointer.

2 Dr ag

1

8

Click to end drawing the 2D shape.

9

Move the mouse in the direction you want to extrude the object.

32 10 Click to end.

2

5

Hold the mouse button down while you extend the line in the direction and to the length you want. Dimensions appear in the position readout bar, as you draw.

6

Release the mouse button.

7

Move the mouse in the direction you want to extrude the plane.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

363

Chapter

52 Drawing in 3D

32

2

2 42 1 2

8

Click to end.

5

Double-click to end.

9

(optional) Press and hold the Shift key, while drawing, to constrain the line horizontally or vertically.

6

Move the mouse in the direction you want to extrude the object.

Drawing a 3D Curve In curve drawing mode, you will be able to draw an open curved shape which changes direction. You will find this tool useful when drawing curved ceilings, outdoor grills and so on. To draw a curve 1

On the Design toolbar, click the Tool Toggle to access the 3D Design Toolbar. If the 3D Design Toolbar is already active, please skip to step 2.

Note: Other ways to access the 3D design toolbar are on the View menu, click 3D Design Tools or press CTRL+3. 2

On the Design menu, click a drawing grid. If the appropriate drawing grid was previously selected, please skip to step 3.

3

Click the Curve Tool. The pointer changes to reflect drawing mode.

4

Click and move the mouse to the next cornerpoint. Repeat until you have drawn the necessary shape. Although the lines will initially appear angular, they will become curved when you end drawing mode.

5 2

7

Click to end.

Using Object Selection Mode Object Selection Mode is active by default. Object selection, along with point selection, controls how your edits impact your object. If you are in object selection mode, changes affect the object as a whole. If you are working in point selection mode, each edge of the object is treated separately, as you edit. To use object selection mode 1

On the Options menu, click Object Selection or click on the Object Selection tool in the lower left corner of the window.

2

Click the object and drag it into the new position.

364

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

Using Point Selection Mode

Using Point Selection Mode In point selection mode, you are able to move each edge individually in your drawing. While it is easy to move an entire object in object selection mode, it is much more convenient to handle detailed edits using point selection mode. To use point selection mode 1

On the Options menu, click Point Selection or click on the Point Selection tool in the lower left corner of the window. The design window changes to reflect wire frame view.

Note: To restore colors and materials, click the Rendering Style toggle at the lower left of your window or on the View menu, click 3D Rendering Style, then click Textured.

Drawing from Corner Draw from Corner, along with Draw from Center, controls the beginning points of objects drawn with the drawing tools. Draw from Corner makes drawing cabinets, tables and most other angular objects much easier. Draw from Corner works with the rectangle, oval and line/plane tools only. To draw from corner 1

On the Options menu, click Draw From Corner or click on the Draw from Corner Tool.

Note: Draw from Corner mode is the 3D Custom Workshop’s default drawing style.

2

On the Design menu, click a drawing grid.

3

Click a section of the object and drag it into the new position to reshape it.

2

Click the Rectangle Tool. The pointer changes to reflect drawing mode.

3

Press the mouse button on the design window to define the cornerpoint of the rectangle. A rubber-band rectangle is displayed and follows the pointer.

1 2

Drag

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

365

Chapter

52 Drawing in 3D

4

Hold the mouse button down as you extend the opposite corner of the rectangle to the size you want. Dimensions will appear in the position readout bar, as you draw.

5

Release the mouse button.

6

Move the mouse in the direction you want to extrude the rectangle. 12

2

7

Drag

4

Hold the mouse button down as you extend the rectangle to the size you want. Dimensions will appear in the position readout bar, as you draw.

5

Release the mouse button.

6

Move the mouse in the direction you want to extrude the rectangle.

Click to end.

Drawing from Center Draw from Center, along with Draw from Corner, controls the beginning points of objects drawn with the drawing tools. Draw from Center makes drawing concentric objects a breeze. Draw from Center is applicable with the rectangle, oval and line/plane tools only.

2

To draw from center 1

On the Options menu, click Draw from Center or click on the Draw from Center Tool.

2

Click the Rectangle Tool. The pointer changes to reflect drawing mode.

3

Press the mouse button on the design window to define the centerpoint of the rectangle. A rubber-band rectangle is displayed and follows the pointer.

7

Click to end.

366

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

Chapter 53

Drawing in 2D You may find it easier to begin your design in 2D and add the third dimension later. You will find the 2D design tools are extremely useful for this technique. These tools are the counterpart to the 3D drawing tools and work similarly. For more information on 3D drawing tools, see the chapter titled “Drawing in 3D”, which begins on page 357. The 2D toolset can be used in 3D view or a 2D view from a specific direction. In this chapter we will explore the uses of each 2D drawing Tool. In addition, the Curve Tension technique is explained.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

367

Chapter

53 Drawing in 2D

Drawing a 2D Rectangle

Drawing a 2D Oval

In rectangle drawing mode you will be able to draw squares and rectangles. You will find this tool useful when drawing tables, cabinets, counters and so on.

In ellipse drawing mode you will be able to draw circles and ovals. You will find this tool useful when drawing lamps, couches, planters, rugs and so on.

To draw a rectangle

To draw an oval

1

On the Design toolbar, click the Tool Toggle to access the 2D Design Toolbar. If the 2D Design Toolbar is already active, please skip to step 2.

Note: Other ways to access the 2D design toolbar are on the View menu, click 2D Design Tools or press CTRL+2. 2

On the Design menu, click a drawing grid. If the appropriate drawing grid was previously selected, please skip to step 3.

3

Click the Rectangle Tool. The pointer changes to reflect drawing mode.

4

Press the mouse button on the design window to define the start point of the rectangle. A rubber-band rectangle is displayed and follows the pointer.

1

On the Design toolbar, click the Tool Toggle to access the 2D Design Toolbar. If the 2D Design Toolbar is already active, please skip to step 2.

Note: Other ways to access the 2D design toolbar are on the View menu, click 2D Design Tools or press CTRL+2. 2

On the Design menu, click a drawing grid. If the appropriate drawing grid was previously selected, please skip to step 3.

3

Click the Oval Tool. The pointer changes to reflect drawing mode.

4

Press the mouse button on the design window to define the start point of the oval. A rubber-band shape is displayed and follows the pointer.

12

12 Drag

Dr ag

5

Hold the mouse button down and extend the rectangle to the size you want. Dimensions appear in the position readout bar, as you draw.

5

Hold the mouse button down and extend the oval until it reaches the size you want. Dimensions appear in the position readout bar, as youshift, while drawing, to draw.

6

Release the mouse button.

6

Release the mouse button.

7

(optional) Press and hold SHIFT, while drawing, to draw a perfect circle.

368

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

Drawing a 2D Multigon

Drawing a 2D Multigon

Drawing a 2D Polygon

In multigon drawing mode you will be able to draw objects with a specified number of equal-length sides. You will find this tool useful when drawing mirrors, tabletops, hot tubs and so on.

In polygon drawing mode you can draw an object with any number of sides at any angle or length. You will find this tool useful when drawing corner cabinets, futons and so on. To draw a polygon

To draw a multigon 1

1

On the Design toolbar, click the Tool Toggle to access the 2D Design Toolbar. If the 2D Design Toolbar is already active, please skip to step 2.

Note: Other ways to access the 2D design toolbar are on the View menu, click 2D Design Tools or press CTRL+2. 2

On the Design menu, click a drawing grid. If the appropriate drawing grid was previously selected, please skip to step 3.

3

Click the Multigon Tool. The pointer changes to reflect drawing mode.

4

On the Options menu, click Custom Options, then type the number of equal-length sides you need.

5

Press the mouse button on the design window to define the start point (center) of the multigon. A rubber-band multigon is displayed and follows the pointer.

On the Design toolbar, click the Tool Toggle to access the 2D Design Toolbar. If the 2D Design Toolbar is already active, please skip to step 2.

Note: Other ways to access the 2D design toolbar are on the View menu, click 2D Design Tools or press CTRL+2. 2

On the Design menu, click a drawing grid. If the appropriate drawing grid was previously selected, please skip to step 3.

3

Click the Polygon Tool. The pointer changes to reflect drawing mode.

4

Click on the design window to define the start point of the polygon. A rubber-band line is displayed and follows the pointer. This line signifies the first side of your polygon.

12

2

42 3 2

12

Dr ag

6

Hold the mouse button down and extend the multigon to the size you want. The radius will appear in the position readout bar, as you draw.

7

Release the mouse button.

5

Click and move the mouse to the next cornerpoint. Repeat until you have drawn the needed shape.

6

Double-click to end drawing mode. Dimensions appear in the position readout bar, as you draw.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

369

Chapter

53 Drawing in 2D

Drawing a 2D Closed Arc

Drawing a 2D Circular Closed Arc

In closed arc drawing mode you will be able to draw an elliptical arc, which will automatically close along the bottom. You will find this tool useful when drawing couches, chairs, drop-leaf tables and so on.

In circular closed arc drawing mode you will be able to draw a closed shape of any rounded item. You will find this tool useful when drawing cabinet mouldings, decorative edges and so on.

To draw a closed arc

To draw a circular closed arc

1

1

On the Design toolbar, click the Tool Toggle to access the 2D Design Toolbar. If the 2D Design Toolbar is already active, please skip to step 2.

On the Design toolbar, click the Tool Toggle to access the 2D Design Toolbar. If the 2D Design Toolbar is already active, please skip to step 2.

Note: Other ways to access the 2D design toolbar are on the View menu, click 2D Design Tools or press CTRL+2.

Note: Other ways to access the 2D design toolbar are on the View menu, click 2D Design Tools or press CTRL+2.

2

On the Design menu, click a drawing grid. If the appropriate drawing grid was previously selected, please skip to step 3.

2

On the Design menu, click a drawing grid. If the appropriate drawing grid was previously selected, please skip to step 3.

3

Click the Closed Arc Tool. The pointer changes to reflect drawing mode.

3

Click the Circular closed arc Tool. The pointer changes to reflect drawing mode.

4

Press the mouse button on the design window to define the start point of the closed arc. A rubber-band line is displayed and follows the pointer.

4

Press the mouse button on the design window to define the centerpoint of the arc. A rubber-band line is displayed and follows the pointer. This line signifies the radius of your arc.

12

12

Drag

Drag

5

Hold the mouse button down and extend the arc to the shape you want. Dimensions appear in the position readout bar, as you draw.

6

Release the mouse button.

7

(optional) Press and hold SHIFT, while drawing, to constrain the arc to 90 degrees.

5

Hold the mouse button down and extend the radius to the size you want. Dimensions appear in the position readout bar, as you draw.

6

Release the mouse button.

7

Move the mouse clockwise or counter-clockwise to create the shape you want.

370

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

Drawing a 2D Open Arc

2

5

Hold the mouse button down and extend the arc to the shape you want. Dimensions appear in the position readout bar, as you draw.

6

Release the mouse button.

7

(optional) Press and hold SHIFT, while drawing, to constrain the arc to 90 degrees.

Drawing a 2D Circular Arc In circular arc drawing mode you will be able to draw an open shape of any radius. You will find this tool useful when drawing decorative edges, barrel planters and so on. 8

Click to end drawing mode.

To draw a circular arc

Drawing a 2D Open Arc

1

In open arc drawing mode you will be able to draw an elliptical arc which will remain open along the bottom. You will find this tool useful when drawing outdoor bridges, slides and so on.

Note: Other ways to access the 2D design toolbar are on the View menu, click 2D Design Tools or press CTRL+2.

To draw an open arc 1

On the Design toolbar, click the Tool Toggle to access the 2D Design Toolbar. If the 2D Design Toolbar is already active, please skip to step 2.

Note: Other ways to access the 2D design toolbar are on the View menu, click 2D Design Tools or press CTRL+2. 2

On the Design menu, click a drawing grid. If the appropriate drawing grid was previously selected, please skip to step 3.

3

Click the Open Arc Tool. The pointer changes to reflect drawing mode.

4

Press the mouse button on the design window to define the start point of the closed arc. A rubber-band line is displayed and follows the pointer.

On the Design toolbar, click the Tool Toggle to access the 2D Design Toolbar. If the 2D Design Toolbar is already active, please skip to step 2.

2

On the Design menu, click a drawing grid. If the appropriate drawing grid was previously selected, please skip to step 3.

3

Click the Circular arc Tool. The pointer changes to reflect drawing mode.

4

Press the mouse button on the design window to define the centerpoint of the arc. A rubber-band line is displayed and follows the pointer. This line signifies the radius of your arc.

12

1 2

Dr ag

Drag

5

Hold the mouse button down and extend the radius to the size you want. Dimensions appear in the position readout bar, as you draw.

6

Release the mouse button.

7

Move the mouse clockwise or counter-clockwise to create the shape you want.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

371

Chapter

53 Drawing in 2D 5

Hold the mouse button down and extend the line to the length you want. Dimensions appear in the position readout bar, as you draw.

6

Release the mouse button.

7

(optional) Press and hold SHIFT, while drawing, to constrain the line horizontally or vertically.

Drawing a 2D Curve In curve drawing mode you will be able to draw an open curved shape which changes direction. You will find this tool useful when drawing outdoor grills and so on.

2 8

Click to end drawing mode.

Drawing a 2D Line

To draw a curve 1

In line drawing mode you will be able to draw straight lines of any length. You will find this tool useful when drawing angular details to cabinets, tables and so on. To draw a line

On the Design toolbar, click the Tool Toggle to access the 2D Design Toolbar. If the 2D Design Toolbar is already active, please skip to step 2.

Note: Other ways to access the 2D design toolbar are on the View menu, click 2D Design Tools or press CTRL+2. 2

On the Design menu, click a drawing grid. If the appropriate drawing grid was previously selected, please skip to step 3.

Note: Other ways to access the 2D design toolbar are on the View menu, click 2D Design Tools or press CTRL+2.

3

Click the Curve Tool. The pointer changes to reflect drawing mode.

2

On the Design menu, click a drawing grid. If the appropriate drawing grid was previously selected, please skip to step 3.

4

Click and move the mouse to the next cornerpoint. Repeat until you have drawn the needed shape.

3

Click the Line Tool. The pointer changes to reflect drawing mode.

4

Press the mouse button on the design window to define the start point of the line. A rubber-band line is displayed and follows the pointer.

1

On the Design toolbar, click the Tool Toggle to access the 2D Design Toolbar. If the 2D Design Toolbar is already active, please skip to step 2.

Note: Although the lines will initially appear to be angular, they will become curved when you end drawing mode. 12

5

Double-click to end drawing mode.

Changing Curve Tension Drag

372

To further control the look of the shapes drawn with any of the arc or curve tools, you have control over the degree of curve assigned to them. With the Unsmooth feature it is easy

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

Changing Curve Tension to create angular shapes and with Curve Tension you can change the appearance. Curve Tension is measured between 1 and 50. Specifying 1 in the dialog box results in very little tension being applied, while specifying 50 is the maximum amount allowed and causes a greatly-exaggerated curve.

Curve Tension set at 20:

To change curve tension 1

Click an object to select it.

2

On the Options Menu, click Curve Smoothing, Curve Tension. The Curve Tension dialog box is displayed.

Curve Tension set at 30: 3

Type the amount of tension that you want.

4

Click OK. The Curve Tension you specified is applied.

Examples: Default Curve Tension (5):

Curve Tension set at 10:

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

373

Chapter

374

53 Drawing in 2D

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

Chapter 54

Converting 2D Objects to 3D In the previous chapter you learned how to draw in 2D, now you will learn how to convert two-dimensional objects into 3D. You can create as much depth as you want in any direction necessary. The Extrude technique adds depth to any object while the powerful Revolve command makes creating intricate objects like chair legs, table legs and columns very easy.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

375

Chapter

54 Converting 2D Objects to 3D

Extruding a 2D Object

Revolving a 2D Object

Once you draw an object in 2D you can add the third dimension at any time. The Extrude tool makes this a straight-forward process.

Another way to add a third dimension is with the Revolve command. This command is useful when creating table legs, lamps, vases and so on. Radians and degrees are two ways of measuring circular distances. One radian, sometimes called a pi radian, equals 180 degrees. Two pie radians equal 360 degrees. To convert degrees to radians, multiply degrees by Pi, divided by 180. To convert radians into degrees, multiply radians by 180, divided by Pi.

To extrude a 2D object 1

On the View menu, click Reset View or right-click anywhere on the design window, then click Reset View on the pop-up menu that is displayed.

2

Click once on the object to be extruded. Selection handles appear.

To revolve a 2D object 1

Click the object to be revolved.

2

On the Edit menu, click Revolve. The Revolve dialog box is displayed.

3

Type parameters in the dialog box. Measurements are from -360 to 360 degrees or -6.28 to 6.28 radians. The Radius is measured in the scale you have defined.

12

3

On the Standard toolbar, click the Extrude Tool.

4

Click an object handle; hold down the mouse button and move the pointer in the direction that you want the object to extrude. Dimensions appear in the position readout bar as you extrude.

Drag

5

Release the mouse button to end extrusion mode.

376

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

Revolving a 2D Object

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

377

Chapter

378

54 Converting 2D Objects to 3D

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

Chapter 55

Editing 3D Objects 3D Custom Workshop makes it extremely easy to change objects once they are drawn. In this chapter, you will find instructions on techniques that make rotating, resizing and so on, very simple. You will also learn how to use layers, lock and unlock; in addition, you’ll learn to create groups that will make complex objects much more manageable. The flip and mirror techniques are also described and are useful when you need perfectly symmetrical objects.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

379

Chapter

55 Editing 3D Objects

Applying Skew

Rotating an Object

To skew an object means to slant it along a selected axis. This is a useful tool for adding beveled edges to counters, diagonal legs to tables and so on.

With the rotate tool you can easily spin an object around any point on any drawing grid. This is useful when you want to face an object in a different direction from which it was drawn.

To skew an object 1

Click the object you want to skew. Selection handles appear around the object.

To rotate an object 1

12

2

On the Design menu, click a drawing grid.

3

On the Standard toolbar, click the Skew Tool.

4

Click a cornerpoint of the object; hold down the mouse button and move the pointer in the direction that you want the object to be slanted. Dimensions appear in the position readout bar, as you draw.

Click the object to be rotated. Selection handles appear around the object.

12

2

On the Design menu, click a drawing grid.

3

On the Standard toolbar, click the Rotate Tool.

4

Click a cornerpoint of the object; hold down the mouse button and move the pointer in the direction that you want to rotate.

Drag Drag

5

Release the mouse to stop skewing the object.

5

Release the mouse to stop rotating the object.

380

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

Using Elevation Slider

Using Elevation Slider

2

On the Options menu, click Object Size or double-click the object you want to resize. Selection handles appear around the object. The Object Size dialog box is displayed.

3

Select the absolute size or percent to be scaled and type the necessary values.

4

Click from which part of the object you want to resize.

5

Click OK. The object is resized to the exact measurements or percentage you specified.

With the Elevation Slider you can easily move selected items vertically, regardless of what grid is active. For more information, see “Elevation Slider”, which begins on page 355. To toggle the Elevation Slider on and off ■

On the Standard Toolbar, click the Show/Hide Elevation Slider button.

To use the elevation slider 1

On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.

2

Click the object you want to elevate.

3

Click the Elevation Slider at the left side of your window and move the elevation control up or down, until the object is in the correct position.

4

Release the mouse. The elevation of the object is changed.

To set the working elevation 1

Right-click the Elevation Slider at the left side of your window and click Set Elevation from the pop-up menu that is displayed.

Note: Proportionately resizing an object takes two steps; for example, resize Width and Height first, then switch to Side Grid and resize Depth.

Grouping Objects By defining a Group, you create a set of selected objects that are then treated as one item. You can have unlimited groups in a drawing. To group objects

2

Type the necessary elevation in inches or feet and inches, separated with a hyphen. Click OK.

3

(optional) Right-click, while nothing is selected, and click Set Elevation from the pop-up menu that is displayed.

1

On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.

2

Hold down SHIFT and click each object that you want to be included in the group.

3

On the Control toolbar, click the Group tool or on the Edit menu, click Group or right-click and click Group on the pop-up menu that is displayed.

To ungroup objects

Specifying Object Size With the object size option you can specify exact measurements for each object, either as a percentage of the original size or by specifying dimensions in inches. This is useful if you know how large or small an object must be to fit a specific space in your home.

1

On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.

2

Click the group you want to ungroup.

3

On the Control toolbar, click the Ungroup tool or on the Edit menu, click Ungroup.

To change an object’s size

Locking Objects in Place

1

Many times you will want to lock an object in place after it is positioned. This avoids accidentally moving the object.

Select an object.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

381

Chapter

55 Editing 3D Objects

To lock an object 1

On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.

2

Click to select the object you want to lock.

3

(optional) Hold down SHIFT and click each object that you want to lock.

4

On the Control toolbar, click the Lock tool or on the Edit menu, click Lock or right-click and click Lock on the pop-up menu that is displayed.

To unlock objects 1

On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.

2

Click the objects you want to unlock.

3

On the Control toolbar, click the Unlock tool or on the Edit menu, click Unlock.

Hiding Detection When you are working in layers, it will be helpful to make some objects unable to be selected, which makes it easier to select objects underneath. The Hide Detection feature makes this a simple process.

viewing and working on individual layers easy and uncluttered. To make complex objects more manageable, break them into logical layers. If you are drawing a chair, for example, you may want a separate layer for the back, the legs, the cushion and so on. To define a new layer 1

On the Design menu, click Layer Properties. The Layer Properties dialog box is displayed.

2

Click New. The New Layer Name dialog box is displayed.

3

Type the new layer’s name in the New Layer Name dialog box.

4

Click OK.

5

Repeat Steps 2-4 for each Layer you need. When you are finished creating layers, click OK.

To the hide detection of an object 1

On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.

2

Click to select the object you want to lock.

3

(optional) Hold down SHIFT and click each object that you want to lock.

4

On the Control toolbar, click the Hide Detection tool or on the Edit menu, click Lock or press CTRL+J.

To detect objects

To move a part of the drawing to a new layer

1

On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.

■

2

Click the object you want to detect.

3

On the Control toolbar, click the Detect tool or on the Edit menu, click Detect All or press CTRL+K.

Working in Layers Using the Layer option, you can store different information on different layers of your drawing. The Active Layer’s name is always displayed on the Design toolbar. Many of the functions are available through the Layer Properties dialog box. From the Layer Properties menu, you can choose to show or hide certain layers, which makes

Right-click the part of the drawing you want to move to another layer, then click Move to Layer on the pop-up menu that is displayed, then click which Layer. The selection is moved to the new layer.

382

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

Working in Layers

To rename a layer To hide a layer ■

1

On the Design menu, click Layer Properties. The Layer Properties dialog box is displayed.

2

Click to select the layer you want to rename, then click Rename. The Rename dialog box is displayed.

3

Type the layer’s new name in the Rename Layer dialog box.

4

Click OK.

5

Repeat Steps 2-4 for each Layer you want to rename. When you are finished, click OK.

On the Design menu, click Visible Layers, then click the layer you want to hide. If you select Hide all, only the active layer will remain visible.

Note: The active layer cannot be hidden. To hide all layers ■

On the Design menu, click Visible Layers, then click Hide All Layers.

To remove a layer 1

On the Design menu, click Layer Properties. The Layer Properties dialog box is displayed.

2

Click to select the layer you want to delete.

3

Click Remove. A warning will be displayed letting you know that all objects on that layer will also be deleted. Click OK to continue.

4

Click OK. All objects on that layer are deleted.

Note: The active layer cannot be hidden. To show all layers ■

On the Design menu, click Visible Layers, then click Show All Layers.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

383

Chapter

55 Editing 3D Objects

Setting a Nudge Distance With Nudge, you can move objects in a specific direction and in definable increments. The up, down, left and right selections are also available by using the arrow keys on your keyboard. Through the distance dialog box, distances as small as one inch may be defined. To change the nudge distance 1

On the Edit menu, click Nudge, Distance. The Nudge Distance dialog box is displayed.

To flip an object vertically 2

Type a new distance, then click OK.

To move an object by nudging 1

Click the object you want to move.

2

On the Design menu, click a drawing grid.

3

On the Edit menu, click Nudge, then click the direction (up, down, left, or right) or use the arrow keys on your keyboard.

1

Click the object you want to flip.

2

On the Design menu, click a drawing grid.

3

On the Control toolbar, click the Flip Vertical Tool or on the Edit menu, click Flip, Vertical.

Using Flip The Flip function takes the original object and reverses it either horizontally or vertically. Depending on which grid is active, flipping an object varies. To flip an object horizontally 1

Click the object you want to flip.

2

On the Design menu, click a drawing grid.

3

On the Control toolbar, click the Flip Horizontal Tool or on the Edit menu, click Flip, Horizontal.

384

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

Using Mirror

Using Mirror Mirror works much like the Flip function. The difference is that mirror leaves the original and makes a duplicate. Mirror creates two identical objects facing one another. Depending on which grid is active, mirroring an object varies. To mirror an object horizontally 1

Click the object you want to mirror.

2

On the Design menu, click a drawing grid.

3

On the Control toolbar, click the Mirror Horizontal Tool or on the Edit menu, click Mirror, Horizontal. To mirror an object vertically

4

1

Click the object you want to mirror.

2

On the Design menu, click a drawing grid.

3

On the Control toolbar, click the Mirror Vertical Tool or on the Edit menu, click Mirror, Vertical.

4

Move the object into position.

Move the object into position.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

385

Chapter

55 Editing 3D Objects

Duplicating Objects

To create a series of duplicate objects

Similar to cutting and pasting, the duplicate feature creates an exact copy of the object you select. In the duplicate properties dialog box, you can specify the number and specific offset of a series of duplicates.

1

Click the object you want to duplicate.

2

On the Design menu, click a drawing grid.

3

On the Control toolbar, click the Duplicate Properties Tool or on the Edit menu, click Duplicate, Duplicate Properties. The Duplicate Properties dialog box is displayed.

4

Type the horizontal and vertical offsets and the number of duplicates.

To create a duplicate 1

Click the object you want to duplicate.

2

On the Design menu, click a drawing grid.

3

On the Control toolbar, click the Duplicate Tool or on the Edit menu, click Duplicate Object or press CTRL+D.

Note: These variables control the distance apart the duplicates are placed. 5

386

Click OK. The object is duplicated at the offset(s) you defined.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

Duplicating Objects

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

387

Chapter

388

55 Editing 3D Objects

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

Chapter 56

Controlling Views You can control the way you see your design in 3D Custom Workshop. These views can make editing much easier or can simply make it clearer to view specific areas of your drawing. In this chapter you will learn to use ClearView, perspective, orthographic, textured and wire-frame views. You will also learn how to zoom in on a specific area and how to set the camera angle.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

389

Chapter

56 Controlling Views

Using Perspective or Orthographic Views

Using Different Views

Perspective view is the default view in 3D Custom Workshop. Perspective views give more information about depth and are often easier to view because they are similar to a “real world” view. Orthographic viewpoints make it much easier to compare, for example, two parts of the object, as there is no question of how the viewpoint may affect the perception of distance.

Textured view gives a more realistic appearance and is the default view in 3D Custom Workshop. In wire frame view each individual line or arc is visible and able to be changed; detailed editing of the object may be easier in wire frame view. While in ClearView, you can view your design in an opaque state. 3D Custom Workshop’s technology includes anti-aliased, photo-realism. You can even create glass-topped tables by setting the Translucency of an object.

To view in perspective ■

Click the Viewpoint Tool, then click Perspective or on the View menu, click View in Perspective.

To view wire frame mode ■

Note: Parts of the drawing that are nearest to you will appear larger than those further away.

To view in orthographic ■

Click the Viewpoint Tool, then click Orthographic or on the View menu, click View in Orthographic.

390

Click the Rendering Style button or on the View menu, click 3D Rendering Style, Wire Frame.

To view shaded mode ■

Click the Rendering Style button or on the View menu, click 3D Rendering Style, Shaded View.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

Using Different Views To view using ClearView ■

To set translucency

Click the ClearView button or on the View menu, click Render ClearView.

1

Click the object or part of an object that you want to alter. Selection handles appear around the object.

2

Click the Translucency Icon. The Object Translucency Menu is displayed.

3

Move the slider to the percent of translucency. Click OK.

To render using 3D final quality ■

Click the Render Final Quality button or on the View menu, click Render 3D Final Quality.

To set 3D render quality 1

On the View menu, click 3D Final Quality, Low. This results in a fast rendering speed, but lower quality output.

2

On the View menu, click 3D Final Quality, High. This results in a moderate rendering speed and average quality output.

3

On the View menu, click 3D Final Quality, Ultra High. This results in a slower rendering speed and a high quality output.

4

On the View menu, click 3D Final Quality, Excellent. This results in a very slow rendering speed, but a very high quality, sharp output.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

391

Chapter

56 Controlling Views

Using Zoom At some point while illustrating your object, you may want a close-up view of a specific area. By using the zoom and pan tools in concert with the set zoom feature, you will be able to view any area of your drawing with pinpoint accuracy. With the pan tool, you can move the window to view a different area of the drawing without changing the magnification.

2

Type a zoom percentage into the dialog box.

3

Click OK.

To pan across the drawing To zoom in or out of your drawing 1 2

On the Standard Toolbar, click the Zoom Tool. Click on the design window.

3

Hold the mouse button down.

4

Move the pointer up to zoom in and move the pointer down to zoom out.

5

Release the mouse button.

To set a specific zoom percentage 1

1 2

Click the Pan Tool. Click on the design window.

3

Hold the mouse button down.

4

Drag the object to the center of the window.

5

Release the mouse button.

To adjust the lighting intensity 1

On the View menu, click 3D Lighting. The 3D Lighting dialog box is displayed.

On the View menu, click Set Zoom. The Set Zoom dialog box is displayed.

392

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

Setting the Camera Angle 2

Increase or decrease the overall lighting by clicking and dragging the slider.

3

Click OK.

Setting the Camera Angle With the 3D Camera Angle options you can view your design from six preset vantage points. They are particularly useful when you need to quickly view a specific area of your design or when you want to line up multiple objects. To view from 3D top view ■

On the View menu, click 3D Camera Angle, Top.

To view from 3D bottom view ■

On the View menu, click 3D Camera Angle, Back.

To view from 3D left view ■

On the View menu, click 3D Camera Angle, Right.

To return to the default view ■

1

On the Viewpoint Toolbar click the Fly-Around button.

2

Hold the mouse button down and move the Fly-Around pointer around inside the window and watch the view move dynamically.

On the View menu, click Reset View.

1

On the Viewpoint Toolbar click the Set Rotation Origin Tool.

2

On the design window, click to define the point you want to revolve around.

To hide the point of rotation origin

On the View menu, click 3D Camera Angle, Left.

To view from 3D right view ■

To use the Fly-Around tool

To set the rotation origin

On the View menu, click 3D Camera Angle, Front.

To view from 3D back view ■

In addition to the six preset viewing angles, you can view your design from any other angle using the Fly-Around Tool. The Fly-Around Tool lets you rotate around a point of origin that can be defined with a couple clicks. You can easily rotate around the center of any object, again with just a click or two!

On the View menu, click 3D Camera Angle, Bottom.

To view from 3D front view ■

Using Fly-Around

1

On the Options menu, click to uncheck Rotation Origin Visible.

2

(optional) Right-click on the design window, then click to uncheck Rotation Origin Visible.

To center the rotation on an object 1

Click the Center Origin on Object Tool.

2

Click an object on the design window. The rotation origin is centered on the object and that object is centered in the design window.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

393

Chapter

394

56 Controlling Views

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

Chapter 57

Applying Color and Material Punch! 3D Custom Workshop lets you customize any object by adding color and material. Using drag-and-drop, you can easily alter anything you design to fit into your color scheme. Using color and material, you can make decorative changes to objects you have placed in your home as quickly as you think of them. This makes it easy to experiment with color and material variations without spending a cent!

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

395

Chapter

57 Applying Color and Material

Setting the Object Color

4

Scroll to view the available wood materials.

By default, all objects drawn with 3D Custom Workshop are painted blue. You can change this default color to any color you want.

5

Click the wood you want to apply; hold down the mouse button and drag the wood material onto the object. The wood you selected is applied.

To set the default object color 1

On the Design menu, click Default Object Color. The Color dialog box is displayed.

2

Click an area on the color spectrum window to select a color, then adjust the values, if necessary.

3

(optional) Adjust the current Red, Green and Blue values to create a custom color.

4

Click OK. The color you defined will be used for all subsequently-drawn objects.

Applying Materials Just like applying colors, it’s easy to apply the appropriate material. 3D Custom Workshop includes a wide variety of materials, plus you have the ability to create a custom color palette to suit your needs. With 3D Custom Workshop you still have access to all custom materials you have created. For more information on creating custom materials, see “Material Workshop”, which begins on page 183. To apply material 1

Click the Rendering Style button or on the View menu, click 3D Rendering Style, Shaded View.

2

On the Design toolbar, click the Material button. Materials appear in the drag-and-drop Preview Bar.

3

(optional) At the top of the Preview Bar, click the down arrow next to “Materials” to display the Materials style menu, then click to check Wood. Wood options are displayed on the Preview Bar.

396

Tip: To apply the same texture to the entire object, hold the Control key down while applying the material. To apply a custom material 1

On the Design toolbar, click the Custom Material button. Materials appear in the Preview Bar.

2

(optional) At the top of the Preview Bar, click the down arrow next to “Custom” to display the available material libraries.

3

Click to select the library you want.The materials contained in that library are displayed on the Preview Bar.

4

Click the material you want to apply; hold down the mouse button and drag the material onto the object. The material you selected is applied.

Applying Color Whether you are drawing a fireplace, kitchen cabinets, or a loveseat, it’s easy to apply the appropriate color. With 3D Custom Workshop you can define your own custom color with the Color dialog box. You can start with one of the basic colors available, then change its red, blue, or green values, or click on a color in the color spectrum window to “mix” your own color. Using these techniques you can find the exact color you want, without restricting yourself to a set palette. To apply color 1

Click the Rendering Style button or on the View menu, click 3D Rendering Style, Shaded View.

2

On the Design toolbar, click the Color button. Colors appear in the Preview Bar.

3

(optional) At the top of the Preview Bar, click the down arrow next to “Colors” to display the Colors style menu, then click to check Fall or whichever category you want. That color palette is displayed on the Preview Bar.

4

Scroll to view the available colors.

5

Click the color you want to apply; hold down the mouse button and drag the color onto the object. The color you selected is applied.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

Controlling Application of Color or Material To apply a series of the same color

Controlling Application of Color or Material

1

Click the Rendering Style button or on the View menu, click 3D Rendering Style, Shaded View.

2

On the Design toolbar, click the Color button. Colors appear in the Preview Bar.

3

(optional) At the top of the Preview Bar, click the down arrow next to “Colors” to display the Colors style menu, then click to check Spring or whichever category you want. That color palette is displayed on the Preview Bar.

With 3D Custom Workshop you can control how colors and materials are applied to your design. By default you will be using the Normal Apply function where the color or material is applied only to the place where you click. The Grouped Apply method applies the color or material to all of the object. While Matching Apply will replace all like colors or materials with the new one. To use Normal Apply

4

Right-click the color you want to apply.

5

Right-click where you want the chosen color to appear.

6

Click the left mouse button to end. The color you selected is applied.

1

Click the Rendering Style button or on the View menu, click 3D Rendering Style, Shaded View.

2

On the Design toolbar, click the Color or Material button. Options appear in the Preview Bar.

3

Click the Normal Apply button.

4

Click the color or material you want to apply; hold down the mouse button and drag the color or material onto the object. The color or material you selected is applied only to the place where you click.

To define a custom color 1

Click the Rendering Style button or on the View menu, click 3D Rendering Style, Shaded View.

2

On the Design toolbar, click the Color button. Colors appear in the Preview Bar.

3

(optional) At the top of the Preview Bar, click the down arrow next to “Colors” to display the Colors style menu, then click to check Summer or whichever category you want. That color palette is displayed on the Preview Bar.

4

Double-click one of the colors on the Preview Bar. The Color dialog box is displayed.

5

(optional) Adjust the current Red, Green and Blue values to create a custom color.

6

(optional) Click an area on the color spectrum window to select a color, then adjust the RGB values, if necessary.

7

Click OK. The color you defined is displayed on the Preview Bar.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

397

Chapter

57 Applying Color and Material

To use Grouped Apply

To use Matching Apply

1

Click the Rendering Style button or on the View menu, click 3D Rendering Style, Shaded View.

1

Click the Rendering Style button or on the View menu, click 3D Rendering Style, Shaded View.

2

On the Design toolbar, click the Color or Material button. Options appear in the Preview Bar.

2

On the Design toolbar, click the Color or Material button. Options appear in the Preview Bar.

3

Click the Grouped Apply button.

3

Click the Matching Apply button.

4

Click the color or material you want to apply; hold down the mouse button and drag the color or material onto the object. The color or material you selected is applied to the entire object.

4

Click the color or material you want to apply; hold down the mouse button and drag the color or material onto the object. The color or material you selected is applied to all places matching the material you are replacing.

Note: To control how shadows are rendered across an object with many facets, use Planar Mapping on the Options Menu. Surface Mapping will apply the shadow to each facet individually.

398

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

Index Numerics 2D objects, converting (3D Custom Workshop) 375 2D view in 3D Custom Workshop 354 in Topo Designer 56 3D adding shadows 161 3D Custom Workshop floor grid 352 3D Custom Workshop front grid 352 3D Custom Workshop side grid 352 3D cut-away slider 165 3D fly around view 159 3D lighting intensity 161 in 3D Custom Workshop 392 3D selection tool 166 3D view, saving 164 3D viewing speed 159 3D walk through 159 3-point freehand roof tool 104 4-point freehand roof tool 104

A AC 97 ac units, rotating 97 accessories 77 applying in Punch! (Material Workshop) 189 accessories, adding 170 accessories, adding (Pool Designer) 237 accessory organizer 173 in Material Workshop 186 add point 147 adding air conditioners 97 arc topography objects (Topo Designer) 52 circle/oval topography objects (Topo Designer) 51 circular arc topography objects (Topo Designer) 52 color (Fence Designer) 270 color (Material Workshop) 187 color ramp(Fence Designer) 270 curved topography objects (Topo Designer) 51 custom color (Fence Designer) 270 custom material (Fence Designer) 270 custom material (Material Workshop) 187 fences (Fence Designer) 268 gates (Fence Designer) 268 heat pumps 97 heating 97

lighting 87 material (Fence Designer) 270 material (Material Workshop) 187 multigon topography objects (Topo Designer) 53 objects to library (3D Custom Workshop) 348 points (Site Planner) 194 railings 81 rectangle topography objects (Topo Designer) 51 roof points (Roofing Wizard) 114 roofing 102 shadows 161 straight-edge topography objects (Topo Designer) 51 topography objects (Topo Designer) 50 age, customizing plant 176 air conditioner 97 air ducts rotating 96 air ducts, placing 96 align text 40 alter roof size 105 alter roof slope 105 alter topography (Topo Designer) 53 angle, north (Global Sun Positioning) 321 angled text 40 annotation bar 9 annotations 39 appliance elevation (Cabinet Wizard) 213 apply color 179 apply material 180 in Material Workshop 189 applying accessories (Material Workshop) 189 custom accessories (Material Workshop) 189 custom materials (Material Workshop) 189 arc 2D circular (3D Custom Workshop) 371 2D circular closed (3D Custom Workshop) 370 2D closed (3D Custom Workshop) 370 2D open (3D Custom Workshop) 371 circular (3D Custom Workshop) 362 arc deck (Deck Designer) 125 arc, drawing 143 arc, open (3D Custom Workshop) 362 auto activate 45 auto flooring 70 Auto Reset Tools (Door Designer) 198 Auto Reset Tools (Window Designer) 204 AutoClick Placement 171

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

399

Index automatic dimensioning, turning off 39, 70 automatic pool cleaner, adding (Pool Designer) 240 AVI, exporting (Animator) 326, 331 AVI, opening (Animator) 326 Azimuth (Site Planner) 194

B back view (3D Custom Workshop) 393 background animation, suppress 164 background color 155 in 3D Custom Workshop 347 backsplash height, change (Cabinet Wizard) 215 backsplash thickness, change (Cabinet Wizard) 216 baluster (deck), changing spacing 119 baluster spacing 119 in Deck Designer 130 base cabinet dimensions, change (Cabinet Wizard) 214 base trim 178, 179 baseboard heaters 98 basement, creating 64 basic terminology 14 basketball goal, adding (Pool Designer) 242 bathroom (Room Wizard) 58 bathtubs, placing 93 bay window 74 beam size, specifying (Framing Editor) 279 beam type customizing (Framing Editor) 279 specifying (Framing Editor) 279 beams dimensioning 64 length 64 stiffener 63 Bearing (Site Planner) 194 bedroom (Room Wizard) 58 blinds 77, 170 bottom view (3D Custom Workshop) 393 break a wall 74 brightness (Material Workshop) 187 brightness, scene (Global Sun Positioning) 321 bring to front 146 in Material Workshop 188 bring to front (PhotoView Editor) 261 building pad (Topo Designer) 53 built-in oven (Cabinet Wizard) 212 built-in refrigerator (Cabinet Wizard) 212

C cabinet trim (Cabinet Wizard) 214 cabinet, standard measurements (Cabinet Wizard) 209 cable jack 89 calculate pool volume (Pool Designer) 246 calculating construction costs 287 calculating square footage 39 calendar (Global Sun Positioning) 320 calendar, synchronize (Global Sun Positioning) 320 camera in Material Workshop 190 in PhotoView 255 in Plant Editor 225 camera angle 159 in 3D Custom Workshop 393 cased opening 274

400

ceiling and floor outlets, placing 86 ceiling fan 88 ceiling height 73 ceiling/floor options 70 center origin on object (3D Custom Workshop) 393 center text 40 centerpoint, snap to segment 31 chain link fence 137 in Fence Designer 268 chamfer 36 change backsplash height (Cabinet Wizard) 215 backsplash thickness (Cabinet Wizard) 216 base cabinet depth (Cabinet Wizard) 214 base cabinet height (Cabinet Wizard) 214 base cabinet width (Cabinet Wizard) 214 deck height 118 deck height (Deck Designer) 129 door height (Cabinet Wizard) 216 door type 75 exterior wall length 68 font of annotations 39 interior wall length 72 rail height 216 roof pitch 105 roof slope 105 stile width (Cabinet Wizard) 216 style of line 145 thickness of line 145 toe kick size (Cabinet Wizard) 216 top cabinet depth (Cabinet Wizard) 215 top cabinet elevation (Cabinet Wizard) 214 top cabinet height (Cabinet Wizard) 215 top cabinet thickness (Cabinet Wizard) 215 width, pathway 135 chimney tab (Fireplace Wizard) 222 chlorinator, adding (Pool Designer) 241 choosing a codec (Animator) 338 circles, drawing 28, 142 circular arc (3D Custom Workshop) 362 circular arc deck (Deck Designer) 126 circular arc, 2D (3D Custom Workshop) 371 circular arc, drawing 144 circular closed arc (3D Custom Workshop) 361 circular closed arc, 2D (3D Custom Workshop) 370 circular deck (Deck Designer) 125 city (Global Sun Positioning) 318 clear 152 ClearView 159 in 3D Custom Workshop 390 clipboard 152 clock, synchronize (Global Sun Positioning) 320 closed arc (3D Custom Workshop) 360 closed arc, 2D (3D Custom Workshop) 370 closet (Room Wizard) 58 closing files 20 closing files (3D Custom Workshop) 349 closing files (Animator) 327 codec, choosing (Animator) 338 codec, default (Animator) 339 color (3D Custom Workshop) 395 color ramp 179 color ramp (Fence Designer) 270 color toolbar (3D Custom Workshop) 344 color, adding (Fence Designer) 270 color, applying 179

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

color, applying (3D Custom Workshop) 396 color, changing default (3D Custom Workshop) 396 color, plan layer 44 color, printing plan in 22 colors, custom 180 colors, foreground and background (3D Custom Workshop) 347 column material (Framing Editor) 280 material, customizing (Framing Editor) 280 size, specifying (Framing Editor) 280 compass 11 compass (Global Sun Positioning) 321 connector switches 86 construction costs, calculating (Home Estimator) 287 construction materials (RealModel) 294 content folder 257 contents, package 4 context-sensitive help 5 control lighting (Global Sun Positioning) 321 control toolbar (3D Custom Workshop) 345 controlled walk-through view 158 convert, degrees to radians (3D Custom Workshop) 376 coping (Pool Designer) 234 copy 152 copying from one floor 78 copying objects between floors 152, 264 copying staircases 81 counter top (Cabinet Wizard) 210 country (Global Sun Positioning) 318 crown molding 178 crown trim, remove 179 cues, graphic 14 curtains 77, 170 curve (3D Custom Workshop) 364 curve a pathway 135 curve edging 137 curve tension 29 in 3D Custom Workshop 372 curve, 2D (3D Custom Workshop) 372 curved deck railing 119 deck staircase 79 edging 136 railing 81 railing (Deck Designer) 127 staircase 120 staircase (Deck Designer) 127 wall 73 curves, drawing 29, 145 custom accessories, applying in Punch! (Material Workshop) 189 custom cabinet features (Cabinet Wizard) 214 custom color 180 custom color list (Material Workshop) 187 custom color palette 179 custom color, adding (Fence Designer) 270 custom material, applying in Punch! (Material Workshop) 189 customizing colors (Home Estimator) 286 customizing deck railing 120 customizing deck staircases 120 customizing railing 81 customizing staircases 80 in Deck Designer 131 cut 152 cut-away slider 165

D date (Global Sun Positioning) 318 date, synchronize (Global Sun Positioning) 320 Daylight Savings Time (Global Sun Positioning) 318 deactivate undo 152 deck cut-out 118 deck height, change 118 deck height, change (Deck Designer) 129 deck plan tab 117 deck properties (Framing Editor) 282 Deck Wizard 122 decks adding 118 handrails 118 handrails (Deck Designer) 129 default codec (Animator) 339 default object color (3D Custom Workshop) 396 defining slope (Topo Designer) 53 delete point 147 deleting a point (Site Planner) 195 deleting roof points (Roofing Wizard) 114 depth, change base cabinet (Cabinet Wizard) 214 depth, change top cabinet (Cabinet Wizard) 215 depth, pool (Pool Designer) 236 design toolbar (3D Custom Workshop) 344 designer palette 162 designer palettes 162 detail plan tab 141 details creating (Section Detailer) 310 link properties (Section Detailer) 310 opening (Section Detailer) 310 printing (Section Detailer) 316 detect all (3D Custom Workshop) 382 diagonal, walls 72 diameter dimension 39 different color in each room 74 digital picture, importing in Material Workshop 190 in PhotoView 255 in Plant Editor 225 dimensions adding between walls 37 change endpoint 39 changing location 63, 70 from wall to center 63, 70 hiding 39, 62, 70 dimming lights 88 dining room (Room Wizard) 58 display settings 5 diving board, adding (Pool Designer) 242 dollhouse view 165 door 274 door categories creating (Door Designer) 200 deleting (Door Designer) 200 renaming (Door Designer) 200 Door Designer 197 door dimensions, hiding 39, 62, 70 door header size (Framing Editor) 281 door height, change (Cabinet Wizard) 216 door settings 75 doors 74 creating (Door Designer) 200 deleting (Door Designer) 200

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

401

Index hiding in 3D 163 importing (Door Designer) 200 moving (Door Designer) 200 resizing 75 viewing in 3D 163 dormer 105 double doors 75 double oven (Cabinet Wizard) 212 download updates (Punch! Updater) 24 drag-and-drop, objects 170 drain, adding (Pool Designer) 241 drains, floor 92 drapes 77, 170 drawing arcs 143 circles 28, 142 circular arcs 144 curves 29, 145 lines 142 multigons 28, 144 ovals 28, 142 polygons 28, 143 rectangles 28, 142 squares 28, 142 drawing (3D Custom Workshop) 357 drawing animation paths (Animator) 330 drawing from center (3D Custom Workshop) 366 drawing from corner in Section Detailer 315 in Symbol Editor 307 drawing from corner (3D Custom Workshop) 365 drawing in 2D (3D Custom Workshop) 367 drawing precision (Door Designer) 199 drawing scale, setting 15 driveway 135 ducts, placing 96 duplicate properties (3D Custom Workshop) 386 duplicating in Section Detailer 311 in Symbol Editor 304 duplicating (3D Custom Workshop) 386 DXF/DWG export (DXF/DWG Import) 263 import (DXF/DWG Import) 263

E edging 136 edit property line 134 edit text 40 editing a drawing 151 editing a point (Site Planner) 195 editing material perspective (Material Workshop) 189 editing material perspective (PhotoView Editor) 262 editing objects 172 editing, 3D objects (3D Custom Workshop) 379 electrical outlet 86 electrical plan tab 85 elevate built-in oven (Cabinet Wizard) 213 elevating objects 155, 173 elevating, PhotoView image 257 elevation change top cabinet (Cabinet Wizard) 214 increasing and decreasing (Roofing Wizard) 115 increasing and decreasing (Topo Designer) 55

402

Elevation Editor 273 elevation slider 9, 156 in 3D Custom Workshop 355 elevation, adjusting 159 ellipses 28 ellipses, see drawing circles and ovals 142 email plans 21 establish true north (Global Sun Positioning) 321 estimation options (Framing Editor) 283 Estimator 285 excavate topography 140 existing files, opening 20 exiting 20 export a pricelist (Home Estimator) 288 cabinet to 3D Custom Workshop (Cabinet Wizard) 217 fireplace to 3D Custom Workshop (Fireplace Wizard) 223 export to DXF/DWG (DXF/DWG Import) 263 exterior walls 68 extruding, 2D objects (3D Custom Workshop) 376 eyeglasses 160

F face dimensions (Fireplace Wizard) 221 family room (Room Wizard) 58 fan, ceiling 88 features, moving between plans 45, 153 Fence Designer 267 fences adding (Fence Designer) 268 chain link (Fence Designer) 268 drawing 137 ornamental iron (Fence Designer) 268 picket (Fence Designer) 269 privacy (Fence Designer) 269 rail (Fence Designer) 269 resizing (Fence Designer) 269 file format (PhotoView) 256 files closing 20 opening 20 printing 22 saving 20 fill 136 region 134 reshaping 134 fillet 36 fills 145 firebox dimensions (Fireplace Wizard) 221 fireplace, placing in design (Fireplace Wizard) 223 flat roof 105 flatten gables (Roofing Wizard) 112 flip 37 in 3D Custom Workshop 384 PhotoView image 258 flip room (Room Wizard) 60 flip, entire plan 153 float above topography 156 floating thermometer, adding (Pool Designer) 241 flood lights, adding 88 floor cutout adding 82 drawing 82 floor cutout properties (Framing Editor) 278

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

floor drains 92 floor grid (3D Custom Workshop) 352 floor options 70 floor plan tab 67 flooring automatic 63, 70 drawing 81 joists (Framing Editor) 279 reshaping 82 FloorPlan Trace 251 floors, adding 78 flowers 175 flush right text 40 fly around 159 center of reference 159 in 3D Custom Workshop 393 fly around speed 159 follow topography 156 font 40 foreground and background colors (3D Custom Workshop) 347 forum 6 foundation defining perimeter 62 piers 64 reshaping 63 width 62 foundation piers 64 foundation slope, changing 64 four-point freehand roof tool 104 fps (Animator) 338 frames per second (Animator) 338 framing beam (Framing Editor) 278 free rotate 154 French doors 75 front grid (3D Custom Workshop) 352 front view (3D Custom Workshop) 393 full cabinet (Cabinet Wizard) 210 full cabinet, standard measurements (Cabinet Wizard) 210 furniture 170

G gable roof 102 gambrel roof 107 garage (Room Wizard) 58 gas bib 92 gates 137, 139 adding (Fence Designer) 268 ornamental iron (Fence Designer) 268 picket (Fence Designer) 269 privacy (Fence Designer) 269 rail (Fence Designer) 269 resizing (Fence Designer) 269 general tab (Fireplace Wizard) 221 glow 88 grid 16 grid settings (3D Custom Workshop) 353 grid spacing 16 in 3D Custom Workshop 353 grid style 16 grid toolbar (3D Custom Workshop) 344 grid, constrain toggle (3D Custom Workshop) 353 grid, displaying 17 grill settings, window 77 ground fill region 134

grouped apply (3D Custom Workshop) 397 grouping objects (3D Custom Workshop) 381 growing, plants 177 guide, about this 14

H hallway (Room Wizard) 58 handrails (Deck Designer) 130 handrails (deck) 119 hardiness zone maps 176 hearth & mantle tab (Fireplace Wizard) 221 heat pump 97 heat/vent lights, dimming 88 heating units, adding 97 height, change backsplash (Cabinet Wizard) 215 height, change base cabinet (Cabinet Wizard) 214 height, change door (Cabinet Wizard) 216 height, change rail 216 height, change top cabinet (Cabinet Wizard) 215 height, wall 73 help, online 5 hide doors in 3D 163 materials in 3D 164 objects in 3D 163 plumbing in 3D 164 roofs in 3D 164 topography in 3D 164 hide detection (3D Custom Workshop) 382 hide layers (3D Custom Workshop) 382 hide path name (Animator) 336 hide plan layers 44 hide point elevations (Animator) 336 hide segment time (Animator) 336 hide tools (Home Estimator) 286 hide topography lines 164 hidie FloorPlan Trace image 253 hiding KeyPoints (Animator) 336 hiding, plan layers 338 hip roof 102 homeplans, included 20 horizontally, flip entire plan 153 hose bib, placing 92 hot water heater 94 how to estimate materials needed 287 hvac tab 95

I identify color material in 3D 167 identifying which plant has been placed 176 import 3DS file (3D Custom Workshop) 349 import a DXF/DWG file (DXF/DWG Import) 263 importing 21 importing (FloorPlan Trace) 252 importing animation paths (Animator) 326 importing DXF 141 importing image (Fence Designer) 271 importing image (PhotoView) 256 importing objects 170 inactive floor color,topography line color 155 insert PhotoView image 256 inserting a point (Site Planner) 195 install manager options (Punch! Updater) 25

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

403

Index install updates (Punch! Updater) 24 installation 4 installing, troubleshooting 5 insulation, specifying in Framing Editor 278 intensity, lighting 161 in 3D Custom Workshop 392 interior walls 69 Internet settings (Punch! Updater) 25 interrupt rendering 160 intersection, snap to 34 inverse fillet 36 irregular walls 72

J jacks, phone and cable 89 join sensitivity (Door Designer) 199 joists angle, specifying (Framing Editor) 280 material, customizing (Framing Editor) 280 material, specifying (Framing Editor) 279 size, specifying (Framing Editor) 280 spacing, specifying (Framing Editor) 280

K Keep Tool Selected 28 KeyPoint view, customize (Animator) 335 kitchen (Room Wizard) 58 kitchen design, standard measurements (Cabinet Wizard) 209 kitchen island (Cabinet Wizard) 211

L landing, stairway 80 landscape plan tab 133 landscape, designing 133 latitude grid (Global Sun Positioning) grid, longitude and latitude (Global Sun Positioning) 320 launch Door Designer 198 Elevation Editor 274 Estimator 286 Fence Designer 268 Floorplan Trace 252 Framing Editor 278 Layout Manager 298 Material Workshop 184 PhotoView Editor 260 Plant Editor 226 RealModel 294 Roofing Wizard 112 Room Wizard 58 Section Detailer 310 Symbol Editor 302 Topo Designer 50 Trim Designer 230 Window Designer 204 Launch PowerTool Store 11 Launch Punch! Software.com 11 laundry room (Room Wizard) 58 layer, viewing plan 44 layers hiding (3D Custom Workshop) 382, 383

404

renaming (3D Custom Workshop) 383 show all (3D Custom Workshop) 383 working in layers (3D Custom Workshop) 382 working with (3D Custom Workshop) 382 Layout Manager 297 leader dimension 39 leaf skimmer, adding (Pool Designer) 241 left view (3D Custom Workshop) 393 length dimension 38 lengthen interior walls 72 library paneling 178 library paneling, remove 179 light switch 86 lighting adding interior 87 adding outdoor 161 adjusting intensity (outdoor) 161 dimming 88 lighting controls (Global Sun Positioning) 321 lighting settings (Global Sun Positioning) 321 lighting, adjusting intensity (3D Custom Workshop) 392 line dimensions (Site Planner) 195 line style 145 line, 2D (3D Custom Workshop) 372 liner broom, adding (Pool Designer) 241 liner vacuum, adding (Pool Designer) 241 lines, drawing 142 link properties (Section Detailer) 310 linked 73 LiveView 157 adding colors to palette 162 adding materials to palette 162 adding textures to palette 162 collapsing palette groups 162 expanding palette groups 162 exporting palettes 162 importing palettes 162 managing palettes 162 opening a window 158 palette 162 palette groups 162 renaming palette groups 162 saving palettes 162 LiveView icons 10 LiveView, printing 22 living room (Room Wizard) 58 load bearing walls,specifying (Framing Editor) 278 locate plant 177 locating PhotoView image 257 location (Global Sun Positioning) 318 location indicator (Global Sun Positioning) 320 lock 10 lock objects (3D Custom Workshop) 381 lock roof panels (Roofing Wizard) 112, 115 lock walls (Roofing Wizard) 112 log home components 171 longitude grid (Global Sun Positioning) 320 lot properties (Topo Designer) 55 lot size, defining 14 lot size, setting (Topo Designer) 50

M Managing LiveView Palettes 162 mantle dimensions (Fireplace Wizard) 222

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

manual activate 45 map options (Global Sun Positioning) 320 mask (PhotoView Editor) 258 masking, PhotoView image 258 master bedroom (Room Wizard) 58 master pricelist, creating in Estimator 287 matching apply (3D Custom Workshop) 397 matching scale (FloorPlan Trace) 252 material estimations (Home Estimator) 287 material organizer 173 material organizer (Material Workshop) 185 material toolbar (3D Custom Workshop) 344 Material Workshop 183 tips for using 190 material, adding (Fence Designer) 270 material, attaching (RealModel) 296 material, printing template (RealModel) 295 materials applying 180 applying in Punch! (Material Workshop) 189 hiding in 3D 164 viewing in 3D 164 materials, applying (3D Custom Workshop) 396 mature plants 177 measurement tools 9 measurements, using the Virtual Ruler 39 menu bar 8 in 3D Custom Workshop 344 metric (3D Custom Workshop) 355 mirror 37 in 3D Custom Workshop 385 modifying deck staircases 120 in Deck Designer 130 modifying staircases 80 month (Global Sun Positioning) 318 move to back (Room Wizard) 59 move to front (Room Wizard) 59 move, entire plan 153 moving along the grid 17 ceiling fan 88 features between plans 153 floors 79 objects 172 objects between floors 152 Photoview image 256 plants 176 railing (Deck Designer) 123 sinks 93 staircases 80 multigon deck (Deck Designer) 126 multigon, 2D (3D Custom Workshop) 369 multigon, drawing 28, 144 in 3D Custom Workshop 359

N network options (Punch! Updater) 25 normal apply (3D Custom Workshop) 397 north, angle (Global Sun Positioning) 321 notations 39 nudge 153 in 3D Custom Workshop 384

O object center, snap to 32 object corner, snap to 33 object description (3D Custom Workshop) 348 object organizer 173 Object Organizer, recycle button 174 object selection mode in 3D Custom Workshop 364 in Door Designer 199 in Section Detailer 315 in Symbol Editor 307 in Window Designer 205 object-level editing 147 in Material Workshop 188 objects 21, 170 converting 2D to 3D (3D Custom Workshop) 375 copying 152 copying (DXF/DWG Import) 264 copying between floors 152, 264 editing 172 elevating 155, 173 hiding in 3D 163 moving 172 moving by coordinates 172 printing (3D Custom Workshop) 349 renaming 172 rotating 154, 172 rotating (3D Custom Workshop) 380 selecting (3D Custom Workshop) 364 selecting (Door Designer) 199 selecting (Section Detailer) 315 selecting (Symbol Editor) 307 selecting (Window Designer) 205 specifying 3D size (3D Custom Workshop) 381 viewing in 3D 163 objects, moving between floors 152 office (Room Wizard) 58 offset dimension 37 online help 5 opacity (Material Workshop) 187 opacity, in ClearView 160 open arc (3D Custom Workshop) 362 open arc, 2D (3D Custom Workshop) 371 open stairway 80 opening 274 opening a file (3D Custom Workshop) 348 ornamental iron fences (Fence Designer) 268 ornamental iron gates (Fence Designer) 268 orthographic (3D Custom Workshop) 390 outdoor hose bib 92 outlets, placing 86 oval (3D Custom Workshop) 358 oval, 2D (3D Custom Workshop) 368 ovals, drawing 28, 142 oven (Cabinet Wizard) 212

P paint 179 palettes 162 pan (3D Custom Workshop) 392 parameters, undo 152 paste 152 paste (Animator) 327

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

405

Index path name, hide (Animator) 336 path name, view (Animator) 336 pathway 135 change width 135 straight or curved 135 perimeter, foundation 62 perpendicular, snap to 35 perspective (3D Custom Workshop) 390 perspective editing (Material Workshop) 189 perspective editing (PhotoView Editor) 262 phone jack 89 photograph (PhotoView) 255 PhotoView 255 file format 256 masking 258 tips for using 255 PhotoView Editor 260 pi radian (3D Custom Workshop) 376 picket fences (Fence Designer) 269 picket gates (Fence Designer) 269 picture of my home (PhotoView) 259 piers, foundation 64 pitch, roof 105 pitch, roof (Roofing Wizard) 112, 113 placing air ducts 96 bathtubs 93 ceiling and floor outlets 86 gas bib 92 hose bib 92 hot water heater 94 showers 94 sinks 93 sprinkler heads 140 toilets 92 plan layer, viewing a 44 plan scale 22 plan tab, selecting 44 plan tabs 8 plan views (Topo Designer) 56 planar mapping 398 plane (3D Custom Workshop) 363 plans, customizing visible 44 plant categories 175 plant database 176 Plant Editor 226 Plant Fill 147 plant growth meter 177 PlantFinder 176 plants adding 175 customizing age 176 find by name 177 locate on Preview Bar 177 moving 176 sorting 176 plants, growing 177 play video after export (Animator) 326, 331 plotter 22 plumbing hiding in 3D 164 viewing in 3D 164 plumbing tab 91 point elevation, hide (Animator) 336 point elevations, view (Animator) 336 point selection mode (3D Custom Workshop) 365

406

point tension, customize (Animator) 335 point-level editing 147 in Material Workshop 188 points adding roof points (Roofing Wizard) 114 deleting roof points (Roofing Wizard) 114 polygon deck (Deck Designer) 124 polygon, 2D (3D Custom Workshop) 369 polygon, 3D (3D Custom Workshop) 360 polygons, drawing 28, 143 pond, adding 136 pool depth (Pool Designer) 236 pool options (Pool Designer) 247 pool shape (Pool Designer) 235 pool support system, adding (Pool Designer) 240 pool template, create (Pool Designer) 245 pool volume (Pool Designer) 246 Pool Wizard 234 position readout bar (3D Custom Workshop) 344 post tension strand 64 PowerTool launch bar 10 PowerTool Store, visit 11 PowerTool-enabled 14 PowerTools Global Sun Positioning 318 pre-built steps, adding (Pool Designer) 240 preview bar 10 preview bar (3D Custom Workshop) 345 preview speed, setting (Animator) 331, 339 print 294 a 3D LiveView rendering (Framing Editor) 284 print templates (RealModel) 294 printer setup (RealModel) 294 printing 3D LiveView 22 printing drawing in color 22 printing floorplans 22 print to fit page 22 in Framing Editor 283 in Trim Designer 232 print to scale 22 in Framing Editor 283 printing a pricelist (Home Estimator) 289 floorplans (3D Custom Workshop) 349 in Section Detailer 316 priority (Room Wizard) 59 privacy fences (Fence Designer) 269 privacy gates (Fence Designer) 269 properties bar 10 properties tab, selecting 45 property line 134 proxy settings (Punch! Updater) 25 pumps (heat), adding 97 Punch! Cabinet Wizard 209 Punch! Home Design installing 4 registering 5 uses for 3 Punch! Online Community 6 Punch! Software homepage 5 punchsoftware.com 5, 6

Q quarter view 158

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

R R12 (DXF/DWG Import) 263 radians (3D Custom Workshop) 376 rafter material, customizing (Framing Editor) 281 material, specifying (Framing Editor) 281 size, specifying (Framing Editor) 281 spacing, specifying (Framing Editor) 281 rafter properties (Framing Editor) 281 rail fences (Fence Designer) 269 rail gates (Fence Designer) 269 rail height, change 216 rail, cabinet (Cabinet Wizard) 210 railings adding 81, 119 adding (Deck Designer) 127 modifying 81 rails, adding (Pool Designer) 237 RealModel 293 attaching template textures & colors 296 construction material 294 scale 294 recently opened files 20 recessed lights, dimming 88 rectangle (3D Custom Workshop) 358 rectangle, 2D (3D Custom Workshop) 368 rectangles, drawing 28, 142 rectangular deck (Deck Designer) 124 recycle button 174 redo 152 reference grid 16 refrigerator (Cabinet Wizard) 212 region, fill 134 registering the program 5 registration 5 relative (Site Planner) 194 remove handrails 118 remove skirt trim 118 remove trim 178 remove wall trim 179 renaming layers (3D Custom Workshop) 383 render final quality (3D Custom Workshop) 390 rendered mode, printing in (3D Custom Workshop) 350 rendering options 161 rendering, adjusting quality 160 rendering, stopping process 160 replacing PhotoView image 257 replicate tool (Plant Editor) 227 requirements, system 4 reshape add points 36 decks 118 flooring 82 remove points 36 reshaping, fill 134 resize exterior wall 68 resize interior wall 72 resize, objects 172 resizing bathtubs 93 doors 75 fences (Fence Designer) 269 gates 139 gates (Fence Designer) 269 PhotoView image 258

railing 120 railing (Deck Designer) 130 roofing 105 staircases 120 staircases (Deck Designer) 130 steps 119 steps (Deck Designer) 130 tubs 93 retaining wall height 140 retaining walls 139 reversing a staircase 80, 120 reversing a staircase (Deck Designer) 131 revolving, 2D objects (3D Custom Workshop) 376 right align text 40 right view (3D Custom Workshop) 393 rim joists, specifying (Framing Editor) 280, 281 roof adding roof points (Roofing Wizard) 114 custom roof region (Roofing Wizard) 114 deleting roof points (Roofing Wizard) 114 freehand hip roof (Roofing Wizard) 114 height policy (Roofing Wizard) 112, 113 options (Roofing Wizard) 112, 113 pitch (Roofing Wizard) 112, 113 roof cutout 105 roof elevation (Roofing Wizard) 115 roof pitch (Roofing Wizard) 114 roof pitch, change 105 roof slope, change 105 roof trusses (Framing Editor) 281 roof, resizing 105 roofing tab 101 Roofing Wizard (Roofing Wizard) 112 roofs adding 102 constructing templates (RealModel) 295 gambrel 105, 107 hiding in 3D 164 saltbox 108 viewing in 3D 164 room templates 175 rotate 154 3D objects (3D Custom Workshop) 380 air ducts 96 hvac units 97 objects 172 walls 72 rotate entire plan 153 rotate, specified amount 154 in PhotoView Editor 261 rotated text 40 rotation origin visible (3D Custom Workshop) 393 rules 145

S saltbox roof 108 save 3D view 164 save as 20 saving animation paths (Animator) 326 saving files 20 saving your property lines (Site Planner) 196 scale contours (Topo Designer) 50 scale, defining (RealModel) 294 scale, setting 15, 22

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

407

Index scanned image, importing (Material Workshop) 190 scanned image, importing (PhotoView) 255 scene brightness (Global Sun Positioning) 321 screen colors 154 scroll bars 10 scroll bars (3D Custom Workshop) 345 search for updates (Punch! Updater) 24 second floor, adding 78 Section Detailer 309 segment centerpoint, snap to 31 segment time, hide (Animator) 336 segment time, view (Animator) 336 segment-offset, snap to 35 select material/paint tool 167 selecting in 3D 166 selection filter 10 selection mode, object in 3D Custom Workshop 364 in Door Designer 199 in Section Detailer 315 in Symbol Editor 307 in Window Designer 205 selection mode, point (3D Custom Workshop) 365 selection, rotating 154 send to back 146 in Material Workshop 188 send to back (PhotoView Editor) 261 serial number 5 set lighting (Global Sun Positioning) 321 set rotation origin (3D Custom Workshop) 393 setting a nudge distance (3D Custom Workshop) 384 setting a temporary directory (Animator) 326, 339 setting display size (Animator) 339 setting export quality (Animator) 338 setting frames per second (Animator) 338 setting roof options (Roofing Wizard) 112, 113 settings (Punch! Updater) 25 settings, display 5 shading (Global Sun Positioning) 321 shading intensity (Global Sun Positioning) 321 shadows (Global Sun Positioning) 321 shadows in preview (Animator) 339 shadows, adding 161 shape, pool (Pool Designer) 235 shorten interior walls 72 show FloorPlan Trace image 253 show on startup (Deck Designer) 122 show tools (Home Estimator) 286 show topography lines 164 shrubs 175 side grid (3D Custom Workshop) 352 side-by-side refrigerator (Cabinet Wizard) 212 sidewalk 135 single oven (Cabinet Wizard) 212 sinks 93 Site Planner 194 size, 3D objects (3D Custom Workshop) 381 skewing objects (3D Custom Workshop) 380 skirt trim editing (Deck Designer) 129 removing (Deck Designer) 129 skirt trim (deck), editing 118 skylight 107 slab foundation 64 slide, adding (Pool Designer) 242 smoke detector 89

408

smooth 148 smoothing tension 148 snap basics 29 snap grid, on and off (3D Custom Workshop) 353 snap to intersection 34 object center 32 object corner 33 perpendicular 35 segment centerpoint 31 segment-offset 35 snap to grid, settings 16 snap to grid, turning off 17 snaps bar 9 soffit options 70 spa tub 93 spacing, baluster 119 in Deck Designer 130 speed tips 5 speed, fly-around 159 speed, walk through 159 split view 158 split view, 2D and 3D 158 split-level, creating 65 sprinkler head, placing 140 square footage, calculating 39 squares, drawing 28, 142 staircases copying 81 customizing 80 customizing (Deck Designer) 131 modifying 80 modifying (Deck Designer) 130 moving 81 placing 79 placing straight (Deck Designer) 127 resizing 120 resizing (Deck Designer) 130 reversing the direction 80, 120 reversing the direction (Deck Designer) 131 straight (Deck Designer) 127 staircases (deck) customizing 120 modifying 120 placing straight 120 straight 120 stairway landing 80 stairway, open 80 standard toolbar 7 standard toolbar (3D Custom Workshop) 344 status bar 10 status bar (3D Custom Workshop) 344 steps adding (Deck Designer) 130 changing the height 119 changing the height (Deck Designer) 130 resizing 119 resizing (Deck Designer) 130 steps, adding 119 steps, adding (Pool Designer) 237 steps, adding pre-built (Pool Designer) 240 stiffener beams 63 changing length 64 dimensioning 64 stile width, change (Cabinet Wizard) 216 stile, cabinet (Cabinet Wizard) 210

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

stock cabinets (Cabinet Wizard) 209 stop rendering 160 straight deck staircase 120 in Deck Designer 127 straight edging 136 straight railing 81, 119 in Deck Designer 127 straight staircase 79 straight staircases 120 in Deck Designer 127 straighten a curved pathway 135 straighten curved edging 137 stud spacing 62, 70, 115 support column material (Framing Editor) 280 support columns (Framing Editor) 279 support, technical 6 suppress background animation 164 surface mapping 398 surface skimmer, adding (Pool Designer) 240 switches, connector 86 symbol categories creating (Symbol Editor) 302 deleting (Symbol Editor) 302 renaming (Symbol Editor) 302 Symbol Editor 301 symbols creating (Symbol Editor) 302 moving (Symbol Editor) 302 symbols, 2D 170 synchronize (Global Sun Positioning) 320 system requirements 4 system settings 5

T tabs deck plan 117 detail plan 141 electrical plan 85 floor plan 67 foundation 61 hvac 95 landscape plan 133 plumbing 91 roofing 101 technical support 6 temp directory, setting (Animator) 326, 339 template organizer 173 template, printing textures 295 template, RealModel wall 294 templates 175 text adding 39 alignment 40 at an angle 40 edit 40 formatting 40 texture, attaching (RealModel) 296 textured (3D Custom Workshop) 390 thermostat 89 thickness, change backsplash (Cabinet Wizard) 216 thickness, change top cabinet (Cabinet Wizard) 215 three-point freehand roof tool 104 time (Global Sun Positioning) 318 time clock (Global Sun Positioning) 320

time, synchronize (Global Sun Positioning) 320 tips & tricks 8 tips for using (Plant Editor) 225 title bar 8 title bar (3D Custom Workshop) 344 To 236 toe kick size, change (Cabinet Wizard) 216 toekick (Cabinet Wizard) 210 toilets, placing 92 toolbars 8 toolbars (3D Custom Workshop) 344 tools, measurement 9 top cabinet depth, change (Cabinet Wizard) 215 elevation, change (Cabinet Wizard) 214 height, change (Cabinet Wizard) 215 thickness, change (Cabinet Wizard) 215 with microwave (Cabinet Wizard) 211 top view (3D Custom Workshop) 393 topography alter (Topo Designer) 53 hiding in 3D 164 viewing in 3D 164 topography (Topo Designer) 53 topography objects adding (Topo Designer) 50 arc (Topo Designer) 52 circle/oval (Topo Designer) 51 circular arc (Topo Designer) 52 curved (Topo Designer) 51 multigon (Topo Designer) 53 rectangle (Topo Designer) 51 straight-edge (Topo Designer) 51 tracing (Topo Designer) 54 topography, define 14 trace images (Topo Designer) 54 tracing (FloorPlan Trace) 252 tracing, floorplan 252 tracking, constraining (Door Designer) 199 translucency (3D Custom Workshop) 390 translucency slider 160 transparent fill 145 transparent, mask (PhotoView Editor) 258 trees 175 trim categories creating (Trim Designer) 230 deleting (Trim Designer) 230 renaming (Trim Designer) 230 Trim Designer 229 trim organizer 173 trim style, cabinet (Cabinet Wizard) 214 trim, remove 178 trims creating (Trim Designer) 230 deleting (Trim Designer) 230 importing (Trim Designer) 230 moving (Trim Designer) 230 true north (Global Sun Positioning) 321 trusses (Framing Editor) 281 tubs, placing 93 two colors on one wall 74 two textures on one wall 178

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

409

Index

U undo 152 undo parameters 152 uninstall content updates (Punch! Updater) 24 unit of measurement 15 unit of measurement (3D Custom Workshop) 347 unsmooth 148 update 3D view 164 update topography from previous version 50 URL, Punch 5 USDA zone maps 176 user interface 7

V vents, placing 96 vertically, flip entire plan 153 view doors in 3D 163 materials in 3D 164 objects in 3D 163 plumbing in 3D 164 roofs in 3D 164 topography in 3D 164 view path name (Animator) 336 view point elevations (Animator) 336 view segment time (Animator) 336 view, adding shadows 161 view, adjusting lighting 161 in 3D Custom Workshop 392 view, camera angle 159 view, quarter 158 view, speed 159 view, split 158 viewing 2D plan (Topo Designer) 56 all floors (Topo Designer) 56 working floor (Topo Designer) 56 viewing elevations in ClearView 159 viewing, plan layer 44 viewpoint angle 166 viewpoint toolbar (3D Custom Workshop) 344 views 2D (3D Custom Workshop) 354 ClearView (3D Custom Workshop) 390 controlled fly-around 159 final quality (3D Custom Workshop) 390 orthographic (3D Custom Workshop) 390 perspective (3D Custom Workshop) 390 textured (3D Custom Workshop) 390 translucent (3D Custom Workshop) 390 wire frame (3D Custom Workshop) 390 views, fly-around 159 virtual ruler 9 hiding 39 visibility (Room Wizard) 59 volleyball net, adding (Pool Designer) 241 VRML, exporting to 21

W wainscot, remove 179 wainscotting 178 walk-through

410

adjusting elevation 159 speed 159 view 158 wall break tool 74 wall cabinet (Cabinet Wizard) 210 wall framing properties (Framing Editor) 278 wall height (Roofing Wizard) 114 wall options 70 wall properties (Framing Editor) 278 wall tab (Room Wizard) 59 wall trace deck (Deck Designer) 127 wall trim, remove 179 wall width 70 walls changing length 72 defining height 73 diagonal 72 exact length exterior 68 exact length interior 69 exterior 68 interior 69 irregular 72 retaining 139 retaining height 140 rotating 72 second floor 78 slanted 72 walls tab (Room Wizard) 58 walls, constructing templates (RealModel) 295 wall-spacing dimensions 37 watch plants grow 177 water transparency (Pool Designer) 247 width, change base cabinet (Cabinet Wizard) 214 stile (Cabinet Wizard) 216 width, foundation 62 window categories creating (Window Designer) 206 deleting (Window Designer) 206 renaming (Window Designer) 206 Window Designer 203 window dimensions, hiding 39, 62, 70 window header size (Framing Editor) 281 window layout 7 window layout (3D Custom Workshop) 343 window molding 178 window treatments 170 window, grill settings 77 window, LiveView 158 windows 76 creating (Window Designer) 206 importing (Window Designer) 206 moving (Window Designer) 206 wire frame (3D Custom Workshop) 390 wire frame, printing in (3D Custom Workshop) 350 Wolfgang Trost Architects 21 working elevation, setting 156 in 3D Custom Workshop 355, 381 working floor button 10 color 154 viewing (Topo Designer) 56 working in groups (3D Custom Workshop) 381 working in layers (3D Custom Workshop) 382 workshop object, resize 172 workspace boundary (Door Designer) 199

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

Z zero-offset dimension 38 zoom (3D Custom Workshop) 392

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide

411